advertisement
HARDWARE REFERENCE MANUAL
ENOVA DGX 100 SERIES
DIGITAL MEDIA SWITCHERS
DGX800-ENC, DGX1600-ENC, DGX3200-ENC, DGX6400-ENC
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
READ these instructions.
2.
KEEP these instructions.
3.
HEED all warnings.
4.
FOLLOW all instructions.
5.
DO NOT use this apparatus near water.
6.
CLEAN ONLY with dry cloth.
7.
DO NOT block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8.
DO NOT install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9.
DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wider blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. PROTECT the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. ONLY USE attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. USE ONLY with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. UNPLUG this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. REFER all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. DO NOT expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing and ensure that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, are placed on the apparatus.
16. To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from the AC receptacle.
17. Where the mains plug or an appliance coupler is used as the disconnect device, the disconnect device shall remain readily operable.
18. DO NOT overload wall outlets or extension cords beyond their rated capacity as this can cause electric shock or fire.
The exclamation point, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock to persons.
ESD Warning: The icon to the left indicates text regarding potential danger associated with the discharge of static electricity from an outside source (such as human hands) into an integrated circuit, often resulting in damage to the circuit.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electrical shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
WARNING: No naked flame sources - such as candles - should be placed on the product.
WARNING: Equipment shall be connected to a MAINS socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, grounding of the center pin of this plug must be maintained.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
AMX© 2016, all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of AMX. Copyright protection claimed extends to AMX hardware and software and includes all forms and matters copyrightable material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or herein after granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons, screen display looks, etc. Reproduction or disassembly of embodied computer programs or algorithms is expressly prohibited.
LIABILITY NOTICE
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of information contained herein. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this publication, AMX assumes no responsibility for error or omissions. No liability is assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein. Further, this publication and features described herein are subject to change without notice.
AMX WARRANTY AND RETURN POLICY
The AMX Warranty and Return Policy and related documents can be viewed/downloaded at www.amx.com.
WARNING: This product is intended to be operated ONLY from the voltages listed on the back panel or the recommended, or included, power supply of the product. Operation from other voltages other than those indicated may cause irreversible damage to the product and void the products warranty. The use of AC Plug Adapters is cautioned because it can allow the product to be plugged into voltages in which the product was not designed to operate. If the product is equipped with a detachable power cord, use only the type provided with your product or by your local distributor and/or retailer. If you are unsure of the correct operational voltage, please contact your local distributor and/or retailer.
BATTERY INSTRUCTIONS
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PACK OR COIN/BUTTON CELL BATTERY. IF MISUSED OR ABUSED THIS CAN RESULT IN:
• Smoke or gas hazard
• Heat hazard
• Fire hazard
• Explosion hazard
WARNING: Do not place batteries in mouth or ingest. Chemical burn hazard. Keep new and used batteries out of reach of children and pets. If swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death.
If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.
WARNING: If battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children and pets.
WARNING: Do not handle leaking or damaged Lithium batteries.
WARNING: Risk of leakage. Only use the specified type of batteries. Never mix new and used batteries.
Observe correct polarity. Remove batteries from products that are not in use for extended periods of time. Store batteries in a dry place.
WARNING: Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
WARNING: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
WARNING: Do not recharge non-rechargeable batteries.
WARNING: Avoid exposure to extreme heat or cold.
Please dispose of any used batteries properly, following any local regulations. Do not incinerate.
EU COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Eligible to bear the CE mark; Conforms to European Union Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; European Union EMC Directive
2014/30/EU; European Union Restriction of Hazardous Substances Recast (RoHS2) Directive 2011/65/EU; European Union WEEE
(recast) Directive 2012/19/EU; European Union Eco-Design Directive 2009/125/EC; European Union Registration, Evaluation,
Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) Regulation (EC) 1907/2006.
You may obtain a free copy of the Declaration of Conformity by visiting http://www.amx.com/techcenter/certifications.asp.
WEEE NOTICE
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2012/19/EU concerning waste of electrical and electronic equipment
(WEEE). This label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste. It should be deposited at an appropriate facility to enable recovery and recycling.
US FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE - CLASS A
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
US FCC AND CANADA EMC COMPLIANCE INFORMATION:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CANADA ICES INFORMATION
ICES (Interference-Causing Equipment Standard): CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 3
ESD WARNING
To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal materials.
When working with any equipment manufactured with electronic devices, proper ESD grounding procedures must be followed to make sure people, products, and tools are as free of static charges as possible. Grounding straps, conductive smocks, and conductive work mats are specifically designed for this purpose.
Anyone performing field maintenance on AMX equipment should use an appropriate ESD field service kit complete with at least a dissipative work mat with a ground cord and a UL listed adjustable wrist strap with another ground cord.
These items should not be manufactured locally, since they are generally composed of highly resistive conductive materials to safely drain static charges, without increasing an electrocution risk in the event of an accident.
LICENSE NOTICES AND TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Java ® is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby ® and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
DTS
®
®
, the Symbol, DTS-HD ® , and DTS ® or DTS-HD ® and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc., and all other
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Windows ® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
and Internet Explorer ®
Google Chrome ® is a registered trademark of Google Inc.
Firefox ® is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Safari ®
Opera ®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
is a registered trademark of Opera Software ASA.
UL
3M
®
®
and the UL logo are trademarks of UL LLC.
, Desco
Ethernet ®
®
ENERGY STAR
, Richmond Technology
®
® , and Plastic Systems ®
is a registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
are registered trademarks.
is a registered trademark of the U.S. Department of Energy and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Other products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
TRADEMARK LOGOS
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 4
CHINA MARKINGS (ONLY FOR INSTALLATIONS LOCATED IN CHINA)
䈕䇮༷Ⲵ䇮䇑઼⍻䈅ᱟ൘⎧ᤄ 2000 ㊣儈ᓖԕл䘋㹼Ⲵ , ᆳਚ䘲⭘൘⎧ᤄ 2000 ㊣ԕлⲴൠ४ . ൘⎧ᤄ 2000 ㊣ԕк֯⭘ਟ㜭Պሬ㠤▌
൘Ⲵᆹޘ䳀ᛓ .
This symbol denotes that the device is not to be used at altitudes exceeding 2000 meters.
䈕䇮༷Ⲵ䇮䇑઼⍻䈅ᱟ൘䶎✝ᑖ≄ىᶑԦ䘋㹼Ⲵ , ᆳਚ䘲⭘൘䶎✝ᑖ≄ىⲴൠ४ . ൘✝ᑖ≄ىൠ४֯⭘ਟ㜭Պሬ㠤▌൘Ⲵᆹޘ䳀ᛓ .
This symbol denotes that the device is only to be used in climate regions that are not-tropical.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 5
Contents
CONTENTS
Product Overview and General Specifications ........................................................ 11
Installation and Setup ..............................................................................................37
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 6
Contents
Enova DGX HDMI Boards ..........................................................................................61
Enova DGX DVI Boards .............................................................................................73
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards ................................................................81
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards ...........................................................95
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards ......................................................................... 108
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 7
Contents
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards .......................................................................128
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards .............................................................. 140
Switching, Configuration, and Status ................................................................... 149
NetLinx® Studio .....................................................................................................165
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming ....................................................... 167
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 8
Contents
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin .......................................................195
Control Panel Operation ........................................................................................ 201
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards .............................................................219
Appendix B – Replacing Battery on CPU ................................................................225
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands ....................................................................228
Appendix D – Telnet Communication with Enova DGX 100 Series CPU ................ 240
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 9
Contents
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System ..............................................243
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software .............................................................255
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers .............................................................. 270
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions .........................................................275
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 10
Product Overview and General Specifications
Product Overview and General Specifications
Applicability Notice
The information in this manual applies to the following Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switcher enclosures, plus input, output, and expansion boards, which can be ordered to create custom systems. All of the boards listed in this Applicability Notice are compatible with any of the Enova DGX enclosures listed below.
NOTE: AMX reserves the right to modify its products and their specifications without notice.
NOTE: All Enova DGX Switchers ship with a standard front control panel.
Enova DGX 800 Enclosure (4 RU)
Configuration
8x8 Video and up to 16x16 Audio with Audio Switching Boards
Part #
FG1061-08
Model
DGX800-ENC (ENOVA DGX 800 ENC)
Enova DGX 1600 Enclosure (4 RU)
Configuration
16x16 Video and up to 24x24 Audio with Audio Switching Boards
Enova DGX 3200 Enclosure (6 RU)
Configuration
32x32 Video and up to 40x40 Audio with Audio Switching Boards
Enova DGX 6400 Enclosure (13 RU)
Configuration
64x64 Video and up to 80x80 Audio with Audio Switching Boards
Part #
FG1061-16
Part #
FG1061-32
Part #
FG1061-64
Model
DGX1600-ENC (ENOVA DGX 1600 ENC)
Model
DGX3200-ENC (ENOVA DGX 3200 ENC)
Model
DGX6400-ENC (ENOVA DGX 6400 ENC)
Enova DGX Digital Media Switchers Standard Video Input and Output Boards
Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers currently support four standard Enova DGX input and output board types: HDMI, DVI, DXLink
Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards. Each board fills one of the standard I/O board slots and has four connectors. Within a system, a source device connected to any of the input boards can be routed to any destination device connected to any of the output boards (check the board chapters for important signal information when routing between board types).
For general board information, see page 19 and page 44.
For specific board information, see the applicable board chapter in this manual.
Enova DGX HDMI Boards (page 61)
Type
HDMI Input
4K HDMI Input
HDMI Output
Part #
FG1058-540
FG1061-540
FG1058-550
Model
DGX-I-HDMI
DGX-I-HDMI-4K
DGX-O-HDMI
Enova DGX DVI Boards (page 73)
Type
DVI Input
DVI Output
Part #
FG1058-600
FG1058-610
Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Boards* (page 81)
Type
DXLink Twisted Pair Input
DXLink Twisted Pair Output
Part #
FG1058-570
FG1058-580
Model
DGX-I-DVI
DGX-O-DVI
Model
DGX-I-DXL
DGX-O-DXL
* Enova DXLink Twisted Pair Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers or other AMX
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a Solecis Digital Switcher to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board in an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher, both the Solecis unit and all DXLink Twisted Pair boards must be upgraded with the latest available firmware versions.
Solecis units must be upgraded before connecting a unit to an upgraded input board.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 11
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards* (page 81)
Type
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output
Part #
FG1061-570
FG1061-580
Model
DGX-I-DXL-4K
DGX-O-DXL-4K
* Enova DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers or
system setup information, see page 100.
Enova DGX DXLink Fiber Boards** (page 108)
Type Part # Model
DXLink Multimode Fiber Input Board, Duplex
DXLink Multimode Fiber Output Board, Duplex
DXLink Single Mode Fiber Input Board, Duplex
DXLink Single Mode Fiber Output Board, Duplex
DXLink Multimode Fiber Input Board, Simplex
DXLink Multimode Fiber Output Board, Simplex
DXLink Single Mode Fiber Input Board, Simplex
DXLink Single Mode Fiber Output Board, Simplex
FG1058-622
FG1058-632
FG1058-620
FG1058-630
FG1058-623
FG1058-633
FG1058-621
FG1058-631
DGX-I-DXF-MMD
DGX-O-DXF-MMD
DGX-I-DXF-SMD
DGX-O-DXF-SMD
DGX-I-DXF-MMS
DGX-O-DXF-MMS
DGX-I-DXF-SMS
DGX-O-DXF-SMS
** Enova DXLink Fiber Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers. For model numbers of
compatible Transmitters and Receivers, see page 111. For system setup information, see page 115.
Enova DGX Expansion Boards
Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers currently support two types of expansion boards: Audio Switching Boards (ASB) and the Audio
Insert/Extract Board (AIE).
Audio Switching Boards – must be installed as an input and output pair (or pairs), depending on the enclosure (see table below).
Audio Insert/Extract Board – can be installed in either or both of the expansion board slots for the Enova DGX 800/1600/
3200 and in any number of the expansion board slots in the Enova DGX 6400.
IMPORTANT: The Enova DGX expansion boards will not work in standard input or output board slots (standard input or output boards will not work in expansion board slots). The two types of expansion boards are not compatible with each other and will not work together in the same system.
Audio Switching Board Sets*** (page 128)
Type
Audio Switching Board Set (one I/O pair) for Enova DGX 800/1600
Audio Switching Board Set (one I/O pair) for Enova DGX 3200
Audio Switching Board Set (two I/O pairs) for Enova DGX 6400
Part # Model
FG1061-716 DGX800/1600-ASB
(ENOVADGX 800/1600 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
FG1061-732 DGX3200-ASB
(ENOVADGX 3200 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
FG1061-764 DGX6400-ASB
(ENOVADGX 6400 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
*** Audio Switching Boards will not operate unless the complete board set (one or two I/O pairs, depending on model) is installed.
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Board (page 140)
Type
Audio Insert/Extract
Part #
FG1058-705
Model
DGX-AIE
Product Notes
The Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher 800/1600/3200/6400 includes an integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor, supports InstaGate Pro®, DXLink™ Technology, and SmartScale® on every video output, and manages and distributes analog and digital audio and video including HDMI/HDCP, control, and Ethernet.
The Enova DGX Switcher is available as a custom system, which means it can be ordered in input to output configuration sizes that fit your installation and contain an assortment of input, output, and expansion boards in a single enclosure (expansion board types cannot be mixed).
NOTE: Because Enova DGX Switchers are available as custom systems, the illustrations in this manual may differ from the model(s) purchased.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 12
Product Overview and General Specifications
Features – Enova DGX 100 Series
I/O Boards: HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, DXLink Fiber, and Audio
True HDMI switching, allowing any input to be switched to any or all outputs.
Incorporates HDMI® technology – HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards.
HDCP 1.4 compatible.
HD I/O boards support uncompressed video resolutions up to 1920x1200,60Hz including HDTV up to 1080p.
4K I/O boards support progressive resolutions from 480p up to 4096x2160p@60Hz (Y/Cb/Cr 4:2:0).
DGX Technology provides a common signal transport and matrix switching layer that transcodes between analog and digital signals.
HDMI and DVI Output Boards, as well as compatible DXLink Receivers, feature SmartScale® Technology which automatically responds to the display’s preferred EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video settings for that display without manual setup.
Pre-loaded with the most common EDID settings on each switcher input connector (other than fiber connectors) to emulate display response when queried, which ensures that transmission of the video from the source device is working.
Custom EDID settings can be loaded on each DVI and HDMI input with the System Configuration interface.
InstaGate Pro® Technology – Easily integrate HDCP into system designs and enjoy hassle-free matrix switching to all compliant displays. No tools, no delays, and no key constraints – it just works.
DXLink Twisted Pair Boards provide transport over twisted pair cable.
DXLink Fiber Boards provide transport over fiber cable.
Audio Switching (expansion) Boards provide audio breakaway and downmixing for embedded or inserted audio with Digital
Signal Processing capabilities on every output.
The Audio Insert/Extract (expansion) Board can be set to insert/extract audio into/out of video input or output boards.
Digital Media Switcher
The available input/output range starts at 4x4 and goes to 8x8 for the Enova DGX 800, to 16x16 for the Enova DGX 1600, to 32x32 for the Enova DGX 3200, and to 64x64 for the Enova DGX 6400 (all come in increments of four with upgrade
The System Configuration interface provides simplified setup and configuration of inputs, outputs, and endpoints.
Integrated Ethernet switch passes Ethernet to attached DXLink Twisted Pair and Fiber Transmitters and Receivers.
Auto-setup feature automatically discovers and connects to endpoints using a single IP address.
Independent networks for public LAN and ICS LAN (private) provide secure isolation of A/V equipment from the primary network.
Core architecture supports 4K and Ultra High Definition (UHD) content as well as 3D and Deep Color video.
System self-diagnostics – power monitoring, fan control and monitoring, signal and temperature sensing. The System
Configuration interface monitors, collects, and displays advanced diagnostic information.
Global presets (via Control Panel) allow quick recall of a comprehensive snapshot of the system’s routing state.
Fully redundant (hot-swappable) power supplies (RPS) with independent power paths for maximum reliability.
Control Ports
Rack mounting ears integral to product design
Integrated NetLinx NX Master is an NetLinx NX Controller
LAN 100/1000 port (RJ-45) network connection for the integrated NetLinx NX Master (public LAN)
ICS LAN port (RJ-45) for communication with endpoint devices in auto-setup configuration over ICS LAN (private network)
Program port (USB mini-AB) used for NetLinx Studio control
Control port (standard RS-232) for direct matrix switching control
Control port (USB mini-B) used as a virtual COM port for serial communication with a PC
AxLink Control port (4-pin captive wire connector) for direct control of AxLink devices
Product Support
AMX Limited Lifetime Warranty included (see www.amx.com)
24-hour technical support
Control Features – Enova DGX 100 Series
Each Enova DGX enclosure contains an integrated NetLinx NX Master (for NetLinx NX specific Master functionality, see the list at the
added level of convenience. Several additional control options are available. Multiple control methods can be used on the same system.
Integrated NetLinx NX Master (NetLinx NX Controller) with control via the System Configuration interface; server (public
LAN) connection through the LAN 100/1000 port on the CPU
manual for the specific AMX control device)
Front control panel (standard on all enclosures)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 13
Product Overview and General Specifications
Select AMX NetLinx SEND_COMMANDs are supported
Supports AxLink control of connected devices
Supports AMX’s simple BCS (Basic Control Structure)* serial control protocol
Supports DGX_SHELL commands via terminal session
Supports DGX_SHELL and BCS commands over Telnet
Supports integrated Master Telnet commands
Supports third-party controllers
* BCS commands are sent as ASCII characters through the Control (RS-232) port.
Integrated NetLinx NX Master Functionality
Automatic configuration of AMX devices via ICS LAN (private network)
IPv6 network addressing
Link-local fallback in DHCP mode (IPv4 only)
Wired 802.1x (security for protected networks)
ID Pushbutton
Case sensitive file system
Differences in DEFINE_PROGRAM execution
USB Program port driver for Windows 7 and Windows 8
Telnet access and commands for the Enova DGX 100 Series
For an explanation of these features, see page 23.
NOTE: Features and specifications described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Common Applications
The Enova DGX 100 Series is ideal for dramatically simplifying AV control and distribution in large spaces such as lecture halls, auditoriums, hotel ballrooms, casinos, museums, and stadiums/arenas. In addition, it is ideally suited for multi-room or configurable room applications, where multiple collaboration spaces share a single Enova DGX for control. Enova DGX fiber capabilities enable transport of audio, video, and control up to 6.21 miles (10 km), making it the perfect solution for tall buildings with multiple floors, large campuses with multiple buildings, or large facilities such as factories. Enova DGX fiber solutions provide secure distribution of content for applications in which data security is critical such as government agencies, banking/finance institutions, or network operation centers.
FIG. 1
Application featuring the Enova DGX 1600
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 14
Product Overview and General Specifications
Front View
The enclosure, which is the structural basis of an Enova DGX Switcher, can be controlled using an external controller, control software, the integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor’s System Configuration interface, or standard front control panel.
For additional information on control options, see page 32.
LCD Control Dial Input Keys Power Indicator LED
Control Keys Output Keys
FIG. 2
Front view of an Enova DGX 3200 enclosure
Power Indicator LED on Front of Enclosure
The Power Indicator LED on the front of the enclosure indicates the status of the redundant power system within an Enova DGX
Switcher as follows:
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200
Green – both power supplies are powered on
Red – one of the power supplies is not receiving power or has failed
Off – neither power supply is receiving power
Enova DGX 6400
Green – all four power supplies are powered on
Constant Red – one of the power supplies is not receiving power or has failed
Flashing Red – two (or three) of the power supplies are not receiving power or have failed
Flashing Green – the system’s input/output boards are being upgraded*
Off – none of the power supplies is receiving power
IMPORTANT: If two or more power supplies in the Enova DGX 6400 are not receiving power, the CPU and the control panel will continue to operate. However, input and output boards will become inoperable and the system will not send or receive signals until at least three power supplies resume functional status.
* The LED’s response to power functions supersedes the upgrade function.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 15
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 800 Rear
View
Rear View
Enclosure
The enclosure’s appearance, as viewed from the rear, will vary depending on the number and types of input, output, and expansion
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 and four expansion boards for the Enova DGX 6400. For additional information about expansion
Enova DGX 800
Input boards (up to 2 in input board slots) Output boards (up to 2 in output board slots)
NOTE: If the enclosure has an empty input or output board slot (which is numbered for an additional board), it can be used to expand the system, to a maximum of 2 input and 2 output boards. The blank plates under the input and output board slots cannot be removed.
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
MAC address Serial number
CPU/Control board Power supplies
Expansion boards in expansion slots
(Audio Switching Boards shown)
FIG. 3
Rear view of a fully loaded Enova DGX 800 enclosure with two expansion boards (Audio Switching Boards shown)
Enova DGX 1600 Rear
View
Enova DGX 1600
Input boards (up to 4 in input board slots) Output boards (up to 4 in output board slots)
NOTE: If the enclosure has any empty input or output board slots (which are numbered for additional boards), they can be used to expand the system. If the expansion board slots are empty, expansion boards can be added.
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
MAC address Serial number
CPU/Control board
Expansion boards in expansion slots
(Audio Switching Boards shown)
Power supplies
FIG. 4
Rear view of a fully loaded Enova DGX 1600 enclosure with two expansion boards (Audio Switching Boards shown)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 16
Enova DGX 3200 Rear
View
Enova DGX 3200
Input boards (up to 8) Output boards (up to 8)
Product Overview and General Specifications
NOTE: If the enclosure has any empty input or output board slots (which are numbered for additional boards), they can be used to expand the system. If the expansion board slots are empty, expansion boards can be added.
Expansion boards in expansion slots
(Audio Switching Boards shown)
Power supplies
Enova DGX 6400 Rear
View
MAC address
CPU/Control board
Serial number
FIG. 5
Rear view of a fully loaded Enova DGX 3200 enclosure with two expansion boards (Audio Switching Boards shown)
Enova DGX 6400
Expansion boards
(Audio Switching Boards shown)
Input boards
(up to 16 in input board slots)
NOTE: If the enclosure has any empty input or output board slots
(which are numbered for additional boards), they can be used to expand the system. If the expansion board slots are empty, expansion boards can be added
(see applicable board chapter for restrictions).
Output boards
(up to 16 in output board slots)
Expansion boards
(Audio Switching Boards shown)
Serial number
Power supplies
CPU/Control board MAC address
FIG. 6
Rear view of a fully loaded Enova DGX 6400 enclosure with four expansion boards (Audio Switching Boards shown)
Rear View Components
Input and output boards (some slots may be empty, depending on the configuration)
Expansion boards (optional)
CPU/Control board
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200: two standard redundant power supplies
Enova DGX 6400: four standard power supplies (fourth power supply provides redundancy)
Serial number
MAC address
The following sections briefly introduce the hardware on the rear of the enclosure.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 17
Product Overview and General Specifications
CPU/Control Board
SD card slot MAC address ID Pushbutton Config DIP switches
LAN 100/1000 port
ICS LAN 10/100 port
System Status indicator
Control (DB-9, RS-232 serial) port
AxLink port
Control (USB mini-B) port Program (USB mini-AB) port
FIG. 7
Enova DGX 100 Series CPU/Control board
The CPU/Control board is on the left rear of the enclosure, directly below the input connectors on the Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 and directly below the left bank of output connectors on the Enova DGX 6400.
Each CPU includes the following slot, port, button, and toggle options (left to right):
SD card slot – ships with an installed MicroSD memory card for future functionality
ICS LAN 10/100 port (RJ-45) – for communication with endpoint devices in auto-setup configuration over ICS LAN (private
network). Do not use for a TCP/IP connection or linking of enclosures. (see page 50)
Control port* (DB-9, RS-232) – for attaching an external serial control device (see page 270)
Control port* (USB mini-B) – for attaching an external control device (see page 270)
ID Pushbutton – for selecting static IP or DHCP, resetting the factory defaults, and restoring the factory firmware image
AxLink port – for supporting AMX AxLink devices (see page 56)
Program port (USB mini-AB) – for establishing a connection from the integrated NetLinx NX Master to the PC’s COM port
for all runtime control, NetLinx programming, etc.
* The two Control ports provide direct control of matrix switcher processing (they do not work on the same layer of control as the integrated NetLinx NX Master, which uses the LAN 100/1000 and Program ports).
Each CPU includes five LED indicators (left to right):
System Status LED (to the left of the Control ports) – for indicating system status (see page 49)
AxLink LED (to the right of the AxLink port) – for indicating AxLink data activity (see page 56)
Status, Output, and Input LEDs (below Program connector) – for indicating system communication status and indicating
when data is sent and received (for modes and blink patterns, see page 56)
NOTE: For an overview of the integrated NetLinx NX Master’s functionality, see page 24.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 18
Product Overview and General Specifications
Power Supply Units
standard power sources. (US power cords are included with all enclosures shipped within the US.) Maximum power specifications
are provided on the power supply receptacles. For information on applying power, see page 46.
Each power supply unit has two LED indicators:
AC: Green LED – power is good
DC: The DC indicator uses a tri-color LED
Green – power is good
Amber – temperature is above normal
Red – power supply is in a fault state
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Indicator LEDs Enova DGX 3200 – Indicator LEDs
Enova DGX 6400 – Indicator LEDs
FIG. 8
Power supply receptacles for Enova DGX 800/1600 (upper left), Enova DGX 3200 (upper right), and Enova DGX 6400 (bottom)
I/O Board Types and
Supported Signals
Input and Output Boards
A single enclosure can handle a combination of signals depending on the types of input and output boards.
Input and Output Boards and Supported Signals
I/O Board Types
Input: HDMI and 4K HDMI
Output: HDMI
Input: DVI
Output: DVI
Input and Output: DXLink Twisted Pair^
Input and Output: DXLink Twisted Pair 4K^
Input and Output: DXLink Fiber^^
•
•
•
•
•*
•*
•*
•*
•
•
•
•
• •
•
• • • • •** • • •
• • • • •** • •
• • • • • • •*** • • • •
• • • • • • •*** • • • •
• • • • • • •*** • • • •
* HDMI Boards require a cable adapter to support single-link DVI signals.
** For a DVI Board to support embedded audio on an HDMI signal, the EDID must be updated.
*** Supported analog video signals include RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, and Y/Pb/Pr in and RGBHV out.
^ Signals supported by DXLink Twisted Pair Boards depend on the type of DXLink Twisted Pair TXs and RXs used.
^^ Signals supported by DXLink Fiber Boards depend on the type of DXLink Fiber TXs and RXs used.
NOTE: The DXLink Twisted Pair Boards also support embedded power, NetLinx control, and Ethernet. The DXLink Fiber Boards also support NetLinx control and Ethernet (Duplex units provide this by default; Simplex units require additional setup).
All signals are automatically converted to the destination device’s format, with DXLink Twisted Pair TXs and RXs used for transport of signals with DXLink Twisted Pair Boards and DXLink Fiber TXs and RXs used for transport of signals with DXLink Fiber Boards.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 19
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 800
Input boards
Numbering plate
Output boards
DVI Board
DXLink Fiber Board
HDMI Board
DXLink Twisted Pair Board
FIG. 9
HDMI and DXLink Twisted Pair Input Boards and DVI, DXLink Fiber Output Boards shown
Enova DGX 800 enclosures have four horizontal I/O board slots (two slots each for input and output boards with four connectors each), allowing for a maximum configuration of 8x8.
Enova DGX 1600
Input boards
Numbering plate
Output boards
HDMI Board
DXLink Twisted Pair Board
DVI Board
DXLink Fiber Board
FIG. 10
HDMI, DXLink Twisted Pair, DVI, and DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards shown
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures have eight horizontal I/O board slots (four slots each for input and output boards with four connectors each), allowing for a maximum configuration of 16x16.
Enova DGX 3200
Input boards Output boards
Numbering plate
HDMI Board
DXLink Twisted Pair Board
DVI Board
DXLink Fiber Board
FIG. 11
HDMI, DXLink Twisted Pair, DVI, and DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards shown
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures have 16 vertical I/O board slots (eight slots each for input and output boards with four connectors each), allowing for a maximum configuration of 32x32.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 20
Enova DGX 6400 boards
Enova DGX 6400
Inputs
Outputs
Product Overview and General Specifications
Inputs
Numbering plate
Input boards located in upper 16 board slots
8 Left
2 DXLink Fiber SM-D
8 Right
4 DXLink Twisted Pair
2 DXLink Fiber MM-D 4 DVI
4 HDMI
Outputs
Output boards located in upper 16 board slots
8 Left
2 DXLink Fiber SM-D
8 Right
4 DXLink Twisted Pair
2 DXLink Fiber MM-D 4 DVI
4 HDMI
FIG. 12
HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards shown
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures have 32 horizontal I/O board slots (16 slots each for input and output boards with four connectors each), allowing for a maximum configuration of 64x64.
For information on the boards included in your system, including connector types, cabling directions, installation considerations, and specifications, see the specific board chapter in this manual.
DXLink Twisted Pair Boards – page 81
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards – page 96
DXLink Fiber Boards – page 108
If a system has empty input or output board slots (which are numbered for additional inputs and outputs), the slots can be used to
NOTE: Two types of audio expansion boards are also available. They can be used in conjunction with HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair,
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, and DXLink Fiber Boards and route audio signals into, out of, or through the system (see “Expansion Boards”
Input and Output Board Connectors
The connectors on the input and output boards are the attachment points for source and destination devices that connect to the system. Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the input connectors (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output connectors (for attaching destinations) are on the right, with the exception of the DGX 6400 enclosure which has inputs on top and outputs on bottom.
Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located as follows:
Enova DGX 800/1600 – on the vertical numbering plate (metal strip) between input and output connectors.
Enova DGX 3200 – on the horizontal numbering plate (metal strip) directly above connectors.
Enova DGX 6400 – on the vertical numbering plate (metal strip) between left and right input and left and right output connectors.
NOTE: For information on the board connectors on the expansion boards, see the chapter for the specific type of expansion board.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 21
Product Overview and General Specifications
Connectors and Signal Types
Connector
HDMI
DVI
DXLink (RJ-45)
(Signal support depends on the type of DXLink
Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers used.)
DXLink Fiber (LC Duplex)
(Signal support depends on the type of DXLink
Fiber Transmitters and Receivers used.)
Supported Signals
• HDMI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio
• DVI-D (single link) with or without HDCP (adapter cable required)
• DVI-D (single link) with or without HDCP
• HDMI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio*
• HDMI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio
• DVI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio
• Analog video input (RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, Y/Pb/Pr)
• Digital audio or analog stereo audio
• Embedded power, NetLinx, and Ethernet
• HDMI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio
• DVI with or without HDCP or embedded digital audio
• Analog video input (RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, Y/Pb/Pr)
• Digital audio or analog stereo audio
• NetLinx and Ethernet (DXLink Fiber, Duplex models only)**
* For a DVI connector to support embedded audio on an HDMI signal, the EDID must be updated.
** For Simplex models – control can be provided if a supplemental independent network connection is used (see illustration on
NOTE: For information on embedded audio signals from either ASB or AIE expansion boards, see the next section and the applicable board chapter.
Expansion Boards
Expansion boards provide additional functionality for systems. Enova DGX Switchers support two types of expansion boards:
Audio Switching Boards (for complete details, see page 128)
Audio Insert/Extract Board (for complete details, see page 140)
Expansion boards work in conjunction with HDMI Boards, DVI Boards, DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, DXLink Fiber Boards to route audio with video and/or breakaway the audio (depending on the board).
If the expansion board slots in an enclosure are empty, the slots can be used for expansion boards to expand the functionality of the system. The procedure for installing/replacing Audio Switching Boards is the same as for the standard input/output boards.
CAUTION: Standard input and output boards will not fit in the expansion board slots; expansion boards will not work in standard input or output board slots.
Need to Know When Using Expansion Boards
Audio Switching Boards and AIE boards are not compatible with each other and cannot be used in the same system.
Enova DGX expansion boards use terminal block connectors which can be used to bring auxiliary audio into the system and/or out of the system.
the top or down the center (depending on the enclosure).
Audio Switching Boards
Audio Switching Boards can only be purchased in board sets and must be installed in specific expansion board slots as an input and output pair (or pairs, when used in an Enova DGX 6400).
Audio Switching Boards support audio-only switching and switching as embedded audio on standard video input and output boards. They also support using either type of switching from the same source device to different destination devices. In addition, the embedded audio can be digitally processed (e.g., input gain, volume, equalizer).
Audio Switching Output Board
Audio Switching Input Board
FIG. 13
Audio Switching Board set installed in Enova DGX 3200 – shown with a variety of video input and output boards
For complete information on Audio Switching Boards, see page 128.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 22
Product Overview and General Specifications
Audio Insert/Extract Board
The Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 holds up to two AIE expansion boards. The Enova DGX 6400 holds up to eight AIE expansion boards.
Embedded audio signals switch with the video channels. Through the use of the Audio Insert/Extract Board, embedded audio can be extracted and external audio matrix switches can be executed (using a separately purchased audio matrix switcher like the
Precis DSP) and then reinserted post-switch on the output side.
For complete information on the Audio Insert/Extract Board, see page 140.
IMPORTANT: Setting the DIP switches is the only mechanism for configuring the Audio Insert/Extract Board to either insert or extract audio. Therefore, setting the switches (which requires removal of the board from the enclosure) should be done at the time of installation.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
Audio Insert/Extract Board
FIG. 14
Audio Insert/Extract Boards installed in Enova DGX 3200 – shown with a variety of video input and output boards
NOTE: Enova DGX 800 only – AIE Board connectors 1-8 in the left and right expansion board slots correspond to standard connectors
1-8 on the input and output boards respectively. AIE connectors 9-16 are inoperable.
MAC Address
The MAC address for the system is located directly above the Control (DB-9 serial) port on the CPU.
Serial Number
The serial number is normally located on the rear of the enclosure on the left. Before installation, we recommend recording the serial number for the enclosure (and for each module and/or wallplate if applicable) in an easily accessible location.
Integrated NetLinx NX Master Functionality
The integrated NetLinx NX Master in Enova DGX enclosures is a NetLinx NX Controller.
Network Connection
The default IP address for the ICS LAN network is 198.18.0.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0.
IMPORTANT: The LAN 100/1000 (public network) and ICS LAN (private network) subnets must not overlap. If the LAN 100/1000 port is configured such that its address space overlaps with the ICS LAN network, the ICS LAN network will be disabled. The DGX communicates with the 5002 device (and any endpoint in Auto-setup) via ICS LAN. Since those devices have fixed static IP addresses on the ICS LAN network, you cannot change the 198.18 subnet information on the DGX platform of processors. You can only change the Host name and DHCP server settings. Additionally, if connecting the Enova DGX’s LAN 100/1000 port to an NX-x200 NX
Integrated Controller's ICS LAN port, you MUST change the NX Master's ICS LAN port settings (via the SET ICSLAN telnet command) to choose a different subnet than the default 198.18.x.x or else the Enova DGX’s 5002 switcher device (and any endpoint in
Auto-setup) will not come online.
DHCP Server
The ICS LAN port has a built-in DHCP server. This DHCP server is enabled by default and will serve IP addresses to any connected devices set to DHCP mode.
The DHCP server can be disabled from a Telnet session with the integrated NetLinx NX Master with the command: SET ICSLAN.
The DHCP address range is fixed.
The server will provide addresses in the range 198.18.0.2 through 198.18.63.254.
Devices using static IP addresses on the ICS LAN network should be set within the reserved static IP address range of
198.18.64.1 through 198.18.127.254.
Do not use addresses in the range 198.18.128.1 through 198.18.129.254, as they are reserved for future upgrades.
The server supports TX and RX (endpoint) Auto-setup with addresses in the range 198.18.130.1 through 198.18.135.254.
IMPORTANT: The ICS LAN port on the left of the CPU is for communication via Telnet of endpoint devices connected to the integrated
Master in Auto-setup Mode. The ICS LAN allows the DGX to provide Private IP addresses to all connected endpoints while only consuming a single IP address on the Public LAN. Please note, however, that the ICS LAN port serves DHCP addresses to any connected device. If the ICS LAN is inadvertently connected to the Public LAN, devices also on the Public LAN may experience DHCP address conflicts.
23
Product Overview and General Specifications
Opening Public LAN and ICS LAN Sockets from Code
The integrated NetLinx NX Master opens sockets from NetLinx or Java code on whichever network has an IP subnet that matches the address provided in the command to open the socket. No other indications are provided for which network is in use, only whether the socket is successfully created.
Integrated NetLinx NX Master Features
The integrated NetLinx NX Master supports the following features:
Automatic configuration of AMX devices via ICS LAN (private network)
Link-local fallback in DHCP mode (IPv4 only)
Wired 802.1x (security for protected networks)
IPv6 network addressing
ID Pushbutton
Case sensitive file system
Differences in DEFINE_PROGRAM execution
USB Program port driver for Windows 7 and Windows 8
Telnet Commands for the Enova DGX 100 Series NetLinx NX Master
Automatic Configuration of AMX Devices via ICS LAN
When an ICS LAN capable endpoint device (e.g., a DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitter connected to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board) is initially connected, the integrated Master sends ICS LAN messages to the device and conducts automatic configuration
(auto-setup), after which the device reboots.
If the Master is set to serve DHCP addresses and the device is set to DHCP addressing mode, a stable connection is assured. Since these are the factory default settings for the devices, automatic configuration is the expected behavior for all new equipment.
Even after being automatically configured for a Master in this manner, if the device is disconnected and reconnected to a different
Master, its old configuration will be forgotten and it will establish a new configuration with the new Master to which it has been connected.
Once connected, the device can also be configured for a different connection mode if desired.
Device auto-setup status is discoverable via NetLinx Studio such that Auto-setup device IP addresses reside in the 198.18.x.x space where the first “x” represents either 130 (input side) or 134 (output side) and the second “x” represents an individual port number.
Transmitter endpoints: 198.18.30.x (where x is the input channel)
Receiver endpoints: 198.18.134.x (where x is the output channel)
Device numbering in NetLinx Studio places auto-setup devices on the input side in the range 45001 to 45999 and devices on the output side in the range 46001 to 46999.
Link-local Fallback in DHCP Mode (IPv4 Only)
When the integrated Master’s public LAN IP addressing mode is set to DHCP, it will attempt to acquire an IPv4 address from a DHCP server for approximately one minute after boot. If the Master does not receive a valid DHCP address in that time (e.g. if a DHCP server is not found), it will fall back to an IPv4 address in the link-local range.
IMPORTANT: Link-local is not an operational mode for the Master; it is a temporary addressing scheme to permit access over the network so that IP settings can be modified. Do not commission the Master with a link-local IP address.
The default link-local address is 169.254.x.y, where x and y are the least significant two octets of the MAC address. The Master will first verify that this address is not taken by another device on the network. If the address is taken, the Master uses a standard algorithm to find an available IP address in the link-local range.
When the Master is using a link-local IP address, the status light will blink once per second. If the Master’s network settings remain in DHCP mode, it will attempt to acquire a DHCP address every five minutes until successful. After each failed attempt to acquire a
DHCP address, the Master will execute the link-local algorithm and may not fall back to the same link-local IP address.
Wired 802.1x Support
The integrated NetLinx NX Master supports 802.1X, an IEEE Standard for Port-based Network Access Control (PNAC). The Master acts as a supplicant (client device) to an 802.1X enabled network and presents customer-provided X.509 certificates to be allowed access to protected networks.
Support for IPv6 Network Addressing
The integrated NetLinx NX Master fully supports IPv6 network addressing. If the LAN 100/1000 port is connected to an IPv6 capable network, it will self-select an appropriate IPv6 address based on the discovered address settings of the network to which it is attached.
The Master simultaneously supports IPv4 network addressing. This means any Master may have more than one valid
IP address: one IPv4 and one or more IPv6 addresses.
When opening sockets from NetLinx or Java code, no unique command is available to indicate that you are providing an IPv4 or
IPv6 network address. As long as the provided IP address is a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address, the Master will utilize the correct addressing protocol automatically.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 24
Product Overview and General Specifications
ID Pushbutton
The ID Pushbutton functions performed depend on when and for how long the ID Pushbutton is pressed and held.
The integrated Master includes ID Pushbutton functionality for selecting a static or DHCP address, performing a factory default
reset, and restoring the factory firmware image (for instructions, see page 58).
Case Sensitive File System
All file names on the integrated Master are case sensitive. This includes all user files created or used within NetLinx or Java code. If your legacy code generates an error when accessing a file, it is likely due to inconsistent use of case in the filename.
IMPORTANT: If you have legacy code that uses files, verify that every reference to each file is consistent with regard to case.
USB Program Port Driver
The integrated NetLinx NX Master is configurable for communication with a PC over the switcher’s USB Program port. On Enova
DGX 100 Series Switchers, the USB Program port includes pre-loaded drivers for use with a PC running either Windows 7 or
Windows 8.
The integrated NetLinx NX Master utilizes a USB (mini-AB) Program port for configuration and programming via a connected PC.
The required USB driver installs automatically with NetLinx Studio v4.0 or later.
Because a PC COM port can only be used for a single process at a time, having a terminal window open using the COM port assigned to that USB connection will prevent any other communication to the Master over that same USB connection, including refreshing the OnLine Tree and transferring files. We recommend using the front control panel to discover the IP address of the
Master, modifying the IP address via the USB Program port if necessary, and then connecting over Ethernet to the new IP address.
For additional information, see page 55.
Differences in DEFINE_PROGRAM Execution
Due to differences in the underlying architecture of the integrated Master, changing variables in the DEFINE_PROGRAM section of code* can negatively impact program performance. If you have legacy NetLinx code that does change a variable in this section, timing differences very likely will cause your code to run slower and appear less responsive on the Master.
* Changing variables within the DEFINE_PROGRAM section of code is poor programming practice.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 25
Product Overview and General Specifications
NetLinx NX Master Telnet Commands
The table below contains Telnet commands which apply to the integrated NetLinx NX Master.
NOTE: For further information about using Telnet commands and a complete list of commands available for NetLinx NX Central
Controllers, see the “WebConsole & Programming Guide – NX-Series Controllers” at www.amx.com.
NetLinx NX Telnet Commands for the Integrated NetLinx NX Master
Command
AUTO LOCATE (ENABLE|DISABLE|STATUS)
Description
Enables/disables/queries the auto locate feature on the integrated Master. Auto locate adds additional broadcast information for use by AMX Touch Panel devices configured in Auto connect mode.
Syntax:
DOT1X (ENABLE|DISABLE|STATUS)
MANAGE FIRMWARE
PROGRAM (ENABLE|DISABLE|STATUS)
PROGRAM INFO
Auto Locate [enable|disable|status]
Enables/disables 802.1x security or displays its current settings. The default settings is disable.
Syntax:
DOT1X[status|enable|disable]
Telnet interface to load previous and factory firmware versions for both the integrated Master (device 0) and controller (device 5001).
Example:
>manage firmware
Devices
-------
0 - Master
5001
Select device or press return to cancel:0
Current Version: 1.2.259
Previous Version: 1.2.258
Factory Version: 1.2.250
To install a firmware version:
Enter P (Previous), F (Factory) or press return to cancel:
Enable/disable the NetLinx program or display the status of the current program execution setting. The default setting is enable.
Important: For information on using this command, see page 59.
The setting (enable or disable) persists through power down and through firmware updates, etc., until a new command is sent. If the software setting is disabled, then the NetLinx program is disabled.
Syntax:
PROGRAM [status|enable|disable]
Displays a list of program files and modules residing on the integrated Master.
Example:
>PROGRAM INFO
-- Program Name Info
-- Module Count = 1
1 Name is i!-PCLinkPowerPointTest
-- File Names = 2
1 = C:\Program Files\AMX Applications\i!-PCLinkPowerPoint
2 = C:\Program Files\Common Files\AMXShare\AXIs\NetLinx.axi
2 = Name is MDLPP
REBOOT
--File Names = 2
1 C:\AppDev\i!-PCLink-PowerPoint\i!-PCLinkPowerPointMod.axs
2 C:\Program files\Common Files\AMXShare\AXIs\NetLinx.axi
Reboots the integrated Master or specified device. Options for rebooting the Master are cold, soft, and warm. The reboot command with no parameter executes as
“reboot cold”.
Example (Rebooting device):
>REBOOT [0:1:0]
Rebooting...
Example (Rebooting Master):
>reboot cold
Reboots the Master and restarts the entire operating system.
>reboot warm
>reboot soft
Reboots the Master but only starts the AMX NetLinx application firmware.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 26
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 800 – General Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Approvals
AC Power per Supply
Power Capacity (max.)
Power Consumption (max.)
Power Consumption (typical)
Thermal Dissipation Full Capacity (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (typical)
Power Factor Correction (PFC)
Operational Temperature
Storage Temperature
Operational Humidity
Storage Humidity
MTBF
Dimensions
Weight
Shipping Weight
Per Channel Aggregate Data Rate (max.)
Noise Level
Airflow
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Fiber Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible Solecis Digital Switchers
Compatible Solecis 4K Digital Switchers
Value
UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, CE EN 60950-1, CE EN 55022 Class A,
CE EN 55024, FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, RoHS,
WEEE
100-240 +/-10% VAC single phase, 50/60 Hz
977 Watts (110 VAC and 230 VAC)
562 Watts, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure with redundancy
255 Watts, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
3334 BTU/hr.
1917 BTU/hr, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure with redundancy
870 BTU/hr, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
Supported, complies with EN60555-2 and EN61000-3-2
32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
-22° F to 158° F (-30° C to 70° C)
5% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
566,000 hrs
15 in. (38.1 cm) depth; 16 in. (40.64 cm) depth with extractors
19 in. (48.26 cm) width including integral rack mounting ears
6.84 in. (17.37 cm) height (4 RU)
Approximately 35 lb. (15.9 kg) per loaded enclosure
Approximately 45 lb. (20.4 kg) per loaded enclosure
12.8 Gbps
<52.5 dBA @ 1 m (typical @ 25° C)
Forced air (inlet on side; exhaust on side)
• DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitters
• DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate Transmitters (US)
• DXLink HDMI Receiver Modules
• DXLink 4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate Transmitters (US)
• DXLink HDMI 4K Receiver Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format MM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink Multi-Format SM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI MM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI SM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• Solecis 4x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 4x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 4K Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 27
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 1600 – General Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Approvals
AC Power per Supply
Power Capacity (max.)
Power Consumption (max.)
Power Consumption (typical)
Thermal Dissipation Full Capacity (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (typical)
Power Factor Correction (PFC)
Operational Temperature
Storage Temperature
Operational Humidity
Storage Humidity
MTBF
Dimensions
Weight
Shipping Weight
Per Channel Aggregate Data Rate (max.)
Noise Level
Airflow
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Fiber Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible Solecis Digital Switchers
Compatible Solecis 4K Digital Switchers
Value
UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, CE EN 60950-1, CE EN 55022 Class A,
CE EN 55024, FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, RoHS,
WEEE
100-240 +/-10% VAC single phase, 50/60 Hz
977 Watts (110 VAC and 230 VAC)
953 Watts, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure with redundancy
365 Watts, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
3334 BTU/hr.
3251 BTU/hr, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure with redundancy
1245 BTU/hr, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
Supported, complies with EN60555-2 and EN61000-3-2
32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
-22° F to 158° F (-30° C to 70° C)
5% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
555,000 hrs
15 in. (38.1 cm) depth; 16 in. (40.64 cm) depth with extractors
19 in. (48.26 cm) width including integral rack mounting ears
6.84 in. (17.37 cm) height (4 RU)
Approximately 55 lb. (24.95 kg) per loaded enclosure
Approximately 65 lb. (29.5 kg) per loaded enclosure
12.8 Gbps
<52.5 dBA @ 1 m (typical @ 25° C)
Forced air (inlet on side; exhaust on side)
• DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitters
• DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate Transmitter (US)
• DXLink HDMI Receiver Modules
• DXLink 4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate Transmitters (US)
• DXLink HDMI 4K Receiver Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format MM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink Multi-Format SM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI MM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI SM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• Solecis 4x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 4x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 4K Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 28
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 3200 – General Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Approvals
AC Power per Supply
Power Capacity (max.)
Power Consumption (max.)
Power Consumption (typical)
Thermal Dissipation Full Capacity (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (typical)
Power Factor Correction (PFC)
Operational Temperature
Storage Temperature
Operational Humidity
Storage Humidity
MTBF
Dimensions
Weight
Shipping Weight
Per Channel Aggregate Data Rate (max.)
Noise Level
Airflow
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Fiber Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible Solecis Digital Switchers
Compatible Solecis 4K Digital Switchers
Value
UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, CE EN 60950-1, CE EN 55022 Class A,
CE EN 55024, FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, RoHS,
WEEE
100-240 +/-10% VAC single phase, 50/60 Hz
1320 Watts, with redundancy @ 110 VAC
1730 Watts, with redundancy @ 230 VAC
2640 Watts, without redundancy @ 110 VAC
3459 Watts, without redundancy @ 230 VAC
1813 Watts*, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure without redundancy
622 Watts, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
4508 BTU/hr, with redundancy @ 110 VAC
5908 BTU/hr, with redundancy @ 230 VAC
9016 BTU/hr, without redundancy @ 110 VAC
11813 BTU/hr, without redundancy @ 230 VAC
6322 BTU/hr*, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure without redundancy
2122 BTU/hr, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
Supported, complies with EN60555-2 and EN61000-3-2
32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
-22° F to 158° F (-30° C to 70° C)
5% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
424,000 hrs
20.08 in. (51 cm) depth; 21.08 in. (53.54 cm) with extractors
19 in. (48.26 cm) width including integral rack mounting ears
10.45 in. (26.54 cm) height (6 RU)
Approximately 73 lb. (33.1 kg) per loaded enclosure
Approximately 83 lb. (37.6 kg) per loaded enclosure
12.8 Gbps
<52.5 dBA @ 1 m (typical @ 25° C)
Forced air (inlet on side; exhaust on side)
• DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitters
• DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate Transmitter (US)
• DXLink HDMI Receiver Modules
• DXLink 4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate Transmitters (US)
• DXLink HDMI 4K Receiver Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format MM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink Multi-Format SM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI MM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI SM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• Solecis 4x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 4x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 4K Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
*Use the Enova DGX Configuration Tool located at www.AMX.com/enova to determine the power requirements of a configuration and whether any of the DXLink Transmitters or Receivers should be powered with the local power supply to maintain power supply redundancy in the Enova DGX 32 enclosure.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 29
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 6400 – General Specifications
General Specifications
Parameter
Approvals
AC Power per Supply
Power Capacity (max.)
Power Consumption (max.)
Power Consumption (typical)
Thermal Dissipation Full Capacity (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (max.)
Thermal Dissipation (typical)
Power Factor Correction (PFC)
Operational Temperature
Storage Temperature
Operational Humidity
Storage Humidity
MTBF
Dimensions
Weight
Shipping Weight
Per Channel Aggregate Data Rate (max.)
Noise Level
Airflow
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers
Compatible DXLink™ Fiber Transmitters and
Receivers
Compatible Solecis Digital Switchers
Compatible Solecis 4K Digital Switchers
Value
UL 60950-1, CSA 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, CE EN 60950-1, CE EN 55022 Class A,
CE EN 55024, FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A, ICES-003 Class A, RoHS,
WEEE
100-240 +/-10% VAC single phase, 50/60 Hz
3960 Watts, @ 110 VAC
5189 Watts, @ 230 VAC
3522 Watts, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure with redundancy
1138 Watts, fully loaded HDMI enclosure with redundancy
13524 BTU/hr, @ 110 VAC
17721 BTU/hr, @ 230 VAC
12017 BTU/hr, fully loaded DXLink Power enclosure
3883 BTU/hr, fully loaded HDMI enclosure
Supported, complies with EN60555-2 and EN61000-3-2
32° F to 104° F (0° C to 40° C)
-22° F to 158° F (-30° C to 70° C)
5% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
185,000 hrs
19.99 in. (50.78 cm) depth; 21.14 in. (53.70 cm) with extractors
18.96 in. (48.15 cm) width with rack mounting ears
22.72 in. (57.71 cm) height (13 RU)
Approximately 150 lb. (68.0 kg) per loaded enclosure
Approximately 257 lb. (116.6 kg) per loaded enclosure
26 Gbps
<50.1 dBA @ 1 m (typical @ 25° C)
Forced air (inlet on side; exhaust on side)
• DXLink Multi-Format Transmitter Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate Transmitters
• DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate Transmitter (US)
• DXLink HDMI Receiver Modules
• DXLink 4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate Transmitters (US)
• DXLink HDMI 4K Receiver Modules
• DXLink Multi-Format MM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink Multi-Format SM Fiber TX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI MM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• DXLink HDMI SM Fiber RX, Duplex/Simplex
• Solecis 4x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 4x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 5x1 4K Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
• Solecis 8x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 30
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX – NetLinx and Control Specifications
NetLinx and Control Specifications
Integrated Controller
LAN 100/1000 (Ethernet) Port
ICS LAN Port
Processor
Memory
Program Port (USB)
ID Pushbutton
Configuration DIP Switch
RJ-45 connector
• NetLinx on-board Master is an NX Class Controller
• TCP/IP uplink port (LAN 10/100/1000)
• Supports up to 64-port unmanaged 10/100 Ethernet Switch*
• Static IP or DHCP/DNS, SSL, Auto-negotiating, Auto MDI/MDI-X Crossover
• Supports IPv4 and IPv6 networks
• Supports HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP
• Built-in Web server
• Includes support for DXLink™ devices
RJ-45 connector
• Auto-setup and connection for control of endpoint devices
1600 MIPS
• SDRAM 512 MB
• NVRAM 1 MB
• Flash 8 GB
USB Mini-AB connector
• Used for NetLinx Studio control
ID Pushbutton to set IP mode or revert to default configuration and firmware
2-position
• PRD Mode Setup
Enclosure Control
Control Port (Serial)
Control Port (USB)
AxLink Port
USB (HID) Keyboard & Mouse
DB-9 connector
• Bidirectional RS-232
• Baud rates of 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 (default)
USB Mini-B connector
4-position 3.5 mm screw terminal
• Provides data and power to external AxLink control devices
• 3A Max Load
Use the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers (twisted pair and/or fiber), connect a DXLink TX to a PC and a DXLink
RX to a keyboard and mouse, the system then emulates commands from the receiver back to the PC. The Solecis SDX-510M functions as a DXLink Transmitter in this scenario.
For a list of HID devices which have been tested and found to be working well with the latest firmware, please view the document, “DXLink HID Keyboard and Mouse
Supported Devices” at www.amx.com on the product page for your DXLink Fiber
Receiver or DXLink Twisted Pair Receiver.
* Cascaded architecture actual throughput dependent on loading.
Enova DGX 6400: Worst case per port throughput is 7 Mbps. Best case is 100 Mbps when used with 64 DXLink Transmitters and 64 DXLink Receivers.
Enova DGX 3200: Worst case per port throughput is 10 Mbps. Best case is 100 Mbps when used with 32 DXLink
Transmitters and 32 DXLink Receivers.
Enova DGX 1600: Worst case per port throughput is 10 Mbps. Best case is 100 Mbps when used with 16 DXLink
Transmitters and 16 DXLink Receivers.
Enova DGX 800: Worst case per port throughput is 10 Mbps. Best case is 100 Mbps when used with 8 DXLink Transmitters and 8 DXLink Receivers.
For individual board information and specifications, see the specific board chapter in this manual.
HDMI Input and Output Boards – page 61
DVI Input and Output Boards – page 73
DXLink Twisted Pair Input and Output Boards – page 81
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and Output Boards – page 96
DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards – page 108
Audio Switching (expansion) Boards – page 128
Audio Insert/Extract (expansion) Board – page 140
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 31
Product Overview and General Specifications
Configuration Information and Control Options
Switching Configuration Information
The configuration file stored on the CPU contains routing and control information for the AMX Enova Routing System.
NOTE: The configuration file is automatically generated by the system based on its hardware – input and output boards, expansion boards, front control panel, CPU, etc. If boards are added during runtime, they are immediately added to the system’s configuration.
From the factory, the configuration normally contains three virtual matrices (VMs) for switching signals:
VM 0 = default (System Configuration interface: this VM is controlled via Switch Mode: A/V)
VM 1 = video signals (System Configuration interface: this VM is controlled via Switch Mode: Video)
VM 2 = audio signals (System Configuration interface: this VM is controlled via Switch Mode: Audio)
Embedded audio signals
Embedded audio signals switch with the video channels.
Through the use of Audio Switching Boards and the System Configuration interface or ICSP commands, embedded audio can be digitally processed (e.g., gain, unity, volume) and switched onto another digital signal, becoming embedded audio on that signal. For more information about Digital Signal Processing (DSP) options for Audio Switching Boards, see
Through the use of the Audio Insert/Extract Board, embedded audio can be extracted and external audio matrix switches can be executed (using a separately purchased audio matrix switcher like the Precis DSP) and then reinserted post-switch
on the output side. For more information, see the AIE Board chapter on page 140.
Available Levels (Virtual Matrices)
Enova DGX 100 Series systems support three levels for BCS control purposes (below). NetLinx code and ICSP Commands require the use of the values: ALL, VIDEO, and AUDIO for the corresponding switch levels.
L0 (All) – comprises all available crosspoints for digital video with embedded audio (the standard matrix*)
L1 (Video) – comprises all available crosspoints for digital video with embedded audio (the standard matrix*)
L2 (Audio) – comprises the embedded audio on the standard matrix,* plus auxiliary audio from the Audio Switching Boards
* The standard matrix corresponds to the basic switcher size: 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, or 64x64.
Audio Switching Boards
When Audio Switching Boards (ASB) are in the system, the Enova DGX 100 Series supports audio breakaway on VM 2 (via the Audio
Switch Mode on the System Configuration interface). The system can route the embedded audio from any digital video input to any digital video output. In addition, audio can be routed via the ASB connectors on VM 2 to/from any of digital video inputs/outputs
(the default is for the ASB audio to take precedence), as well as from Audio Switching Board to Audio Switching Board.
NOTE: If Audio Switching Boards are not in the system, any commands sent to Audio Switch Mode (VM2) shall be NACKed and no state change will be applied.
Board Configuration Information
The System Configuration interface can be used for configuring HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards. This interface can be used to set the Scaler mode, the aspect ratio, and custom resolutions as well as re-program the EDID on input
IMPORTANT: Because signals routed through HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, and DXLink Fiber Boards in an
Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image, you will not need to use the System Configuration interface unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements.
Control Options
NOTE: For an overview of audio control options and a list of where those options are located within this manual, see the “Audio
Control and Signal Processing Options” section on page 55.
Integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor
System Configuration interface – This interface is the Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers’ installation setup tool. It is used during system setup to manage your system’s network, security, and system needs, as well as configure its inputs and outputs while executing switches.
NOTE: Some devices run on a secured file-system. As such, file-system operations (e.g., Load and Save operations) may not be supported by the device’s default capabilities and may require downloading a file manager application.
SEND_COMMANDs – The Enova DGX Switcher can be controlled using AMX SEND_COMMANDs. ICSP is the primary protocol for all system level messaging on integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processors and is a peer-to-peer protocol used for both
Master-to-Master and Master-to-device communications. For details, see page 167.
Control Panel
The Control Panel is standard on all Enova DGX Switchers (see page 201).
The following external methods of control are also available.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 32
Product Overview and General Specifications
AMX Control Devices
The Enova DGX Switcher is compatible with a number of AMX control devices via Native NetLinx communication. For control
BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol
The Enova DGX Switcher can be controlled with an external serial controller using BCS* protocol, a command language for programming control operations and for diagnostic purposes.
Serial control (sends and receives ASCII characters)
Use the Control (RS-232 serial) port or use the USB Control port (as a virtual COM port); both are located on the CPU
Commands can be entered into a terminal emulation program on a PC
* For information on BCS commands, see the BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com.
Third-Party Controllers
A third-party controller can be attached to an Enova DGX Switcher via the RS-232 serial port. If using a third-party controller, see the controller documentation for operating instructions.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 33
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 100 Series and Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Differences
The Enova DGX 100 Series has incorporated a number of technological advancements which resulted in changes that may be of interest to users of previous Enova DGX products. In order to assist these users, we have included the table below which captures some of the main system differences (highlighted cells represent changes that may affect programming code in existing systems).
Enova DGX 100 Series and Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Differences
Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Series
NetLinx Programming and Switcher Control
Switcher Control (NetLinx ICSP)
CHANGE
Switcher Control (NetLinx ICSP)
STATUS
Can be sent to Port 2 or 3
CIxOyT
(default A/V switch)
CL<level>IxOyT
(where <level>=0,1)
Can be sent to Port 2 or 3
SIxT
Switcher Control (NetLinx ICSP)
DISCONNECT
SOyT
Can be sent to Port 2 or 3
DIxT
DOyT
Enova DGX 100 Series
Must be sent to Port 1
Must be sent to Port 1
Serial (COM1) port
USB (COM2) port
Switcher Control (Serial)
Switcher Control (Web Control page) http://Master_IP_address
Switcher Control
(Telnet Interface)
Local Presets
File system
DEFINE_PROGRAM execution
9600 baud, defaults to bcs
(USB uses APBridge driver)
Standard bcs commands
Master Configuration Manager
Device 5002 / IP Control / XBar Controller
BCS Tunnel (telnet to Master on port 15000)
Supports basic bcs commands only
Local presets configurable via XNConnect
Case insensitive
Standard NetLinx execution
PRD mode Settable via DIP switch on CPU board inside enclosure
Device Binding, Addressing, and Network Options
Binding devices to the DGX
Master
Traditional binding only (defaults to NDP)
Must be sent to Port 1
• uses 0 to disconnect - outputs ONLY
15200 baud, defaults to DGX_SHELL>
Standard bcs commands
System Configuration interface
Switcher / Switching or Configuration pages
Telnet interface supports DGX_SHELL (default) and bcs commands.
Does not support Local Presets
Case sensitive (more secure)
Possible timing differences (depends on program variables)
Settable via DIP switch on CPU faceplate
Device Addressing
Network addressing
Telnet to Endpoints
Internet Protocol Versions and
Network Security
Device name given via NDP or specified by user
• The DGX Master and each endpoint device consumes an IP address on the Public LAN
• Endpoint ICSLAN ports pass Public IP
Telnet to any point on the Public LAN as long as the PC is on the Public LAN
IPv4 only
• Defaults to Auto-setup automatic binding of
each device on the Private LAN (page 24)
• Traditional binding supported if Auto-setup is disabled in the System Configuration interface
Status page
• In Auto-setup, endpoints are given an address
• With Auto-setup disabled, traditional device address rules apply
• In Auto-setup, the DGX Master consumes a single Public IP address but all endpoints are given predefined Private LAN addresses
• With Auto-setup disabled, each endpoint gets a Public IP address
• Endpoint ICS LAN ports ONLY pass Public IP
• The Master and switcher always have Private
LAN addresses:
• DGX Master: 198.18.0.1
• DGX Switcher: 198.18.128.1
WARNING: The master Public IP must NEVER use a 198.18.x.x subnet. Doing so will prevent the 5002 device from coming online.
In Auto-setup, can ONLY telnet to endpoints when connected directly to the endpoint’s
ICS LAN port so that your PC receives an IP address on the Private LAN
• IPv4 and IPv6
• Wired 802.1x security for protected networks
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 34
Product Overview and General Specifications
Enova DGX 100 Series and Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Differences
Compatibility and Hardware Support
System Compatibility Please refer to the shipping document:
Enova DGX Input/Output board and Endpoint
Compatibility Instructions
I/O Board Hardware Support Supports Enova DGX HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted
Pair, DXLink Fiber Boards, and compatible Epica
DGX SC Optical Boards.
Does not support DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards or
4K HDMI Boards.
Audio and EDID Functionality
EDID Read/Write Support Use DGX Configuration Software EDID Programmer tab
Audio Expansion Boards
Only one type of Expansion Board shall be used in a given enclosure.
Audio Insert/Extract/Routing
Downmixing
Audio Insert/Extract (AIE) Boards Only
AIE - DIP settings tie insertion/extraction to I/O channels. No audio breakaway routing
Not Supported
Requires kit v3.0.10 or later for new 100 Series feature support. Older I/O cards added to a new system must be upgraded.
Supports all Enova DGX I/O boards.
Does not support Epica DGX SC Optical Boards.
Use System Configuration interface to change/ save/load EDID. Changes can be made to either
Video or Audio EDID or a Custom file loaded
• Audio Insert/Extract Boards (AIE)
• Audio Switching Boards (ASB)
NOTE: ASB must be installed as a pair.
AIE - DIP settings tie insertion/extraction to I/O channels
ASB - Independent I/O channels for audio switching, breakaway, and downmix. Switched audio also supports DSP functionality. Outputs utilizing ASB audio must be set to SWITCHED audio.
The ASB supports one downmix channel (the last audio input) which downmixes any input channel and can be routed to any output
Upgrades, Firmware Resets, and Default Restoration
Web Upgrade Status Web Control Interface link to status page http://Master_IP_Address/web/upgrade/ systemUpgradeStatus.xml
Failed Upgrade Recovery Rolls back to previous kit version
Factory Firmware Image Reset
Switcher
Factory Firmware Image Reset
Master and AxLink Controller
Restore system defaults
N/A
N/A
BCS command (~def!)
• only resets MCPU
System Configuration interface System/Devices page, select the “Switcher Update Status” button
Completes the upgrade to attempted kit version and identifies any mismatch in I/O cards that failed to update. (This is shown in the OnLine
Tree, the System Configuration interface, and
DGX_SHELL> show
.)
DGX_SHELL> manage firmware
then select
“F” for Factory
ID Pushbutton on Master or Telnet to Master and type: manage firmware then select the device to reset (0 or 5001)
DGX_SHELL command (reset factory)
• resets whole system
System Components
RJ-45 ports
External MicroSD Card
Internal MicroSD Card
ID Button
Integated AxLink Control
Control Panel
Left: ENC & ENC
Right: Public LAN
Contains system configuration, presets, eventlogs,
SRM file
N/A
N/A
N/A
Basic control panel functions only
Left: ICSLAN (Private LAN - DHCP Server)
Right: Public LAN
• Contains no files or data
• Only for file transfer to/from Internal SD Card
Contains system configuration, eventlogs, SRM file, current/previous/factory firmware, EDID
Library
• Use to change between DHCP/Static - 10 sec hold while running
• Reset Factory (for Master) - 10 sec hold on power up
• Factory Firmware Reset (for Master) - 20 sec hold on power up
AxLink port for direct connection and control of
AxLink devices
Displays Integrated Master info and provides basic audio support (for embedded audio only)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 35
Product Overview and General Specifications
System Diagnostic Options
The two system diagnostic options for the Enova DGX 100 Series are the Status page in the System Configuration interface and
DGX_SHELL commands.
System Configuration Interface’s Status Page
The Status page in the System Configuration interface (Switcher/Status) displays status for the power supplies, fans, CPU, I/O
Central Controllers at www.amx.com.
DGX_SHELL Commands
The Enova DGX 100 Series supports a number of shell (command-line interpreter) commands for a variety of functions, both basic
and advanced (see “Appendix C” on page 228).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 36
Installation and Setup
Installation and Setup
DXLink Fiber Boards
IMPORTANT: If the Enova DGX Switcher contains Enova DGX DXLink Fiber Boards, be sure to read all of the safety information for laser products in this chapter and in the DXLink Fiber Boards chapter.
WARNING: DXLink Fiber units use laser transceivers, which are Class 1 Eye Safe per IEC 60825-1/CDRH requirements. While the
Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any
optical fiber products (see the OSHA directive on page 117).
Site Recommendations
When placing the enclosure, follow the recommendations and precautions in this section to reduce potential installation and operation hazards.
Environment
Choose a clean, dust free, (preferably) air-conditioned location.
Avoid areas with direct sunlight, heat sources, or high levels of EMI (Electromagnetic Interference).
Chassis Accessibility
Make sure the front and rear panels of the enclosure are accessible, so that you can monitor the Power indicator LED on the front and the other LED indicators on the rear. Leaving adequate clearance at the rear will also allow for easier cabling and service.
Power
IMPORTANT: We recommend attaching all power cords to a surge protector (20 A) and/or an AC line conditioner.
The source’s electrical outlet should be installed near the router, easily accessible, and properly grounded. Power should come from a building branch circuit. We strongly recommend using a dedicated line for the system’s power. Use a minimum breaker current rating of 20 A for 110 V or 10 A for 230 V.
To avoid an overload, note the power consumption rating of all equipment connected to the circuit breaker before applying power.
General Hazard Precautions
These recommendations address potential hazards that are common to all installations.
IMPORTANT: DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building. “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
Elevated Operating Temperature
The maximum rated ambient temperature for the Enova DGX Switcher is 104° F (40° C).
All equipment should be installed in an environment compatible with the manufacturer’s maximum rated ambient temperature. In a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than the ambient room temperature.
CAUTION: To protect the equipment from overheating, do not operate in an area that exceeds 104° F (40° C) and follow the clearance recommendation below for adequate airflow.
Airflow Restriction
Enova DGX Switchers are designed to adequately dissipate the heat they produce under normal operating conditions; however, this design is defeated if high heat producing equipment is placed directly above or below an enclosure.
CAUTION: To prevent overheating, avoid placing high heat producing equipment directly above or below the enclosure. The system requires a minimum of one empty rack unit above and below (three empty rack units are recommended). Verify that the openings on the top and sides of the enclosure are not blocked and do not have restricted air flow.
Mechanical (Rack) Loading
When installing equipment in a rack, distribute the weight to avoid uneven mechanical loading. Note that fully loaded, the Enova
DGX 800 weighs approximately 35 pounds (15.9 kg), the Enova DGX 1600 weighs approximately 55 pounds (24.95 kg), the Enova
DGX 3200 weighs approximately 73 pounds (33.1 kg), and the Enova DGX 6400 weighs approximately 150 pounds (68.0 kg).
Circuit Overloading
When connecting the equipment to the supply circuits, be aware of the effect that overloading the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Reliable Earthing (Grounding)
Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. If not using a direct connection to the branch circuit
(e.g., plugging into a power strip), pay particular attention to supply connections.
CAUTION: We strongly recommend attaching all of the power cords to a surge protector and/or an AC line conditioner. After powering up the enclosure, apply power to the source and destination devices.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 37
Installation and Setup
Unpacking
Enova DGX Switchers are shipped with one enclosure per shipping box. The invoice is sent separately; a packing slip is attached to the outside of each box. Each box contains the following items:
Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switcher
Two standard US power cords for the Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 (if shipped within the US)
Or
Four standard US power cords for the Enova DGX 6400 (if shipped within the US)
Other enclosure related products, as needed
The documentation in the first box includes:
AMX Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers Quick Start Guide
AMX Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Board Quick Start Guide
Control Panel Custom Label Kit (for inputs and outputs and for LCD Function menu)
For orders comprising multiple enclosures, the shipping boxes are marked as “Chassis __ of __,” where the first blank is the box number and the second blank is the total number of boxes in the shipment.
Unpacking Tips
Before fully unpacking the enclosure, inspect the shipping box for any signs of damage. If a box is partially crushed or any sides have been broken open, notify the shipping agency immediately and contact your AMX representative (see the warranty at www.amx.com).
Once unpacking is complete, closely check the physical condition of the enclosure.
Collect all documentation.
NOTE: Please save the original shipping container and packing materials. AMX is not responsible for damage caused by insufficient packing during return shipment to the factory. Shipping boxes are available; contact your AMX representative for details.
System Setup with Transmitters and Receivers
The next three sections cover system setup options for Enova DGX boards and their compatible TXs and RXs.
The following general statements apply to all three sections:
In each section’s table where “Any input board” or “Any output board” is shown, check in the specific board’s chapter to determine whether or not a transmitter or receiver is required.
The transmitters and receivers mentioned in each section can be used as a standalone pair (end-to-end solution). For additional information, see the applicable manual for the modules/units.
Options for System Setup with DXLink Twisted Pair
The following table contains the options in an Enova DGX Switcher for using DXLink Twisted Pair Input and Output Boards in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers.
System Setup Options – Enova DGX Boards with DXLink Modules/Wallplates
DXLink Module/Wallplate
Multi-Format TX Module
Enova DGX Input Board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Multi-Format TX Module DXLink Twisted Pair
Multi-Format Wallplate TX DXLink Twisted Pair
Multi-Format Wallplate TX DXLink Twisted Pair
Decor Wallplate TX DXLink Twisted Pair
Decor Wallplate TX
Not Applicable
DXLink Twisted Pair
Any input board
Enova DGX Output Board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Any output board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Any output board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Any output board
DXLink Twisted Pair
DXLink Module
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
Pair Boards used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers.
NOTE: Solecis Digital Switchers (SDX-410-DX, SDX-510M-DX, and SDX-810-DX) have a DXLink Twisted Pair output port that optionally provides source point switching and distance transmission to an Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board for hub-style or campus-wide distribution.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a Solecis Digital Switcher to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board in an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher, both the Solecis unit and all DXLink Twisted Pair boards must be upgraded with the latest available firmware versions.
Solecis units must be upgraded before connecting a unit to an upgraded input board.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 38
Installation and Setup
Options for System Setup with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
The following table contains the options in an Enova DGX Switcher for using DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and Output Boards in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers.
System Setup Options – Enova DGX Boards with DXLink Modules/Wallplates
DXLink Wallplate Enova DGX Input Board
HDMI 4K Decor Wallplate TX DXLink Twisted Pair
HDMI 4K Decor Wallplate TX DXLink Twisted Pair
Not Applicable Any input board
Enova DGX Output Board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Any output board
DXLink Twisted Pair
DXLink Module
HDMI 4K RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI 4K RX Module
Pair Boards used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers.
NOTE: Solecis Digital Switchers (SDX-410-DX, SDX-510M-DX, and SDX-810-DX) have a DXLink Twisted Pair output port that optionally provides source point switching and distance transmission to an Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board for hub-style or campus-wide distribution.
NOTE: Additional compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair 4K and DXLink Twisted Pair equipment (see the “DXLink
Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters & Receivers Hardware Reference Manual”).
Options for System Setup with DXLink Fiber
The following table contains the options for using DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards in conjunction with DXLink Fiber TXs and
RXs in an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher. The input/output boards and TX/RX units can be either Duplex or Simplex, as long as the model types match (multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode).
IMPORTANT: Compatibility between hardware requires matching model types: multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode.
System Setup Options – Enova DGX Boards with DXLink Fiber
DXLink Fiber TX DXLink Fiber Input Board DXLink Fiber Output Board DXLink Fiber RX
Multi-Format MM Fiber TX Multimode Fiber Multimode Fiber HDMI MM Fiber RX
Multi-Format MM Fiber TX Multimode Fiber
Multi-Format MM Fiber TX Multimode Fiber
Multi-Format SM Fiber TX Single Mode Fiber
Multi-Format SM Fiber TX Single Mode Fiber
Multi-Format SM Fiber TX Single Mode Fiber
Not Applicable Any input board
Not Applicable Any input board
Single Mode Fiber
Any output board
Single Mode Fiber
Multimode Fiber
Any output board
Multimode Fiber
Single Mode Fiber
HDMI SM Fiber RX
Not applicable
HDMI SM Fiber RX
HDMI MM Fiber RX
Not applicable
HDMI MM Fiber RX
HDMI SM Fiber RX
Boards used in conjunction with DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers.
Rack Installation and System Setup
Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers can be mounted in a standard EIA 19 in. (48.26 cm) rack.
Required Items for Rack Installation:
Enclosure
Enova DGX 6400 only – two rack mounting handles (provided)
Standard EIA 19 in. (48.26 cm) rack
Screwdriver
Screws that fit your rack for mounting the enclosure
Power cords (provided, if shipped within the US)
Surge-protector – highly recommended
Optional Items for Rack Installation:
A PC or laptop computer with a null modem cable for communication with the enclosure via the RS-232 serial (Control) port
Installation Recommendations:
Write the serial numbers (normally located on rear of enclosure) in an easily accessible location before installing the enclosure in a rack.
Use earth-grounded power cords and equipment with an Enova DGX Switcher.
Attach all power cords to a single surge protector and/or an AC line conditioner.
Apply power to the Enova DGX Switcher before applying power to its source and destination devices.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 39
Installation and Setup
Safety Recommendations for Laser Products
IMPORTANT: No user serviceable parts are included inside Enova DGX Switchers; service should only be done by qualified personnel.
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Exercise caution when installing Enova DGX DXLink Fiber products to avoid direct eye exposure to invisible laser radiation. Follow the recommendations below whenever installing or working with fiber products.
Be sure to apply the power only after all the fiber connections are made and no fiber ends are exposed.
Do not remove dust plugs from fiber connectors or the dust caps from the fiber cables until establishing connections; avoid direct eye exposure.
Make sure all cables, including fiber cables, are correctly connected and/or terminated.
Before you unplug a fiber cable on an input board, disconnect the power on the transmitter that is connected to the input.
Before you unplug a fiber cable on an output board, disconnect the switch for that output connector.
Installation Procedure
to detailed information found in later sections of the manual.
Install in rack.
If applicable - remove AIE Audio Boards, set DIP switches to insert or extract, and re-install in enclosure.
IMPORTANT: If the system contains Audio Insert/Extract
Boards, they must be removed from the system and the DIP switches on the boards must be set to either insert or extract
audio according to the system’s requirements (see page 143).
If applicable - attach cable management bars for
DXLink Fiber Boards.
Attach first two video input and output cables.
If applicable, install appropriate TXs and RXs.
If applicable, wire first two connectors on audio board(s).
Apply power to enclosure(s) and then to system devices.
Establish connection from integrated Master to public LAN via
LAN 100/1000 port on CPU.
Launch System Configuration interface via browser on PC connected to public LAN.
IMPORTANT: DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink Input and Output Boards shall only be run within a common building. “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
Execute a test switch.
Attach remaining video input and output cables.
If applicable, install remaining appropriate TXs and RXs.
If applicable, wire connectors on audio board(s).
FIG. 15
Flow chart for installation procedure
CAUTION: To prevent overheating and airflow restriction, avoid placing high heat producing equipment directly above or below the enclosure. The system requires a minimum of one empty rack unit above and below (three empty rack units are recommended). Verify that the openings on the top and sides of the enclosure are not blocked and do not have restricted air flow.
NOTE: If desired, remove any rubber feet present from bottom of enclosure before rack installation.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 40
Heavy Enclosure
Caution
Installation and Setup
Installing an Enova DGX 6400 Enclosure
This procedure applies to starting the installation of an Enova DGX 6400. For either completing the Enova DGX 6400 installation or installing an Enova DGX 800/1600/3200, see the instructions on the next page.
To start installation of Enova DGX 6400 enclosure in rack (requires 3 people minimum):
IMPORTANT: Do not use the board extractor handles to lift the enclosure or to maneuver it into place. Use the lifting handles provided (see Step 6) to maneuver it. We recommend using a temporary shelf for support.
1.
While the shipping box containing the enclosure is still on the pallet, cut loose and remove the outer straps.
2.
Remove the cardboard tray from the top of the reusable shipping box.
NOTE: The shipping box is mounted on wheels.
3.
Lift the shipping box off of the pallet.
CAUTION: The Enova DGX 6400 weighs approximately 150 lb (68 kg) for a fully loaded enclosure. Ensure all parties involved in lifting the shipping box are prepared and follow local requirements as necessary for the task (e.g., wearing proper lifting attire, number of lifters, etc.).
4.
Unlock the four latches on the two sides of the shipping box.
5.
Lift the top of the shipping box straight up and over the Enova DGX 6400 and set aside.
6.
down all four screws securely on both handles).
FIG. 16
Handle position options
7.
Using the bottom of the shipping box, roll the enclosure into position.
8.
Lift onto a temporary shelf (or some other type of support) in the rack.
9.
Align as closely as possible and then remove the lifting handles.
10. Lift into position and screw in the rack ear screws.
11. To complete the setup of the Enova DGX 6400, begin the following procedure at Step 4.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 41
Installation and Setup
Installing an Enova DGX 100 Series Enclosure
For installing the Enova DGX 800/1600/3200, all of the steps below are required. For the Enova DGX 6400, the procedure above must be completed first, after which only Steps 4 through Step 11 below are required).
To install and setup an Enova DGX Switcher:
IMPORTANT: Installation of the Enova DGX 3200 requires a minimum of two people for Step 3; we recommend using three people.
1.
Enova DGX 6400 only – complete the previous procedure and then go to Step 4.
2.
Select a position in the rack for the enclosure that is accessible and does not restrict airflow.
3.
Position the enclosure in the rack. Screw in the rack ear screws on each side.
IMPORTANT: For position in rack, see “Caution”
under Installation Procedure on page 41.
Rack mounting screws aligned with rack
FIG. 17
Insertion of Enova DGX 3200 into rack
4.
audio (see page 144). This is the only mechanism for configuring the insert/extract functionality.
CAUTION: On systems with DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards, we recommend using the provided cable management bars or some other type of cable management system to avoid damage to the fiber cables.
5.
Recommended for DXLink Fiber Boards – Attach the provided cable management bars to the input and output boards (see
6.
Attach only the first two source and destination devices.
If connecting devices to DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, the boards require DXLink Transmitters and Receivers. Install the
Transmitters and Receivers between the first two source and destination devices and the DXLink Boards (see “System
Setup with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers” on page 86 and the product’s documentation).
If connecting devices to DXLink Fiber Boards, the boards require DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers. Install the
Transmitters and Receivers between the first two source and destination devices and the DXLink Fiber Boards (see “System
Setup with DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex Units” on page 115 and the product’s documentation).
If wiring devices to Audio Switching Boards, see page 134.
If wiring devices to Audio Insert/Extract Boards, see page 146.
7.
We recommend using a surge protector and/or an AC line conditioner.
8.
Launch the System Configuration interface via a browser on a PC or tablet (see page 50).
IMPORTANT: The default Username for the interface is “administrator” and the default Password is “password.”
9.
10. When the test switch works correctly, attach the remaining source and destination devices and any additional required transmitters and receivers. If applicable, wire remaining connectors on Audio Switching Boards or Audio Insert/Extract
Board(s).
* Power Budget Planning – If an Enova DGX 3200 system contains DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, read the “Power Budget Planning” in the board chapter. Calculate the power draw for the system to maintain redundancy of power supplies in enclosure and determine how many DXLink Twisted Pair TXs and RXs can be powered via the switcher.
Special Information for Audio Expansion Boards
Two types of audio expansion boards are available: Audio Switching Boards (ASB) or Audio Insert/Extract (AIE) Boards. For Audio
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 42
Installation and Setup
Installation Options
Additional installation tasks may include the following:.
Attaching an AxLink Device – page 56
Using the ID Pushbutton – page 58
Establishing Telnet connection with the CPU – page 240
Establishing external serial control – page 270
Attaching Cable Management Bars
If the enclosure has DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards installed, cable management bars are provided.
CAUTION: Do not severely bend or kink any type of fiber cable. Irreversible damage can occur. Refer to the physical limitations (bend radius) specified for the cable by the manufacturer.
To install cable management bars:
1.
Enova DGX 3200 only – Loosen the two captive screws that hold the connector numbering plate at the top of the connectors.
Remove the connector numbering plate and set aside.
Connector numbering plate
FIG. 18
Connector numbering plate on Enova DGX 3200
2.
Align the two screw holes on the end of the cable management bar with the two screw holes on the end of the board.
(Note the position of the long part of the bar in relation to screw holes.)
Fasten cable management bar with two screws on one end and one on the other end
IMPORTANT: Do not over tighten installation screws.
Enova DGX 3200
Tie cable to cable management bar far enough from connector to allow for manufacturer’s recommended bend radius
NOTE: Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 – orientation of cable management bar is reversed from input to output board.
FIG. 19
Installation of cable management bars
3.
Insert and tighten the two screws at the end of the cable management bar (do not over tighten the screws).
4.
Align, insert, and tighten the single screw at the other end of the cable management bar (do not over tighten).
5.
Tie the cable to the cable management bar far enough from the connector to allow for the manufacturer’s recommended bend radius.
6.
Enova DGX 3200 only – Replace the connector numbering plate that was removed in Step 1.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 43
Installation and Setup
Attaching Video Input and Output Cables
Input and output connectors are the attachment points for source and destination devices that connect to the system.
Enova DGX 800/1600
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the Enova DGX 800/1600 input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enova DGX 800 – Enclosures have 4 horizontal board slots (2 slots each for the input and the output boards, with 4 connectors per board), allowing for a maximum configuration of 8x8.
Enova DGX 1600 – Enclosures have 8 horizontal board slots (4 slots each for the input and the output boards, with 4
connectors per board), allowing for a maximum configuration of 16x16 (FIG. 20).
Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Input connectors
Output connectors
Numbering plate
FIG. 20
Numbers on numbering plate indicate input and output board channels (Enova DGX 1600 shown)
Enova DGX 3200
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the Enova DGX 3200 input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enclosures have 16 vertical board slots (8 slots each for the input and the output boards, with 4 connectors per board),
allowing for a maximum configuration of 32x32 (FIG. 21).
Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate (metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to right one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Numbering plate
<-- Input connectors --> <-- Output connectors -->
FIG. 21
Numbers on numbering plate indicate input and output board channels
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 44
Installation and Setup
Enova DGX 6400
The Enova DGX 6400 has input boards at the top of the enclosure’s rear and output boards below.
Enclosures have 32 horizontal board slots (16 slots each for the input and the output boards, with 4 connectors per board),
allowing for a maximum configuration of 64x64 (FIG. 22).
Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the bottom input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the bottom input board on the right. Outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Input connectors Input connectors
Numbering plate
Output connectors Output connectors
FIG. 22
Numbers on numbering plate indicate input and output board channels
Cabling Specific Connector Types
For information on board connectors and cabling and specifications for specific types of connectors:
DXLink Twisted Pair Boards – page 90
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards – page 96
DXLink Fiber Boards – page 117
Input and Output Signal Cables
CAUTION: If you are connecting switching systems via their DXLink ports (applies to DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards, DXLink Twisted
Twisted Pair), and on page 116 (DXLink Fiber).
If using cable management bars, install them before attaching the cables (see page 43).
Before connecting all of the input and output cables and wires, attach only the ones for the first two sources and destinations (and any applicable transmitters and receivers). Complete the remaining installation tasks (applying power and any system setup though the System Configuration interface), and then disconnect the factory default switch and execute a test switch (see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 45
Installation and Setup
Wiring Audio Inputs and Outputs
Enova DGX Switchers can be ordered to include either of the following audio expansion boards: Audio Switching Boards (ASB) or
Audio Insert/Extract (AIE) Boards. Audio expansion boards work in conjunction with HDMI, 4K HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K,
DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards. The inputs and outputs are configured on a per connector basis to route audio into, out of, or through the system.
CAUTION: Audio Switching Boards and Audio Insert/Extract Boards are not compatible. Expansion boards of both types must not be placed in the same enclosure.
IMPORTANT: Audio Insert/Extract Boards Only – Setting the DIP switches is the only mechanism for configuring insert/extract functionality on the Audio Insert/Extract Board. Therefore, setting the switches (which requires removal of the board from the enclosure) needs to be done at the time of installation setup.
For information on board connectors and wiring and specifications for specific types of connectors:
Audio Switching Boards (ASB) – page 128
Audio Insert/Extract Boards (AIE) – page 140
Audio Switching Boards
FIG. 23
Audio Switching Boards (ASB) in expansion board slots (Enova DGX 3200 shown)
Applying Power and Startup
The enclosure’s universal power receptacles will accept all major international standard power sources. Two US power cords are included with all enclosures shipped within the US. Maximum power specifications are on each power receptacle (and are also
listed on page 27). Always use earth-grounded power cords and equipment with an Enova DGX Switcher.
The source electrical outlet(s) should be installed near the enclosure, easily accessible, and properly grounded. Power should come from a building branch circuit. We strongly recommend using a dedicated line for the system’s power. Use a minimum breaker current rating of 20 A for 110 V or 10 A for 230 V for each circuit. To avoid an overload, note the power consumption rating of all the equipment connected to the circuit breaker before applying power.
Power Budget Planning for Systems with DXLink Twisted Pair Boards
If an Enova DGX 3200 system contains DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, be sure to read the section on “Power Budget Planning” in board chapter. The power draw for the system should be calculated in order to maintain the power redundancy of the power supplies in the enclosure. Calculating the power draw also helps determine how many DXLink Transmitters and Receivers can be powered via the switcher.
Complete Power Redundancy Setup
IMPORTANT: For proper redundant operations, all power supplies must be powered at all times.
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – To take full advantage of the multiple power feeds and redundant power supplies, cable the primary power feed to an outlet connected to one circuit breaker. The redundant power feed should be cabled to an outlet connected to a
second circuit breaker (FIG. 24).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 46
Installation and Setup
Enova DGX 6400 – To provide adequate power for an N+1 redundant application, connect each of the power supplies to its own circuit.
Circuit Breaker 2 Circuit Breaker 1
FIG. 24
Power setup for complete redundancy on Enova DGX 3200
CAUTION: We recommend attaching all power cords to a surge protector and/or an AC line conditioner.
Power-Up Sequence
NOTE: Enova DGX 6400 only – Four AC power filtering Ferrites (one per cord) are provided to ensure the system meets or exceeds the radiated emission requirements defined in standards EN55022:2010, FCC 15.109(g):2014, and ICES-003:2012. To install these filters, clamp in place onto the power cords as close to the power supply as reasonably possible for the system.
IMPORTANT: Enova DGX 6400 only – If two or more power supplies are not receiving power, shut down power to all power supplies then restart the system with all power supplies connected.
The following instructions start with attaching only two source and destination devices for the purpose of executing a test switch
(after the factory default switch is disconnected).
To apply power:
1.
Attach the first two source and destination devices (attach the remaining devices in Step 9 after executing the test switch in
Step 8).
Do not apply power to the source and destination devices until Step 7.
If connecting devices to DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, the boards require DXLink Transmitters and Receivers. Install the
Transmitters and Receivers between the first two source and/or destination devices and the DXLink Boards (see
“System Setup with Transmitters and Receivers” section in the board chapter and the product’s documentation).
If connecting devices to DXLink Fiber Boards, the boards require DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers. Install the
Transmitters and Receivers between the first two source and/or destination devices and the DXLink Fiber Boards (see
“System Setup with DXLink Fiber, Duplex Units” on page 115 and the product’s documentation).
2.
Plug power cords into all of the power receptacles (two or four depending on the system) on the enclosure simultaneously.
Enova DGX 800/1600 power supplies
FIG. 25
Attach power cables to both power receptacles (Enova DGX 800/1600 shown)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 47
Installation and Setup
Enova DGX 3200 power supplies
FIG. 26
Attach power cables to both power receptacles (Enova DGX 3200 shown)
Enova DGX 6400 power supplies
FIG. 27
Attach power cables to all four power receptacles (Enova DGX 6400 shown)
3.
Plug the other end of each power cord into its power source (if using a power strip, turn on the power strip).
4.
Wait 30 seconds.
The Power indicator LED on the Front Panel illuminates green (showing that all redundant power supplies are working). (The
LCD on the Control Panel also illuminates and displays the menu screen.)
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – if one power supply is not working, the Power indicator will be a constant red (check
power connections and switches).
Enova DGX 6400 – if one power supply is not working, the Power indicator will be a constant red; if two or three power supplies are not working, the Power indicator will flash red (check power connections and switches).
5.
Optional – Apply power to a control device/system.
6.
For systems with DXLink Fiber Boards – Apply power to the DXLink Fiber TX and RX units.
7.
Apply power to the source and destination devices.
8.
Disconnect the factory default switch and execute a test switch (see page 54).
9.
Attach the remaining sources and destinations and apply power to them.
IMPORTANT: Whenever the system is powered down, be sure the indicator LEDs on the CPU are off and the fans have stopped before reapplying power.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 48
Installation and Setup
Indicator Lights at Startup
When the enclosure powers up, the indicator LEDs respond as follows:
Enova DGX LED Indicators
Front
LED
Power
Indicates
System power status
Rear –
Power
Supplies
AC Power
DC Power
(Tri-color LED)
Rear –
CPU
Status
AC power presence
• DC power present
• Power supply temperature
• Fault Status
System status
LAN 100/1000 and ICS LAN
• L/A
• SPD
• Cables are connected and terminated correctly
• Receiving or transmitting
LAN data packets
Normal Display
Constant green
Constant green
Constant green
• Solid amber during boot load (10 sec)
• Solid green during app load
(1-4 minutes, depending on system configuration)
• Flashing green when ready
• Constant green
• Blinks yellow
Cautionary
Constant red: one power supply is not working
Enova DGX 6400 only -
• Constant red: one power supply is not working
• Flashing red: two or three power supplies are not working
• Flashing green: System in upgrade process*
Not illuminated: AC failure
• Not illuminated: DC failure
• Amber: power supply is over temperature
• Red: power supply is in a fault state
Blinking red/green: MCPU is in a fault state. Power cycle may recover; otherwise, contact technical support.
IMPORTANT: If the indicator LEDs do not respond with a normal display as stated in the table above, check power connections,
before contacting technical support (see page 60).
Redundant Power Supply (RPS)
IMPORTANT: Enova DGX 6400 only – If two or more power supplies are not receiving power, the CPU and the control panel will continue to operate. However, input and output boards will become inoperable and the system will not send or receive signals until at least three power supplies resume functional status.
Every Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 enclosure ships with two mutually-redundant (hot-swappable) power supplies; every Enova DGX
6400 enclosure ships with four.
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – Power indicator on the front of the enclosure illuminates constant red if a problem occurs with one or more power supplies.
Enova DGX 6400 – Power indicator on the front of the enclosure illuminates constant red if a problem occurs with one power supply and flashing red if two or three power supplies experience problems.
Check the AC and DC LED indicators on the left of each power receptacle to determine if a power supply is not working. For additional LED information, see above.
IMPORTANT: A failed power supply should be replaced as soon as possible to maintain the system’s power redundancy. For
replacement information, contact technical support (see page 60).
Power Supply Troubleshooting
If a power supply’s AC and DC power indicator LEDs are not illuminated: Check to be sure the power cord is completely plugged into the enclosure and the power source.
If a power supply’s DC LED illuminates amber or red, contact technical support (see page 60).
CAUTION: Do not remove a failed power supply until the replacement is ready to install, unless directed to do so by technical support.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 49
Installation and Setup
System Setup for Using the Integrated NetLinx NX Master
The Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher has an integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor (Master) that establishes its public
LAN (Local Area Network) connection through the LAN 100/1000 port on the CPU. The Master provides a System Configuration interface that allows you to make various configuration settings via a web browser on any PC connected to the public LAN.
The NetLinx NX Master’s onboard System Configuration interface delivers HTML pages for setting up the system plus dedicated
Switching, Configuration, and Status pages which allow for remote control and monitoring of an Enova DGX Switcher using
PC-based Internet browsing software.
IMPORTANT: The Enova DGX Switcher uses DHCP to retrieve its IP address by default. The integrated Master’s IP address is available via the control panel at Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address.
The enclosure must be connected to a LAN in order to get an IP address from a DHCP server. After the network assigns a DHCP IP address, a static IP address can be assigned in its place.
IMPORTANT: Although it is also possible to provide access from outside a LAN via the Internet, security issues for your LAN environment must be taken into account (contact your Network Administrator).
System Setup Overview
IMPORTANT: The Enova DGX Switcher uses DHCP by default.
The LAN 100/1000 (Ethernet) port provides functionality for the following protocols: FTP, SSH, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS/SSL, and ICSP
default, the integrated Master will receive an IP address from the LAN it connects with (via DHCP). Once the System Configuration interface has been launched and a test switch has been completed, it will be possible to reconfigure the integrated Master’s LAN
100/1000 port IP setting from DHCP to Static IP (see page 164).
The system setup example below for using the integrated NetLinx NX Master shows an Enova DGX 3200 Digital Media Switcher connected to a LAN via the LAN 100/1000 port. Both computers in the illustration have access to the enclosure via the LAN.
page 82 (DXLink Twisted Pair modules), and/or see page 116 (DXLink Fiber modules).
LAN 100/1000 port connected to PCs via LAN
FIG. 28
Enova DGX 3200 connected via a LAN to two PCs
RJ-45 Ports
The Enova Series CPU has two RJ-45 ports: the ICS LAN port on the left and the LAN 100/1000 port on the right. The ICS LAN port acts as a DHCP server (private LAN) and the LAN 100/1000 port acts as a DHCP client (public LAN) with each port on a separate network.
CAUTION: In order to avoid a Network Loop, do not connect any device on the private LAN (ICS LAN port) to any branch on the public LAN (LAN 100/1000 port).
Both of the RJ-45 ports indicate the same type of LED information and use the same pinouts for cabling.
RJ-45 Port LEDs
The two small rectangular LEDs on the RJ-45 connector indicate the following:
Green L/A LED
On – Link is active (when the Ethernet cable is connected and terminated correctly)
Yellow SPD LED
On – receiving or transmitting LAN data packets
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 50
Installation and Setup
RJ-45 Indicator LEDs
ICS LAN 10/100 and LAN 100/1000 Indicator LEDs
ICS LAN 10/100 port
L/A (green) LED
LAN 100/1000 port
SPD (yellow) LED
FIG. 29
ICS LAN 10/100 and LAN 100/1000 port LED indicators
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
Cable Requirements and Pinouts
RJ-45 link cable (either crossover or straight-through) – required to connect an Enova DGX Switcher to the public LAN.
NOTE: Cable can be wired to either T568A (see below) or T568B (on the next page), as long as the wiring is consistent on both ends.
T568A
The following table lists the pinouts, signals, and pairing for the Ethernet connector when wired for straight-through cable according to T568A.
T568A Pairing
T568A
Pin
TX+
Signals
TX-
RX+
No connection
No connection
RX-
No connection
No connection
Connections
1--------1
2--------2
3--------3
4--------4
5--------5
6--------6
7--------7
8--------8
Pairing Color
1--------2 Green - White
Green
3--------6 Orange - White
Blue
Blue - White
Orange
Brown - White
Brown
FIG. 30 shows the connections for Ethernet RJ-45 connector/cable per T568A.
FIG. 30
RJ-45 connections per T568A
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 51
Installation and Setup
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
T568B
The following table lists the pinouts, signals, and pairing for the Ethernet connector when wired for straight-through cable according to T568B.
T568B Pairing
T568B
Pin
1 TX+
Signals Connections
1--------1
Pairing Color
1--------2 Orange - White
TX-
RX+
No connection
No connection
RX-
No connection
No connection
2--------2
3--------3
4--------4
5--------5
6--------6
7--------7
8--------8
Orange
3--------6 Green - White
Blue
Blue - White
Green
Brown - White
Brown
FIG. 31 shows the connections for Ethernet RJ-45 connector/cable per T568B.
FIG. 31
RJ-45 connections per T568B
ICS LAN 10/100 Port
The ICS LAN 10/100 port on the left-hand side of the CPU is the access point for communication with devices on the private
(ICS LAN) network. The port has a built-in DHCP server which serves IP addresses for the private LAN to endpoint devices.
LAN 100/1000 Port
The LAN 100/1000 (Ethernet) port, which provides the connection from the integrated NetLinx NX Master to a public LAN, is located on the rear of the enclosure on the right-hand side of the CPU. The port handles Ethernet 10/100/1000 connections for
1000 Mbps (megabits per second), 100 Mbps, and 10 Mbps. This connection is compatible with most Ethernet based LANs.
IMPORTANT: Because the LAN 100/1000 port is the single, shared connection to the public LAN, a Gigabit (1000 Mbps) LAN connection between the network and the Enova DGX Switcher’s LAN 100/1000 port is strongly recommended. Lower speed connections may result in inferior performance of the embedded Ethernet network.
CAUTION: The ICS LAN port acts as a DHCP server (private LAN) and the LAN 100/1000 port acts as a DHCP client (public LAN) with each port on a separate network. In order to avoid a Network Loop, do not connect any device on one network to any branch on the other network.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 52
Installation and Setup
IP Protocols Used by the Enova DGX Integrated Controller
IP Protocols Used by the Integrated Controller
Protocol
FTP
SSH
Telnet
Description
The integrated Master has a built-in FTP server
The SSH port functions using the same interface as Telnet but over a secure shell where it uses SSL as a mechanism to configure and diagnose a NetLinx system. This port value is used for secure
Telnet communication.
NOTE: Only SSH version 2 is supported.
The NetLinx Telnet server provides a mechanism to configure and diagnose a NetLinx system. For maximum flexibility, the Master can be configured to use a different port than 23 or disable Telnet completely from either Telnet or the Program port on the rear of the Enova DGX Switcher. Once disabled, the only way to enable Telnet again is from the Program port.
HTTP
HTTPS/SSL This port is used by a web browser for secure communication between the web server UI and the integrated Master. This port is also used for simultaneous encryption of this data, using the SSL certificate information on the Master as a key.
ICSP
The integrated Master has a built-in web server that complies with the HTTP 1.0 specification and supports all of the required features of HTTP v1.1. This port is used for unsecured HTTP Internet communication between the web browser’s UI and the integrated Master.
The port is used for peer-to-peer protocol for both Master-to-Master and Master-to-device communications. This type of communication is used by various AMX products for communication
among themselves (see page 167).
NOTE: The integrated Master can only be configured to use Port 1319, and the ICSP cannot be disabled.
Standard Port #
21/20 (TCP)
22 (TCP)
23 (TCP)
80 (TCP)
443 (TCP)
1319 (UDP/TCP)
To connect an Enova DGX to a Public LAN via the LAN 100/1000 port:
IMPORTANT: In order to use the onboard System Configuration interface, the Enova DGX Switcher must establish an active connection to a public LAN. Do not connect the LAN 100/1000 port on the Enova DGX Switcher to a PC; it will not work.
1.
Insert one end of the RJ-45 link cable into the LAN 100/1000 port on the enclosure.
2.
Connect the other end of the RJ-45 link cable to a LAN hub or switch. The network automatically assigns a DHCP IP address
(the assigned IP address can be changed to a static IP address).
Cable to LAN hub or switch
LAN 100/1000 (RJ-45) connector
FIG. 32
RJ-45 link cable connected to LAN 100/1000 port
3.
Check the indicator LEDs for the LAN 100/1000 connector (see the table on page 49).
NOTE: When the connection is made, the DHCP server on the network will automatically assign an IP address. If you power down and power back up, the DHCP server will reassign the IP address, which may or may not be the same address it assigned before. To prevent the possibility of the IP address changing at power up, you can change the DHCP address to a static IP address (see the
“WebConsole & Programming Guide – NetLinx NX Central Controllers” at www.amx.com). The integrated Master’s IP address is available via the control panel at Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 53
Installation and Setup
System Configuration Interface Setup
System Requirements
Minimum web browser requirements – Google Chrome v30, Internet Explorer v10, Firefox v24, Safari v6.0, Opera v24, or other browser with substantial support for HTML5 features
NOTE: User experience may differ due to browser support for HTML5.
Setting up the system to use AMX’s System Configuration interface requires completing the following three items. Detailed instructions for each item are given.
Determine the integrated Master’s IP address via the front Control Panel
Open a web browser on the PC*
Open the System Configuration interface
* The PC (or tablet) must be on the same LAN that the enclosure is connected to via the LAN 100/1000 port (i.e., if the enclosure is connected to an internal enterprise network, the PC must be as well).
NOTE: The steps below assume that the Enova DGX is powered on and connected to the public LAN via the LAN 100/1000 port on the enclosure’s CPU.
NOTE: Place source and destination devices within view until the test switch confirms correct routing behavior. Any applicable modules/wallplates should be correctly installed and power must be applied to both the enclosure and source and destination devices.
To log on to the System Configuration interface and execute a test switch:
NOTE: The System Configuration interface can also be launched via NetLinx Studio (see page 165).
1.
Determine the integrated Master’s IP address: a. b.
On the front Control Panel, locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
Press the Select key.
c. d. e.
Locate IP Address by scrolling with the Control Dial.
Press the Select key to display the IP Address.
Record the IP address for use in Step 3.
2.
On a PC or tablet, open a web browser that supports HTML5.
3.
In the web browser’s address bar, enter the Enova DGX’s IP address and press Enter.
The System Configuration interface’s Home page appears in the browser.
IMPORTANT: The default Username for the interface is “administrator” and the default Password is “password.”
4.
From the main menu bar at the top of the screen, select Switcher>Switching.
The Switching page appears.
5.
Disconnect the factory default switch (Input 1 routed to all Outputs): a. b. c.
Click Input 1.
Under outputs, select Deselect All.
Click Take.
6.
Make sure the first two source devices and the first two destination devices are connected to the first two input and output connectors (for specific board connector information and specifications, see the board chapter).
7.
Route Input 1 to Output 2 (click Input 1, then Output 2, then click the Take button).
8.
To verify the switch, click Input 1 again. Both the Input 1 and Output 2 buttons will turn blue and both selections will appear in the Selected pane on the right.
9.
Disconnect the test switch (click Output 2 and click Take) and finish the installation.
For System Configuration interface tips, see page 149.
NOTE: For instructions on executing a test switch via BCS Commands, see the “BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol Programming
Guide” at www.amx.com.
The following sections contain information on additional setup options:
Audio Control and Signal Processing (see the following page)
Establish serial communication with a PC via the Program port (see page 55)
Attaching an AxLink device (see page 56)
Using the ID Pushbutton (see page 58)
Enable Program Run Disable (PRD) Mode (see page 59)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 54
Installation and Setup
Audio Control and Signal Processing Options
Audio Switching Boards (ASB)
The audio signal on Audio Switching Boards can be switched independently of the video or as embedded audio. These boards also allow for digital signal processing (e.g., volume, equalizer, input gain) on every input and every output in the enclosure. When using
Audio Switching Boards, the Enova DGX 6400 requires two each of the input and output boards for functionality. Both boards are provided as part of the compatible DGX6400-ASB Audio Switching Board Kit for the Enova DGX 6400.
NOTE: The Audio Insert/Extract Board has no control options aside from the configuration of DIP switches. All switching of audio is executed in conjunction with the switches executed on the corresponding input and output connectors (for additional information,
see the Audio Insert/Extract Board chapter on page 140).
System Configuration Interface
Switching audio outputs/inputs – page 150
Switching a downmixed signal – page 152
Configuring audio outputs/inputs – page 153
ICSP Commands
Switching audio outputs/inputs – page 174
Digital Signal Processing audio commands – page 188
Control Panel
NOTE: Audio from Audio Switching Boards cannot be switched independently from the Control Panel. When the audio from the boards is embedded on a video signal, only volume, input gain, and mute can be applied from the Control Panel.
BCS Commands
Volume, input gain, and mute – See the BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com.
Establish Serial Communication with a PC via the Program Port
Program Port
The Enova DGX Switcher’s integrated NetLinx NX Master is equipped with a low-speed USB connection labeled “Program.” Use the provided USB mini-AB adapter cable (CA1090-541) to establish a connection between the Program port on the enclosure and the
PC’s USB port. This connection provides serial-based communication between the integrated Master and NetLinx Studio. This port is useful for getting and setting the system’s IP address (in NetLinx Studio, open Tools/Telnet Session and enter either GET IP
<D:P:S> or SET IP <D:P:S>, where D:P:S is Device:Port:System).
IMPORTANT: The Program port is not recommended for firmware updates or large file transfers. These more data-intensive operations are better handled via the LAN 100/1000 port connection.
Cable Requirements
USB mini-AB adapter cable (provided) – required to connect an Enova DGX Switcher via its Program port to a PC.
Program Port LEDs – Modes and LED Blink Patterns
Program port
Program port LEDs
FIG. 33
Program Port LEDs
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 55
Installation and Setup
Modes and LED Blink
Patterns table
The following table lists the modes and the blink patterns for the Program port’s LED indicators which are associated with each mode. These blink patterns are not evident until the unit is powered.
Modes and LED Blink Patterns
Mode
OS Start
Boot
Contacting DHCP Server
Unknown DHCP Server
Downloading Boot
Firmware
No program running
Normal
Description
Starting the operating system (OS).
Integrated Master is booting.
Integrated Master is contacting a DHCP server for IP configuration information.
Integrated Master could not find the DHCP server.
Downloading Boot firmware to the integrated Master’s flash memory.
Do not cycle power during this process.
Either no program is loaded or the program is disabled.
Integrated Master is functioning normally.
Status
(Green)
On
LEDs and Blink Patterns
Output
(Red)
On
Input
(Yellow)
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Fast Blink
Fast Blink
Fast Blink
On
1 blink per second
Off
Fast Blink
Normal*
On indicates activity
Off
Fast Blink
Normal*
On indicates activity
* “Normal” is typically off. However, this state may change depending on external inputs.
Attaching an AxLink Device
The CPU board has an AxLink port and an adjacent AxLink LED on its right. The AxLink port is a 4-pin mini-Phoenix (female) captive-wire connector. This port allows the integrated Master to support AMX AxLink devices. The AxLink port can be used to supply power to downstream AxLink-compatible devices as long as the power required does not exceed 2 Amps.
AXM = AxLink - (minus)
AXP = AxLink + (plus)
AxLink LED
FIG. 34
AxLink Connector and LED
AxLink LED
A green AxLink LED indicates AxLink data activity. “Off” indicates either no power or the Master is not functioning properly.
When the AxLink port is operating normally, LED blink patterns include:
1 blink per second – Normal operation.
3 blinks per second – AxLink bus error. Check all AxLink bus connections.
Using the AxLink Connector for Data and Power
AxLink port on compatible device AxLink port on CPU
Top view
FIG. 35
AxLink connector wiring diagram (direct data and power)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 56
AxLink
Troubleshooting
Installation and Setup
AxLink Device Numbering
For NetLinx programming purposes, each AxLink device must be assigned a unique number to locate that device on the bus. The range for AxLink device numbers is 1-255. AMX best practices requires assigning device numbers in three groups:
Axcess Control Cards: 1 - 95
Axcess Bus Boxes: 96 - 127
Axcess Panels/Receivers: 128 - 255
If you are familiar with binary, start at Step 3 and set the device’s DIP switch toggles accordingly (zero = all up; 255 = all down).
To set an AxLink device address:
1.
Open NetLinx Studio and select Tools>DIP Switch.
The DIP Switch 2.0 applet appears.
2.
Enter the AxLink device number in the Device Number text box and note toggle positions.
Close the applet.
3.
On the bottom/side of the AxLink device, set the device’s DIP switch toggles to an appropriate device number according to
AMX best practices (see established ranges above).
4.
Connect AxLink cables from the AxLink device to the AxLink port on the Enova DGX CPU.
5.
In NetLinx Studio, select the OnLine Tree tab and refresh the OnLine Tree with the Enova DGX displayed.
The AxLink device appears as a device in the OnLine Tree.
AxLink Power Measurement and Control
The AxLink port on the CPU supports a SEND_COMMAND to turn on and off +12V power output on the port.
AXPWRON LOWER
– turns on power output on port
AXPWROFF LOWER
– turns off power output on port
These messages are always sent to port 1 of the 5001 control device (D:S:P = 5001:1:0) and return status comes from the same port.
AxLink Port Diagnostics
The fault state can be queried using the SEND_COMMAND: GET AX FAULT (D:S:P = 5001:1:0).
The reply to normal operating status is: AX FAULT: NONE
The reply to a problem in operating status is: AX FAULT: BUS
Removing the problem should restore the fault state to NONE without intervention.
NOTE: Shorting the bus power does not cause a fault that GET AX FAULT can detect.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 57
Installation and Setup
Using the ID Pushbutton
The ID Pushbutton for the integrated Master is located on the rear of the enclosure on the CPU board to the left of the AxLink Port.
ID Pushbutton
FIG. 36
ID Pushbutton
The ID Pushbutton can be used to perform three types of initial configuration settings:
Toggle between DHCP (default) and static IP addressing (see below).
The functions performed depend on when and for how long the ID Pushbutton is pressed and held.
NOTE: ID Pushbutton functions can also be implemented using Telnet commands (see the “WebConsole & Programming Guide –
NetLinx NX Central Controllers” at www.amx.com).
Toggling Between DHCP and Static IP Addressing
To select static IP or DHCP:
1.
Verify that the Master is not currently booting*.
2.
Press and hold the ID Pushbutton for 10 seconds or longer.
3.
Release to toggle between static and dynamic IP addressing.
The Master will automatically reboot to complete the process.
The default static IP address is 192.168.1.2 with a 255.255.255.0 subnet mask.
Resetting the Factory Default Settings:
CAUTION: Do not press significantly longer than the necessary 10 seconds if you only want to restore the default settings on the
Master (see following procedure). Pressing the ID Pushbutton for 20 seconds restores the factory firmware image on the Master.
To reset factory default settings**:
1.
Verify that the Master is currently booting*.
2.
During the boot process, press and hold the ID Pushbutton for 10 seconds or longer.
3.
Release to reset to the factory defaults.
This includes resetting the static IP address to its default and deleting the NetLinx Studio program.
Restoring the Factory Firmware Image and Factory Default Settings**
To restore factory firmware image and default settings:
1.
Verify that the Master is currently booting*.
2.
Press and hold the ID Pushbutton for 20 seconds or longer.
3.
Release.
While the system is booting up, the unit will restore itself to a factory firmware image.
This hold-and-release sequence also deletes all code and IRL files.
* The Master is booting when the Program port’s Status and Input LEDs are ON (green and yellow respectively) and the Output LED
(red) is OFF.
** A reset of the Master to factory default settings includes: removal of all security settings and user files, resetting to DHCP, and loading an empty NetLinx program. Once reset, the Master will be effectively in an out-of-box state.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 58
Installation and Setup
Program Run Disable (PRD) Mode
IMPORTANT: The information in this section is not applicable when the system is running under normal operating conditions. The
PRD mode should only be used if the resident NetLinx program is causing inadvertent communication and/or control problems.
If the procedure is necessary, use NetLinx Studio (v4.0 or later) to resolve the communication and/or control problems with the resident NetLinx program.
The PRD mode prevents the NetLinx program stored in the integrated Master from running during the Enova DGX enclosure’s power-up. Think of the PRD mode (ON) equating to a PC’s “SAFE” mode setting. PRD mode allows you to power the unit, update the firmware, and download a new program while circumventing any problems with a currently downloaded program. Power must be cycled to the enclosure after activating/deactivating the PRD mode.
NOTE: DIP switch #2 must remain in the DOWN (default) position.
To set the Config (Configuration) DIP switch (place integrated Master in PRD mode):
NOTE: The DIP switch is mounted with the ON position at the top (as indicated by the arrow on the left).
1.
Set the Position #1 DIP switch to ON (places the integrated Master into PRD mode).
#1 DIP switch
FIG. 37
Config DIP #1 set to ON
2.
Cycle power on the enclosure.
3.
Use NetLinx Studio (v4.0 or later) to resolve the communication and/or control problems with the resident NetLinx system/ project.
4.
Download the corrected system/project.
5.
Reset the DIP switch to OFF (places integrated Master back into Normal mode).
6.
Cycle power on the enclosure.
7.
Try communication and/or control again.
If problems persist, contact technical support (see the following page).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 59
Installation and Setup
Troubleshooting and Technical Support
Troubleshooting
This manual addresses a number of topics with troubleshooting sections and tips appearing as they apply. The sections below list each of these appearances with linked page references to troubleshooting advice. If the troubleshooting advice does not answer a particular question, the text above or below the advice should also be consulted as those areas may contain relevant material. If the manual has not addressed your particular problem, contact Technical Support.
Enova DGX Switcher Hardware Troubleshooting
DXLink Fiber Boards – page 126
Audio Switching Boards – page 139
Control panel error codes – page 218
CPU troubleshooting after setting PRD Mode Dip switches – page 59
CPU troubleshooting after replacing the CPU battery – page 227
Video and Audio Troubleshooting
Audio, EDID / support / problems / solutions – page 72
AMX Software Troubleshooting
NetLinx Studio connection – page 165
System Configuration interface setup – page 54
Communication and/or control problems (PRD mode) – page 59
System Configuration interface proxy settings – page 198
DGX Configuration Software – page 255
Contacting Technical Support
If this manual has not satisfactorily answered your questions regarding the Enova DGX Switcher or the system is not operating as expected, please contact your AMX representative or technical support. Have the serial numbers for your system and any applicable AMX accessory devices ready (the numbers are normally located on the rear of the enclosure or accessory devices).
We recommend recording your system’s serial numbers in an easily accessible location.
AMX Contact Information
3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082
800.222.0193
469.624.8000
Fax 469.624.7153
Technical Support 800.932.6993
www.amx.com
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 60
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to Enova DGX HDMI Input Boards and HDMI Output Boards.
FG1058-540 Input board
FG1061-540 4K HDMI Input Board
FG1058-550 Output board
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
NOTE: Enova DGX 4K HDMI Boards feature a “4K” label beside the “IN” label.
FIG. 38
Enova DGX HDMI Input and Output Boards (Enova DGX 3200 shown)
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 800 enclosures can hold up to four DGX HDMI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of two input and two output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 8x8, as well as three subsets (i.e., 4x4, 4x8, or 8x4).
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures can hold up to eight DGX HDMI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of four input and four output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 16x16, as well as subsets (e.g., 16x8 or 4x12).
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures can hold up to sixteen DGX HDMI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of eight input and eight output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 32x32, as well as subsets in increments of four (e.g., 12x20 or 24x8).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures can hold up to thirty-two DGX HDMI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of sixteen input and sixteen output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 64x64, as well as subsets in increments of four (e.g., 12x48 or 52x8).
Signal Routing
DGX HDMI Input Boards route signals to DGX HDMI Output Boards or to any other type of Enova DGX Output Boards. HDMI Output
Boards can also accept signals from all of the other types of Enova DGX Boards. When routing signals between different board types, the Enova DGX Switcher automatically converts the signal format to match the output board.
The HDMI connectors are designed to route high-resolution HDMI or DVI signals with or without HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection). DVI signals must be single link DVI-D and require the use of a cable adapter. Destinations with DVI-I or single-link DVI-D connectors are supported.
IMPORTANT: Signals through HDMI Boards in the Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image and provide support for the most flexible audio settings because the connectors are pre-loaded with the most common EDID settings to ensure they will work with the source devices. In addition to common EDIDs on the inputs, SmartScale on every output also greatly helps ensure that all signals are satisfactory. Therefore, adjustments are not necessary unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP
4K Signal Routing
By default, 4K HDMI Input Boards route 4K video from an attached source device through the Enova DGX to an output board (or via a DXLink Output Board to a DXLink Receiver). In order to receive 4K video at the destination device, the entire signal path (e.g., source device, input board, output board, receiver module, and destination device) must support 4K video formats.
4K signals passed to output boards or Receiver Modules that are not 4K capable result in no signals being shown on the destination device. To resolve compatibility issues, change the format from the source device or route the 4K formatted signal to a
4K capable output board/Receiver. 4K HDMI Boards require Category 2 high-speed cable for use with 4K content.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 61
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
InstaGate Pro® and SmartScale®
HDMI Boards are HDCP 1.4 compatible and feature InstaGate Pro Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content and support computer video up to 1920x1200 and HDTV up to 1080p. The HDMI Boards also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM (Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby TrueHD, etc.).
4K HDMI Boards are HDCP 1.4 compatible and feature InstaGate Pro Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content and support progressive resolutions from 480p up to 4096x2160p@60Hz (Y/Cb/Cr 4:2:0). 4K HDMI
Boards also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM (Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby
TrueHD, etc.).
HDMI Boards meet HDCP Standards. For information on HDCP functionality for HDMI Boards, see “HDCP Support on Enova
HDMI Boards provide EDID emulation support with plug-and-play information provided by the Enova DGX Switcher.
HDMI Output Boards feature SmartScale Technology which automatically responds to the display’s preferred EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video settings for that display without manual setup.
* InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates HDCP latency and interruptions on all displays in a system. (These conditions are typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices.) With InstaGate Pro Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated – it just works.
Enova DGX HDMI Boards – Specifications
This section applies to HDMI Input Board (FG1058-540) and HDMI Output Board (FG1058-550). Specifications for 4K HDMI Input
Board FG1061-540 begin on page 64.
HDMI Specifications
Compatible Formats
Signal Type Support
Video Data Rate (max.)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support
2K Resolution Support
Input Equalization
Input Re-clocking (CDR)
Output Re-clocking
Output Scaling
SmartScale Output Resolution
Support
Deep Color Support
Color Space Support
3D Format Support
Audio Format Support
HDMI, HDCP, DVI
• HDMI
• DVI-D (single link with HDMI cable adapter)
• DisplayPort ++ (Input only, with HDMI cable adapter)
4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps
• 6.75 Gbps is only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less
165 MHz / 225 MHz
• 225 MHz is only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is
1080p60 or less
480p up to 1920x1200,60Hz
480i, 576i, 1080i
2048x1024@47Hz; 2048x1080@60Hz; 2048x1152@60Hz; 2048x1536@24Hz
• 2K formats are only compatible with DVI, HDMI, and DXLink Fiber Input/Output Boards and require the output scaler to be set in Bypass mode
Yes, adaptive up to 100 ft. (30 m) at 225 MHz
• Cable distance support dependent on cable type and signal format
Yes
Yes
SmartScale, Manual Configuration, Bypass
All resolutions between 480p and 1920x1200@60Hz via automatic SmartScale query of the display’s preferred EDID Detailed Timing Definition
24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit
30-bit and 36-bit are only supported when the HDMI Output Board or DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less.
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2
• Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
NOTE: The Scaler on corresponding output board or RX must be set to Bypass mode.
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
• Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 62
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
HDMI Specifications
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Local Audio Support
DDC/EDID Support
HDCP Support
CEC Support
Output +5 V DDC Pin
Input Propagation Delay
Output Propagation Delay
HDMI Audio Synchronization
(Embedded Audio)
HDMI Audio Synchronization
(Switched Audio)
Audio Switching Board Support
Connectors
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz
Yes, insertion and/or extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel
• EDID provided by Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher
• EDID is user re-programmable
Yes, full matrix HDCP 1.4 support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro® Technology
• Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device
None
50 mA max. per output port
2 s
24 ms for progressive, 48 ms for interlaced, 5 s when in Bypass mode
Progressive and Interlaced Video Formats @ 60 Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 8 ms leading or lagging
NOTE: Interlaced and progressive video supported into the HDMI Input Board, progressive only supported out of the HDMI Output Board unless in non-scaling Bypass mode.
Progressive and Interlaced Video Formats @ 60Hz frame rate: Audio lags video by up to 22ms.
• Supports break-away audio switching of 2 CH L-PCM for all channels
• Supports downmix from one input channel of Dolby True-HD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD, DTS, or 2 to
8 channel L-PCM
4 HDMI Type A female ports
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 63
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
Enova DGX 4K HDMI Boards – Specifications
This section applies to 4K HDMI Input Board FG1061-540. Specifications for HDMI Input Board (FG1058-540) and HDMI Output
Board (FG1058-550) begin on page 62.
4K HDMI Specifications
Compatible Formats
Signal Type Support
Video Data Rate (max.)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support
Resolution Support
HDMI Cable Requirement
Input Equalization
Input Re-clocking (CDR)
Deep Color Support
Color Space Support
3D Format Support
Audio Format Support
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Audio Switching Board Support
DDC/EDID Support
HDCP Support
CEC Support
Input Propagation Delay
Output +5 V DDC Pin
Connectors
HDMI, HDCP, DVI
• HDMI
• DVI-D (single link with HDMI cable adapter)
• DisplayPort ++ (Input only, with HDMI cable adapter)
8.91 Gbps (max)
297 MHz
480p up to 4096x2160p,60 Hz*
*Y/Cb/Cr 4:2:0 & 4K RX Scaler in Bypass
NOTE: See full list of supported formats on page 65.
480i, 576i, 1080i
NOTE: If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode interlaced input will pass through unaltered.
3840x2160p@24/25/30 Hz
4096x2160p@24/25/30 Hz
3840x2160p@60 Hz, 4:2:0*
4096x2160p@60 Hz, 4:2:0*
* Supported by DX-RX-4K when in Bypass Scaling mode.
HDMI High Speed Cable, Category 2, Required
Yes, adaptive to 21 ft. (7 m)*
*Cable distance support dependent on cable quality and signal format.
Yes
24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit
30-bit and 36-bit are only supported when the HDMI Output Board or DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less.
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr 4:4:4, 4:2:2, and 4:2:0
• Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4
• 4:2:0 only supported at 2160p 50/60 Hz with 4K RX Scaler in Bypass
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
NOTE: The Scaler on corresponding output board or RX must be set to Bypass mode.
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
• Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz
• Supports break-away audio switching of 2 CH L-PCM for all channels
• Supports downmix from one input channel of Dolby True-HD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD, DTS, or 2 to
8 channel L-PCM
• EDID provided by Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher
• EDID is user re-programmable
Yes, full matrix HDCP 1.4 support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro® Technology
• Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device
None
2 s
N/A
4 HDMI Type A female ports
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 64
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
HDMI Board EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
Standard and established timings are given in the tables following along with detailed timing blocks.
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs for HDMI Input and Output Boards (not 4K HDMI Boards). In the System
Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section,
Preferred EDID menu) and VICs are differentiated by the presence of a “p” or “I” in the format. EDID information for 4K HDMI Boards is located on the following page.
IMPORTANT: The EDID can be re-programmed to support additional resolutions through the local DDC using the EDID programming
functionality in the System Configuration interface (see page 161).
Standard Timings (Default Shipping EDID*)
Resolution Refresh Rate Max.
1920x1200
1680x1050
1600x1200
1600x900
1400x1050
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x960
1280x800
1280x720
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
* The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, including HDMI mode, based on installation requirements.
** This is the preferred timing identified in the EDID.
Established Timings
Resolution Refresh Rate Max.
1152x870
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
75 Hz
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
TIP: If you are experiencing audio problems, it may be because you are trying to pass Dolby or DTS or high PCM frequency rates and the destination device does not support them. If you are experiencing video problems, it may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support. In either of these cases, re-programming the EDID may help resolve the problem.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 65
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
4K HDMI Board EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs for 4K HDMI Boards. In the System Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section, Preferred EDID menu) and VICs are differentiated by the presence of a “p” or “I” in the format. EDID information for HDMI Input and Output Boards is located on the previous page.
4K HDMI DTD (Detailed Timing Descriptor)
Resolution
3840x2160p*
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1200
1920x1200
Refresh Rate Max.
30 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
* This is the preferred DTD identified in the EDID.
4K HDMI Standard Timings
Resolution
1920x1200
Refresh Rate Max.
60 Hz
1680x1050
1600x1200
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x800
1280x720
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
Video Standard
CTA (VIC 95)
CTA (VIC 16)
CTA (VIC 31)
CVR
CVR
4K HDMI Established Timings
Resolution Refresh Rate Max.
1152x870
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
75 Hz
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 66
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
HDMI CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
NOTE: CTA VIC formats for 4K HDMI Boards are located on the following page.
VIC #
VIC = 22
VIC = 29
VIC = 30
VIC = 31
VIC = 32
VIC = 33
VIC = 34
VIC = 39
VIC = 41
VIC = 42
VIC = 43
VIC = 44
VIC = 45
VIC = 47
VIC = 48
VIC = 49
VIC = 1
VIC = 2
VIC = 3
VIC = 4
VIC = 5
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 14
VIC = 15
VIC = 16
VIC = 17
VIC = 18
VIC = 19
VIC = 20
VIC = 21
Resolution
640x480p
720x480p
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
1440x480p
1440x480p
Native 1920x1080p
720x576p
720x576p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1440x576p
1440x576p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x576p
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1280x720p
720x480p
720x480p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 4:3
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels Sampling Frequency
Basic Audio: 2 channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 67
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
023
024
025
026
019
020
021
022
027
028
029
030
015
016
017
018
011
012
013
014
007
008
009
010
003
004
005
006
4K HDMI CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
NOTE: CTA VIC formats for HDMI Boards are located on the previous page.
NOTE: The Short Video Descriptor (SVD) column describes the order of video preference.
SVD #
001
002
VIC #
VIC = 95
VIC = 94
Resolution
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
VIC = 19
VIC = 2
VIC = 17
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 18
VIC = 21
VIC = 22
VIC = 39
VIC = 90
VIC = 89
VIC = 1
VIC = 32
VIC = 34
VIC = 31
VIC = 33
VIC = 5
VIC = 20
VIC = 4
VIC = 3
VIC = 93
VIC = 100
VIC = 98
VIC = 99
VIC = 105
VIC = 103
VIC = 104
VIC = 16
3840x2160p
4096x2160p
4096x2160p
4096x2160p
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x480p
1280x720p
720x480p
720x576p
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1920x1080i
2560x1080p
2560x1080p
640x480p
23.98/24 Hz 16:9
30 Hz 256:135
24 Hz 256:135
25 Hz 256:135
30 Hz 64:27
24 Hz 64:27
25 Hz 64:27
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
60 Hz 64:27
50 Hz 64:27
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
Notes
HDMI VIC = 1
HDMI VIC = 2
HDMI VIC = 3
HDMI VIC = 4
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels Sampling Frequency
Basic Audio: 2 channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
IMPORTANT: For information on troubleshooting audio, including a table on “Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards,” see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 68
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
Attaching Cables
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom board; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 3200 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate (metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to right board; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 6400 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the bottom input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the bottom input board on the right.
Outputs are in the lower part of the enclosure, start over at “1” on the left, and follow the same pattern.
NOTE: The HDMI connector has a center screw for locking capability.
To attach HDMI connectors:
NOTE: 4K HDMI Boards require Category 2 high-speed cable for use with 4K content.
1.
Attach HDMI connectors to HDMI receptacles.
FIG. 39
Attach HDMI connectors to HDMI receptacles
IMPORTANT: If a device with an EDID (e.g., a video processor) is installed between the output and destination monitor, the scaler override function will read the EDID for that device. If this happens, we suggest a procedure where you first connect the output to the
Executing a Test Switch for an HDMI Board
We recommend becoming familiar with how HDMI switching works in an Enova DGX Switcher by reading the rest of this chapter before executing a test switch. We also recommend executing a test switch to verify the system is working correctly and then
HDCP Support on Enova DGX Switchers
The Enova DGX HDMI Boards provide true matrix switching for complete distribution of high resolution digital video and embedded audio from the sources to the destinations (audio can also be inserted or extracted with the use of Audio Insert/Extract Boards;
capabilities provide the advantage of being able to use this solution to switch high resolution computer images. As a result, a single system can handle a combination of computer images and protected content.
NOTE: This section also applies to DGX DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards.
Enova DGX Switchers meet the HDCP Standard, which was established to prevent the unauthorized transfer of protected audiovisual content between devices. In addition, these switchers support InstaGate Pro, which was developed to address the special concerns that arise when protected content needs to be distributed.
The Enova DGX HDMI Boards route HDCP (content-protected) and non-HDCP digital audiovisual signals. If HDCP is applied, the transmitted video is encrypted. The HDMI input connectors act as HDCP receivers (RXs) for upstream devices, and the output connectors act as HDCP transmitters (TXs) for downstream devices.
If the content is protected (HDCP), the Enova DGX Switcher functions as an InstaGate Pro sink and through the HDMI (or DVI) output connectors handles verification of the connected individual downstream sinks / destination devices (and downstream repeaters in the path if applicable). This means that the source device only needs to authenticate the HDMI input. Once the authentication is complete, the encrypted content begins to display on the destinations.
NOTE: Enova DGX Boards do not support CEC.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 69
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
HDMI System Conditions
Normally, all devices used in an HDMI system are HDCP compliant. Each HDCP capable device has a unique set of confidential keys
(used to encrypt and decrypt the data).
Normally HDCP is used only when the source content is copyright protected.* Unprotected content is not affected and may be routed as desired.
Each HDMI input can be routed to any number of outputs. The HDMI input (using InstaGate Pro Technology) is the only sink that the source device is required to verify (unless any repeaters are installed between the source device and the Enova
DGX Switcher).
Each HDMI output goes through a verification process with its connected sink(s).** Each HDMI output can support a maximum of 16 devices (repeaters and destination devices) with seven levels, i.e., the number of times the signal goes through a repeater prior to going to the sink. However, if the HDMI output goes into a device which is also utilizing
InstaGate Pro, then the process starts all over again and the Enova DGX Switcher only sees the input of that InstaGate Pro device as the one sink that it needs to verify. So even though the number of sinks each HDMI output on the switcher can handle is finite, the number of sinks can be unlimited if using AMX devices that support InstaGate Pro Technology.
* In some cases, source devices will always enforce HDCP even if the content is not protected. In those cases, when the source device sees that its output is connected to the input of the Enova DGX HDMI board (or another HDCP compliant sink), the source device will always enforce and encrypt the HDMI signal that it sends. If the system’s equipment includes this type of source device, be aware that DGX HDMI Boards will not be able to route that source device’s signal to a non-HDCP compliant display.
** If the connected downstream sink is not HDCP compliant, then the HDMI output will not send the signal. This does not affect other outputs the source may be routed to. This allows compliant displays to show content from source devices even if the source devices are switched to non-compliant displays. Non-compliant outputs can easily be identified because they display a dark red image to indicate they failed the authentication process.
The content protection process for the point-to-point connection between the upstream transmitter on the source device and an
HDMI input connector (which is an RX) on the Enova DGX Switcher through an HDMI output connector (which is a TX) to the destination device includes four steps.
Steps in the Content Protection Process
1.
The transmitter on the source device uses authentication protocol to verify that the HDMI input is authorized to receive the protected content. (This is true regardless of how many destination devices the source is being routed to.) The content is encrypted and transmitted.
2.
The Enova DGX Switcher verifies that the display devices are authorized to receive the protected content (this is the part of the process in which renewability of the SRM (System Renewability Message) list is verified; this verification of the display devices occurs inside the switcher). The content is encrypted and transmitted.
3.
The source device’s transmitter periodically verifies that the HDMI input is still synchronized and capable of decrypting the protected content.
4.
The Enova DGX Switcher periodically verifies that the display devices are still synced and capable of decrypting the protected content.
NOTE: If the source does not support HDCP, the display device does not need to support HDCP. The unencrypted content from the source is simply routed through the outputs to the display devices.
Supported Number of Sinks
HDCP Source Device
The number of sinks that the source device supports is not relevant when using Enova DGX Switcher boards that support HDCP because the input connector on the board is the only sink that the source device needs to authenticate.
Enova DGX Switcher
The HDMI outputs in an Enova DGX Switcher each support a maximum of 16 downstream devices (repeaters and/or destination devices).
Unsuccessful Transmission in System
If an Enova DGX Switcher does not successfully transmit the protected content to any of the routed sinks, it may indicate one of the following conditions:
Non-compliant device – The sink device is not HDCP compliant or has had its authentication key revoked.*
HDMI output sink support limit exceeded – The output is actively routed to more than 16 downstream devices (display devices and/or repeaters) from a single output connector on an Enova DGX Switcher.
* Key revocation is handled strictly by the Enova DGX Switcher. The source does not take any action with respect to revoked keys.
IMPORTANT: Keep in mind that a “failure condition” (in which HDCP authentication fails to occur) is verified by the Enova DGX
Switcher not the source device and will result in the image being a dark red.
NOTE: Be aware that even when you are playing un-encrypted content on a Blu-Ray player, most Blu-Ray players play all content as encrypted content. Normally the Enova DGX Switcher switches non-encrypted content without problems if the display is non-HDCP compliant. However, when encrypted content is sent from a Blu-Ray player to the Enova and is switched to a device that does not support HDCP, the content will not display and the image will be red.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 70
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
InstaGate Pro
®
Technology
InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates latency (time required for authentication) in the switcher for HDCP negotiations with the displays in a system. The latency is typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices every time a new switching combination between a source device and display occurs. With InstaGate Pro Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated – it just works.
Key limitations on source devices are also eliminated by allowing them to see only a single sink key from the HDMI Input Board’s input connection.
NOTE: Some destination devices have a longer lag time than others between receiving a signal and displaying that signal. Although
InstaGate Pro significantly reduces the latency associated with HDCP authentication, it cannot reduce the inherent lag time of a device as it syncs up to the newly switched video image.
Troubleshooting Video
The following troubleshooting tips involve signal support from or to third-party devices. The first tip resolves potential problems from third-party sources and the second resolves potential problems when using third-party destinations.
Problem – The HDMI Input Board does not pass video through the enclosure to a connected display. The likely cause is that the signal is from an incorrectly formatted source (e.g., VTC, wall processor with combined output, or signal generator) and the Enova
DGX firmware (v1.6.4.1 and later) includes a background measurement process for detecting valid video. (If the incoming signal fails to meet the Enova DGX criteria, it will not pass the signal.)
Solution – Turn off the firmware’s background checks and run video without them:
Install Enova DGX firmware v3.0.0.4 or later.
Use the DGX_SHELL command set BCPUx_bg_vsync_disabled=ON (where x is the input board slot number) to disable the background check (affects the entire input board).
(The command BCPUx_bg_vsync_disabled=OFF enables the background check.)
The video will route through the Enova DGX from source to destination as soon as the command is sent. The board’s setting persists through power cycles and will persist the setting when removed from the enclosure and added to another, while a new board replacing the old board will be set to OFF (default).
Problem – Video from the HDMI Output Board to a third-party device (e.g., VTC, wall processor) does not display or displays with flickers. The problem is usually caused by destination devices with weak or no input equalization (i.e., the video stream from the output board attempts to lock onto the destination; however, the destination is unable to provide a stable connection). This is made worse when signals are passed through low-quality or long-distance cable runs.
Solution – Use one or more of the following work-around suggestions to avoid the issue:
Replace low quality cables with higher quality cables.
Use shorter cable runs.
Install an EDID emulator, an HDMI equalizer/repeater, or another device that rebuilds/reclocks the signal.
You will know the problem is resolved when the video signal appears on the display device without flickering.
Problem – Intermittent or solid screen blanking after the video source is disconnected (VIDOUT_SLEEP is enabled).
Solution – For the video output attached to the problematic monitor, either uncheck the Allow Display Sleep option and set the
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 71
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
Troubleshooting Audio
Before troubleshooting audio, it helps to understand how the system handles EDID information.
The source reads and adapts to the pre-loaded EDID on the DGX HDMI input connector.
The factory default EDID is set to support 2 channel L-PCM audio. This EDID can be modified by using one of the methods described under “Possible Solutions” at the bottom of the page.
Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards
The following table indicates which audio formats are supported by specific Enova DGX boards.
Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards
Audio Format
2 Channel L-PCM
6 Channel L-PCM
8 Channel L-PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•*
•*
•
•
•
•
•
•*
•*
•
•
•
•
•
(on either the input or the output side)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels.
NOTE: DVI Boards must have their EDID changed to support HDMI signals with embedded audio.
IMPORTANT: Because signals are routed through HDMI, 4K HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards which feature
SmartScale Technology, they normally produce a quality image. If the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements,
Audio Problems
The default EDID for input boards only supports 2 channel L-PCM audio. If a sources chooses to ignore this EDID and send a format that is not in the EDID, the audio may not pass through the Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher at all or it may be distorted. To present
the EDID on the input board, the audio is still distorted or is not present on the destination device, then the device may not be capable of supporting the requested audio format with the newly loaded EDID setting. In this case, a standard EDID should be used and the sources set up to only pass the type of audio that the downstream destination devices can handle.
Checking for Support
One way to check if a destination supports a particular type of audio format is to capture the EDID using the System Configuration interface’s Save EDID function and then paste the data from the .edid file into an EDID reader program (e.g., www.edidreader.com).
Possible Solutions:
If you encounter audio problems, we recommend trying the following solution:
destination device and to write it to the HDMI input on the Enova DGX Switcher.
Audio not present or intermittent with good video
Likely Cause:
A signal containing both video and audio must have space for both signal portions. The audio signal portion lies in the blanked portion of the video signal. High Bit Rate Audio (HBRA) requires a larger than normal space in the blanked area of the signal. Video formats with reduced blanking normally provide enough space for audio signals. In a signal that combines a video format with reduced blanking and HBRA, the HBRA signal is truncated and can present as either no audio or as problematic audio (static, clicking, absent, etc.). While Enova DGX hardware supports both HBRA and reduced blanking video formats, these formats do not necessarily work with one another.
Possible Solution:
Change either the audio format to non-HBRA or change the video format to a format that does not use reduced blanking.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 72
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to the following DVI Input Board and Output Board for the Enova DGX Switcher:
FG1058-600 Input board
FG1058-610 Output board
Enova DGX DVI Boards
FIG. 40
DVI Input and DVI Output Boards
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 800 enclosures hold up to four DVI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of two input and two output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 8x8, as well as three subsets
(i.e., 4x4, 4x8, or 8x4).
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures hold up to eight DVI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of four input and four output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 16x16, as well as subsets
(e.g., 16x8 or 4x12).
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures hold up to sixteen DVI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of eight input and eight output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 32x32, as well as subsets in increments of four (e.g., 12x20 or 24x8).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures hold up to thirty-two DVI Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of sixteen input and sixteen output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 64x64, as well as subsets in increments of four (e.g., 12x48 or 52x8).
Signal Routing
DGX DVI Input Boards route signals to DGX DVI Output Boards or to any other type of Enova DGX Output Boards. DVI Output Boards can also accept signals from all of the other types of Enova DGX Boards. When routing signals between different board types, the
Enova DGX Switcher automatically converts the signal format to match the output board.
DGX DVI Boards can also accept HDMI/HDCP with embedded audio signals, but require an EDID change on the input board to allow a source device to send out signals in that format.
The DVI connectors are designed to route high-resolution DVI signals with or without HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). DVI Boards support only single link DVI-D signals. The connectors on the boards are DVI-I connectors, which allow use of cables with either single link DVI-D or DVI-I connectors (for DVI-I, the analog pins are not used; for DVI-I connector pinout
Switching Boards (see page 128).
IMPORTANT: Signals through DVI Boards in the Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image because the connectors are pre-loaded with the most common EDID settings to ensure they will work with the source devices. In addition to common EDIDs on the inputs, SmartScale on every output also greatly helps ensure that all signals are satisfactory. Therefore, adjustments are not necessary unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements. If re-programming of boards is necessary, use the
System Configuration interface (see page 149).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 73
Enova DGX DVI Boards
InstaGate Pro
®
and SmartScale
®
DVI Boards meet HDCP Standards and support InstaGate Pro Technology.
DVI Input Boards provide EDID emulation support with plug-and-play information provided by the Enova DGX Switcher.
DVI Output Boards feature SmartScale Technology which automatically responds to the display’s preferred EDID information and scales the video to the best resolution and video settings for that display without manual setup.
DVI Boards are HDCP 1.4 compatible and feature InstaGate Pro Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content and support computer video up to 1920x1200 and HDTV up to 1080p. The EDID of the input will need to be changed to allow for HDMI formatted signals, so that the source device can send out that signal style. If the EDID on the input board has been properly modified and the downstream sink has proper declarations in its EDID, the DVI connectors also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM (Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, etc.).
* InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates HDCP latency and interruptions on all displays in a system. (These conditions are typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices.) Key limitations on source devices are also eliminated by allowing them to see only a single sink key from the DVI Input Board’s input connection. With InstaGate Pro Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated – it just works.
NOTE: Enova DGX Boards do not support CEC.
Audio Support on DVI Boards
Enova DGX DVI Boards – Specifications
Applies to input board FG1058-600 and output board FG1058-610.
Digital Video – DVI Specifications
Parameter
Compatible Formats
Signal Type
HDMI Mode Support
Video Data Rate (max.)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support
2K Resolution Support
Input Equalization
Input Re-clocking (CDR)
Output Re-clocking
Output Scaling
SmartScale Output Resolution
Support
Deep Color Support
Value
DVI, HDMI, HDCP
DVI-D (single link with HDMI cable adapter)
HDMI
DisplayPort ++ (Input only, with HDMI cable adapter)
DVI Boards can be run in HDMI mode with an EDID update which will provide full HDMI functionality and board specifications
4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps
(6.75 only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less with deep color)
165 MHz / 225 MHz
(225 MHz only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less with deep color)
480p up to 1920x1200 @ 60 Hz
(If the signal is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode, interlaced input will pass through unaltered.)
480i, 576i,1080i
(If the signal is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode, interlaced input will pass through unaltered.)
2048x1024@47Hz; 2048x1080@60Hz; 2048x1152@60Hz; 2048x1536@24Hz
• 2K formats are only compatible with DVI, HDMI, and DXLink Fiber Input/Output Boards and require the output scaler or RX Scaler to be set in Bypass mode
Yes, adaptive up to 100 ft. (30 m) at 225 MHz
• Cable distance support dependent on cable type and signal format.
Yes
Yes
SmartScale, Manual Configuration, Bypass
All resolutions between 480p and 1920x1200@60Hz via automatic SmartScale query of the display’s preferred EDID Detailed Timing Definition
24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit
(30-bit, 36-bit only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink RX Scaler is in
Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 74
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Digital Video – DVI Specifications
Color Space Support
3D Format Support
Audio Format Support
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Local Audio Support
DDC/EDID Support
HDCP Support
CEC Support
Input Voltage (nominal)
Output Voltage (nominal)
Output Rise Time / Fall Time
Output +5 V DDC Pin
Input Board Propagation Delay
Output Board Propagation Delay
HDMI Audio Synchronization
(Embedded Audio)
HDMI Audio Synchronization
(Switched Audio)
Audio switching Board Support
Connector
• RGB 4:4:4
• YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2
(Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4)
Yes* (HDMI primary formats)
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
* When used with DXLink Output Boards and the RX Scaler is in Bypass mode.
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
(Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48kHz, 5.1 channels)
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192kHz
Yes, insertion and/or extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel
• EDID provided by the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher
• EDID is user re-programmable
• Default has support for HDMI
Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro® Technology
• Key support up to 16 devices per output, independent of source device
None
1.0 Vpp differential
1.0 Vpp differential
100 ps min. to 200 ps max. (20% to 80%)
0.16 UI min. to 0.33 UI max. (@ 1.65 Gbps, 20% to 80%)
50 mA per output port
2 s
24 ms for progressive, 48 ms for interlaced, 5 s when in Bypass mode
Progressive and Interlaced Video Formats @ 60 Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 8 ms leading or lagging
NOTE: Interlaced and progressive video supported into the HDMI Input Board, progressive only supported out of the HDMI Output Board unless in non-scaling Bypass mode.
Progressive and Interlaced Video Formats @ 60Hz frame rate: Audio lags video by up to 22ms.
Yes, Supports break-away audio switching of 2 CH L-PCM for all channels and downmix Dolby
True-HD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD or DTS for one input channel
4 DVI-I ports (DVI-D single link is the supported signal type)
NOTE: Interlaced and progressive video are supported into the HDMI Input Board; progressive video is only supported out of the
HDMI Output Board, unless in non-scaling bypass mode.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 75
Enova DGX DVI Boards
EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs. In the System Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section, Preferred EDID menu).
Standard Timings (Default shipping EDID*)
Resolution
1920x1080**
1920x1200
1680x1050
1600x1200
1600x900
1400x1050
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x900
1280x800
1280x720
Refresh Rate Max.
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
* The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, including HDMI mode, based on installation requirements.
** This is the preferred timing identified in the EDID.
Established Timings
Resolution
1280x1024
1152x870
Refresh Rate Max.
75 Hz
75 Hz
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 76
Enova DGX DVI Boards
CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
VIC #
VIC = 1
VIC = 2
Resolution
640x480p
720x480p
VIC = 31
VIC = 32
VIC = 33
VIC = 34
VIC = 39
VIC = 41
VIC = 42
VIC = 43
VIC = 44
VIC = 45
VIC = 47
VIC = 48
VIC = 49
VIC = 17
VIC = 18
VIC = 19
VIC = 20
VIC = 21
VIC = 22
VIC = 29
VIC = 30
VIC = 3
VIC = 4
VIC = 5
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 14
VIC = 15
VIC = 16
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
1440x480p
1440x480p
Native 1920x1080p
720x576p
720x576p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1440x576p
1440x576p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x576p
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1280x720p
720x480p
720x480p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 4:3
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels Sampling Frequency
Basic Audio: 2 channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
IMPORTANT: For information on troubleshooting audio, including a table on “Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards,” see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 77
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Attaching Cables
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 3200 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate (metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to right one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 6400 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the bottom input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the bottom input board on the right.
Outputs are in the lower part of the enclosure, start over at “1” on the left, and follow the same pattern.
IMPORTANT: We strongly recommend screwing down the DVI connector retention screws to ensure as good of a seating of the cable into the receptacle as possible.
To connect DVI inputs and outputs:
1.
Fasten the DVI-I (or DVI-D) connectors on the cable ends onto the DVI-I receptacles on the boards.
(For DVI pinout information, see below.)
DVI-I connection
FIG. 41
Fasten cables onto input and output connectors
DVI Pinout
DVI-I Pinout
1. Data 2-
2. Data 2+
3. Ground
4. No connect
5. No connect
6. DDC-CLK
7. DDC-Data
8. No connect
9. Data 1-
10. Data 1+
11. Ground
12. No connect
13. No connect
14. +5 V*
15. Ground
16. Hot-Detect
17. Data 0-
18. Data 0+
19. Ground
20. No connect
21. No connect
22. Ground
23. CLK+
24. CLK-
C1. No connect
C2. No connect
C3. No connect
C4. No connect
C5. No connect
* DVI output pin 14 (+5 VDC out) supplies 50 mA per each of the four output connectors.
FIG. 42
DVI-I connector pinout
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 78
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Troubleshooting Video
The following two troubleshooting tips both involve signal support from or to third-party devices. The first tip resolves potential problems from third-party sources and the second resolves potential problems when using third-party destinations.
Problem – The DVI Input Board does not pass video through the enclosure to a connected display. The likely cause is that the signal is from an incorrectly formatted source (e.g., VTC, wall processor with combined output, or signal generator) and the Enova
DGX firmware (v1.6.4.1 and later) includes a background measurement process for detecting valid video. (If the incoming signal fails to meet the Enova DGX criteria, it will not pass the signal.)
Solution – Turn off the firmware’s background checks and run video without them:
Install Enova DGX firmware v3.0.0.4 or later.
Use the DGX_SHELL command set BCPUx_bg_vsync_disabled=ON (where x is the input board slot number) to disable the background check (affects the entire input board).
(The command BCPUx_bg_vsync_disabled=OFF enables the background check.)
The video will route through the Enova DGX from source to destination as soon as the command is sent. The board’s setting persists through power cycles and will persist the setting when removed from the enclosure and added to another, while a new board replacing the old board will be set to OFF (default).
Problem – Video from the DVI Output Board to a third-party device (e.g., VTC, wall processor) does not display or displays with flickers. The problem is usually caused by destination devices with weak or no input equalization (i.e., the video stream from the output board attempts to lock onto the destination; however, the destination is unable to provide a stable connection). This is made worse when signals are passed through low-quality or long-distance cable runs.
Solution – Use one or more of the following work-around suggestions to avoid the issue:
Replace low quality cables with higher quality cables.
Use shorter cable runs.
Install an EDID emulator, an HDMI equalizer/repeater, or another device that rebuilds/reclocks the signal.
You will know the problem is resolved when the video signal appears on the display device without flickering.
Troubleshooting Audio
Before troubleshooting audio, it helps to understand how the system handles EDID information.
The source reads and adapts to the pre-loaded EDID on the board’s input connector.
The factory default EDID is set to support 2 channel L-PCM audio. This EDID can be modified by using one of the methods described under “Possible Solutions” on the following page.
Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards
The following table indicates which audio formats are supported by specific Enova DGX boards.
Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards
Audio Format
2 Channel L-PCM
6 Channel L-PCM
8 Channel L-PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD Master
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•*
•*
•
•
•
(on either the input or the output side)
• •
• •**
• •**
•* •**
•* •**
• •**
• •**
* Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels.
** ASB Boards support 1 Downmix input channel.
IMPORTANT: Because signals are routed through HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards which feature SmartScale
Technology, they normally produce a quality image. If the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements, see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 79
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Audio Problems
The default EDID for input boards only supports 2 channel L-PCM audio. If a sources chooses to ignore this EDID and send a format that is not in the EDID, the audio may not pass through the Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher at all or it may be distorted. To present other types of audio formats to the source, a different EDID must be loaded. If after changing the EDID on the input board, the audio is still distorted or is not present on the destination device, then the device may not be capable of supporting the requested audio format with the newly loaded EDID setting. In this case, a standard EDID (2 Channel L-PCM) should be used and the sources set up to only pass the type of audio that the downstream destination devices can handle.
NOTE: The AMX EDID Library is available at www.amx.com (search for EDID Library).
Checking for Support
One way to check if a destination supports a particular type of audio format is to capture the EDID using the System Configuration interface’s Save EDID function and then paste the data from the .edid file into an EDID reader program (e.g., www.edidreader.com).
Possible Solutions
If you encounter audio problems, we recommend trying the following solution:
destination device and to write it to the HDMI input on the Enova DGX Switcher.
Audio not present or intermittent with good video
Likely Cause:
A signal containing both video and audio must have space for both signal portions. The audio signal portion lies in the blanked portion of the video signal. High Bit Rate Audio (HBRA) requires a larger than normal space in the blanked area of the signal. Video formats with reduced blanking normally provide enough space for audio signals. In a signal that combines a video format with reduced blanking and HBRA, the HBRA signal is truncated and can present as either no audio or as problematic audio (static, clicking, absent, etc.). While Enova DGX hardware supports both HBRA and reduced blanking video formats, these formats do not necessarily work with one another.
Possible Solution:
Change either the audio format to non-HBRA or change the video format to a format that does not use reduced blanking.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 80
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to the following Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Input and Output Boards:
FG1058-570 Input board
FG1058-580 Output board
FIG. 43
DXLink Twisted Pair Boards, shown in an Enova DGX 3200
IMPORTANT: DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers or other AMX DXLink™ signal management solutions.
NOTE: Compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair equipment and DXLink Twisted Pair 4K equipment (see the “DXLink
Compatibility” Appendix in the “DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com).
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 800 enclosures can hold up to four DXLink Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of two input and two output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 8x8, as well as three subsets (i.e., 4x4, 4x8, or 8x4).
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures can hold up to eight DXLink Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of four input and four output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 16x16, as well as subsets (e.g., 16x8 or 4x12).
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures can hold up to sixteen DXLink Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of eight input and eight output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 32x32, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x24 or 32x8).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures can hold up to thirty-two DXLink Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of sixteen input and sixteen output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 64x64, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x48 or 52x8).
Signal Routing
DXLink Twisted Pair Input Boards route signals to DXLink Output Boards or to any other type of Enova DGX Output Boards. DXLink
Twisted Pair Output Boards can also accept signals from all of the other types of Enova DGX Boards. When routing signals between different board types, the Enova DGX Switcher automatically converts the signal format to match the output board.
Signals that can be sent over DXLink Boards include: HDMI, DVI-D, analog video, analog audio, digital audio, and embedded audio.
IMPORTANT: Because the DXLink, DVI, and HDMI Boards in the Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image, you will not need to make adjustments or custom scaler settings unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements (if
adjustments are necessary, use the System Configuration interface; see page 149).
NOTE: Enova DGX DXLink Boards do not support CEC.
HDCP Compliance
If a connected downstream sink is not HDCP compliant, then the DXLink output will not send the signal to it. This does not affect other outputs the source may be routed to. This allows compliant displays to show content from source devices even if the source devices are switched to non-compliant displays. Non-compliant displays can easily be identified because they display a dark red image (via an HDMI/DVI Output) or an orange image (via a DXLink RX) to indicate that the authentication process failed.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 81
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
InstaGate Pro
®
Technology
DXLink Boards meet HDCP standards and support InstaGate Pro Technology. For information on HDCP functionality for
DXLink boards, see “HDCP Support on Enova DGX Switchers” on page 69.
DXLink Boards provide EDID emulation support with plug-and-play information provided by the Enova DGX Switcher.
DXLink input and output connectors incorporate HDMI Technology, are HDCP 1.4 compatible, and feature InstaGate Pro
Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content and support computer video up to 1920x1200 and HDTV up to 1080p. The DXLink connectors also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM
(Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, etc.).
* InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates HDCP latency and interruptions on all displays in a system. (These conditions are typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices.) Key limitations on source devices are also eliminated by allowing them to see only a single sink key from the DXLink Input Board’s input connection. With InstaGate Pro Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated.
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards – Specifications
Applies to input board FG1058-570 (DGX-I-DXL) and output board FG1058-580 (DGX-O-DXL).
NOTE: Compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair equipment and DXLink Twisted Pair 4K equipment (see the “DXLink
Compatibility” Appendix in the “DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com).
Compatible AMX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receiver:
DXLink Multi-Format TX: FG1010-310 (DX-TX)
DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate TX: FG1010-320-BL (DX-TX-WP-BL)*
DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate TX: FG1010-320-WH (DX-TX-WP-WH)*
DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate TX (US): FG1010-325-BL (DX-TX-DWP-BL)*
DXLink Multi-Format Decor Style Wallplate TX (US): FG1010-325-WH (DX-TX-DWP-WH)*
DXLink HDMI RX: FG1010-500 (DX-RX)**
* These Transmitters are available with a black front (BL) or a white front (WH).
** The Receiver features SmartScale Technology and is also compatible with the DXLink output connections on Enova DVX
Solutions.
Compatible AMX Solecis Digital Switchers (1 Output per Switcher):
Solecis 4x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
Solecis 5x1 Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
Solecis 8x1 HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output
IMPORTANT: DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building. “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 82
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Board Specifications
Parameter
Compatible AMX DXLink™
Products
Multi-Format TX, Multi-Format Wallplate TX, Decor Wallplate TX, and DXLink RX; and other AMX
DXLink signal management products
Value
Compatible Formats
Signal Type Support
HDMI video, audio, Ethernet, USB (HID), power, and control
DXLink Twisted Pair
Transport Layer Throughput (max.) 10.2 Gbps
Video Data Rate (max.)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support*
Deep Color Support
Color Space Support
4.95 Gbps / 6.75 Gbps^
165 MHz / 225 MHz^
480p up to 1920x1200,60Hz
480i, 576i, 1080i
3D Format Support
Audio Format Support
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Local Audio Support
EDID Support
24-bit, 30-bit^, 36-bit^
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr^^ 4:4:4 and 4:2:2
Yes (HDMI primary formats), when used with DXLink Output Boards and the RX Scaler is in Bypass mode
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital*, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS*, 2 CH L-PCM, 6 CH L-PCM, 8 CH L-PCM
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz
HDCP Support
CEC Support
ICSP, TCP/IP, USB, IR, and
Control Management
USB (HID) Transport
Yes, insertion and/or extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel
• EDID provided by Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher to the digital (HDMI) input on the DXLink
Multi-Format TX
• EDID is user re-programmable
Yes, full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro® Technology
• Key support up to 16 destinations per output, independent of source device
None
Control Distribution is managed by the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher on-board NetLinx NX
Master and Ethernet Switch
DXLink Twisted Pair Power
Input Board Propagation Delay
Output Board Propagation Delay
Audio Switching Board Support
Use the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers
(twisted pair and/or fiber), connect a DXLink Transmitter to a PC and a DXLink Receiver to a keyboard and mouse, the system then emulates commands from the receiver back to the PC.^^^
DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers can have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to a DXLink Input or Output Board on the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher
5 s
5 s
Connectors
Twisted Pair Cable Type
Twisted Pair Cable Length
Important Notice
Yes, Supports break-away audio switching of 2 CH L-PCM for all channels and downmix Dolby
True-HD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD or DTS for one input channel
4 RJ-45 ports
Shielded Cat6, Cat6A, Cat7**
Up to 328 ft. (100 m)**
DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building.
A “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
^ Only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink RX scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p 60 Hz or less.
^^ Input signal support for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4.
^^^ A list is available of HID devices which have been tested and found to be working well with the latest firmware (see “DXLink -
HID supported Devices” on the DXLink Receiver’s product page at www.amx.com).
* Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels.
** For more details and helpful cabling information, reference the white paper titled “Cabling for Success with DXLink” available at www.amx.com or contact your AMX representative.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 83
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
Standard and established timings are given in the tables following along with detailed timing blocks.
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs. In the System Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section, Preferred EDID menu) and VICs are differentiated by the presence of a “p” or “I” in the format.
IMPORTANT: The EDID can be configured to support additional resolutions through the local DDC using the EDID options in the
System Configuration interface (see page 161).
Standard Timings (Default Shipping EDID*)
Resolution
1920x1080**
1920x1200
1680x1050
1600x1200
1600x900
1400x1050
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x900
1280x800
1280x720
Refresh Rate Max.
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
* The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features, based on installation requirements.
** This is the preferred timing identified in the EDID.
Established Timings
Resolution
1280x1024
1152x870
Refresh Rate Max.
75 Hz
75 Hz
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
TIP: If you are experiencing audio problems, it may be because you are trying to pass Dolby or DTS or high PCM frequency rates and the destination device does not support them. If you are experiencing video problems, it may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support. In either of these cases, configuring the EDID may help resolve the
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 84
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
VIC #
VIC = 1
VIC = 2
Resolution
640x480p
720x480p
VIC = 31
VIC = 32
VIC = 33
VIC = 34
VIC = 39
VIC = 41
VIC = 42
VIC = 43
VIC = 44
VIC = 45
VIC = 47
VIC = 48
VIC = 49
VIC = 17
VIC = 18
VIC = 19
VIC = 20
VIC = 21
VIC = 22
VIC = 29
VIC = 30
VIC = 3
VIC = 4
VIC = 5
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 14
VIC = 15
VIC = 16
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
1440x480p
1440x480p
Native 1920x1080p
720x576p
720x576p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1440x576p
1440x576p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x576p
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1280x720p
720x480p
720x480p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 4:3
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels Sampling Frequency
Basic Audio: 2 channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
IMPORTANT: For information on troubleshooting audio, including a table on “Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards,” see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 85
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
System Setup with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers
DXLink Twisted Pair Input and Output Boards must be used in conjunction with AMX DXLink Transmitters and Receivers or other
AMX DXLink signal management solutions. This combination creates an end-to-end extender solution for transmission of HDMI (or
DVI via adapter cable) over twisted pair cable. In addition to transport of HDMI, the DXLink Transmitters and Receivers provide
Native NetLinx control functionality (Ethernet connectivity, IR control*, and serial data transfer*).
The DXLink Multi-Format TX, DXLink Multi-Format Wallplate TX, and DXLink Decor Wallplate TX also have an input for analog video
(composite, Y/c, Y/Pb/Pr, RGB, RGBS, or RGBHV).
Compatible DXLink Transmitters and Receivers are listed on page 82.
System setup options are listed in the table below.
For TX and RX installation details, see the Transmitter and Receiver’s Quick Start Guide or Hardware Reference Manual.
* DXLink wallplate models do not support IR control or serial data transfer.
When the Transmitters and Receivers are installed in conjunction with the DXLink Boards, image adjustment and EDID scaling is automatically applied. For almost every installation, the automatic features on the Transmitters and Receivers result in a quality image on the monitor.
the Transmitters and Receivers or their specifications, refer to the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/
Receiver at www.amx.com.
The distance from a DXLink Transmitter to a DXLink Input Board can be up to 328 feet (100 m) and another 328 feet (100 m) from the DXLink Output Board to the DXLink Receiver.
IMPORTANT: DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink Input and Output Boards shall only be run within a common building.
“Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
NOTE: Along with the video signal, the DXLink Boards support embedded digital audio and analog stereo audio from the DXLink
Transmitters and Receiver.
Options for DXLink System Setup
The following table contains several options in an Enova DGX Switcher for using DXLink Input and/or Output Boards in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers.
NOTE: DXLink Transmitters and Receivers can be also be used together as a standalone solution without a switcher (wallplate models connected directly to a DXLink HDMI RX must use a DXLink power injector); see the “Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink
Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver.”
System Setup Options – Enova DGX Boards with DXLink Modules/Wallplates
DXLink Module/Wallplate
Multi-Format TX Module
Enova DGX Input Board
DXLink
Enova DGX Output Board
DXLink
Multi-Format TX Module
Multi-Format Wallplate TX
Multi-Format Wallplate TX
Decor Wallplate TX
Decor Wallplate TX
Not Applicable
DXLink
DXLink
DXLink
DXLink
DXLink
Any input board*
Any output board*
DXLink
Any output board*
DXLink
DXLink
Any output board*
DXLink Module
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
Not applicable
HDMI RX Module
NOTE: Solecis Digital Switchers (SDX-410-DX, SDX-510M-DX, and SDX-810-DX) have a DXLink Twisted Pair output port that optionally provides source point switching and distance transmission to an Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board for hub-style or campus-wide distribution.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a Solecis Digital Switcher to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board in an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher, both the Solecis unit and all DXLink Twisted Pair boards must be upgraded with the latest available firmware versions.
Solecis units must be upgraded before connecting a unit to an upgraded input board.
DXLink Transmitter/Receiver Grounding
When using DXLink Power from an Enova DGX Switcher, we recommend wiring a technical ground for the ungrounded sources/ destinations with respect to the DXLink Transmitters/Receivers and switcher. For complete grounding information, see the
Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver.
IMPORTANT: If one DXLink Transmitter or Receiver is grounded, any remaining ungrounded units that are connected to the same board on the Enova DGX Switcher must also be grounded.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 86
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Example of Typical Setup with DXLink Transmitter and Receiver
A typical system setup for a source and a destination is illustrated below and shows an Enova DGX 1600 with DXLink Boards used in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers for transport of HDMI signals.
This type of setup also supports DVI-D signals with the use of a cable adapter and analog video through a Multi-Format TX,
Wallplate TX, or Decor Wallplate TX.
The Transmitter receives an HDMI signal and an audio signal from a source device. The audio can be either digital audio embedded with the HDMI signal, digital audio over S/PDIF, or analog stereo audio. Both the video and embedded audio are transmitted over twisted pair cable to the RJ-45 connector on the DXLink Input Board. The signal is routed through the desired DXLink Output connector to the DXLink Receiver, which in turn sends the HDMI signal with embedded audio on to a destination device. Audio
(whether embedded or not) received on the Transmitter can be output on the stereo audio port.
DXLink Twisted Pair
Output Board
AC
DC
F L T
DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board
DXLink Transmitter
Source Device
DXLink HDMI Receiver
AC
DC
F L T
Destination Device
FIG. 44
DXLink Boards used in conjunction with DXLink Transmitter and Receiver
TIP: For systems with special requirements – Before installing in the final location, place the equipment close together, so a PC for control and the destination monitor can be seen simultaneously if adjustments are necessary. Adjustments can be made using the
System Configuration interface
CAUTION: Be careful not to create a network (Ethernet) loop. To avoid doing so, see page 90.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 87
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Functions of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers
The diagram in FIG. 45 shows the functions of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers and the example descriptions contain the device
HDCP key count when used in conjunction with DXLink Boards in an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher.
Example A
Enova DGX
Source
TX acts like a sink
DXLink In DXLink Out
RX acts like a sink
Destination
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
Twisted Pair cable Twisted Pair cable
Example B
Enova DGX
Source
TX acts like a sink
DXLink In HDMI Out
HDMI cable
Destination
HDMI cable
Twisted Pair cable
Example C
Enova DGX
Source
HDMI cable
Acts like sink
HDMI In DXLink Out
RX acts like a sink
Destination
HDMI cable
Twisted Pair cable
Example A: When a Receiver acts like a source, its key does not count. Source device sees 1 key (Transmitter).
Example B: When a Transmitter acts like a sink, the source device sees 1 key (Transmitter).
Example C: When a source device is connected directly to a switcher, the source sees 1 key (switcher input).
FIG. 45
Repeater and source functions of Transmitters and Receivers (A and B also apply to TX wallplate models)
Important Power Considerations for Enova DGX 3200 Endpoint Systems
NOTE: This section does not apply to the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 because the system is capable of providing power for the maximum number of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers required when the enclosure contains all DXLink Twisted Pair Input and
Output boards.
In an endpoint system, the Enova DGX Switcher has DXLink Transmitters and/or Receivers attached. The Transmitters and
Receivers can be powered either locally, remotely, or via the switcher (the last two ways are considered DXLink power since power is received via the DXLink line).
Local power – Local power on a DXLink Transmitter or Receiver always takes precedence over power via the DXLink line from the switcher. However, if a locally powered Module is connected to a switcher and the local power is lost
(i.e., unplugged or turned off), the Module will power down and then automatically power back up using power from the switcher via the DXLink connection (increasing the overall power draw on the switcher). When local power is restored, it automatically replaces the power over the DXLink line.
DXLink power – When DXLink Transmitters or Receivers are being powered by an Enova DGX DXLink board or DXLink power injector* (using power via the DXLink line), to maintain the switcher’s power redundancy, we recommend that you:
Determine the power budget based on the input/output boards used and the quantity of powered endpoints (DXLink
Modules and Wallplates); see the following page.
Do not use the local DC power jack on the Module (even if the local power adapter is off).
* AMX supports the use of DXLink power injector PDXL-2 (FG1090-170) and PS-POE-AT-TC (FG423-84); other power injectors may potentially damage the DXLink equipment.
IMPORTANT: If local power is used for the DXLink Modules, it must come from the provided desktop power supplies, which must not be altered in any way.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 88
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Power Budget Planning for Enova DGX 3200 with DXLink Boards
Before installing an Enova DGX 3200 Switcher and connecting any required DXLink Transmitters and Receivers, the power draw for the system should be calculated in order to maintain the power redundancy of the power supplies in the enclosure. (Each Enova
DGX 3200 enclosure ships with two mutually-redundant power supplies.)
IMPORTANT: If you do not want to draw power from the Enova DGX 3200 enclosure’s power supplies, you must power the DXLink
Transmitter and Receiver Modules with local power (must use the provided desktop power supply) or remote power (must be a DXLink power injector). Local or remote power always overrides power from the switcher. If local or remote power is turned off, the DXLink
Transmitters and Receivers do not power down but immediately start drawing power from the switcher.
Power Budget Calculation
Calculating the power budget helps determine how many DXLink Transmitters and Receivers can be powered via the Enova DGX
3200 Switcher while maintaining power redundancy if one of the power supplies should fail. The Enova DGX Configuration Tool is used to determine the switcher’s power budget. Simply enter the types of boards and the number of DXLink Transmitters and
Receivers to be powered via the switcher, and the calculator shows the resulting power draw. The Enova DGX Configuration Tool is located at www.amx.com/enova. If more DXLink units are required than the switcher can support while maintaining redundancy, they must be powered using the provided desktop power supplies (which must not be altered in any way) or a DXLink power injector; otherwise, damage may occur.
Foregoing Power Supply Redundancy
Depending on particular Enova DGX 3200 Switcher input and output board configurations, operating over the redundant power supply level may be necessary on a permanent basis for some installations. While foregoing the benefits associated with a redundant power supply should be understood, operating without redundancy is in no way detrimental to the system, as long as both power supplies are operational. In this case, necessary power will be pulled evenly from both supplies. However, the loss of one power supply will result in the system being non-operational from a normal “non-redundant” system capability perspective.
In the Event of a Power Supply Failure
If an Enova DGX 3200 power supply fails, check the table below to determine which situation applies and any actions that may be required:
System
Enova DGX 3200
Condition
Within power budget
Over power budget
Result/Required Action
The system will continue to run; okay to leave it powered until the failed power supply is replaced.
The remaining power supply will turn off. If enough DXLink Transmitter or Receiver
Modules are removed (or otherwise powered) to bring the system’s power budget within its maximum limit, the system will be able to run until the failed power supply is replaced. (You can also remove some input and/or output boards.)
NOTE: The table above does not apply to the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 because the system is capable of providing power for the maximum number of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers required when the enclosure contains all DXLink Twisted Pair Input and
Output boards.
In both the situations in the table above, the power supply should be replaced as soon as possible to restore power redundancy to the system or to allow the system to become fully operational again. Unless the Enova DGX 3200 has exceeded its power budget, it should operate normally with a failed power supply. For power supply replacement information, contact technical support (see
Connecting Switching Systems with DXLink Connectors
Switching systems with DXLink Twisted Pair support (e.g., an Enova DGX Switcher and an Enova DVX-3150HD) can be connected via their DXLink (RJ-45) ports.
IMPORTANT: This section does not refer to the linking of enclosures from CPU to CPU, which is not supported in the Enova DGX
Switcher.
In an installation with a multiple-stage switching system, the following applies:
When two switching systems with DXLink support are connected via their DXLink ports, only video and audio will be passed through the DXLink connection.
When a DXLink input or output on one switching system determines that it is connected to a DXLink input or output on another switching system, the DXLink port will automatically disable all Ethernet, power, and control on that connection port so that the only things passed down the DXLink line are the video and audio signals.
When connecting switching systems via DXLink ports, AMX recommends no more than 3 switcher throughputs.*
Network loops must be avoided (see the following page).
* For example, the path through 3 switchers could be: source device Enova DVX-3250HD (out a DXLink/HDMI port) Enova
DGX 3200, DXLink input (out a DXLink port) Enova DGX 1600, DXLink input (out a DXLink port) DXLink Receiver display device as an HDMI signal.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 89
LAN
Local Area Network
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Avoiding Network (Ethernet) Loops
CAUTION: Be careful not to create a network (Ethernet) loop.
Only one connection to the Public LAN is permitted within a switching system with DXLink support.* Network loops must be avoided. A network loop is created when the enclosure and one or more DXLink Modules or Wallplates within the system are connected to the same Public LAN as the Enova DGX. The Enova DGX Switcher does not support STP (Spanning Tree Protocol).
* This applies to systems with DXLink Twisted Pair and/or DXLink Fiber Boards.
IMPORTANT: If DXLink Twisted Pair units are used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K units or DXLink Fiber units, all units’ guidelines must be followed.
Example
In the example in FIG. 46, a network loop was created when an Enova DGX 1600 was connected to a Public LAN and one of its
DXLink Transmitters was connected to the same LAN. The DXLink Transmitter needs to be disconnected from the LAN. The same problem would also occur if an enclosure and one (or more) of its DXLink Receivers were connected to a common Public LAN.
IMPORTANT: If you have questions or concerns about network setup, consult with your network administrator about avoiding network loops before connecting units.
Source device
Enova DGX 1600
Destination device
LAN connection
DXLink TX
FIG. 46
Avoid network loops
Attaching Cables
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 3200 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate (metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to right one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 6400 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the bottom input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the bottom input board on the right.
Outputs are in the lower part of the enclosure, start over at “1” on the left, and follow the same pattern.
IMPORTANT: If the system has DXLink input and output connectors in use, we strongly recommend that the LAN 100/1000 port use a connection speed of 1000 Mbps.
Important Twisted Pair Cabling Requirements and Recommendations
The following requirements and recommendations apply to cabling DXLink (RJ-45) connectors:
DXLink cable runs require shielded category cable (STP) of Cat6 (or better).
DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building.**
DXLink delivers 10.2 Gb/s throughput over shielded category cable. Based on this bandwidth requirement, we recommend following industry standard practices designed for 10 Gigabit Ethernet when designing and installing the cable infrastructure.
The cables should be no longer than necessary to reach the end-points. We recommend terminating the cable to the actual distance required rather than leaving any excess cable in a service loop.
For complete cable specifications, see the board’s specifications.
** “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
For more details and helpful cabling information, reference the white paper titled “Cabling for Success with DXLink” available at www.amx.com or contact your AMX representative.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 90
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Twisted Pair Cable Pinouts
Use either the T568A or T568B pinout specification for termination of the twisted pair cable used between the Transmitter or
Receiver and the enclosure.
FIG. 47
Twisted pair cable pinouts for T568A and T568B
To connect sources and destinations to DXLink inputs and outputs via TX/RX:
1.
Attach an HDMI cable from the source device to the HDMI connector on the DXLink Transmitter.
2.
Attach a twisted pair cable to the DXLink Transmitter’s Output (RJ-45) connector.
3.
Attach the other end of the twisted pair cable to the input connector on the DXLink Input Board.
FIG. 48
Fasten cables onto input and output connectors
4.
Attach a second twisted pair cable to the output connector on the DXLink Output Board.
5.
Attach the other end of the second twisted pair cable to the Input (RJ-45) connector on the DXLink Receiver.
6.
Attach a second HDMI cable to the HDMI Output connector on the Receiver.
7.
Attach the other end of the second HDMI cable to the destination device.
8.
Repeat steps above for additional source and destination devices.
9.
If the enclosure is not being used as the source of power, attach the provided desktop power supplies to the transmitters and receivers.*
10. Apply power to the source and destination devices.
* If the enclosure already has power applied, as soon as transmitters and receivers are connected they will have power.
NOTE:
NOTE: DXLink Twisted Pair 4K cable runs include support for up to two (2) patch cables of up to 5 meters in length each, provided that the total end-to-end cable length does not exceed 80 meters and all cables and couplers/patch panels used in the run meet the minimum cable requirements (e.g., from DX-TX-DWP-4K to 5m patch cable, 70m cable run, 5m patch cable to DXLink 4K Input Board using shielded Cat6A or better for each cable length).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 91
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
DXLink Connector LEDs
The following information applies to the LEDs on the DXLink connectors on the DXLink Input and Output Boards.
Green LED
Yellow LED
Yellow LED Green LED
Yellow:
On – Authenticated HDCP
(handshaking has occurred successfully)
Flashing – Video active; no HDCP
Off – No video
Green:
On – Speed status is 100 Mbps
Off – Speed status is 10 Mbps
FIG. 49
DXLink connector LEDs (left Enova DGX 3200 Output Board orientation; right Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 orientation)
Configuring DXLink Endpoints for Communication with a Master
DXLink Transmitters and Receivers may be configured for communication in one of two ways: auto-setup or traditional NetLinx binding. The instructions in this section cover configuration through auto-setup. For instructions that cover configuring TXs and
RXs through traditional NetLinx binding, see the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver.
DXLink endpoints ship from the factory with a default mode which allows auto-setup to work without additional configuration. If the endpoint has not been altered from its default settings, it should not require any of the following instructions. For information of control signals passed through an Enova DGX with configured DXLink Transmitter and Receiver, be sure to review “Serial Data
Transfer and IR Flow Control” on page 94.
Best Practices for Configuration
Best practices for configuring endpoints includes using auto-setup. Auto-setup is designed to reduce the number of IP addresses consumed by a complete system. In a system that does not use auto-setup, each endpoint requires its own IP address whereas a system that uses auto-setup requires only one IP address (for the integrated Master) and each endpoint is configured for communication via a private LAN (ICS LAN) hosted by the integrated Master.
DIP Switch Toggles
The following table contains some of the most common scenarios for setting up DXLink Transmitters and Receivers with an Enova
DGX Switcher (the default for all four DIP switch toggles is OFF).
IMPORTANT: Find the scenario in the table below that you want to use and set the DIP switches accordingly.
The DIP switches are on the bottom of the DXLink Modules, on the rear of the DXLink Wallplate, and on the front of the DXLink Decor
Style Wallplate (hidden by front cover plate). A detailed description of functions for each toggle is provided in the Hardware
Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver at www.amx.com.
Common Scenarios DIP Switch Toggle Settings
Switcher Setup – TX/RX with Enova DGX 100 Series
AV with NetLinx control of TX/RX unit and serial/IR ports
AV with NetLinx control of TX/RX unit and serial/IR ports, plus
Ethernet passthrough to networked device*
1
OFF
ON**
2
OFF
OFF
3
ON
ON
4
OFF
OFF
* Connect the ICS LAN 10/100 port of the DXLink unit to the network device (e.g., laptop, IP controlled projector, AMX ICSLan EXB device).
** #1 Toggle settings do not apply to Wallplate TX & Decor Wallplate TX – leave #1 Toggle OFF.
TIP: Each toggle’s ON position is toward the connectors on the rear of the DXLink Modules or toward the top of the unit for the DXLink
Wallplate TXs and Decor Wallplate TXs.
Auto-setup
To configure TXs and RXs using traditional NetLinx binding (requires disabling auto-setup), see the Hardware Reference Manual –
DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver.
Need to Know for Auto-setup
Endpoints must be set to DHCP Mode (default)
Endpoints must use NDP Master connection mode (default)
Endpoints must not be currently bound (traditional NetLinx binding) to a Master
Endpoint DIP switch setting for Toggle #3 (network connectivity) is ignored while in auto-setup mode
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 92
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Disabling Auto-setup Mode
commands (see below).
IMPORTANT: The DGX_SHELL command to disable auto-setup mode does not persist over a power cycle. If your installation requires disabling auto-setup through endpoint power cycles, we suggest using the System Configuration interface for this setting.
To disable auto-setup using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program.
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to disable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Disable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
Disable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=2
Disable all boards in the system (including DXLink Fiber) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
3.
The endpoint detects the change and reboots with auto-setup disabled.
4.
Use traditional NetLinx binding to configure DXLink TXs/RXs.
Enabling Auto-setup Mode
Auto-setup is enabled by default. If disabled, auto-setup can be enabled for DXLink Twisted Pair endpoints by using the System
Configuration interface (see page 164) or DGX_SHELL commands (see below).
To enable auto-setup mode using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to enable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Enable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
Enable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,3,4
Enable all boards in the system (including DXLink Fiber) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
3.
The endpoint detects the change and reboots with auto-setup enabled.
Telnet Access to Endpoints in Auto-setup Mode
Endpoints in auto-setup mode are accessible through the ICS LAN port on the Switcher’s CPU. Control is established through a
Telnet session with appropriate Telnet commands for the DXLink Twisted Pair module or wallplate (see the Hardware Reference
Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver at www.amx.com).
CAUTION: The ICS LAN port acts as a DHCP server (private LAN) and the LAN 100/1000 port acts as a DHCP client (public LAN) with each port on a separate network. In order to avoid a Network Loop, do not connect any device on one network to any branch on the other network.
IMPORTANT: If auto-setup is being used, Telnet is the only way to access some of the network settings. Also note that some network settings will disable the auto-setup feature (reference the section “Need to Know for Auto-setup” on page 92).
To access DXLink endpoints via Telnet session:
1.
Connect a PC to the ICS LAN port on the left side of the Switcher’s CPU.
2.
Open NetLinx Studio.
3.
In the OnLine Tree, listen for the 198.18.0.1 device (internal Master IP) and establish a connection.
4.
Right-click the endpoint and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx Studio.
NOTE: For additional information on DXLink Modules and Wallplates, see the “Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair
Transmitters/Receiver.”
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 93
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Serial Data Transfer and IR Flow Control
The illustration in FIG. 50 shows the bidirectional serial data transfer and IR flow control when an Enova Digital Media Switcher is used with DXLink Modules connected to both input and output boards. The switcher has an integrated NetLinx NX Central Control
Processor which provides native AMX control at each remote location fed by a DXLink Transmitter or Receiver. Control is sent over twisted pair cable (via the DXLink ports).
DXLink TX
DXLink DXLink
DXLink RX
Enova DGX 1600 IR and/or
RS-232
HDMI
HDMI IR and/or
RS-232
FIG. 50
Serial data transfer and IR flow control
DXLink Twisted Pair / DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Compatibility
By default, DXLink 4K Input Boards provide a 4K EDID to all connected DXLink Transmitter devices. While DXLink Transmitters are supported by the DXLink 4K Input Board, the default EDID provided to the Transmitter may result in a source device (computer, media player, etc) presenting a video resolution out of the Transmitter's range. To ensure the source device presents a resolution the DXLink Transmitter can support, simply use the Enova DGX 100 Series System Configuration interface to select a non-4K EDID
(All, Wide, Full in non-4K range) to ensure a supported format is requested by the DXLink Transmitter.
Some older DXLink Twisted Pair Receivers are not compatible with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards. Receiver and DXLink
Twisted Pair 4K Output Board compatibility are established through:
In NetLinx Studio – If the Receiver is referenced as “DXLINK-HDMI-RX.c” (ends in “.c”), the Receiver is incompatible. Receivers with the suffix “.e” are fully compatible with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards.
On the physical endpoint – If the Receiver has a date code of less than 26D (e.g., 1010500AP18C0034 has a date code of 18C), the Receiver is incompatible. Receivers with a date code of 26D or greater (e.g., 1010500AP27E0034) are fully compatible with
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards.
NOTE: Compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair equipment and DXLink Twisted Pair 4K equipment (see the “DXLink
Compatibility” Appendix in the “DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com).
Troubleshooting Audio
Audio not present or intermittent with good video
Likely Cause:
A signal containing both video and audio must have space for both signal portions. The audio signal portion lies in the blanked portion of the video signal. High Bit Rate Audio (HBRA) requires a larger than normal space in the blanked area of the signal. Video formats with reduced blanking normally provide enough space for audio signals. In a signal that combines a video format with reduced blanking and HBRA, the HBRA signal is truncated and can present as either no audio or as problematic audio (static, clicking, absent, etc.). While Enova DGX hardware supports both HBRA and reduced blanking video formats, these formats do not necessarily work with one another.
Possible Solution:
Change either the audio format to non-HBRA or change the video format to a format that does not use reduced blanking.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 94
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to the following Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Input and Output Boards:
FG1061-570 Input board
FG1061-580 Output board
NOTE: Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards feature a “4K” label beside the “IN” or “OUT” label.
FIG. 51
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards, shown in an Enova DGX 3200 (left) and 4K Board labels (right)
NOTE: For full capability, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and
Receivers. Additional compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair 4K equipment and DXLink Twisted Pair equipment (see the “DXLink Compatibility” Appendix in the “DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com).
By default, DXLink 4K Input Boards provide a 4K EDID to all connected DXLink Transmitter devices. While DXLink Transmitters are supported by the DXLink 4K Input Board, the default EDID provided to the Transmitter may result in a source device (computer, media player, etc) presenting a video resolution out of the Transmitter's range. To ensure the source device presents a resolution the DXLink Transmitter can support, simply use the Enova DGX 100 Series System Configuration interface to select a non-4K EDID
(All, Wide, Full in non-4K range) to ensure a supported format is requested by the DXLink Transmitter. For information about compatibility between DXLink Twisted Pair 4K and endpoints, see the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware
Reference Manual at www.amx.com.
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 800 enclosures can hold up to four DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of two input and two output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of
8x8, as well as three subsets (i.e., 4x4, 4x8, or 8x4).
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures can hold up to eight DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of four input and four output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of
16x16, as well as subsets (e.g., 16x8 or 4x12).
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures can hold up to sixteen DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board.
Each enclosure holds a maximum of eight input and eight output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 32x32, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x24 or 32x8).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures can hold up to thirty-two DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards with four RJ-45 inputs or outputs per board.
Each enclosure holds a maximum of sixteen input and sixteen output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 64x64, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x48 or 52x8).
Signal Routing
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input Boards route signals to DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards or to any other type of Enova DGX
Output Boards. DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards can also accept signals from all of the other types of Enova DGX Boards.
When routing signals between different board types, the Enova DGX Switcher automatically converts the signal format to match the output board.
Signals that can be sent over DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards include: HDMI, DVI-D, analog video, analog audio, digital audio, and
Insert/Extract Boards (see page 140).
IMPORTANT: Because the DXLink, DVI, and HDMI Boards in the Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image, you will not need to make adjustments or custom scaler settings unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements (if
adjustments are necessary, use the System Configuration interface; see page 149).
NOTE: Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards do not support CEC.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 95
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
HDCP Compliance
If a connected downstream sink is not HDCP compliant, then the Output Board will not send the signal to it. This does not affect other outputs the source may be routed to. This allows compliant displays to show content from source devices even if the source devices are switched to non-compliant displays. Non-compliant displays can easily be identified because they display a dark red image (via an HDMI/DVI Output) or an orange image (via a DXLink RX) to indicate that the authentication process failed.
InstaGate Pro
®
Technology
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards meet HDCP standards and support InstaGate Pro Technology. For information on HDCP
functionality for DXLink boards, see “HDCP Support on Enova DGX Switchers” on page 69.
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards provide EDID emulation support with plug-and-play information provided by the Enova DGX
Switcher.
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K input and output connectors incorporate HDMI Technology, are HDCP 1.4 compatible, and feature
InstaGate Pro Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content. The DXLink Twisted Pair 4K connectors also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM (Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, etc.).
* InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates HDCP latency and interruptions on all displays in a system. (These conditions are typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices.) Key limitations on source devices are also eliminated by allowing them to see only a single sink key from the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input Board’s input connection. With InstaGate Pro
Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated.
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards – Specifications
Applies to input board FG1061-570 (DGX-I-DXL-4K) and output board FG1061-580 (DGX-O-DXL-4K). This section applies to products with full compatibility (including a complete 4K signal path). For compatibility between DXLink Twisted Pair 4K products and DXLink Twisted Pair products, see the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual.
Compatible AMX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers:
DXLink 4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate TX: FG1010-330-BL and FG1010-330-WH (DX-TX-DWP-4K)
DXLink 4K HDMI RX: FG1010-510 (DX-RX-4K)
Compatible AMX Solecis 4K Digital Switchers (1 Output per Switcher):
Solecis 4x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output: FG1010-314 (SDX-414-DX)
Solecis 5x1 4K Multi-Format Digital Switcher with DXLink Output: FG1010-355 (SDX-514M-DX)
Solecis 8x1 4K HDMI Digital Switcher with DXLink Output: FG1010-318 (SDX-814-DX)
IMPORTANT: DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building. “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Board Specifications
Parameter
Compatible AMX DXLink™
Twisted Pair 4K Products
Value
4K HDMI Decor Style Wallplate TX, 4K HDMI RX, other AMX DXLink signal management products
NOTE: For additional compatibility with DXLink Twisted Pair products, see the “DXLink Twisted
Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com.
Compatible Formats
Signal Type Support
HDMI Video, Audio, Ethernet, USB (HID), Power, and Control
DXLink Twisted Pair
Transport Layer Throughput (max.) 10.2 Gbps
Video Data Rate (max.) 8.91 Gbps (max)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support
Deep Color Support
Color Space Support
297 MHz
480p up to 4096x2160p,60 Hz*
* Y/Cb/Cr 4:2:0 and 4K RX Scaler in Bypass
NOTE: See full list of supported formats on page 98.
480i, 576i, 1080i
If input is interlaced, all scaled outputs will deinterlace video to a progressive resolution format. If in scaler Bypass mode, interlaced input will pass through unaltered.
Up to 1080p: 24-bit, 30-bit, 36-bit
30-bit, 36-bit only supported when the HDMI Output Board Scaler or DXLink RX Scaler is in Bypass mode and format is 1080p60 or less.
• RGB 4:4:4
• YCbCr 4:4:4, 4:2:2, and 4:2:0
Input signal for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4.
4:2:0 only supported at 2160p 50/60Hz with 4K RX Scaler in Bypass.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 96
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Board Specifications
3D Format Support
4K Resolution Support
Audio Format Support
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Local Audio Support
Audio Switching Board Support
EDID Support
HDCP Support
CEC Support
ICSP, TCP/IP, USB, IR, Serial, and
Control Management
USB (HID) Transport
Yes (Scaler on corresponding Output Board or RX must be set to Bypass mode)
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
Yes
• 3840x2160p@24/25/30 Hz
• 4096x2160p@24/25/30 Hz
• 3840x2160p@60 Hz, 4:2:0*
• 4096x2160p@60 Hz, 4:2:0*
* Supported by DX-RX-4K when in Bypass Scaling mode.
NOTE: See full list of supported formats on page 98.
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
(Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels)
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz
Yes, insertion and/or extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel
Yes
• Supports break-away audio switching of 2 CH L-PCM for all channels
• Supports downmix from one input channel of Dolby True-HD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD, DTS, or
2 to 8 channel L-PCM
• EDID provided by Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher to the digital (HDMI) input on the DXLink
Transmitter
• EDID is user re-programmable
Yes, full matrix HDCP 1.4 support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro® Technology
• Key support up to 16 destinations per output, independent of source device
None
Control Distribution is managed by the Enova DGX on-board NetLinx NX Master and Ethernet
Switch
DXLink Twisted Pair Power
Input Board Propagation Delay
Output Board Propagation Delay
Connectors
Twisted Pair Cable Type
Twisted Pair Cable Length
HDMI Cable Requirement
Important Notice
Use the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers
(twisted pair and/or fiber), connect a DXLink Transmitter with HID hardware support to a PC and a
DXLink Receiver to a keyboard and mouse, the system then emulates commands from the receiver back to the PC.
A list is available of HID devices which have been tested and found to work well with the latest firmware (see “DXLink - HID Supported Devices” on the RX’s product page at www.amx.com).
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers can have power supplied over twisted pair cable when connected to a DXLink Input or Output Board on the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher
5 s
5 s
4 RJ-45 ports
• Shielded Cat6A and Cat7
For more details and helpful cabling information, reference the white paper titled “Cabling for
Success with DXLink” available at www.amx.com or contact your AMX representative.
Up to 262 ft. (80 m) for full 4K signal support.
Up to 328 ft. (100 m) for 1080p and below.
HDMI High-Speed Cable Category 2 Required
DXLink twisted pair cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building.
A “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 97
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
Standard and established timings are given in the tables following along with detailed timing blocks.
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs. In the System Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section, Preferred EDID menu) and VICs are differentiated by the presence of a “p” or “I” in the format.
IMPORTANT: The EDID can be configured to support additional resolutions through the local DDC using the EDID options in the
System Configuration interface (see page 161).
DTD (Detailed Timing Descriptor)
Resolution
3840x2160p*
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1200
1920x1200
Refresh Rate Max.
30 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
Video Standard
CTA (VIC 95)
CTA (VIC 16)
CTA (VIC 31)
CVR
CVR
* This is the preferred timing identified in the EDID.
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Standard Timings
Resolution
1920x1200
1680x1050
1600x1200
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x800
1280x720
Refresh Rate Max.
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
Established Timings
Resolution
1280x1024
1152x870
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
Refresh Rate Max.
75 Hz
75 Hz
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 Hz, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
TIP: If you are experiencing audio problems, it may be because you are trying to pass Dolby or DTS or high PCM frequency rates and the destination device does not support them. If you are experiencing video problems, it may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support. In either of these cases, configuring the EDID may help resolve the
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 98
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
023
024
025
026
019
020
021
022
027
028
029
030
015
016
017
018
011
012
013
014
007
008
009
010
003
004
005
006
CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
NOTE: The Short Video Descriptor (SVD) column describes the order of video preference.
SVD #
001
002
VIC #
VIC = 95
VIC = 94
Resolution
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
VIC = 19
VIC = 2
VIC = 17
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 18
VIC = 21
VIC = 22
VIC = 39
VIC = 90
VIC = 89
VIC = 1
VIC = 32
VIC = 34
VIC = 31
VIC = 33
VIC = 5
VIC = 20
VIC = 4
VIC = 3
VIC = 93
VIC = 100
VIC = 98
VIC = 99
VIC = 105
VIC = 103
VIC = 104
VIC = 16
3840x2160p
4096x2160p
4096x2160p
4096x2160p
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
3840x2160p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x480p
1280x720p
720x480p
720x576p
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1920x1080i
2560x1080p
2560x1080p
640x480p
23.98/24 Hz 16:9
30 Hz 256:135
24 Hz 256:135
25 Hz 256:135
30 Hz 64:27
24 Hz 64:27
25 Hz 64:27
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
60 Hz 64:27
50 Hz 64:27
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
Notes
HDMI VIC = 1
HDMI VIC = 2
HDMI VIC = 3
HDMI VIC = 4
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels Sampling Frequency
Basic Audio: 2 channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
IMPORTANT: For information on troubleshooting audio, including a table on “Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards,” see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 99
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
System Setup with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and Output Boards must be used in conjunction with AMX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and
Receivers or other AMX DXLink 4K signal management solutions. This combination creates an end-to-end extender solution for transmission of HDMI (or DVI via adapter cable) over twisted pair cable.
Compatible DXLink Transmitters and Receivers are listed on page 96.
System setup options are listed in the table below.
For TX and RX installation details, see the Transmitter and Receiver’s Quick Start Guide or Hardware Reference Manual.
When compatible Transmitters and Receivers are installed in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards, image adjustment and EDID scaling is automatically applied. For almost every installation, the automatic features on Transmitters and Receivers result in a quality image on the monitor.
the Transmitters and Receivers or their specifications, refer to the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters
and Receivers at www.amx.com.
The distance from a Transmitter to a Input Board can be up to 262 feet (80 m) and another 262 feet (80 m) from the Output Board to the Receiver.
IMPORTANT: Twisted pair cable runs for Input and Output Boards shall only be run within a common building. “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
NOTE: Along with the video signal, the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards support embedded digital audio from the Transmitters.
Options for DXLink System Setup
The following table contains several options in an Enova DGX Switcher for using DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and/or Output
Boards in conjunction with DXLink Twisted pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers.
NOTE: Transmitters and Receivers can be also be used together as a standalone solution without a switcher (Wallplate Transmitters
connected directly to Receivers must use DXLink power injectors); see the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
Transmitters and Receivers.
System Setup Options – Enova DGX Boards with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Modules/Wallplates
DXLink Module/Wallplate
4K HDMI Decor Wallplate TX
Enova DGX Input Board
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
Enova DGX Output Board
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
DXLink Module
4K HDMI RX Module
4K HDMI Decor Wallplate TX
Not applicable*
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
Any input board*
Any output board*
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K
Not applicable*
4K HDMI RX Module
* If the board is a DXLink Fiber Board or DXLink Twisted Pair Board, it will need the appropriate Transmitter or Receiver; see the
NOTE: Solecis 4K Digital Switchers (SDX-414-DX, SDX-514M-DX, and SDX-814-DX) have a DXLink Twisted Pair 4K output port that optionally provides source point switching and distance transmission to an Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input Board for hub-style or campus-wide distribution.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 100
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Example of Typical Setup with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitter and Receiver
A typical system setup for a source and a destination is illustrated below and shows an Enova DGX 1600 with DXLink Twisted Pair
4K Input and Output Boards used in conjunction with compatible Transmitters and Receivers for transport of HDMI signals.
This type of setup also supports DVI-D signals with the use of a cable adapter.
The Transmitter receives an HDMI signal and an embedded digital audio signal from a source device. Both the video and embedded audio are transmitted over twisted pair cable to the RJ-45 connector on the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input Board. The signal is routed through the desired DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output connector to the Receiver, which in turn sends the HDMI signal with embedded audio on to a destination device. Audio received on the Transmitter can be output on the Receiver’s stereo audio port.
DXLink Twisted Pair
Input Board
DXLink Twisted Pair
Output Board
AC
DC
F LT
4K HDMI Decor
Wallplate Transmitter
Source Device
4K HDMI Receiver Module
AC
DC
F LT
Destination Device
FIG. 52
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards used in conjunction with Transmitter and Receiver
TIP: For systems with special requirements – Before installing in the final location, place the equipment close together, so a PC for control and the destination monitor can be seen simultaneously if adjustments are necessary. Adjustments can be made using the
System Configuration interface
Functions of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers
The diagram in FIG. 53 shows the functions of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers and the example descriptions contain the device
HDCP key count when used in conjunction with DXLink Boards in an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher.
Example A
Enova DGX
Source
TX acts like a sink
HDMI cable
DXLink In DXLink Out
RX acts like a sink
HDMI cable
Destination
Twisted Pair cable Twisted Pair cable
Example B
Source
Enova DGX
TX acts like a sink
HDMI cable
Twisted Pair cable
DXLink In HDMI Out
HDMI cable
Destination
Example C
Enova DGX
Source
Acts like sink
HDMI In DXLink Out
RX acts like a sink
HDMI cable
Destination
HDMI cable
Twisted Pair cable
Example A: When a Receiver acts like a source, its key does not count. Source device sees 1 key (Transmitter).
Example B: When a Transmitter acts like a sink, the source device sees 1 key (Transmitter).
Example C: When a source device is connected directly to a switcher, the source sees 1 key (switcher input).
FIG. 53
Repeater and source functions of Enova DGX with Transmitters and Receivers
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 101
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Important Power Considerations for Enova DGX 3200 Endpoint Systems
NOTE: This section does not apply to the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 because the system is capable of providing power for the maximum number of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers required when the enclosure contains all DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and
Output boards.
In an endpoint system, the Enova DGX Switcher has DXLink Transmitters and/or Receivers attached. The Transmitters and
Receivers can be powered either locally, remotely, or via the switcher (the last two ways are considered DXLink power since power is received via the DXLink line).
Local power – Local power on a DXLink Transmitter or Receiver always takes precedence over power via the DXLink line from the switcher. However, if a locally powered Module is connected to a switcher and the local power is lost
(i.e., unplugged or turned off), the Module will power down and then automatically power back up using power from the switcher via the DXLink connection (increasing the overall power draw on the switcher). When local power is restored, it automatically replaces the power over the DXLink line.
DXLink power – When DXLink Transmitters or Receivers are being powered by an Enova DGX DXLink board or DXLink power injector* (using power via the DXLink line), to maintain the switcher’s power redundancy, we recommend that you:
Determine the power budget based on the input/output boards used and the quantity of powered endpoints (DXLink
Modules and Wallplates); see the following page.
Do not use the local DC power jack on the Module (even if the local power adapter is off).
* AMX supports the use of DXLink power injector PDXL-2 (FG1090-170) and PS-POE-AT-TC (FG423-84); other power injectors may potentially damage the DXLink equipment.
IMPORTANT: If local power is used for the DXLink Modules, it must come from the provided desktop power supplies, which must not be altered in any way.
Power Budget Planning for Enova DGX 3200 with DXLink Boards
Before installing an Enova DGX 3200 Switcher and connecting any required DXLink Transmitters and Receivers, the power draw for the system should be calculated in order to maintain the power redundancy of the power supplies in the enclosure. (Each Enova
DGX 3200 enclosure ships with two mutually-redundant power supplies.)
IMPORTANT: If you do not want to draw power from the Enova DGX 3200 enclosure’s power supplies, you must power the DXLink
Receiver Modules with local power (must use the provided desktop power supply) or remote power (must be a DXLink power injector).
Local or remote power always overrides power from the switcher. If local or remote power is turned off, DXLink Receiver Modules do not power down but immediately start drawing power from the switcher.
Power Budget Calculation
Calculating the power budget helps determine how many DXLink Transmitters and Receivers can be powered via the Enova DGX
3200 Switcher while maintaining power redundancy if one of the power supplies should fail. The Enova DGX Configuration Tool is used to determine the switcher’s power budget. Simply enter the types of boards and the number of DXLink Transmitters and
Receivers to be powered via the switcher, and the calculator shows the resulting power draw. The Enova DGX Configuration Tool is located at www.amx.com/enova. If more DXLink units are required than the switcher can support while maintaining redundancy, they must be powered using the provided desktop power supplies (which must not be altered in any way) or a DXLink power injector; otherwise, damage may occur.
Foregoing Power Supply Redundancy
Depending on particular Enova DGX 3200 Switcher input and output board configurations, operating over the redundant power supply level may be necessary on a permanent basis for some installations. While foregoing the benefits associated with a redundant power supply should be understood, operating without redundancy is in no way detrimental to the system, as long as both power supplies are operational. In this case, necessary power will be pulled evenly from both supplies. However, the loss of one power supply will result in the system being non-operational from a normal “non-redundant” system capability perspective.
In the Event of a Power Supply Failure
If an Enova DGX 3200 power supply fails, check the table below to determine which situation applies and any actions that may be required:
System
Enova DGX 3200
Condition Result/Required Action
Within power budget The system continues to run; okay to leave it powered until the failed power supply is replaced.
Over power budget The remaining power supply will turn off. If enough DXLink Transmitter or Receiver Modules are removed (or otherwise powered) to bring the system’s power budget within its maximum limit, the system will be able to run until the failed power supply is replaced. (You can also remove some input and/or output boards.)
NOTE: The table above does not apply to the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 because the system is capable of providing power for the maximum number of DXLink Transmitters and Receivers required when the enclosure contains all DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and
Output boards.
In both the situations in the table above, the power supply should be replaced as soon as possible to restore power redundancy to the system or to allow the system to become fully operational again. Unless the Enova DGX 3200 has exceeded its power budget, it should operate normally with a failed power supply. For power supply replacement information, contact technical support (see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 102
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Connecting Switching Systems with DXLink Connectors
Switching systems with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K support (e.g., an Enova DGX 800 Switcher and an Enova DGX 6400 switcher) can be connected via their DXLink (RJ-45) ports.
IMPORTANT: This section does not refer to the linking of enclosures from CPU to CPU, which is not supported in the Enova DGX
Switcher.
In an installation with a multiple-stage switching system, the following applies:
When two switching systems with DXLink support are connected via their DXLink ports, only video and audio will be passed through the DXLink connection.
When a DXLink input or output on one switching system determines that it is connected to a DXLink input or output on another switching system, the DXLink port will automatically disable all Ethernet, power, and control on that connection port so that the only things passed down the DXLink line are the video and audio signals.
When connecting switching systems via DXLink ports, AMX recommends no more than 3 switcher throughputs.*
Network loops must be avoided (see the following page).
* For example, the path through 3 switchers could be: source device DXLink Transmitter Enova DGX 800 (out a DXLink port)
Enova DGX 6400, DXLink input (out a DXLink port) Enova DGX 1600, DXLink input (out a DXLink port) DXLink Receiver display device as an HDMI signal.
Avoiding Network (Ethernet) Loops
CAUTION: Be careful not to create a network (Ethernet) loop.
Only one connection to the Public LAN is permitted within a switching system with DXLink support.* Network loops must be avoided. A network loop is created when the enclosure and one or more DXLink Modules within the system are connected to the same Public LAN as the Enova DGX. The Enova DGX Switcher does not support STP (Spanning Tree Protocol).
* This applies to systems with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, DXLink Twisted Pair, and/or DXLink Fiber Boards.
IMPORTANT: If DXLink Twisted Pair 4K units are used in conjunction with DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber units, all units’ guidelines must be followed.
In the example in FIG. 54, a network loop was created when an Enova DGX 1600 was connected to a Public LAN and one of its
DXLink Receivers was connected to the same LAN. The DXLink Receiver needs to be disconnected from the LAN.
IMPORTANT: If you have questions or concerns about network setup, consult with your network administrator about avoiding network loops before connecting units.
Public LAN
Enova DGX 1600
Source device DX-RX-4K
Destination device
DX-TX-DWP-4K
FIG. 54
Avoid network loops
Attaching Cables
Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, the input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and the output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right.
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 3200 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate (metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to right one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 6400 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the bottom input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the bottom input board on the right.
Outputs are in the lower part of the enclosure, start over at “1” on the left, and follow the same pattern.
IMPORTANT: If the system has DXLink input and output connectors in use, we strongly recommend that the LAN 100/1000 port use a connection speed of 1000 Mbps.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 103
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Important DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Cabling Requirements and Recommendations
The following requirements and recommendations apply to cabling DXLink (RJ-45) connectors:
DXLink cable runs require shielded category cable (STP) of Cat6A or Cat7.
DXLink cable runs for DXLink equipment shall only be run within a common building.**
DXLink delivers 10.2 Gb/s throughput over shielded category cable. Based on this bandwidth requirement, we recommend following industry standard practices designed for 10 Gigabit Ethernet when designing and installing the cable infrastructure.
The cables should be no longer than necessary to reach the end-points. We recommend terminating the cable to the actual distance required rather than leaving any excess cable in a service loop.
For complete cable specifications, see the board’s specifications.
** “Common building” is defined as: Where the walls of the structure(s) are physically connected and the structure(s) share a single ground reference.
For more details and helpful cabling information, reference the white paper titled “Cabling for Success with DXLink” available at www.amx.com or contact your AMX representative.
NOTE: DXLink Twisted Pair 4K cable runs include support for up to two (2) patch cables of up to 5 meters in length each, provided that the total end-to-end cable length does not exceed 80 meters and all cables and couplers/patch panels used in the run meet the minimum cable requirements (e.g., from DX-TX-DWP-4K to 5m patch cable, 70m cable run, 5m patch cable to DXLink 4K Input Board using shielded Cat6A or better for each cable length).
Twisted Pair Cable Pinouts
Use either the T568A or T568B pinout specification for termination of the twisted pair cable used between the Transmitter or
Receiver and the enclosure.
FIG. 55
Twisted pair cable pinouts for T568A and T568B
To connect sources and destinations to DXLink inputs and outputs via TX/RX:
1.
Attach an HDMI cable from the source device to the HDMI connector on the DXLink Transmitter.
2.
Attach a twisted pair cable to the DXLink Transmitter’s Output (RJ-45) connector.
3.
Attach the other end of the twisted pair cable to the input connector on the DXLink Input Board.
FIG. 56
Fasten cables onto input and output connectors
4.
Attach a second twisted pair cable to the output connector on the DXLink Output Board.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 104
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
5.
Attach the other end of the second twisted pair cable to the Input (RJ-45) connector on the DXLink Receiver.
6.
Attach a second HDMI cable to the HDMI Output connector on the Receiver.
7.
Attach the other end of the second HDMI cable to the destination device.
8.
Repeat steps above for additional source and destination devices.
9.
If the enclosure is not being used as the source of power, attach the provided desktop power supplies to the receivers.*
10. Apply power to the source and destination devices.
* If the enclosure already has power applied, as soon as transmitters and receivers are connected they will have power.
NOTE:
DXLink Connector LEDs
The following information applies to the LEDs on the DXLink connectors on the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input and Output Boards.
Green LED
Yellow LED
Yellow LED Green LED
Yellow:
On – Authenticated HDCP
(handshaking has occurred successfully)
Flashing – Video active; no HDCP
Off – No video
Green:
On – Speed status is 100 Mbps
Off – Speed status is 10 Mbps
FIG. 57
DXLink connector LEDs (left Enova DGX 3200 Output Board orientation; right Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 orientation)
Configuring DXLink Endpoints for Communication with a Master
NOTE: The 4K HDMI Wallplate TX does not require configuration, regardless of the configuration of any connected Receiver units.
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receivers may be configured for communication in one of two ways: auto-setup or traditional NetLinx binding. The instructions in this section cover configuration through auto-setup. For instructions that cover configuring RXs through traditional NetLinx binding, see the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers.
DXLink Receivers ship from the factory with a default mode which allows auto-setup to work without additional configuration. If the
Receiver has not been altered from its default settings, it should not require any of the following instructions. For information covering control signals passed through an Enova DGX with configured DXLink Receivers, be sure to review “Serial Data Transfer
and IR Flow Control” on page 94.
Best Practices for Configuration
Best practices for configuring Receivers includes using auto-setup. Auto-setup is designed to reduce the number of IP addresses consumed by a complete system. In a system that does not use auto-setup, each endpoint requires its own IP address whereas a system that uses auto-setup requires only one IP address (for the integrated Master) and each endpoint is configured for communication via a private LAN (ICS LAN) hosted by the integrated Master.
NOTE: 4K HDMI Wallplate TXs do not consume IP addresses.
DIP Switch Toggles
NOTE: 4K HDMI Wallplate TXs do not have DIP switch toggles and are not affected by DIP switch settings of connected RXs.
The following table contains some of the most common scenarios for setting up DXLink Receivers with an Enova DGX Switcher (the default for all four DIP switch toggles is OFF).
IMPORTANT: Find the scenario in the table below that you want to use and set the DIP switches accordingly.
The DIP switches are on the bottom of the DXLink Modules. A detailed description of functions for each toggle is provided in the
Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers at www.amx.com.
Common Scenarios DIP Switch Toggle Settings
Switcher Setup – DXLink Modules with Enova DGX 100 Series
AV with NetLinx control of RX unit and serial/IR ports
AV with NetLinx control of RX unit and serial/IR ports, plus
Ethernet passthrough to networked device*
1
OFF
ON
2
OFF
OFF
3
ON
ON
4
OFF
OFF
* Connect the ICS LAN 10/100 port of the DXLink Module to the network device (e.g., laptop, IP controlled projector, AMX ICSLan
EXB device).
TIP: Each toggle’s ON position is toward the connectors on the rear of the DXLink Modules.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 105
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Auto-setup
NOTE: The 4K HDMI Wallplate TX does not require configuration, regardless of the configuration of any connected Receiver units.
To configure Receivers using traditional NetLinx binding (requires disabling auto-setup), see the Hardware Reference Manual –
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers.
Need to Know for Auto-setup
Receiver modules must be set to DHCP Mode (default)
Receiver modules must use NDP Master connection mode (default)
Receiver modules must not be currently bound (traditional NetLinx binding) to a Master
Module DIP switch setting for Toggle #3 (network connectivity) is ignored while in auto-setup mode
Disabling Auto-setup Mode
DGX_SHELL commands (see below).
IMPORTANT: The DGX_SHELL command to disable auto-setup mode does not persist over a power cycle. If your installation requires disabling auto-setup through module power cycles, we suggest using the System Configuration interface for this setting.
To disable auto-setup using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program.
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to disable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Disable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
Disable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=2
Disable all boards in the system (including DXLink Fiber) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
3.
The module detects the change and reboots with auto-setup disabled.
4.
Use traditional NetLinx binding to configure DXLink Receivers.
Enabling Auto-setup Mode
Auto-setup is enabled by default. If disabled, auto-setup can be enabled for DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receivers by using the System
Configuration interface (see page 164) or DGX_SHELL commands (see below).
To enable auto-setup mode using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to enable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Enable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
Enable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,3,4
Enable all boards in the system (including DXLink Fiber) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
3.
The module detects the change and reboots with auto-setup enabled.
Telnet Access to Endpoints in Auto-setup Mode
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receiver modules in auto-setup mode are accessible through the ICS LAN port on the Switcher’s CPU.
Control is established through a Telnet session with appropriate Telnet commands for the DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receiver (see the
Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers at www.amx.com).
CAUTION: The ICS LAN port acts as a DHCP server (private LAN) and the LAN 100/1000 port acts as a DHCP client (public LAN) with each port on a separate network. In order to avoid a Network Loop, do not connect any device on one network to any branch on the other network.
IMPORTANT: If auto-setup is being used, Telnet is the only way to access some of the network settings. Also note that some network settings will disable the auto-setup feature (reference the section “Need to Know for Auto-setup” on page 106).
To access DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receivers via Telnet session:
1.
Connect a PC to the ICS LAN port on the left side of the Switcher’s CPU.
2.
Open NetLinx Studio.
3.
In the OnLine Tree, listen for the 198.18.0.1 device (internal Master IP) and establish a connection.
4.
Right-click the Receiver and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx Studio.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 106
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
DXLink Twisted Pair / DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Compatibility
By default, DXLink 4K Input Boards provide a 4K EDID to all connected DXLink Transmitter devices. While DXLink Transmitters are supported by the DXLink 4K Input Board, the default EDID provided to the Transmitter may result in a source device (computer, media player, etc) presenting a video resolution out of the Transmitter's range. To ensure the source device presents a resolution the DXLink Transmitter can support, simply use the Enova DGX 100 Series System Configuration interface to select a non-4K EDID
(All, Wide, Full in non-4K range) to ensure a supported format is requested by the DXLink Transmitter.
NOTE: Compatibility is available between DXLink Twisted Pair equipment and DXLink Twisted Pair 4K equipment (see the “DXLink
Compatibility” Appendix in the “DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual” at www.amx.com).
Troubleshooting
NOTE: While most monitors handle the sleep function well, some monitors continually attempt to wake up, resulting in constant or intermittent screen blanking when no video is present. For the video output attached to the problematic monitor, either uncheck the
DISABLE
and VIDOUT_BLANK-<color> (see page 167).
NOTE: Some older DXLink Twisted Pair Receivers are not compatible with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards. Instructions for
identifying incompatible Receivers are available on page 94.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 107
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards, Duplex, which handle simultaneous, bidirectional or unidirectional data transfer. It also covers DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards, Simplex, which only handle unidirectional data transfer (by removing the fiber return path, Simplex hardware provides an added layer of security). Board models are listed in the tables below.
DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex
Part #
FG1058-622
FG1058-632
FG1058-620
FG1058-630
Model Name
Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber
Input Board, Duplex
Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber
Output Board, Duplex
Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber
Input Board, Duplex
Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber
Output Board, Duplex
Model Number, Description
DGX-I-DXF-MMD,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK MM FIBER INPUT BOARD, DUPLEX
DGX-O-DXF-MMD,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK MM FIBER OUTPUT BOARD, DUPLEX
DGX-I-DXF-SMD,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK SM FIBER INPUT BOARD, DUPLEX
DGX-O-DXF-SMD,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK SM FIBER OUTPUT BOARD, DUPLEX
DXLink Fiber Boards, Simplex
Part #
FG1058-623
FG1058-633
FG1058-621
FG1058-631
Model Name
Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber
Input Board, Simplex
Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber
Output Board, Simplex
Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber
Input Board, Simplex
Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber
Output Board, Simplex
Model Number, Description
DGX-I-DXF-MMS,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK MM FIBER INPUT BOARD, SIMPLEX
DGX-O-DXF-MMS,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK MM FIBER OUTPUT BOARD, SIMPLEX
DGX-I-DXF-SMS,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK SM FIBER INPUT BOARD, SIMPLEX
DGX-O-DXF-SMS,
ENOVA DGX DXLINK SM FIBER OUTPUT BOARD, SIMPLEX
FIG. 58
DXLink Fiber Boards, Simplex and Duplex (shown in Enova DGX 3200 with dust plugs)
DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex and Simplex have four input or output connectors per board.
DXLink Fiber Boards, Simplex are labeled “Simplex.” DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex are not labeled.
TIP: When powered on, Duplex transceiver LEDs are yellow and green; Simplex transceiver LEDs are blue.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 108
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 800 enclosures can hold up to four DXLink Fiber Boards. Each enclosure holds a maximum of two input and two output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 8x8, as well as three subsets (i.e., 4x4, 4x8, or 8x4).
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 1600 enclosures can hold up to eight DXLink Fiber Boards. Each enclosure holds a maximum of four input and four output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 16x16, as well as subsets (e.g., 16x8 or 4x12).
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures can hold up to sixteen DXLink Fiber Boards with four inputs or outputs per board. Each enclosure holds a maximum of eight input and eight output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 32x32, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x24 or 32x8).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures can hold up to thirty-two DXLink Fiber Boards. Each enclosure holds a maximum of sixteen input and sixteen output boards, accommodating connector configurations up to a maximum of 64x64, as well as subsets (e.g., 12x48 or
52x8).
Signal Routing
DXLink Fiber Input Boards route signals to DXLink Fiber Output Boards or to any other type of Enova DGX Output Boards. DXLink
Fiber Output Boards accept signals from all types of Enova DGX Boards. When routing signals between different board types, the
Enova DGX Switcher automatically converts the signal format to match the output board.
IMPORTANT: These boards are compatible only with other AMX products that support the DXLink Fiber Technology. They are not compatible with third-party optical distribution amplifiers or multimode to single mode converters.
Currently, the following signals from a DXLink Fiber unit can be sent over DXLink Fiber Boards: HDMI, DVI-D, analog video, and digital or analog stereo audio. Supported analog video input signals include RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, Y/Pb/Pr (converted to RGsB), and an RGBHV output signal. DXLink Fiber Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Fiber units (see the compatibility table
on page 110 and the system setup information on page 116).
HDCP Compliance
If a connected downstream sink is not HDCP compliant, then the DXLink fiber output will not send the signal to it. This does not affect other outputs the source may be routed to. This allows compliant displays to show content from source devices even if the source devices are switched to non-compliant displays. Non-compliant displays can easily be identified because they display a dark red image (via HDMI/DVI outputs) or an orange image (via a DXLink Fiber RX) to indicate that the authentication process failed.
InstaGate Pro
®
Technology
DXLink Fiber Boards meet HDCP standards and support InstaGate Pro Technology. For complete information on HDCP
functionality for DXLink Fiber Boards, see “HDCP Support on Enova DGX Switchers” on page 69.
DXLink Fiber Boards provide EDID emulation support with plug-and-play information provided by the Enova DGX Switcher.
DXLink fiber input/output connectors incorporate HDMI Technology, are HDCP 1.4 compatible, feature InstaGate Pro
Technology* for low-latency switching of HDCP protected content, and support computer video up to 1920x1200 and
HDTV up to 1080p. The DXLink fiber connectors also support embedded audio, both linear PCM (stereo audio) and non-linear PCM (Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, etc.).
* InstaGate Pro Technology eliminates HDCP latency and interruptions on all displays in a system. (These conditions are typically experienced when HDCP authenticates HDMI source and destination devices.) Key limitations on source devices are also eliminated by allowing them to see only a single sink key from the DXLink Fiber Input Board’s input connection. With InstaGate Pro
Technology, when a source requires HDCP encrypted content, the inputs and compliant downstream devices are automatically authenticated.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 109
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
DXLink™ Fiber Hardware Compatibility
This section applies to DXLink Fiber Input or Output Boards and their corresponding TX or RX units. Connections are allowed between matching hardware (Duplex to Duplex or Simplex to Simplex) as well as between mixed hardware (Simplex to Duplex or
Duplex to Simplex) as long as the constraints of multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode are maintained.
IMPORTANT: Compatibility between hardware requires matching model types: multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode.
Compatible DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers
Part # Model Name
FG1010-362* DXLink Multi-Format Multimode Fiber Transmitter, Duplex
FG1010-562** DXLink HDMI Multimode Fiber Receiver, Duplex
FG1010-360* DXLink Multi-Format Single Mode Fiber Transmitter, Duplex
FG1010-560** DXLink HDMI Single Mode Fiber Receiver, Duplex
FG1010-363* DXLink Multi-Format Multimode Fiber Transmitter, Simplex
FG1010-563** DXLink HDMI Multimode Fiber Receiver, Simplex
FG1010-361* DXLink Multi-Format Single Mode Fiber Transmitter, Simplex
FG1010-561** DXLink HDMI Single Mode Fiber Receiver, Simplex
Model Number, Description
DXF-TX-MMD,
DXLINK MULTI-FORMAT MM FIBER TX, DUPLEX
DXF-RX-MMD,
DXLINK HDMI MM FIBER RX, DUPLEX
DXF-TX-SMD,
DXLINK MULTI-FORMAT SM FIBER TX, DUPLEX
DXF-RX-SMD,
DXLINK HDMI SM FIBER RX, DUPLEX
DXF-TX-MMS,
DXLINK MULTI-FORMAT MM FIBER TX, SIMPLEX
DXF-RX-MMS,
DXLINK HDMI MM FIBER RX, SIMPLEX
DXF-TX-SMS,
DXLINK MULTI-FORMAT SM FIBER TX, SIMPLEX
DXF-RX-SMS,
DXLINK HDMI SM FIBER RX, SIMPLEX
* On the rear of all Transmitter units, the number will be FG1010-36X, indicating they share a common metal box design.
** On the rear of all Receiver units, the number will be FG1010-56X, indicating they share a common metal box design.
The multimode and single mode fiber optic transceivers allow for in-the-field replacement.
The next section explains the functionality and limitations inherent in the three Directional Modes used for control communication.
An understanding of these modes is necessary, especially if you are not using the default for the specific hardware type (Duplex or
DXLink Fiber Directional Modes
DXLink Fiber Directional Modes for control communication are comprised of Bidirectional Mode, Unidirectional Mode, and Data
Link-lost Mode. DXLink Fiber, Duplex hardware has a default setting of Bidirectional Mode, but can be configured for Unidirectional
Mode or drop into Data Link-lost Mode (when the return path is removed or not connected). DXLink Fiber, Simplex hardware is limited to Unidirectional Mode only.
NOTE: For instructions on configuring DXLink Fiber, Duplex Input and Output Boards, see “Duplex Hardware Directional Mode
Reference Manual.
Bidirectional Mode
When data flows in two directions, the flow is bidirectional. For example, a source device sends audio, video, and communication data to a TX. From the TX, all three signals are sent via fiber to an input board on the switcher. The input board routes the audio and video to an output board, while the integrated Master processes the communication data. The output board sends audio and video
(along with any necessary communication data) via its RX to the destination device. If needed, communication data from the destination device can return to the Master for processing via the same path. Bidirectional is the default Directional Mode for
DXLink Fiber, Duplex hardware when both fiber strands are connected. Enabling Unidirectional Mode on Duplex hardware (for an
on the TX and RX units to ON. Removing or not connecting a return fiber path will drop the board/unit into Data Link-lost Mode (see the following page).
Unidirectional Mode
When data flows in only one direction, the flow is unidirectional, i.e., only audio/video signals travel from a TX unit via the switcher’s input/output boards to an RX unit and no signals are passed back to the TX. In Unidirectional Mode, the RX does not send an optical signal trying to establish a return data path connection. Simplex hardware always operates in this mode and does not require additional setup. Unidirectional Mode is a configurable setting for DXLink Fiber, Duplex hardware and requires sending a
available Directional Mode for DXLink Fiber, Simplex.
NOTE: Simplex hardware is designed to only provide a single direction of data flow and not receive return data flow (i.e., transmits only video and audio signals in one direction).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 110
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Data Link-lost Mode
When Duplex hardware is configured for Bidirectional Mode (the default), but the data return path has been removed or is not connected, the hardware is in Data Link-lost Mode. In Data Link-lost Mode, the TX unit only sends audio and video via the switcher’s input/output boards to the RX unit over a single fiber path, but the units/boards are actively ready for the addition of the return path which will enable Bidirectional Mode. For example, an audio/video signal travels from a TX via the switcher’s input/ output boards to an RX and no signals are passed back to the TX, but the RX and input board’s return lasers still transmit light and attempt to establish connections.
CAUTION: In Data Link-lost Mode, the data return path is disconnected but both transceivers’ lasers are still active. If left uncovered,
configuring DXLink Fiber Boards for Unidirectional Mode (see page 120), or covering exposed lasers.
IMPORTANT: When using Duplex hardware in mixed modes (where boards and their units are configured for different Directional
Modes) or using both Duplex and Simplex hardware (where the Duplex hardware is in Bidirectional Mode), we recommend that the hardware be configured to avoid Data Link-lost Mode (see Caution above).
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards – Specifications
Applies to Duplex multimode boards FG1058-622 (input) and FG1058-632 (output) and Duplex single mode boards FG1058-620
(input) and FG1058-630 (output); also applies to Simplex multimode boards FG10-58-623 (input) and FG1058-633 (output) and
Simplex single mode boards FG1058-21 (input) and FG1058-31 (output).
DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex – Specifications
Parameter
Compatible Formats
Signal Type Support
Transport Layer Throughput
Video Data Rate (max.)
Video Pixel Clock (max.)
Progressive Resolution Support
Interlaced Resolution Support
2K Resolution Support
Deep Color Support
Color Space Support
3D Format Support
Audio Format Support
Audio Resolution
Audio Sample Rate
Local Audio Support
EDID Support
HDCP Support
Value
HDMI video / audio / Ethernet* / USB (HID)* / control*
(
DXLink Fiber
Connectivity between products requires matching model types, multimode to multimode or single mode to single mode.)
10.3125 Gbps
4.95 Gbps / 5.568 Gbps**
165 MHz / 185.625 MHz**
480p up to 1920x1200,60Hz
480i, 576i, 1080i
2048x1024@47Hz; 2048x1080@60Hz; 2048x1152@60Hz; 2048x1536@24Hz
• 2K formats are only compatible with DVI, HDMI, and DXLink Fiber Input/Output
Boards and require the output or RX Scaler to be set in Bypass mode
24-bit, 30-bit**
RGB 4:4:4
YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2 (Input signal support is for YCbCr 4:4:4 and 4:2:2; output color-space is converted to RGB 4:4:4.)
Yes ( The scaler on the corresponding output board or DXLink Fiber RX must be set to Bypass mode.)
• Frame Packing 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Frame Packing 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Frame Packing 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
• Top-Bottom 1080p up to 24 Hz
• Top-Bottom 720p up to 50/60 Hz
• Side-by-Side Half 1080i up to 50/60 Hz
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS
• 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
• Dolby Digital and DTS support up to 48 kHz, 5.1 channels.
16 bit to 24 bit
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz
Yes, insertion and/or extraction of 2 CH L-PCM selectable by channel
• EDID provided by an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher to connected DXLink
Fiber Transmitter*
• EDID is user re-programmable
Yes
• Full matrix HDCP support (includes any input to any or all outputs)
• Key Management System
• AMX HDCP InstaGate Pro ® Technology
• Key support up to 16 destinations per output, independent of source device
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 111
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
specs - fiber cable types and supported length
DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex – Specifications
USB (HID) Transport Use the Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher in conjunction with DXLink Transmitters and Receivers (twisted pair and/or fiber). Connect a DXLink Transmitter to a PC and a DXLink Receiver to a keyboard and mouse; the system then emulates commands from the Receiver back to the PC.
A list is available of HID devices which have been tested and found to be working well with the latest firmware (see “DXLink - HID supported Devices” on the DXLink Fiber Receiver’s product page at www.amx.com).
CEC Support None
ICSP, TCP/IP, USB, IR, Control Management Control distribution is managed by the Enova DGX on-board NetLinx NX Master and Ethernet switch.*
Fiber Transceiver Type
Connectors
Fiber Cable Types and Supported Length
Optical Wavelength
Single Mode Optical Budget
10G SFP+
4 LC Duplex Fiber ports (used on both Duplex and Simplex boards) conforming to
ANSI TIA/EIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10A)
• On the DXLink MM / SM Duplex input and output ports, both receive and transmit portions of the SFP+ module are active.
• On the DXLink MM / SM Simplex output ports, only the transmit portion of the
SFP+ module is active.
• On the DXLink MM / SM Simplex input ports, only the receive portion of the
SFP+ module is active.
• Single mode models, duplex/simplex – 9/125 m @ 6.21 miles (10 km)
• Multimode models, duplex/simplex – OM3 50/125 m @ 984 ft. (300 m)
• Single mode – 1310 nm
• Multimode – 850 nm
• 7.4 dB (typical) between DXLink Fiber transceivers
• Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA): -5.2 dBm (min.)
• Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA) Sensitivity: -12.6 dBm (typical)
-8.2 dBm to 0.5 dBm (average power) Single Mode Optical Transceiver
Mean Output Power
Multimode Optical Budget • 6.8 dB (typical) between DXLink Fiber transceivers
• Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA): -4.3 dBm (min.)
• Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA) Sensitivity: -11.1 dBm (typical)
-1 dBm (average power) Multimode Optical Transceiver
Mean Output Power
DXLink Fiber Input Board Propagation Delay 5 s
DXLink Fiber Output Board Propagation Delay 5 s
Safety Certifications Class 1 Eye Safe per requirements of IEC 60825-1 / CDRH
* Duplex boards/units support bidirectional control over fiber. Simplex boards/units do not support EDID transfer and control transport (such as Ethernet, USB, IR, and Serial Control) over fiber; although when used as part of a complete Enova DGX solution,
control can be provided if a supplemental independent network connection is used (see page 123).
** The scaler on the corresponding output board or DXLink Fiber RX must be set to Bypass mode using CTA-861 formats and the resolution is 1080p,60 or less.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 112
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
EDID Resolutions Supported through Local DDC
Standard and established timings are given in the tables following, along with detailed timing blocks.
NOTE: This section covers all of the default EDIDs. In the System Configuration interface, the EDIDs contained in this section's tables are displayed in a single dropdown menu (General section, Preferred EDID menu) and VICs are differentiated by the presence of a “p” or “I” in the format.
IMPORTANT: The EDID can be configured to support additional resolutions through the local DDC using the EDID options in the
System Configuration interface (see page 161).
Standard Timing Identification (Default Shipping EDID*)
Resolution Refresh Rate Max.
1920x1200
1680x1050
1600x1200
1600x900
1400x1050
1440x900
1360x765
1280x1024
1280x900
1280x800
1280x720
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
* The default EDID can be overwritten to include a broad range of features based on installation requirements.
** This resolution is the preferred timing identified in the EDID.
Established Timing
Resolution
1280x1024
1152x870
Refresh Rate
75 Hz
75 Hz
1024x768
832x624
800x600
720x400
640x480
60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 87 Hz
75 Hz
56 HZ, 60 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
70 Hz, 88 Hz
60 Hz, 67 Hz, 72 Hz, 75 Hz
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 113
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
CTA Video Information Code (VIC) Formats
VIC #
VIC = 1
VIC = 2
VIC = 31
VIC = 32
VIC = 33
VIC = 34
VIC = 39
VIC = 41
VIC = 42
VIC = 43
VIC = 44
VIC = 45
VIC = 47
VIC = 48
VIC = 49
VIC = 17
VIC = 18
VIC = 19
VIC = 20
VIC = 21
VIC = 22
VIC = 29
VIC = 30
VIC = 3
VIC = 4
VIC = 5
VIC = 6
VIC = 7
VIC = 14
VIC = 15
VIC = 16
Resolution
640x480p
720x480p
720x480p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x480i
720(1440)x480i
1440x480p
1440x480p
Native 1920x1080p
720x576p
720x576p
1280x720p
1920x1080i
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1440x576p
1440x576p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080p
1920x1080i
1280x720p
720x576p
720x576p
720(1440)x576i
720(1440)x576i
1280x720p
720x480p
720x480p
Refresh Rate and Aspect Ratio
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 4:3
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
59.94/60 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 4:3
50 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
23.97/24 Hz 16:9
25 Hz 16:9
29.97/30 Hz 16:9
50 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
100 Hz 4:3
100 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
119.88/120 Hz 4:3
119.88/120 Hz 16:9
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Audio Data Block
Channels
Basic Audio: 2 Channel L-PCM 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
Sampling Frequency
Sampling frequency at 16, 20, or 24 bits per sample
IMPORTANT: For information on troubleshooting audio, including a table on “Audio Format Support on Enova DGX Boards,” see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 114
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
System Setup with DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex Units
DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards must be used in conjunction with DXLink Fiber TX and RX units. Compatible DXLink Fiber
Quick Start Guide or Hardware Reference Manual.
When the TX and RX units are installed, image adjustment and EDID scaling is automatically applied. For almost every installation, the automatic features on the units result in a quality image on the monitor. If the installation has special requirements and needs additional adjustment or if you need product specifications for the modules, refer to the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber
Transmitters and Receivers at www.amx.com.
The distance from a DXLink Fiber TX unit to a DXLink Fiber Input Board can be up to the maximum specified in the table below and the same for the distance from the DXLink Fiber Output Board to the DXLink Fiber RX unit. The cable run length depends on the quality of the cable (see specifications in the table below, which apply to both Duplex and Simplex hardware).
DXLink Fiber Model / Cable / Distance
Model
Multimode – Duplex/Simplex Models
Single mode – Duplex/Simplex Models
Cable Type
OM3 50/125 μm
9/125 μm
Maximum Distance
984 ft. (300 m)
6.21 miles (10 km)
The system setup in FIG. 59 illustrates DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex used in conjunction with a DXLink Fiber, Duplex Transmitter and
Receiver. Setup for DXLink Fiber, Simplex equipment is similar but without the return path.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to read “DXLink Fiber Hardware Compatibility” on page 110.
DXLink Fiber RX
NOTE: Fiber optic cable length requirements differ between multimode and single mode.
For cable length specifications, see the table above.
Enova DGX Switcher
DXLink Fiber TX
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Fiber Optic Cable
Destination
Device
Source Device
FIG. 59
DXLink Fiber Boards are used in conjunction with DXLink Fiber units
TIP: For systems with special requirements – Before installing in the final location, place the equipment close together, so the Control
PC and the destination monitor can be seen simultaneously if adjustments are necessary.
Destination Device Support Problems
Occasionally destination devices can cause problems in the system due to lack of signal support.
Audio – If you experience audio problems, it may be because you are trying to pass Dolby or DTS or high PCM frequency rates and the destination device does not support them.
Video – If you experience video problems, it may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support.
In either of these cases, configuring the EDID may help resolve the problem (see page 161).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 115
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Connecting Switching Systems with DXLink Fiber Connectors
Enova DGX switching systems with DXLink Fiber support can be connected via their DXLink Fiber ports.
IMPORTANT: This section does not refer to the linking of enclosures from CPU to CPU, which is not supported in the Enova DGX
Switcher.
In an installation with a multiple-stage switching system, the following applies:
When two switching systems with DXLink Fiber support are connected via their DXLink Fiber ports, only video and audio will be passed through the DXLink Fiber connection.
When a DXLink Fiber input or output on one switching system determines that it is connected to a DXLink Fiber input or output on another switching system, the DXLink Fiber port will automatically disable all Ethernet and control on that connection port so that the only things passed down the DXLink Fiber line are the video and audio signals.
Compatibility between boards types from switcher to switcher must be maintained: multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode.
When connecting switching systems via DXLink Fiber ports, AMX recommends no more than 3 switcher throughputs.*
Network loops must be avoided (see below).
* For example, the path through 3 switchers could be: source device Enova DGX 800 (out a DXLink Fiber port) Enova DGX
3200, DXLink Fiber input (out a DXLink Fiber port) Enova DGX 1600, DXLink Fiber input (out a DXLink Fiber port) DXLink Fiber
Receiver display device as an HDMI signal.
Avoiding Network (Ethernet) Loops
CAUTION: Be careful not to create a network (Ethernet) loop.
Only one connection to the Public LAN is permitted within a switching system with DXLink Fiber support.** Network loops must be avoided. A network loop is created when the enclosure and one or more DXLink Fiber, Duplex units in Bidirectional Mode within the system are connected to the same Public LAN as the Enova DGX. The Enova DGX Switcher does not support STP (Spanning Tree
Protocol).
** This applies to systems with DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex in Bidirectional Mode and/or DXLink Twisted Pair Boards and DXLink
Twisted Pair 4K Boards.
Example
DXLink Fiber, Duplex Transmitters in Bidirectional Mode was connected to the same Public LAN as the Enova DGX. The DXLink Fiber,
Duplex Transmitter needs to be disconnected from the LAN. The same problem would also occur if an enclosure and one (or more) of its DXLink Fiber, Duplex Receivers were connected to a common Public LAN.
LAN
Local Area Network
IMPORTANT: If you have questions or concerns about network setup, consult with your network administrator about avoiding network loops before connecting units.
Source Device
Enova DGX 1600
LAN connection
Destination device
DXLink Fiber TX
FIG. 60
Avoid network loops
IMPORTANT: For Duplex hardware in Bidirectional Mode connected to an Enova Digital Media Switcher, we recommend connecting the switcher to the network for all network connection needs. Network connections via the switcher are faster and more reliable.
Never connect both a TX and RX, a TX and switcher, or a switcher and RX to the same network: Avoid network loops.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 116
Tips for Fiber Optic
Connections
OSHA Directive
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Attaching Cables
WARNING: DXLink Fiber units use laser transceivers, which are Class 1 Eye Safe per IEC 60825-1/CDRH requirements. While the
Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any optical fiber products (see the OSHA directive below).
Tips for Fiber Optic Connections:
Keep dust plugs in transceivers until you are ready to make a connection.
Clean fiber optic cable ends before attaching to transceivers (be sure to follow the cable manufacturer’s instructions for inspecting and cleaning the cable ends).
Use gentle pressure when connecting fiber cables to transceivers (normally an audible click is heard when the connector engages).
If unsure the connection is properly seated, gently tug on the transceiver.
If fiber cables are removed from the transceivers, reinsert dust plugs.
Multimode transceivers only – If you are unsure that a multimode transceiver is passing a signal, hold the unattached end of the fiber optic cable away from you and take a picture of it with a digital camera (or cell phone camera). The image will show a bright light if the signal is being passed (works on some digital cameras and cell phone cameras).
OSHA Directive
The OSHA Technical Manual (at https://www.osha.gov/dts/osta/otm/otm_iii/otm_iii_6.html) under “VI. Control Measures and
Safety Programs” states: “Direct exposure on the eye by a beam of laser light should always be avoided with any laser, no matter
how low the power.”
IMPORTANT: Before attaching cables, be sure to set the DXLink Fiber unit’s DIP switch toggles if necessary (see the “Hardware
Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers”).
Wiring for Directional Modes
Fiber Optic Cable Wiring for Bidirectional Mode – Duplex Only (Default)
When wiring fiber optic cable for bidirectional full system capabilities, a dual set of fiber optic cables is used to wire from a DXLink
Fiber Transmitter to a DXLink Fiber Input Board and another dual set of fiber optic cables from a DXLink Fiber Output Board to a
DXLink Fiber Receiver (or directly from TX to RX). This wiring provides not only video and audio but Ethernet, IR, serial, and USB functionality as well.
Fiber Optic Cable Wiring for Unidirectional Mode – Simplex (Default) or Duplex (Configurable)
When wiring fiber optic cable for secure unidirectional system capabilities, a single fiber optic cable is used to wire from a DXLink
Fiber Transmitter to a DXLink Fiber Input Board and another single fiber optic cable from a DXLink Fiber Output Board to a DXLink
Fiber Receiver (or directly from TX to RX). This wiring provides video and audio only.
Configuring Duplex boards for secure Unidirectional Mode communication requires additional actions (see “Duplex Hardware
Directional Mode Configuration” on page 120).
Fiber Optic Cable Wiring for Data Link-lost Mode – Duplex Only
When a DXLink Fiber Duplex cable run in Bidirectional Mode has one or both ends of the fiber optic cable on the return path removed, the system automatically drops into Data Link-lost Mode. In Data Link-lost Mode, video and audio continue to flow from source to destination, but network and control no longer transmit over the fiber optic path. Restoring the cable(s) on the return path moves the system back into Bidirectional Mode. Configuring Duplex boards for secure Unidirectional Mode communication
requires additional actions (see “Duplex Hardware Directional Mode Configuration” on page 120).
NOTE: Simplex hardware is designed to only provide a single direction of data flow and not receive return data flow (i.e., transmits only video and audio signals in one direction).
Connector Location and Numbering
For the Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – Viewed from the rear of the enclosure, input boards (for attaching sources) are on the left, and output boards (for attaching destinations) are on the right. For the Enova DGX 6400, see the description following.
Enova DGX 800/1600 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located between the input and output boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top board to the bottom one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 3200 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located on the numbering plate
(metal strip) directly above the boards. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from top to bottom on each board from the left board to the right one; outputs start over at “1” and follow the same pattern.
Enova DGX 6400 – Input and output channel numbers correspond to the connectors and are located in the middle of the enclosure between boards on either side. For inputs, numbering is consecutive from left to right on each board from the top input board on the left to the lowest input board on the left, continuing on the top input board on the right to the lowest input board on the right.
Outputs are in the lower part of the enclosure, start over at “1” on the left, and follow the same pattern as the inputs.
Fiber Optic Transceivers
Fiber optic transceivers are self-contained modules that send and receive optical signals over fiber cable. DXLink SFP+ fiber optic transceivers* are either multimode or single mode and must be wired with the corresponding cable type.
* SFP+ = enhanced small form-factor pluggable fiber optic transceiver rated at 10 Gbps transmission data rate.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 117
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Board Types / Cable Types / Cable Runs
The type of DXLink Fiber Board determines the maximum length of cable runs possible. Cable quality is also a determining factor.
DXLink Fiber Devices
Board Type
Multimode
Single Mode
DGX Fiber Boards
• DGX-I-DXF-MMD
• DGX-O-DXF-MMD
• DGX-I-DXF-MMS
• DGX-O-DXF-MMS
• DGX-I-DXF-SMD
• DGX-O-DXF-SMD
• DGX-I-DXF-SMS
• DGX-O-DXF-SMS
Required Cable Type
50/125 m multimode fiber optic
9/125 m single mode fiber optic
Maximum Distance
984 ft. (300 m)
6.21 miles (10 km)
All DXLink Fiber Boards are designed for transmission of an HDMI signal over fiber optic cable.
TIP: When powered on, Duplex transceiver LEDs are yellow and green; Simplex transceiver LEDs are blue.
Fiber Optic Cable Requirements
Fiber optic cable with LC termination for snap coupling with SFP+ transceivers
Cable with LC Duplex connectors conforming to ANSI TIA-EIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10A)
MM duplex boards require OM3 50/125 m multimode fiber optic cable; maximum length 984 feet (300 m)
SM duplex boards require 9/125 m single mode fiber optic cable; maximum length is 6.21 miles (10 km)
DXLink Fiber Board.
CAUTION: Do not severely bend or kink the fiber optic cable. Irreversible damage can occur. Refer to the physical limitations (bend radius) specified for the cable.
To connect DXLink Fiber inputs and outputs:
1.
Recommended
–
Install the provided cable management bars (see page 43). We also recommend the use of soft ties
(e.g., Velcro type hook-and-loop strips) instead of nylon cable ties, which can break fiber cables.
WARNING: DXLink Fiber units use laser transceivers, which are Class 1 Eye Safe per IEC 60825-1/CDRH requirements. While the
Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any optical fiber products (see the OSHA directive on page 117).
2.
Remove the dust plugs from the DXLink SFP+ transceiver and fiber cable connectors and save for future use.
3.
Attach the fiber optic cable to the DXLink Fiber Input or Output Board’s fiber optic transceiver.
(Normally an audible click is heard when the connector engages.)
4.
Tie the DXLink fiber cable to the cable management bar far enough below the connector to allow for the manufacturer’s recommended bend radius.
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400
Tie cable to cable management bar far enough below connection to allow for manufacturer’s recommended bend radius
FIG. 61
Attach cables to input and output connectors (shown with cable management bar)
5.
Attach the free-running end of the fiber optic cable to the transceiver on the DXLink Fiber Transmitter or Receiver.
6.
Repeat the previous steps for the remaining fiber cables.
NOTE: When fiber optic transceivers are not cabled (e.g., for shipping or storage), replace the dust plugs that originally shipped with the product.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 118
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Fiber Optic Transceiver LEDs in Duplex and Simplex Hardware
DXLink Fiber Board, Simplex
DXLink Fiber Board, Duplex
FIG. 62
DXLink Fiber Boards, Simplex and Duplex
DXLink Fiber Boards, Simplex are labeled “Simplex.” DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex are not labeled.
Fiber optic transceiver LEDs* have different functionality for each of the data Directional Modes (see page 110). Duplex hardware is designed for Bidirectional Mode, but can be configured for Unidirectional Mode. Simplex hardware only functions in Unidirectional
Mode. When Duplex hardware in Bidirectional Mode loses its return pat, it drops into Data Link-lost Mode.
Regardless of the Directional Mode that Duplex hardware is using, the transceiver’s TX LED is yellow and its RX LED is green.
Simplex transceiver LEDs are always blue.
NOTE: For instructions on setting Duplex hardware to a particular Directional Mode and information about each of the available
modes, see “Duplex Hardware Directional Mode Configuration” on page 120.
* Location of TX and RX LEDs depends on board orientation. Enova DGX 800/1600 - TX LED is right on input boards and left on output boards; RX LED is reversed. Enova DGX 3200 - TX LED is on bottom and RX is on top for both input and output boards. Enova
DGX 6400 - TX LED is right on I/O boards in left side of enclosure and is left on I/O boards in right side of enclosure.
Transceiver LEDs in Bidirectional Mode – Duplex Only
The following information applies to the LEDs for the fiber optic transceiver on DXLink Fiber, Duplex Boards (and on DXLink Fiber
TXs and RXs) in Bidirectional Mode (as well as in Data Link-lost Mode).
Link Status LED:
• On – Link status is active
• Blinking – Unit in Data Link-lost Mode*
• Off – Link status is not active
Signal Status LED:
• Off – No video is present
• On (solid) – HDCP video is present
• Fast blink (mostly On) – Unencrypted video is present
• Slow blink (mostly Off) – Free-run video is present
* Data Link-lost Mode occurs when hardware in
Bidirectional Mode loses its return path.
FIG. 63
Fiber optic transceiver LEDs on Duplex Input Board
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 119
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Transceiver LEDs in Unidirectional Mode – Simplex (Default) or Duplex (Configurable)
The following information applies to the LEDs for the fiber optic transceivers on Simplex or Duplex Boards in Unidirectional Mode
(also applies to transceivers on DXLink Transmitter and Receiver units).
NOTE: Only one transceiver LED, either the TX LED or the RX LED, will operate in Unidirectional Mode. The operational LED illuminates on the side of the transceiver where data enters or leaves the hardware and indicates the individual port where the fiber optic cable should be attached during cabling (see page 118).
DXLink Input Board – Data Transport LEDs:
TX is: Off – Transceiver port is not operational
RX is: On (solid) – Available for use; not
receiving data
Blinking – Receiving data
RX
DXLink Output Board – Data Transport LEDs:
TX is: On – Available for use; not sending data
Blinking – Receiving data
RX is: Off – Transceiver port is not operational
RX
TX TX
FIG. 64
Fiber optic transceiver LEDs on DXLink Fiber, Simplex Board (Enova DGX 3200)
Duplex Hardware Directional Mode Configuration
Directional Mode refers to the flow of signals and communication data withing the system.
The following section applies to DXLink Fiber, Duplex hardware and describes configuration of hardware for Bidirectional or
Unidirectional Mode. The instructions that follow require access to the DXLink Fiber, Duplex Board(s) and associated Transmitters/
Receivers and a terminal emulation program.
NOTE: The Directional Modes are explained on page 110.
WARNING: DXLink Fiber units use laser transceivers, which are Class 1 Eye Safe per IEC 60825-1/CDRH requirements. While the
Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any optical fiber products (see the OSHA directive on page 117).
CAUTION: In Data Link-lost Mode, the data return path is disconnected but both of the transceivers’ lasers are still active. If left uncovered, transceiver lasers may constitute a health hazard. This hazard should be avoided by restoring Bidirectional Mode (see
Need to Know for Hardware Configuration:
When different pieces of DXLink Fiber, Duplex hardware are in different modes (e.g., a Transmitter in Bidirectional Mode and an
Input board in Unidirectional Mode) the entire run drops into Data Link-lost Mode until the hardware is configured for matching modes.
The only way to configure DXLink Fiber, Duplex Transmitters and Receivers for Unidirectional Mode is to adjust the setting of
DIP switch #4 on the bottom of the unit. After setting the DIP switch (ON for Unidirectional Mode and OFF for Bidirectional
Mode), power must be cycled to use in the enabled state.
When Duplex and Simplex hardware are connected to one another, the Duplex hardware will always operate in Data Link-lost
Mode until specifically set to Unidirectional Mode.
Setting a Duplex board connector’s configuration (to Unidirectional or Bidirectional Modes) persists between power cycles and board swaps (i.e., a board with connectors set to Unidirectional Mode will persist these settings when removed from its enclosure and added to another, while a new DXLink Fiber Board, Duplex placed in the old board’s slot will not have any connectors set to Unidirectional Mode.
Configuring DXLink Duplex Hardware for Unidirectional Communication
The following directions assume that the Duplex hardware is in Bidirectional Mode (factory default). For hardware currently in Data
Link-lost Mode (see following note), you must return the hardware to Bidirectional Mode (restore the fiber optic cables that provide the data return path) before beginning the instructions below.
NOTE: If the data return path is disconnected while the system is configured for Bidirectional Mode, the system automatically drops into Data Link-lost Mode.
NOTE: Changing the enable state (ON or OFF) on any or all channels will cause the DXLink Fiber Board to undergo a reset 5 seconds after receiving the command for it to take effect.
TIP:
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 120
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
To configure DXLink Duplex hardware for Unidirectional Mode:
1.
For DXLink Fiber Inputs or Outputs – Navigate to the System Configuration interface and toggle the DXLink Mode button: a. On the Configuration Page (Switcher/Configuration), select an input or output.
b. c. d.
Select the DXLink Details button on the right pane.
Toggle the DXLink Mode button from Bidirectional to Unidirectional.
Wait for the board to reboot.
2.
For units connected to DXLink board connectors – Place DIP switch #4 (on the bottom of Transmitters/Receivers) in the ON position to enable Unidirectional Mode and then cycle power to the unit(s) to reboot in Unidirectional Mode.
Configuring DXLink Duplex Hardware for Bidirectional Communication
When starting from Data Link-lost Mode or Unidirectional Mode, the following instructions explain how to restore Duplex hardware configuration to Bidirectional Mode (default).
For hardware beginning in Data Link-lost Mode, simply restore the fiber optic cables that provide the data return path.
To configure DXLink Duplex hardware for Bidirectional Mode:
1.
For DXLink Fiber Inputs or Outputs – Navigate to the System Configuration interface and toggle the DXLink Mode button: a. On the Configuration Page (Switcher/Configuration), select an input or output.
b. c. d.
Select the DXLink Details button on the right pane.
Toggle the DXLink Mode button from Unidirectional to Bidirectional.
Wait for the board to reboot.
2.
For units connected to DXLink board connectors – Place DIP switch #4 (on the bottom of Transmitters/Receivers) in the OFF position to enable Bidirectional Mode and then cycle power to the unit(s) to reboot in Bidirectional Mode.
Checking DXLink Fiber, Duplex Hardware Directional Mode Settings
Directional Mode settings on a DXLink Fiber, Duplex Input or Output Board can be checked by revisiting the DXLink Details.
NOTE: To discover the Directional Mode setting of a DXLink Fiber, Duplex TX or RX unit, check the #4 DIP switch on the bottom of the unit (ON = unidirectional; OFF = bidirectional).
Configuring DXLink Endpoints for Communication with a Master
DXLink Transmitters and Receivers may be configured for communication in one of two ways: auto-setup or traditional NetLinx binding. The instructions in this section cover configuration through auto-setup. For instructions that cover configuring TXs and
RXs through traditional NetLinx binding, see the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers.
DXLink endpoints ship from the factory with a default mode which allows auto-setup to work without additional configuration. If the endpoint has not been altered from its default settings, it should not require any of the following instructions. For information of control signals passed through an Enova DGX with configured DXLink Transmitter and Receiver, be sure to review “Serial Data
Transfer and IR Flow Control” on page 123.
NOTE: Auto-setup is only available for DXLink endpoints capable of and configured for Bidirectional Mode. Endpoints in Unidirectional
Mode should use traditional NetLinx binding (see the “Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers”).
Best Practices for Configuration
Best practices for configuring endpoints includes using auto-setup. Auto-setup was designed to reduce the number of IP addresses consumed by a complete system. In a system that does not use auto-setup, each endpoint requires its own IP address whereas a system that uses auto-setup requires only one IP address (for the integrated Master) and each endpoint is configured for communication via a private LAN (ICS LAN) hosted by the integrated Master.
DIP Switch Toggles
The following table contains some of the most common scenarios for setting up DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers with an
Enova DGX Switcher (the default for all four DIP switch toggles is OFF).
IMPORTANT: Find the scenario in the table below that you want to use and set the DIP switches accordingly.
DIP switch toggles for enabling/disabling special Transmitter/Receiver functionality are located on the bottom of the Transmitters and Receivers. A detailed description of functions for each toggle is provided in the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber
Transmitters and Receivers at www.amx.com.
Common Scenarios for Auto-setup DXLink Fiber Units
Switcher Setup – TX/RX with Enova DGX 100 Series
AV signals with NetLinx control of TX/RX unit and serial/IR ports
AV signals with NetLinx control of TX/RX unit and serial/IR ports, plus Ethernet passthrough to networked device*
1
OFF
ON
DIP Switch Toggle Settings
2
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
* With both units connected to boards in an Enova DGX Digital Media Switcher (provides integrated NetLinx control), connect the
ICS LAN 10/100 port on one of the DXLink Fiber units to the network device (e.g., laptop, IP controlled projector, AMX ICSLan EXB device).
TIP: Each toggle’s ON position is toward the connectors on the rear of the DXLink Fiber Transmitter/Receiver.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 121
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Auto-setup
To configure TXs and RXs using traditional NetLinx binding (requires disabling auto-setup), see the Hardware Reference Manual –
DXLink Fiber Transmitters and Receivers.
Need to Know for Auto-setup
Endpoints must be set to DHCP Mode (default)
Endpoints must use NDP Master connection mode (default)
Endpoints must not be currently bound (traditional NetLinx binding) to a Master
Endpoint DIP switch setting for Toggle #3 (network connectivity) is ignored while in auto-setup mode
Auto-setup is not available for DXLink Fiber hardware in Unidirectional Mode
Disabling Auto-setup Mode
commands (see below).
IMPORTANT: The DGX_SHELL command to disable auto-setup mode does not persist over a power cycle. If your installation requires disabling auto-setup through endpoint power cycles, we suggest using the System Configuration interface for this setting.
To disable auto-setup mode using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program.
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to disable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Disable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
Disable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=2
Disable all DXLink boards in the system (including DXLink Twisted Pair) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
3.
The endpoint detects the change and reboots with auto-setup disabled.
4.
Use traditional NetLinx binding to configure DXLink TXs/RXs.
Enabling Auto-setup Mode
Auto-setup is enabled by default. If disabled, auto-setup can be enabled for DXLink Fiber endpoints by using either the System
Configuration interface (see page 164) or DGX_SHELL commands (see below).
To enable auto-setup mode using DGX_SHELL commands:
1.
Open a terminal emulation program.
2.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command to disable auto-setup:
(To determine the BCPUx variable, see page 230.)
Enable all ports on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
Enable port #2 on an input or output board – set BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=1,3,4
Enable all DXLink boards in the system (including DXLink Twisted Pair) – set BCPU_auto_setup_disabled=,,,
3.
The endpoint(s) detects the change and reboots with auto-setup enabled.
Telnet Access to Endpoints in Auto-setup Mode
Endpoints in auto-setup mode are accessible through the ICS LAN port on the Switcher’s CPU. Control is established through a
Telnet session with appropriate Telnet commands for the DXLink Fiber TX/RX (see the Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber
Transmitters and Receivers at www.amx.com).
CAUTION: The ICS LAN port acts as a DHCP server (private LAN) and the LAN 100/1000 port acts as a DHCP client (public LAN) with each port on a separate network. In order to avoid a Network Loop, do not connect any device on one network to any branch on the other network.
IMPORTANT: If auto-setup is being used, Telnet is the only way to access some of the network settings. Also note that some network
To access DXLink endpoints via Telnet session:
1.
Connect a PC to the ICS LAN port on the left side of the Switcher’s CPU.
2.
Open NetLinx Studio.
3.
In the OnLine Tree, listen for the 198.18.0.1 device (internal Master IP) and establish a connection.
4.
Right-click the endpoint and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx Studio.
NOTE: For additional information on DXLink Fiber units, see the “Hardware Reference Manual – DXLink Fiber Transmitters and
Receivers.”
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 122
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Serial Data Transfer and IR Flow Control
with DXLink Fiber, Duplex Boards is used with DXLink Fiber, Duplex units. The illustration also shows the video/audio signal path.
The switcher has an integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor which provides native AMX control at each remote location fed by a DXLink Fiber unit. Control is sent over fiber cable (via the DXLink Fiber ports).
DXLink Fiber TX
Ethernet* over
Fiber optic cable
Enova DGX 1600
Ethernet* over
Fiber optic cable
DXLink Fiber RX
AV signal
AV signal
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
* Ethernet transports
IR, Serial, and/or USB
Independent
Network Connection
FIG. 65
Serial data transfer and IR flow control with Duplex hardware in Bidirectional Mode
IMPORTANT: For Duplex hardware in Bidirectional Mode connected to an Enova Digital media Switcher, we recommend connecting the switcher to the network for all network connection needs. Network connections via the switcher are faster and more reliable.
Never connect both a TX and RX, a TX and switcher, or a switcher and RX to the same network: Avoid network loops.
NOTE: For systems with DXLink Fiber, Simplex Boards, the return path is not available.
The illustration in FIG. 66 shows a DXLink Fiber Transmitter in Unidirectional Mode* and a DXLink Fiber Receiver in Bidirectional
Mode with a setup that allows the units IR, USB, and serial communication via LAN when the system is in Endpoint mode with an
Enova Digital Media Switcher.
* The Transmitter can either be Duplex configured for Unidirectional Mode or Simplex, which can only support Unidirectional Mode.
In either case, the fiber cable attached to the Transmitter has no data return path.
DXLink Fiber TX
(Unidirectional Mode)
Ethernet**
Fiber optic cable
LAN
Local Area Network
Ethernet**
IMPORTANT: The fiber cable attached to the TX only handles signals in Unidirectional Mode. The return fiber path is disabled.
Ethernet** over
Fiber optic cable
DXLink Fiber RX
(Unidirectional Mode)
AV signal
AV signal
Enova DGX 1600
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
** Ethernet transports
IR, Serial, and/or USB
FIG. 66 Serial data transfer and IR flow control with TX in Unidirectional Mode and RX in Bidirectional Mode
CAUTION: In a source-to-destination signal run that includes hardware in more than one Directional Mode, take precautions against
creating network loops with hardware in Bidirectional Mode (see page 116).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 123
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Replacing an SFP+ Fiber Optic Transceiver
This section applies to replacement of SFP+ fiber optic transceivers for DXLink Fiber boards (and DXLink Fiber units).
IMPORTANT: Compatibility between hardware requires matching model types: multimode to multimode and single mode to single mode.
Items Required
Replacement SFP+ fiber optic transceiver
DXLink Fiber Board or DXLink Fiber unit
ESD wristband and cord with alligator clip
ESD shielded bag for storage of removed transceiver
Multimode SFP+ Fiber Optic Transceiver
The multimode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver is used on DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex Boards. Depending on the transceiver model, it will have a black latch or a black label on the latch top with white triangles showing data flow direction.
The multimode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver requires multimode fiber optic cable, which allows numerous optical waves to transverse the optic core. Multimode fiber optic cable has a significantly larger optical core (and therefore a higher dispersion rate) and results in comparative shorter distance runs than the single mode cable.
Latch color black or black on top
Dust plug
FIG. 67
Multimode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver (model with black label on latch top shown)
Single Mode SFP+ Fiber Optic Transceiver
The single mode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver is used on DXLink Fiber, Duplex and Simplex Boards. Depending on the transceiver model, it will have a bright blue latch or a blue label on the latch top with white triangles showing data flow direction.
The single mode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver requires single mode fiber optic cable, which allows a single optical wave to traverse through the optic core. Single mode fiber optic cable has a significantly smaller diameter optical core than multimode fiber optic cable and is generally associated with longer distance transport capabilities.
Latch color blue or blue on top
Dust plug
FIG. 68
Single mode SFP+ fiber optic transceiver (model with blue handle shown)
Important Information for Fiber Transceiver Replacement
WARNING: DXLink Fiber units use laser transceivers, which are Class 1 Eye Safe per IEC 60825-1/CDRH requirements. While the
Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any optical fiber products (see the OSHA directive on page 117).
Replacement transceivers must match those replaced: either multimode or single mode.
Adding or replacing SFP+ transceivers should be done only by personnel trained to handle ESD sensitive parts and assemblies.
If disposal of transceivers is necessary, dispose of them as mandated by your area or country guidelines.
NOTE: When fiber optic transceivers are not cabled (e.g., for shipping or storage), replace the dust plugs that originally shipped with the product.
ESD WARNING: To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal Enova DGX materials. Use an ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip attached to a good ground source.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 124
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
NOTE: The process for removing and replacing transceivers is the same in DXLink Fiber Boards as it is in DXLink Fiber units and the same for multimode transceivers (black latch) as it is for single mode transceivers (bright blue latch). The photographs in the procedure below show a DXLink Fiber unit.
In the following procedure, read each step entirely. The steps include helpful tips to avoid damage to DXLink Fiber products. We also suggest reading the “Tips for Fiber Optic Connections” on page 117.
To remove and replace an SFP+ fiber optic transceiver:
1.
If applicable – Label and disconnect fiber optic cables (release the locking tab on the cable connector to disconnect the cable from the transceiver) or remove dust plugs from the transceiver. If cables from adjoining transceivers or boards obstruct access, label and disconnect them as necessary.
2.
Using the tip of the index finger, swing the transceiver latch out and down (orientation of DXLink Fiber Boards varies from system to system).
FIG. 69
Flip transceiver latch out and down (DXLink Fiber Transmitter shown)
3.
Use the handle to release and carefully pull the transceiver completely free from its socket.
FIG. 70
Pull transceiver free from transceiver socket
4.
Restore the removed transceiver’s latch to an upright position and replace the dust plug that originally shipped with the transceiver. Place the transceiver in an ESD shielded bag and set aside.
TIP: Leave the dust plug in the replacement transceiver for Step 5 to reduce the possibility of damaging the transceiver / socket.
5.
With the replacement transceiver’s latch in the up (locked) position, gently insert the transceiver straight into the transceiver socket until resistance is felt (an audible click will be heard when it is fully seated).
FIG. 71
Insert transceiver into transceiver socket
6.
Verify proper seating by gently pulling on the transceiver with the latch in the locked position.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 125
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
7.
Remove the dust plug and save for future use.
8.
Attach the fiber cable (see page 118).
9.
Test the signal path.
DXLink Fiber Troubleshooting
General Signal Problems
If you are experiencing general signal problems:
It may be because of fiber cable quality issues. Be sure to check the “Fiber Optic Cable Requirements” section on
Audio Problems
Audio not present or intermittent with good video:
A signal containing both video and audio must have space for both signal portions. The audio signal portion lies in the blanked portion of the video signal. High Bit Rate Audio (HBRA) requires a larger than normal space in the blanked area of the signal. Video formats with reduced blanking normally provide enough space for audio signals. In a signal that combines a video format with reduced blanking and HBRA, the HBRA signal is truncated and can present as either no audio or as problematic audio (static, clicking, absent, etc.). While Enova DGX hardware supports both HBRA and reduced blanking video formats, these formats do not necessarily work with one another.
To resolve the issue, change either the audio format to non-HBRA or change the video format to a format that does not use reduced blanking.
Other audio problems:
May be because you are trying to pass Dolby, DTS, or high PCM frequency rates when the destination device does not
support them. Configuring the EDID may help resolve the problem (see page 161).
Video Problems
If you are experiencing video problems:
It may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support.
Configuring the EDID may help resolve the problem (see page 161).
Check the Scaling setting on the attached RX unit to ensure it is in either Auto or Manual Mode.
Verify Optical Signal – Multimode Transceivers Only
If you are unsure that a multimode transceiver is passing a signal:
Hold the unattached end of the fiber optic cable away from you and take a picture of it with a digital camera (or cell phone camera). The image will show a bright light if the signal is being passed (works on some digital cameras and cell phone cameras).
Verify Bidirectional Mode Fiber Path (Duplex only)*
If you are unsure of data being passed over fiber:
Yellow LED: fast blink = unencrypted video present, slow blink = free-run video present**, solid = HDCP video present
Green LED: solid = full bidirectional link established
Green LED: off = link not established
Green LED: blinking = Data Link-lost Mode*** (no Ethernet, RS-232, IR, or USB). If Bidirectional Mode is required, check return fiber path for proper connections and make sure DIP switch Toggle #4 is OFF.
Verify Unidirectional Mode Fiber Path*
If you are unsure whether or not audio and video is being passed over fiber:
Illuminated LED: solid = available for use; not sending audio and video (never present: Ethernet, RS-232, IR, or USB)
Illuminated LED: blinking = receiving or transmitting audio and video (never present: Ethernet, RS-232, IR, or USB)
* With Simplex hardware or when Duplex hardware is in Unidirectional Mode, only one LED operates, either the transceiver’s TX LED or RX LED. In Unidirectional Mode, the operational LED illuminates on the side of the transceiver where data enters or leaves the hardware and indicates the individual port where the fiber optic cable should be attached during cabling.
** Free run video is a video mode internal to the DXLink system. When free run video is indicated, video is not displayed (nor is black video present) out the endpoint RX unit. This identifies a good connection with video flow between endpoints.
*** When a DXLink Fiber Duplex cable run in Bidirectional Mode has one or both of the fiber optic cables on the return path removed, the system automatically drops into Data Link-lost Mode. In Data Link-lost Mode, video and audio continue to flow from source to destination, but network and control no longer transmit over the fiber optic path.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 126
Enova DGX DXLink™ Fiber Boards
Verify Auto-setup Mode
If you are unsure if an endpoint has connected to the integrated Master with auto-setup:
It may be because the endpoint is connected via the wrong network.
From NetLinx Studio/OnLine Tree, right-click the endpoint and select Show Device Properties from the list of available choices.
Auto-setup endpoints’ IP addresses reside in the 198.18.x.x space where the first “x” represents either 130 (input side) or
134 (output side) and the second “x” represents an individual port number.
Non-auto-setup endpoints’ IP addresses reside outside the 198.18.x.x space.
If you are sure that an endpoint has not connected to the integrated Master via auto-setup:
It may be because the connection (board and/or endpoint) is in Unidirectional Mode or in Data Link-lost Mode.
Restore the connection to Bidirectional Mode and reboot the input or output board.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 127
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to the following Enova DGX Audio Switching Board (ASB) sets which support analog stereo audio and digital audio:
FG1061-716 Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 800/1600 (contains 2 boards)
FG1061-732 Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 3200 (contains 2 boards)
FG1061-764 Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 6400 (contains 4 boards)
Audio Switching Boards in expansion board slots
FIG. 72
Audio Switching Boards (shown with HDMI Input and Output Boards in Enova DGX 3200)
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards (ASB) work in conjunction with HDMI, 4K HDMI, DVI, DXLink Fiber, DXLink Twisted Pair, and
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K. Audio Switching Boards must be installed in the expansion board slots on the rear of the Enova DGX 100
Series enclosure. Each board provides eight balanced/unbalanced stereo audio line-level signals.
Audio Switching Boards support audio-only switching and switching as embedded audio on standard video input and output boards. They also support using either type of switching from the same source device to different destination devices. In addition, the embedded audio can be digitally processed (e.g., input gain, volume, equalizer).
Audio Switching Boards – Rules for System Setup
Audio Switching Boards must be installed as pairs. They will not work unless both an input and an output board are installed in the same enclosure (if the enclosure is an Enova DGX 6400, two input and two output boards are required).
When adding ASB Boards to an enclosure, be sure to use the correct board set designated for the enclosure size (see
“Applicability” above).
Enova DGX 6400 Audio Switching Boards must be installed in specific expansion board slots (see FIG. 73 on page 129).
Audio signals can be routed from any of the standard video input board connectors (embedded audio) or from any of the terminal block connectors (audio only) on the Audio Switching Input Board to:
(1) any of the standard video output board connectors, (2) any of the terminal block connectors on the Audio Switching
Output Board, or (3) a combination of standard video output connectors and terminal block connectors.
Audio Switching Boards and AIE Boards are not compatible with each other and cannot be used in the same system. If both types are installed in the same enclosure, neither will work unless one type is removed (if both types of boards are present, the audio subsystem is disabled).
information on digital signal processing of the audio, see page 137.
IMPORTANT: Adding Audio Switching Boards (ASB) to an Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher changes the way that audio signals are routed. With embedded audio, audio transported on a video signal, the audio must originate as 2 channel L-PCM. On the ASB external connectors, only 2 channel analog stereo audio from 2 channel L-PCM audio is supported. All other audio formats are muted before the signals are routed to output connectors (including both standard video outputs and ASB external output connectors), with the exception of one audio input signal (downmix audio input) that can be routed to any or all outputs. All audio signals from any of the
Switcher’s output connectors (except downmix audio routed outputs) are formatted as 2 channel L-PCM. For most users, this is the desired format. If you need a format on a particular input or output connector that is not supported by the Audio Switching Boards
(in addition to the downmix audio input), change the audio routing method from Switched to Embedded in the System Configuration
interface’s Audio Routing options on page 159.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 128
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Enova DGX Model Specific Audio Switching Board Location
Enova DGX 800/1600 enclosures – Must use one input board (in left expansion slot) and one output board (in right expansion slot). Boards are installed horizontally.
Enova DGX 3200 enclosures – Must use one input board (in left expansion slot) and one output board (in right expansion slot). Boards are installed vertically.
Enova DGX 6400 enclosures – Must use two input boards and two output boards in specific expansion board slots (see
FIG. 73 below). Boards are installed horizontally.
Inputs
Outputs
Audio Switching Boards in expansion board slots
IMPORTANT: Do not install Audio Switching Boards in the expansion board slots indicated in the graphic by red “X”s).
FIG. 73
Audio Switching Boards installed in correct expansion board slots in Enova DGX 6400
CAUTION: Enova DGX 6400 – Audio Switching Input Boards must be installed directly above standard Input Boards in left and right slots and Output Boards must be installed directly below standard Output Boards in left and right slots. See the example in the figure above.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 129
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards – Specifications
Applies to Audio Switching Board sets FG1061-716, FG1061-732, and FG1061-764.
Enova DGX Audio Switching Board Specifications
Parameter
Compatible AMX Systems
Compatible Enova DGX I/O Boards
Audio Switching
Value
Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
• Enova DGX 800/1600 (DGX800-ASB/DGX1600-ASB)
• Enova DGX 3200 (DGX3200-ASB)
• Enova DGX 6400 (DGX6400-ASB)
• DGX-I-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Input Board (FG1058-540)
• DGX-I-HDMI-4K, Enova DGX 4K HDMI Input Board (FG1061-540)
• DGX-O-HDMI, Enova DGX HDMI Output Board (FG1058-550)
• DGX-I-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Input Board (FG1058-600)
• DGX-O-DVI, Enova DGX DVI Output Board (FG1058-610)
• DGX-I-DXL, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board (FG1058-570)
• DGX-O-DXL, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair Output Board (FG1058-580)
• DGX-I-DXL-4K, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Input Board (FG1061-570)
• DGX-O-DXL-4K, Enova DGX DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Board (FG1061-580)
• DGX-I-DXF-MMD, Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber Input Board, Duplex
(FG1058-622)
• DGX-O-DXF-MMD, Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber Output Board, Duplex
(FG1058-632)
• DGX-I-DXF-MMS, Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber Input Board, Simplex
(FG1058-623)
• DGX-O-DXF-MMS, Enova DGX DXLink Multimode Fiber Output Board, Simplex
(FG1058-633)
• DGX-I-DXF-SMD, Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber Input Board, Duplex
(FG1058-620)
• DGX-O-DXF-SMD, Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber Output Board, Duplex
(FG1058-630)
• DGX-I-DXF-SMS, Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber Input Board, Simplex
(FG1058-621)
• DGX-O-DXF-SMS, Enova DGX DXLink Single Mode Fiber Output Board, Simplex
(FG1058-631)
16x16 for Enova DGX 800, 24x24 for Enova DGX 1600,
40x40 for Enova DGX 3200, 80x80 for Enova DGX 6400
Auxiliary Audio Connections
Embedded Digital Audio
3.5 mm 10-position captive-wire terminals (4 per board); support balanced
(differential) or unbalanced (single-ended) stereo audio
• Enova DGX 800: Audio inputs on Enova DGX Input Boards for positions 1-8 and outputs on Enova DGX Output Boards for positions 1-8.
• Enova DGX 1600: Audio inputs on Enova DGX Input Boards for positions 1-16 and outputs on Enova DGX Output Boards for positions 1-16.
• Enova DGX 3200: Audio inputs on Enova DGX Input Boards for positions 1-32 and outputs on Enova DGX Output Boards for positions 1-32.
• Enova DGX 6400: Audio inputs on Enova DGX Input Boards for positions 1-64 and outputs on Enova DGX Output Boards for positions 1-64.
NOTE: Embedded audio must originate as 2 channel L-PCM unless downmixing is employed.
Downmix
Downmix Input
Downmix Input Format Support
Downmix input fed from a single selectable embedded audio input from any Enova
DGX Input Board. Downmixed audio switchable to all embedded/auxiliary audio outputs. +17 dBu
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
NOTE: Only 2 channel L-PCM audio is supported by the Audio Switching Output Board unless downmixing is employed. All other audio formats will be muted before the output connector.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 130
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Audio Switching Boards - Inputs
Audio Adjustments per Input (Embedded and Auxiliary Inputs)
Audio Input Compression • Independent Compression per input
• Attack: 1 to 2000 ms
• Release: 10 to 5000 ms
• Compression Ratio: 1 to 20
• Threshold: -60 to 0 dB
Audio Input Gain Compensation
Auxiliary Analog Audio Inputs
-24 dB to +24 dB, 1 dB steps
Input Level (Nominal)
Input Level (Maximum)
Input Impedance
Audio Channel Crosstalk
+4 dBu (1.228 Vrms) balanced or -10 dbV (0.3162 Vrms) unbalanced
+14 dBu
• >17 kOhms balanced
• >10 kOhms unbalanced
• Balanced Line Inputs: -98 dB @ 0 dBV, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
• Unbalanced Line Inputs: -70 dB @ 0 dBV, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Audio Switching Boards - Outputs
Audio Adjustments per Output (Embedded and Auxiliary Outputs)
Audio Output Compression • 10-band parametric EQ with variable center frequency, filter type and Q per band
• Center Frequency: 20 Hz to 20 kHz
• EQ Gain: -12 to +12 dB
• Q: 0.1 to 20
• Filter Types: Bell, Bass Shelving, Treble Shelving, Low Pass, High Pass,
Band Pass, Band Stop
Audio Output Sync Delay
Balance Control
Audio Control per Output
Test Tone Generator
0 to 200 ms
Balance level can be set from -20 to +20, left to right (default value is 0)
Independent EQ, Volume, and balance control per output
Single selection of test tone type available on all outputs simultaneously.
Individually enabled/disabled per output – 60 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz,
5 kHz, 10 kHz, Pink Noise, White Noise
Auxiliary Analog Audio Outputs
Output Level (Maximum) +17 dBu
Output Impedance
Audio Frequency Response
Audio S/N Ratio
Audio THD+N
200 Ohms (line level)
Line: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/-0.1 dB
Line: 105 dB @ 10 dBV, AES17
Line: 0.003% @ 0 dBV, 1 kHz
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 131
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
System Examples
The examples below show typical uses for the audio replacement and routing functions of the Audio Switching Board. Directions for
Enova DGX systems with Audio Switching Boards are designed to route audio through the system in three ways:
Embedded Audio – An audio signal from an Audio Switching Input Board can be embedded on a video signal and then routed to any or all of the standard video output boards.
Audio Only – An audio-only signal from an ASB Input Board can be routed to any or all of the ASB Output Boards.
All Audio – All audio signals (embedded or audio-only) are available to route to any or all destinations.
Embedded Audio – Replacing Embedded Audio on Video Signals
The Audio Switching Boards replace embedded audio on a standard video board (HDMI shown) with an audio-only signal from an auxiliary audio source. The HDMI video signal is routed to a destination with the original video signal and the replaced embedded audio signal. This behavior is enabled by default.
HDMI with embedded audio HDMI – auxiliary audio replaces embedded audio
Source device Destination device
(video and audio)
Audio-only signal
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Auxiliary audio system
Signal through system
FIG. 74
Audio on the HDMI input signal is replaced with auxiliary audio and routed to destination device
Audio Only – Audio Only from Source to Destination Device
The Audio Switching Input Board can route from connected sources directly to the Audio Switching Output Board and from there to connected audio destination device(s).
Audio-only signal Audio-only signal
Source device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Audio destination device
HDMI with embedded audio
Signal through system
FIG. 75
Audio input signal routed to audio destination device
All Audio (Embedded or Audio Only) – Routing to Differing Types of Destination Devices
The Audio Switching Output Board can route the HDMI embedded audio signal from an HDMI Input Board to an audio-only destination (its breakaway function) while the HDMI embedded audio signal remains intact from the HDMI Output Board to another destination device or devices.
HDMI – embedded audio routed with video
Source device
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
Destination device
(video and audio)
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Signal through system
Breakaway of analog stereo audio
Audio destination device
FIG. 76
Audio Switching Boards routing audio on HDMI input signal to both video destination and audio-only destination
IMPORTANT: When audio is routed as a breakaway signal from an HDMI signal, the audio also remains intact as embedded audio on the HDMI signal.
132
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Audio Switching Board Numbering Overlays
The Enova DGX 6400 can hold up to four Audio Switching Boards (two in the lower input-side expansion board slots and two in the upper output-side expansion board slots). The Audio Switching Boards in the top of the enclosure work in conjunction with the
Input Boards; the Audio Switching Boards in the bottom of the enclosure work in conjunction with the Output Boards.
Overlays are provided to simplify Audio Switching Board connector wiring on the Enova DGX 100 Series enclosures that contain
ASB boards.
Audio Switching Board Numbering Overlays
FIG. 77
Audio Switching Board slot numbering overlays on Enova DGX 6400
To apply ASB overlays to numbering plates:
1.
Check the labels on the overlay to determine which system it applies to (see table below).
2.
Peel the backing off the overlay and discard the backing.
3.
Align the overlay carefully on the numbering plate and then press firmly on the overlay to set the adhesive on the numbering plate.
4.
Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as necessary for any remaining overlays.
Audio Switching Board Overlay Placement
Enclosure
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 6400
Audio Switching Board Numbering
Inputs 9-16, Outputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24, Outputs 17-24
Inputs 33-40, Outputs 33-40
Inputs 65-80, Outputs 65-80
Overlay Placement
Vertical numbering plate (rear center) - at bottom
Vertical numbering plate (rear center) - at bottom
Horizontal numbering plate (rear top) - at left / right ends
Vertical numbering plate (rear center) - at top / bottom
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 133
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Attaching Wires/Cables
When attaching audio wires to terminal block audio connectors, you may find it easier to unplug the audio connectors before you start. Audio Switching Boards also require an HSSI SMA cable (included when required) that attaches from the input board to the output board (required on all enclosure models except the Enova DGX 6400). Each board provides eight balanced/unbalanced
stereo audio line-level signals. For audio connector specifications, see page 130.
Audio Switching Board Connectors
Audio Switching Boards include four audio connectors. Each audio connector is a double 5-pin captive screw terminal block
(L+, L-, Ground, R-, R+). Each board also includes one HSSI SMA connector (not used on the Enova DGX 6400).
Terminal block connectors IMPORTANT: The HSSI connector is not used on the Enova DGX 6400.
HSSI audio connectors
HSSI audio connectors
Terminal block connectors
FIG. 78
Audio Switching Boards - orientation and connectors
ASB Boards are oriented in the Enova DGX 100 Series models as follows:
Enova DGX 800 – One each horizontal input (left) and output (right) board
Enova DGX 1600 – One each horizontal input (left) and output (right) board
Enova DGX 3200 – One each vertical input (left) and output (right) board
Enova DGX 6400 – Two horizontal input boards (left and right) and two horizontal output boards (left and right)
CAUTION: Audio Switching Boards and Audio Insert/Extract Boards are not compatible. Do not install both types of expansion boards in the same enclosure. If both types of boards are present, the audio subsystem is disabled.
Attaching Terminal Block Audio Connectors
Important to Know When Wiring Audio Switching Board Terminal Block Connectors
ASB Boards/connectors are positioned horizontally on the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 and vertically on the Enova DGX
3200.
Be sure to note the labeling as shown in FIG. 79. The “L” (left channel) and “R” (right channel) are each ordered:
+, -, ground, -, +.
To wire audio connectors:
1.
Loosen the captive screw on the side of the terminal block connection point.
CAUTION: Connecting ASB output left and Right channels to the same point to obtain a single channel may damage the ASB Board.
2.
Insert the bare or stripped wire ends into the appropriate slots.
3.
Firmly tighten the screw.
Balanced audio Unbalanced audio
Eliminate buzzing
(if connected to a balanced audio source)
FIG. 79
Stereo audio wiring for Audio Switching Boards: balanced, unbalanced, and eliminate buzzing
4.
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 only – Attach the HSSI SMA cable (see the next page).
5.
Test/check the routing of Audio Switching Boards signals (see page 136).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 134
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Options for Wiring ASB Boards to Source and Destination Devices
Source and destination devices will require either balanced (differential) or unbalanced (single-ended) connections.
The figure below illustrates options for wiring between sources and input connectors and between output connectors and the destinations. More than one option can be used in the same system.
FIG. 80
Wiring from an Audio Switching Board to a variety of source and destination devices
NOTE: To minimize low frequency noise – for stereo audio signals using twisted pair wire, connect the shield (ground) only at one end
(recommend receiving end as shown in the top set of Source/Destination connections in the “Stereo Connections” diagram above).
Attaching the HSSI SMA (Sub-miniature version A) Cable
An HSSI (High-Speed Serial Interface) SMA cable (AMX part # 64-0051) is provided when Audio Switching Boards are either purchased separately or with an enclosure. The HSSI cable attaches from the ASB input board to the ASB output board and is required on all enclosure models except the Enova DGX 6400. Do not dispose of or break this cable as the Audio Switching Boards will not function without it.
TIP: The command ?EXT_AUD sent to 5002:1:0 responds with TRUE when the cable is attached and the Audio Switching Boards are fully functional.
FIG. 81
Audio Switching Boards with HSSI cable connected
To attach a cable to HSSI SMA connectors (Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 only):
1.
Press and hold the cable connector face flat against the Audio Switching Input Board’s HSSI SMA connector face.
2.
Using your free hand, push cable connector’s coupling nut forward until threads begin to engage between connectors.
IMPORTANT: The cable must not be allowed to rotate while tightening the coupling nut to avoid damage to the center conductor
(male pin) on the SMA connector.
3.
Rotate coupling nut clockwise until resistance is felt, being careful to avoid cross-threading coupling nut.
4.
Attach free-running end of cable to Audio Switching Output Board’s HSSI SMA connector per Steps 1-3.
5.
Test/check the routing of Audio Switching Board signals (see page 136).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 135
Expansion Board
Numbering
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Routing Audio Signals
Audio Routing Capability
The audio routing capability of systems with Audio Switching Boards is system dependent.
Enova DGX 800 enclosure: 16x16 audio inputs and outputs comprised of 8 audio only inputs/outputs and 8 video with embedded audio inputs/outputs
Enova DGX 1600 enclosure: 24x24 audio inputs and outputs comprised of 8 audio only inputs/outputs and 16 video with embedded audio inputs/outputs
Enova DGX 3200 enclosure: 40x40 audio inputs and outputs comprised of 8 audio only inputs/outputs and 32 video with embedded audio inputs/outputs
Enova DGX 6400 enclosure: 80x80 audio inputs and outputs comprised of 16 audio only inputs/outputs and 64 video with embedded audio inputs/outputs
In the System Configuration interface, the Audio Virtual Matrix (VM 2) is controlled by selecting the Switch Mode: Audio button.
Virtual Matrix (VM) sizes reflect the model of the enclosure. VM 2 includes audio-only signals and audio embedded on video signals:
Enova DGX 800 will have 8x8 VMs with the exception of VM2 Audio which will be 16x16
Enova DGX 1600 will have 16x16 VMs with the exception of VM2 Audio which will be 24x24
Enova DGX 3200 will have 32x32 VMs with the exception of VM2 Audio which will be 40x40
Enova DGX 6400 will have 64x64 VMs with the exception of VM2 Audio which will be 80x80
For routing purposes, the audio matrix I/O channels are numbered as follows:
A/V and Video input and output ranges cover the basic switching size of the system: 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, or 64x64
Audio only input and output ranges cover the embedded audio as part of the basic switching size of the system, plus the audio available on the Audio Switching Boards (ASB) in the expansion slots, plus the assignment of one input as a downmixed audio channel, which is routed as a separate input:
Enova DGX 800: 1-8 embedded audio, 9-16 audio only, 17 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 1600: 1-16 embedded audio, 17-24 audio only, 25 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 3200: 1-32 embedded audio, 33-40 audio only, 41 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 6400: 1-64 embedded audio, 65-80 audio only, 81 downmix audio only
For switching audio only via the System Configuration interface, use the Audio Switch Mode (VM 2). When embedded audio is sent as audio only, each signal will be numbered according to the number of the video input or output that contains the embedded audio. Audio on the Audio Switching Boards will be numbered using the numbering scheme of the video input or output number
+1, +2, +3, etc. per product according to the table below.
Audio Switching Boards – Connector /Routing Numbers
Product Board Orientation Expansion Slot Number
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 6400
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Input 1
Output 1
Input 1
Output 1
Input 1
Output 1
Input 1
Input 2
Output 1
Output 2
Connector/Routing Number
Inputs 9-16
Outputs 9-16
Inputs 17-24
Outputs 17-24
Inputs 33-40
Outputs 33-40
Inputs 65-72
Inputs 73-80
Outputs 65-72
Outputs 73-80
The input and output numbers in the last column in the table above are the numbers used for routing the Audio Switching Board’s audio channels in the Audio Switch Mode.
For example, on an Enova DGX 800:
In the System Configuration interface, to route the source wired to the first connector on the Audio Switching Input Board in the first input expansion slot, select the Audio Switch Mode and click Input 9.
In addition, audio embedded on an HDMI video input can be routed as an embedded audio-only signal.
For example, on an Enova DGX 800:
In the System Configuration interface, to route an embedded audio-only signal from the source attached to the third connector on the first HDMI Input Board, select the Audio Switch Mode and click Input 3.
Testing/Checking Audio Signal Routing
Input Board – If an embedded audio signal is being replaced on a video output signal, execute a test switch using the video signal.
If you need test switch details, see page 204.
Output Board – If audio is being pulled from a video input or output signal and sent to an auxiliary audio-only destination, check the auxiliary or supplemental audio equipment involved to be sure the audio signal is present where expected. If the system does
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 136
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Once the system is installed and all devices are in their final locations, the sound can be fine-tuned for optimum performance. To properly adjust the sound, signals need to be routed and volume will need to be adjusted throughout the process.
TIP: Before fine-tuning the system for its final location, route a few test switches to verify that the system is working correctly and to determine what type of digital signal processing adjustments are needed.
Audio Switching Boards allow for digital signal processing (e.g., input gain, volume, equalizer) on every input /output in the enclosure.
All of the types of supported DSP settings (see the table that follows) can be adjusted using the System Configuration interface
NOTE: The only types of digital signal processing that can occur using the control panel are volume, gain, and mute on the embedded
digital audio signals only (see page 210).
Input and Output Digital Signal Processing
Digital Signal Processing
Output Volume
Volume Limiter
Mute
Input Gain
EQ Gain
Compression (Enable/Disable)
Delay
10-Band Parametric Equalizer
Preset Filter Types
Band Gain
Band Q
Tone
Balance
Audio Adjustment Parameters
-100 dB to 0 dB (attenuation)
Programmable minimum and maximum volume limits
Mute function on each output channel
• When a muted output is un-muted, the output returns to its previously un-muted volume
• When a volume command is sent to a muted output, the output remains muted; when the output is un-muted, the volume returns at the new level
-24 dB to +24 dB
• Allows source signals of varying amplitudes to be equalized
• Inputs are set to unity gain at the factory
TIP: Make input gain adjustments before fine tuning the outputs.
-12 dB to +12 dB
Audio inputs (when enabled) can be independently configured for the following settings:
• Attack from 1 to 2000 milliseconds
• Release from 10 to 5000 milliseconds
• Threshold of -60 dB to +0 dB
• Ratio 1 to 20
0 to 200 milliseconds (each audio signal independently)
Selectable center frequency for each band independently
• Used to boost or cut the frequencies for each output
• Each equalization band spans one octave and is identified by its center frequency
• Bands are set for a flat response (0 dB) at the factory
Available preset filter types (apply to each band independently):
• Bell
• Bass shelf
• Treble shelf
• Low pass
• High pass
• Band pass
• Band stop
-12 dB to +12 dB
0.1 to 20
NOTE: The tone adjustment is applied on top of the equalizer adjustments.
Available types of tones:
• Off (default)
• Voice
• Music
• Movie
Balance level can be set from -20 to +20, left to right (default value is 0)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 137
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Digital Signal Processing
Tone Generation (may be switched to one or more audio outputs)
Available test tones:
• 60 Hz
• 250 Hz
• 400 Hz
• 1 kHz
• 3 kHz
• 5 kHz
• 10 kHz
• Pink noise
• White noise
Audio Adjustment Parameters
NOTE: Configuration data is not affected by firmware upgrades.
Stereo Audio
Audio on Audio Switching Boards can be processed as a stereo audio pair. Stereo audio input channels are paired (left and right) to present the grouped output on both output channels (left and right).
Downmix Audio Input
In sound recording and reproduction, downmixing is the process by which multiple recorded channels are combined into one or more channels.
In multi-track recording, multiple sound sources are recorded from separate microphones to individualized audio channels.
Downmixing is the process of combining those audio channels to produce one or two channels that include all content.
Audio Switching Board Downmix Input
Audio Switching Output Boards provide the ability to downmix the audio signal from one HDMI input (must be assigned as the downmix input) to stereo audio. While the sample rate can be any valid rate, the data will be sample rate converted to 48 kHz. The resulting audio can be routed to any or all of the analog or digital audio outputs.
The downmixed input is fed from a single selectable embedded audio input from any Enova DGX Input Board. Downmixed audio from a single input can be switched to any or all embedded or auxiliary audio outputs.
Supported Downmix Input Formats
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD High-Resolution Audio
DTS
2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM
Routing the Downmix Input
The downmix input is selected from the available audio inputs and is routed the same as any other audio input to any or all outputs
(for general switching and configuration instructions, including the downmix input, see page 152).
Downmix SEND_COMMANDs
The downmixed audio input uses a subset of the SEND_COMMANDs available for Audio Switching Boards (see below). For details on each of the SEND_COMMANDs that work with the downmixed audio input, see the Audio Input SEND_COMMAND section on
AUDIN_STATUS
AUDIN_GAIN
AUDIN_STEREO
AUDIN_COMPRESSION
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH
NOTE: To negate a downmix command, reroute the switch.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 138
Enova DGX Audio Switching Boards
Audio Switching Board Troubleshooting
If the audio is not present or is not at the expected destination:
You may need to re-wire to a different connector (see the section on “Audio Routing Capability” on page 136).
Check to be sure all the “Rules for System Setup” on page 128 have been followed.
the board’s functionality again.
If audio signal output format (2 channel L-PCM) is different than the required output format:
You may route one input to any or all outputs as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS, or 2 CH through
8 CH L-PCM format by selecting that input as the Downmix Input (see page 152).
Or
You may change the output format by disabling the extraction/insertion of the signal by Audio Switching Boards and allow
the input signal to be passed through the system as embedded audio on a video signal (see page 164).
If audio buzzes when connected to a balanced audio input device:
Wire the Audio Switching Board (ASB) connector as follows (see wiring example on the right in FIG. 79 on page 134):
ASB L+ to device L+
ASB R+ to device R+
ASB ground not connected
ASB R- to device R-
Jumper from ASB R- to ASB L-
If downmixed audio is not present or is intermittent with good video:
A signal containing both video and audio must have space for both signal portions. The audio signal portion lies in the blanked portion of the video signal. High Bit Rate Audio (HBRA) requires a larger than normal space in the blanked area of the signal. Video formats with reduced blanking normally provide enough space for audio signals. In a signal that combines a video format with reduced blanking and HBRA, the HBRA signal is truncated and can present as either no audio or as problematic audio (static, clicking, absent, etc.). While Enova DGX hardware supports both HBRA and reduced blanking video formats, these formats do not necessarily work with one another.
To resolve the issue, change either the audio format to non-HBRA or change the video format to a format that does not use reduced blanking.
If the Audio Switching Board defaults to “Embedded” rather than “Switched” audio:
Audio Switching Boards default to Switched audio but, if the system was upgraded from Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 to 100
Series and then power cycled prior to insertion of ASB boards, the system may not recognize the correct default state.
To resolve this issue, open the System Configuration interface and toggle the Audio Routing to its correct setting (see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 139
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
Applicability Notice
This chapter pertains to the following Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Board (referred to here as the AIE Board) which supports analog stereo audio
FG1058-705 Audio Insert/Extract Board
AIE Boards in expansion board slots
FIG. 82
AIE Boards (shown with a variety of video boards in Enova DGX 3200)
The Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Board works in conjunction with HDMI, 4K HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, DXLink Twisted Pair
4K, and DXLink Fiber Input or Output Boards. The AIE Board can be installed in any of the expansion board slots on the rear of the
Enova DGX enclosure. The AIE Board can provide audio insertion and/or extraction functionality for either the input or output boards. The board’s DIP switches must be set per the individual system’s requirements. The configuration process requires removing the board from the enclosure and setting its DIP switches (for details, see page 143). By default, the AIE Board is set with the extract/insert function enabled. In addition, the connectors default to “extract” audio.
IMPORTANT: Setting the DIP switches is the only way to configure the AIE Board’s insert/extract functionality. Therefore, if the switches require setting (which involves removal of the board from the enclosure), it needs to be done during system setup.
AIE Board Information – Must Know for System Setup
Individual connectors on an AIE Board in either expansion slot can be configured by setting the DIP switches to insert or extract audio (default = “Enable/Extract”).
If an AIE connector is set to “Disable,” then it must also be set to “Extract.”
When audio is “extracted” from an HDMI signal, the audio signal is not only sent to separate audio equipment but also remains intact as embedded audio on the HDMI signal which is handled by the Enova DGX Switcher.
When audio is “inserted” onto an HDMI signal, the audio signal replaces the embedded audio on the HDMI signal which is handled by the Enova DGX Switcher.
Left expansion board slot (Enova DGX 800/1600/3200) and top expansion board slots (Enova DGX 6400) – AIE Board connectors correspond numerically to the standard input connectors. The audio signal on AIE Input 1 is either inserted or extracted onto/from standard Input 1 (2 works with 2, 3 works with 3, etc.).*
Right expansion board slot (Enova DGX 800/1600/3200) and bottom expansion board slots (Enova DGX 6400) –
AIE Board connectors correspond numerically to the standard output connectors. The audio signal on AIE Output 1 is either inserted or extracted onto/from standard Output 1 (2 works with 2, 3 works with 3, etc.).
The audio is always inserted or extracted as analog stereo audio at line level.
Insert/Extract settings provide unity gain to and from the digital domain.
* For example, when AIE Input 1 in the left expansion board slot is set to insert and then you route HDMI Input 1, the audio signal for AIE Input 1 is embedded on the HDMI signal.
IMPORTANT: The AIE Boards do not form an independent switching matrix. When an AIE Board is used on the input side, audio signals cannot be controlled separately, but must either switch with the HDMI as embedded audio (insert function) or are sent to supplemental audio equipment (extract function). When an AIE Board is used on the output side, audio signals have already been switched as embedded audio with HDMI and can be either replaced or extracted, depending on which function is set.
IMPORTANT: AIE Boards are not compatible with Audio Switching Boards; furthermore, if both types are installed in the same enclosure, neither will work unless one type is removed.
Enova DGX Model Specific AIE Notes
Enova DGX 800 only – Depending on location, AIE Board connectors 1-8 correspond to standard input or output connectors 1-8. Connectors 9-16 are inoperable.
Enova DGX 3200 only – AIE Boards will not work in conjunction with standard input and output connectors 17-32, which are on the boards in the last four input and last four output board slots. Remaining standard board slots should be reserved for input/output boards without audio insert/extract needs.
DGX 6400, AIE Boards in the top portion of the enclosure work with input boards that are also located in the top portion of the enclosure. AIE Boards in the bottom portion of the enclosure work with output boards that are also located in the bottom portion of the enclosure.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 140
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards – Specifications
Applies to Audio Insert/Extract Board FG1058-705.
Enova DGX Local Analog Audio Specifications
Audio Insertion
Audio Signal Type
Analog Input Level (max.)
Input Impedance
• Enova DGX 800: Analog stereo, up to 8 channels per enclosure
• Enova DGX 1600/3200: Analog stereo, up to 16 channels per enclosure
• Enova DGX 6400: Analog stereo, up to 64 channels per enclosure
+3 dBu, unbalanced
10 kohms
Analog to Digital Conversion
Analog to Digital Reference Level
Optimal Analog Audio Operating Range
Connectors
48 kHz sample rate, 24-bit
+3 dBu = 0 dBfs
-30 dBu to +2 dBu
8 pluggable, dual three-position, terminal blocks each containing two single-ended stereo contacts (supports 28 to 18 AWG)
Audio Extraction
Audio Signal Type
Audio Signal Type Support
Analog Output Level (max.)
Output Frequency Response
Audio Output THD+N
Audio Output SNR
Digital to Analog Resolution
Digital to Analog Reference Level
Optimal Digital Audio Operating Range
Audio Synchronization
Connector
• Enova DGX 800: Analog stereo, up to 8 channels per enclosure
• Enova DGX 1600/3200: Analog stereo, up to 16 channels per enclosure
• Enova DGX 6400: Analog stereo, up to 64 channels per enclosure
Requires 2 CH L-PCM (32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz at bit depths of
16, 20, and 24)
+2.8 dBu, unbalanced, >=5 kohms
<+/-0.3 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
<0.04%, 1 kHz, -10 dBu to +2.8 dBu
>95 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, Vin = +3 dBu
24 bit, 2 Channel (stereo audio)
0 dBfs = +3 dBu
-30 dBfs to -2 dBfs
Progressive and interlaced video formats @ 60 Hz frame rate: Audio is actively delayed to match video within 6.7 ms leading up to 9.3 ms lagging
8 pluggable, dual three-position, terminal blocks each containing two single-ended stereo contacts (supports 28 to 18 AWG)
NOTE: Only 2 channel L-PCM audio is supported from the AIE extraction port. Multi-channel (>2 channel) L-PCM formats will pass incomplete audio if extracted (only 2 of the multiple channels will be extracted). All other audio formats will be muted at the extraction port.
System Examples
The examples below show some uses for the insertion/extraction functionality on the AIE Board. Individual connectors on an AIE
Board can be set to insert or extract audio onto/from their numerically corresponding standard inputs/outputs.
NOTE: The Enova DGX 6400 enclosure’s AIE Boards are located top and bottom on the rear. Therefore, this section’s references to left and right expansion board slots correspond to the top and bottom expansion board slots respectively on the Enova DGX 6400.
AIE Board in Left Expansion Board Slot – Extract Function
Extracted audio remains intact from standard input to standard output but is also sent on to an auxiliary audio system for further distribution.
HDMI with embedded audio
Signal through system
HDMI-embedded audio remains intact
Source device
Destination device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Audio connector set to “Extract”
Analog stereo audio
Auxiliary audio system
FIG. 83
Audio extracted from HDMI input signal and sent to auxiliary audio system
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 141
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
AIE Board in Left Expansion Board Slot – Insert Function
Inserted audio is received separately from PC source, embedded onto the HDMI signal, and routed from standard input through standard output(s) to destination(s) as an HDMI signal with embedded audio.
DVI-to-HDMI adapter cable required Signal through system HDMI with embedded audio that was inserted from PC
PC
Destination device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Analog stereo audio
Audio connector set to “Insert”
FIG. 84
Audio inserted onto HDMI input signal
AIE Board in Right Expansion Board Slot – Insert Function
Inserted audio from auxiliary audio system replaces embedded audio on HDMI signal and is sent to the destination device.
HDMI with embedded audio
Signal through system
HDMI with embedded audio replaced by inserted audio
Source device
Destination device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Auxiliary audio system
FIG. 85
Audio inserted onto HDMI output signal
Audio connector set to “Insert”
Analog stereo audio
AIE Board in Right Expansion Board Slot – Extract Function
Audio is extracted by the AIE Board on the output side for use in supplemental audio equipment as well as remaining intact as
HDMI with embedded audio from the output to the destination device.
HDMI with embedded audio
Signal through system
HDMI-embedded audio remains intact
Source device
Destination device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Audio connector set to “Extract”
Analog stereo audio
FIG. 86
Audio extracted from HDMI output signal
Amplifier and/or speakers
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 142
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
AIE Boards in Both Expansion Board Slots – Insert and Extract Functions
On left – embedded audio is extracted from standard input side and is sent on for audio processing.
On right – inserted audio replaces embedded audio on HDMI signal and is sent to the destination device.
HDMI with embedded audio
Signal through system
HDMI with embedded audio replaced by inserted audio
Source device
Destination device
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Audio connector set to “Extract”
Analog stereo audio Audio processor
Audio connector set to “Insert”
Analog stereo audio
FIG. 87
Audio extracted from HDMI input signal and inserted onto HDMI output signal(s)
NOTE: When audio is routed through a separate Audio Matrix Switcher, the audio can be inserted back into the original system on multiple audio insert/extract connectors.
IMPORTANT: When audio is “extracted” from an HDMI signal, the audio also remains intact as embedded audio on the HDMI signal.
Setting Audio Connectors to Insert or Extract
IMPORTANT: If the factory default of enable/extract meets all of the system’s needs, this process is not necessary.
Setting AIE functionality to insert or extract audio requires removing the AIE Board, setting the DIP switches, and reinstalling the board.
IMPORTANT: Setting the DIP switches is the only mechanism for configuring the AIE Board’s insert/extract functionality. Therefore, setting the switches (which requires removal of the board from the enclosure) needs to be done at the time of installation setup.
Removing an AIE Board
CAUTION: AIE Boards have an EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) gasket along one edge of the faceplate. Handle boards carefully to avoid dislodging or damaging the gasket on the board being handled and the gasket on the adjacent board or blank plate.
NOTE: If an AIE connector is set to “Disable,” then it must also be set to “Extract.”
To remove an AIE Board:
1.
Power down the enclosure (the AIE board is not hot-swappable).
2.
Enova DGX 3200 only – Loosen the captive screw on each end of the numbering plate above the boards, and set the plate aside.
Captive screws for numbering plate
FIG. 88
Enova DGX 3200 only - two captive screws hold numbering plate above boards
3.
Remove the pan head screw that holds the AIE Board in place.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 143
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
4.
Push on the board’s extractor handle as far as it will go (about a 45° angle). With the handle extended, carefully pull the board straight out of the expansion slot.
One screw holds each board or board plate in place
Board guides
Push board extractor handle down
FIG. 89
Remove screw, push board extractor handle down, then pull board straight out (Enova DGX 3200 shown)
5.
Set the Dip switches according to the information on the following page, and then reinstall the board according to the
Setting the DIP Switches
IMPORTANT: When an AIE connector is set to insert audio, audio on the corresponding video signal will always be replaced with the input from the AIE connector. When the AIE connector does not have a valid audio signal to insert, “no signal” is the input that will be inserted – resulting in no sound.
The individual AIE connectors on the AIE Board must have their DIP switches set according to how the audio for each connector is to be used in the system.
Each board has two DIP switches per AIE connector with the corresponding AIE connector number displayed vertically between the switches (labeled “Channel Setting” – see FIG. 90 below).
DIP switches
FIG. 90
Flip DIP switches to change settings
The DIP switch on the left is used for enabling or disabling the extract/insert functionality. The DIP switch on the right can be set to either “extract audio from” or “insert audio onto” the signal routed on numerically corresponding standard input or output connectors.
IMPORTANT: When disabling extraction/insertion functionality for connectors on the AIE board, use the DIP switch settings
“Disable/Extract”; do not use the settings “Disable/Insert.”
NOTE: We recommend writing down the setting for each connector before reinstalling the AIE Board into the Enova DGX enclosure.
This will make verifying correct audio switching (see page 147) easier.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 144
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
Enable/Disable DIP Switches
Located on the left (see blue rectangle in FIG. 90).
To enable, flip left. Enable must be selected for the insert/extract function to work.
To disable, flip right. Disable turns off the insert/extract function for that port.
Extract/Insert DIP Switches
Located on the right (see red rectangle in FIG. 90).
To extract audio, flip left. The AIE connector will pull the embedded audio signal off the corresponding standard input or output connector’s signal (the embedded audio remains intact on the HDMI signal).
To insert audio, flip right. The AIE connector will insert the connected audio signal onto the corresponding standard input or output connector’s signal.
When shipped from the factory, the DIP switches are set to “Enable” and “Extract.”
Reinstalling an AIE Board
CAUTION: AIE Boards have an EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) gasket along one edge of the faceplate. Handle boards carefully to avoid dislodging or damaging the gasket on the board being handled and the gasket on the adjacent board or blank plate.
CAUTION: Do not try to install an AIE Board in any of the standard input or output board slots. (Standard board slots are indicated by the numbers on the numbering plate that is above the slots on an Enova DGX 3200 and between the input and output slots on an
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400.) An AIE Board can only be installed in an I/O expansion board slot.
To reinstall an AIE Board:
1.
Enova DGX 3200 – With the board’s extractor handle in the extended (unlocked) position, line up the board’s edges on the board guides that are along the top and bottom of the expansion slot.
Or
Enova DGX 800/1600 /6400 – With the board’s extractor handle in the extended (unlocked) position, line up the board’s edges on the board guides that are along the left and right of the expansion slot. Note that boards on the input side have guides at the top of the slot and that guides for boards on the output side are at the bottom of the slot due to their reversed orientation in the enclosure. (For placement of AIE boards in the Enova DGX 6400, see page 146).
2.
Begin pushing the AIE Board into the expansion slot until the extractor handle starts to engage the metal extractor plate (the extractor handle moves into its folded position).
When the extractor handle starts to lift, flip the handle toward the center of the board until it snaps into its folded (locked) position, which firmly seats the board.
3.
Insert and tighten the screw (removed previously) that holds the board in place.
4.
Enova DGX 3200 only – When wiring is complete and functionality is checked, replace the connector numbering plate that was removed previously.
5.
Re-apply power to the enclosure.
IMPORTANT: If for any reason an I/O expansion board slot is left empty, be sure to attach a blank plate to cover the empty slot prior to re-applying power to the enclosure.
Enova DGX 6400 Only - AIE Board Numbering Overlays
The Enova DGX 6400 can hold up to eight AIE Boards (four on the upper rear of the enclosure and four on the lower rear). The AIE
Boards in the upper slots work in conjunction with the Input Boards; the AIE Boards in the lower slots work in conjunction with the
Output Boards.
Because all AIE boards are numbered 1 through 16, overlays are provided to simplify AIE connector wiring on the Enova DGX 6400.
The overlays provided include: two each for the faceplates for connectors 1-16, 17-32, 33-48, and 49-64. The numbers on the overlays (when installed per the instructions below) directly correlate to the input and output connectors.
IMPORTANT: The orientation of the AIE Boards in the right expansion board slots places the lowest connector number for these boards on the far right (e.g., the overlay for the board in the top right slot will read left-to-right as 48 though 33).
NOTE: The audio connectors will need to be removed before applying the overlays.
To apply overlays to AIE Board faceplates:
1.
Check the numbering on the overlay to determine which board it applies to (see numbering in FIG. 91 on the next page).
2.
Peel the backing off the overlay and discard the backing.
TIP: For Step 3, start at the screw end and work across to the extractor handle end.
3.
Align the overlay carefully on the AIE Board’s faceplate and then press firmly on the overlay to set the adhesive on the faceplate.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 145
AIE slot numbering in DGX 64
4.
Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as necessary for the remaining overlays.
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
AIE Board Slots
FIG. 91
AIE Board slot numbering on Enova DGX 6400
Attaching Wires
When attaching audio wires, you may find it easier to unplug the audio connectors before you start.
For connector details, see Audio Specifications on page 141.
Important to Know When Wiring AIE Boards
Audio boards and connectors are positioned vertically on the Enova DGX 3200 and horizontally on the
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400. Be sure to note the labeling for the wiring on the “R” (right channel) and the “L” (left channel) wires in FIG. 92.
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400 only – the orientation of Audio Insert/Extract Board in the right expansion slot places the number 1 audio connector on the far right of the board.
CAUTION: Connecting AIE output left and Right channels to the same point to obtain a single channel may damage the AIE Board.
NOTE: If wiring the audio connectors to balanced audio input devices, see page 148 for options.
To wire audio connectors:
1.
Press a very small tip screwdriver (or a T-pin) into the square hole to release the tension clamp (if the clamp does not release fully, you may need to use the screwdriver as a lever to release it).
2.
Insert the wire into the round hole.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 146
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
3.
Remove the screwdriver from the square hole so that the clamp places tension on the wire.
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400
Tension clamp
FIG. 92
Audio wiring for AIE Board
4.
Test/check the Insert/Extract functionality (see below).
TIP: Insert a T-pin in each of the 3 tension clamps on one side before inserting wires.
Testing/Checking the Insert/Extract Functionality
Insertion – If the DIP switch setting results in being inserted onto the corresponding video input or output signal, execute a test
switch using the video signal. If you need test switch details, see page 204.
Extraction – If the DIP switch setting results in audio being extracted from a video input or output signal, check the auxiliary or supplemental audio equipment involved to be sure the audio signal is present where expected.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 147
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Boards
AIE Board Troubleshooting
Problem - Audio is not present or is not at expected destination device.
Possible Solution #1 - Re-wire to a different connector:
To verify input and/or output connection, check the connector numbers on the AIE Boards. The AIE connector numbers correspond directly to the numbers for the standard input or output connectors that they insert audio into or extract audio from. AIE 1 works with standard Input 1, AIE 2 works with standard Input 2, etc.
Enova DGX 800 only - Depending on location, AIE Board connectors 1-8 correspond to standard input or output connectors
1-8. Connectors 9-16 are inoperable.
Enova DGX 3200 only - Remember that the AIE Boards will not work with connectors 17-32, which are on the boards in the last four input and last four output board slots.
Possible Solution #2 - Re-install board:
Verify that the AIE Board is seated correctly by repeating the re-installation procedure.
Test/check the insert/extract functionality again.
Problem – Connecting to balanced audio input device results in extracted audio buzzing.
Solution – Re-wire audio connections:
Wire the AIE connector as follows: AIE L to device L+; AIE R to device R+; AIE ground to device R-; and a jumper from device R- to device L- (see FIG. 94 below).
Problem – AIE extracted audio from an HDMI output drops out over time. Probably due to upstream unstable/garbage video introduced onto the HDMI output port with no sink connected.
Solution – Connect a sink to the HDMI output port:
Verify the cause by sending the DGX_SHELL commands: power OFF EXPOUT followed by power ON EXPOUT. If the audio signal recovers, not having a sink connected to the HDMI output port was likely the cause.
Connect a sink with a valid EDID to the open HDMI output port. The sink can be something like an EDID emulator or a monitor. Optionally, you can loop back the HDMI output port to an unused HDMI input port.
The problem is resolved when the audio no longer drops out.
Options for Wiring AIE to Balanced Audio Input Device
CAUTION: Connecting AIE output left and Right channels to the same point to obtain a single channel may damage the AIE Board.
Standard Wiring
The wiring in FIG. 93 is the standard way to wire an AIE connector to a balanced audio input device.
AIE output Balanced audio input device
FIG. 93
Standard wiring from AIE to balanced audio input device
If Necessary – Wiring to Eliminate Buzzing
The wiring in FIG. 94 can be used if the extracted audio buzzes when connected to a balanced audio input device.
AIE output Balanced audio input device
FIG. 94
Wiring from AIE to balanced audio input device if buzzing occurs
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 148
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Switching, Configuration, and Status
System Configuration Interface Overview
The System Configuration interface (an onboard web configurator) contains a comprehensive set of web pages that can be used during setup to manage your system’s network, security, and system needs, as well as configure its inputs and outputs while executing switches.
This chapter covers the interface’s Enova DGX Switcher Configuration pages: Switching, Configuration, and Status. These three pages are accessed from the Switcher drop-down list on the main menu bar of the System Configuration interface. The remaining menu options are covered in the Web Console & Programming Guide at www.amx.com (located on the product pages for Enova DGX
100 Series Switchers).
and that the System Configuration interface has been accessed (see page 54).
Click to log on (only required if Master
Security and HTTP Access security options are enabled on the integrated
Master).
FIG. 95
System Configuration Home page
System Configuration interface Tips:
For optimal display of interface features use an HTML5 browser (such as Google Chrome).
“Best practices” require using the most current version of browser software available.
To access the interface after initial setup, simply type the integrated Master’s IP address* in the address bar of the browser and press the Enter key.
Some devices run on a secured file-system. As such, file-system operations (e.g., Load and Save operations) may not be supported by the device’s default capabilities and may require downloading a file manager application.
When selecting Inputs and Outputs for switches – you may select an input followed by multiple outputs, but only one input is selectable if you select an output first.
Inputs and Outputs can only have one name each, regardless of whether the name is set via the Video tab or the Audio tab in the Configuration page (or via NetLinx SEND_COMMANDs VIDIN_NAME, VIDOUT_NAME, AUDIN_NAME, AUDOUT_NAME).
Information represented in the System Configuration interface is provided through both synchronous and asynchronous communication. The interface should be refreshed after making changes to the system, if the interface session has been open but unchanged for over an hour, or at any point information does not appear to be correct.
* The IP address is available through the Control Panel’s LCD menu: Function/Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address.
Username and Password
The Username and Password fields at the top right of the interface allow Users and Administrators to access system security functions. The default Username for the interface is “administrator” and the default Password is “password.”
Menu Bar
The main menu bar at the top of the System Configuration interface contains the following menu items:
Home – access the Web Controls options page
Network – access the IPv4 Setup, IPv6 Setup, and Date/Time pages
Security – access the General, Users, Groups, and LDAP pages
System – access the Info and Devices pages
Modules – access the Device Options, Bindings, User-Defined Devices, and Active Devices pages
Switcher – access the (Enova DGX Switcher Configuration) Switching, Configuration, and Status pages
Home Page
From the Home page, Web Control options become available (e.g., RMS Config, Virtual Keypad, Modero Touch Panel, and Classic
Master Website).
From the main menu’s Switcher drop-down list, you can access the Switching, Configuration, and Status pages whose functionality is described in the remainder of this chapter, which applies to all current Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers (all contain integrated
NetLinx NX Masters).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 149
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Switching Page
The Switching page is used to route the system’s inputs to its outputs during system setup. Each input and output can be labeled by filling in the Input Name or Output Name field on the Configuration page. The one exception to this statement is the audio input
“Downmix” button, which cannot be renamed.
NOTE: The number of available video and audio inputs and outputs depends on the Enova DGX 100 Series model and the number and type of boards it contains.
Color-coded Switch Selection and Switching Orientation
Yellow buttons indicate they have been selected but not switched; blue buttons indicate an already routed switch.
TIP: When disconnecting switches, selecting an input or an output in an already routed switch will turn the button from blue to white, but will leave a thin blue line around the button to indicate it is still active until Take is pressed.
From a cleared state, switching is accomplished from either an input-orientation or an output-orientation depending on whether an input or an output is selected first. When an input is selected first, the Inputs title bar turns yellow (see FIG. 96) and
“input-orientation switching” is enabled. Multiple outputs can then be selected for the input followed by Take to execute the switch(es). When an output is selected first, the Outputs title bar turns yellow and “output-orientation switching” is enabled. A single input can then be selected for the output followed by Take to execute the switch.
Pressing Clear before pressing Take allows you to start over.
NOTE: The default selection (input button highlighted blue) for the Switching pane is Input 1, which also appears in the Input section of the vertical “Selected” bar to the right. All output buttons that the default selection is routed to are highlighted and also appear in the Outputs section of the Selected bar. FIG. 96 shows the factory default switch of one-to-all.
A B
C
D
E
F
G
A
FIG. 96
Switching page allows routing of inputs to outputs during system setup
Switching Page Components
The Switching page features the following components (labeled alphabetically to correspond to FIG. 96 on previous page):
Auto Take button (default is unselected) – when checked, this button persists the Auto Take function and remains illuminated until unchecked. Once an input or output is selected, a click on an output for the input or on an input for an output will execute a switch.
This allows for quick cycling through several inputs for a selected output. Note that when a button is selected, it also appears in the
Configuration page with signal details (for button/signal details, click the Legend button).
Legend button – click to open an additional browser tab (Audio/Video Legend) which displays the legend key with details regarding the state of the input (source) and output (destination) connections. The browser tab opens in a tearaway tab/window that can be dragged and dropped as a standalone desktop window for side-by-side reference with the Switcher/Configuration pages.
NOTE: The label on the title bar can be edited in the Input or Output Name field on the Configuration page.
Title bar
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
Board state icons
NOTE: The 4K icon indicates video images higher than 2048 pixels wide. In some cases, certain 3D video formats (e.g., side-by-side) will indicate they are 4K formats.
150
Save and Load
Buttons
Switching, Configuration, and Status
B
C
D
E
F
G
NOTE: If the enclosure does not include a full set of input/output boards, input and output buttons for connectors that are not available display with a gray Title bar (i.e., No Card).
Switch Mode buttons – click the A/V (default), Video, or Audio button to select the type of signal to be switched. These buttons correspond to the available video and audio Virtual Matrices (VMs) in the system. For additional information on the Switch Mode, see page 152.
NOTE: Switch Mode buttons are only accessible with Audio Switching Boards in the enclosure.
Inputs section – this section contains buttons for each of the available input signals (per selected Switch Mode) in the system.
Click the input button that needs to be switched. Scroll bars on the right-hand side provide access to any inputs on large systems which are not currently visible.
Downmix button – the Audio Switch Mode must be selected before the Downmix button displays. The input source used for the
Outputs section – this section contains buttons for each of the available output signals in the system. Click the output button(s) that needs to receive the signal from the currently selected input button. Note that when the currently selected button is an output, it also appears in the Configuration page with signal details (for button/signal details, click the Legend button). Scroll bars on the right-hand side provide access to any outputs on large systems which are not currently visible.
Select All and Deselect All buttons – these buttons appear only after an input is selected. Click as necessary to select or deselect all output buttons.
Clear button – click to deselect all inputs and outputs (if selected, the Auto Take button state persists) and clear routing status in the Configuration pane. Note that the Clear button does not disconnect switches. After the Clear button is selected and the input or one of the outputs already routed is selected, the buttons turn blue to indicate current status. Selecting an output will show status for the input routed to it, not the other outputs also routed from the same input.
Take button – click to execute the switch for the selected input and output(s). After the switch is made, the current content in the
Switching and Configuration pages persists until further action is taken. Note that the Take button is grayed out until one input and one or more outputs have been selected for routing; once these conditions are met, the Take button becomes active. After the Take button is clicked, all of the buttons clear their status.
Selected status bar (non-editable) – this status bar provides quick visual confirmation of input and output selections and their status (blue = currently routed; yellow = ready to route, waiting further action; blue outline = currently routed, but deselected in preparation to disconnect).
Switcher Setup button options are available on both the Switching page and the Configuration page.
Save and Load buttons – after a system has been set up per the installation’s requirements, the configuration values for the entire switcher’s state (i.e., system settings and routing, video and audio settings, channel names, custom EDIDs, etc.) can be saved and reloaded at any time. The file is saved as a managed content (non-editable) .xdg file with XML and bin data. This file may be reloaded onto the system it was saved from or loaded onto an identical system or backup system.
Saving – To save a configuration, click the Save button (when the Save button is clicked, there is no direct indication that the file is being saved). The CPU begins collecting all of the available system data (may take > 2 minutes) and then packages the file for download. Depending on the browser used in the process, the download may either appear with a Save As dialog box or be saved directly into your Downloads folder. The default file name is "defaultYYYY-MM-DD.xdg."
Loading – To load a configuration, click the Load button. A Warning appears indicating that the action will override all of the current configuration values and reboot the switcher. Click Yes and select the saved configuration (.xdg) file from the dialog box. Click Open to begin the file upload. The file take approximately 30 seconds to load then performs a full system reboot (which takes 3-5 minutes, depending on enclosure size.
While a configuration can be saved at any time, loading a configuration consumes the majority of the available system resources.
For this reason, we recommend disabling code and active switches when loading a configuration. Also, a file should only be loaded onto a system that matches the configuration of the saved file. If the system receiving the file does not match the original system, incongruous information (e.g., a DXLink Fiber Input Board is present when the configuration file tries to load HDMI Input Board information) will be skipped.
Group Restore to Default button – click to open the Warning dialog box below, which requires you to select an A/V Group and an
I/O Group to restore to their factory default settings.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 151
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Switch Mode
The Switch Mode buttons allow you to choose between switching Audio follow Video (A/V), Video (with embedded audio), or Audio only.
IMPORTANT: Support for the Audio Switch Mode (VM 2) requires Audio Switching Boards in the enclosure.
A/V and Video input and output ranges cover the basic switching size of the system: 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, or 64x64
Audio only input and output ranges cover the embedded audio as part of the basic switching size of the system, plus the audio available on the Audio Switching Boards (ASB) in the expansion slots, plus the assignment of one input as a downmixed audio channel:
Enova DGX 800: 1-8 embedded audio, 9-16 audio only, 17 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 1600: 1-16 embedded audio, 17-24 audio only, 25 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 3200: 1-32 embedded audio, 33-40 audio only, 41 downmix audio only
Enova DGX 6400: 1-64 embedded audio, 65-80 audio only, 81 downmix audio only
To execute a switch, click the Switch Mode button (otherwise the switch will default to A/V), an Input button, an Output button(s), and the Take button. (This is called input-oriented switching, also known as one-to-many switching.)
NOTE: If you select an output button first (output-oriented switching, which can only be one-to-one switching), you must select an input button next followed by the Take button, i.e., you cannot select additional outputs before you select the input. If you select an output button first and then the input button, the only way to select multiple outputs is to click the Clear button and click the input button followed by the output buttons.
To deselect (clear status) of an input button that has already been selected, click another input button or click Clear.
To deselect (clear status) of a single output button that has already been selected (before an input button), click another output button or Click Clear.
To clear status of an input and any or all output buttons, click Clear.
To disconnect all currently selected outputs for an input, click the Deselect All button followed by clicking Take.
To execute a switch with a downmixed signal,* the Audio Switch Mode must be selected and the input used for the Downmix signal must be selected on the Configuration page. Click the Downmix button, click the output(s), and click Take.
* Audio Switching Boards must be present for this functionality to work.
Configuring/Switching the Downmix Signal
When the system contains Audio Switching Boards, one embedded audio signal** can be downmixed and routed at any given time.
** Signal must be Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD Master Audio, or 2 CH through 8 CH L-PCM.
When Audio Switch Mode is selected, the “Downmix” input automatically displays as the last analog audio input+1. The Downmix
Input number for each of the Enova 100 Series models is shown in the following table.
Downmix Input #
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 1600
17
25
Enova DGX 3200
Enova DGX 6400
41
81
NOTE: The table above also applies to Enova 8/16/32/64 enclosures that have been upgraded with an Enova DGX 100 Series CPU and that contain Audio Switching Boards.
From the Configuration page – to designate which source will be routed on the Downmix Input, click the Downmix button in the
Switching pane on the left and then select the input from the Downmix Source drop-down list in the Configuration pane on the right.
Switch Mode must be set to Audio
Downmix Source routes the selected input (Input 1 in the example)
Drop-down list displays inputs available for downmixing
Downmix Input button
FIG. 97
Downmix input ready to switch or configure
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 152
Switching, Configuration, and Status
To designate an input for downmixing (from Configuration page):
1.
In the Switching pane on the left, select Audio Switch Mode.
The Downmix button displays at the end of the input buttons.
2.
Select the Downmix button.
3.
In the Configuration pane on the right, select the input from the Downmix Source drop-down list.
The Downmix signal is ready to apply any of the configuration options or to execute switches.
4.
To use a different input source for downmixing, repeat Steps 1-3 (only one input can be downmixed at a time).
Configuration Page
The Configuration page is used to configure inputs and outputs in the system. The most recently selected input or output displays in the Configuration page in accordance with the currently selected Config Viewer button (Recent, Inputs Only, or Outputs Only).
The Configuration page displays the Switching page components compressed on the left. Note that the components are active, i.e., they can be used for all switching functionality without needing to return to the full Switching page.
B
A
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
FIG. 98
Configuration page allows configuration of inputs and outputs
Configuration Components
Any changes made in the Configuration page occur instantaneously on the attached devices. In addition, when you select an input or an output on the left, the options on the right side of the page change to reflect the current settings. Configuration is not affected by power loss, restarting the enclosure, or upgrading the firmware.
NOTE: The number of available video and audio inputs and outputs depends on the Enova DGX 100 Series model and the number and type of boards it contains.
Switching page components – all of the components from the Switching page are compressed and displayed (for details, see previous section on the “Switching Page”).
Input and Output buttons are selected individually for configuration.
Input # or Output # Configuration heading (large text above the Video and Audio tabs) – changes according to the input or output currently selected for configuration.
Video (default) and Audio tabbed views – click tabs to configure the video or audio signal that is selected in the Switching view.
The signal will be either input or output depending on the Config Viewer button selection. The setting options vary depending on the signal.
Config Viewer buttons – the Recent, Inputs Only, and Outputs Only buttons allow you to choose the source or destination signal to be configured. Settings for the current Config Viewer remain when leaving the page and reactivate upon return. When the Recent button is clicked, the last selected input or output and its settings display. If no inputs or outputs are selected before opening the page, then the information will be cleared.
NOTE: When the Inputs Only button is selected, clicking an output button in the Switching components will result in blank
Configuration information; the same is true for selecting the Outputs Only button and then clicking an input button.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 153
Switching, Configuration, and Status
C
Selecting any video or audio signal button will display corresponding information as follows:
Input or Output button – an enlargement of the button selected under Switching (or from the Switching page) appears on the
Configuration side with the source name and number, plus signal details (for an explanation of the button’s details, click the
Legend button).
Video button Audio button
Input Name or Output Name field – use to label the buttons in the Switching pane (and on the Switching page).
Type the name in the field and press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE: Input and Output Names do not allow spaces. Either omit spaces (e.g., Input1, TV12, GameRoom) or use an underscore in place of a space (e.g., Input_1, TV_12, Game_Room).
TIP: For ease of access, we suggest creating Input and Output Names using a naming convention with the port number followed by a unique name, i.e. “<port#><name>,” using 31 characters or less.
D
Restore to Default (red) button – click to open the Warning dialog box below, which requires you to select the Yes button to restore the currently selected input or output to its factory default settings.
E
Video Details or Audio Details button – click to display additional video or audio details for inputs or outputs, depending on current selection (video: colorSpace, flags, pixelclock, etc.; audio: CTS Value, N Value, Audio Mute State, etc.). Examples of both Video
Input and Output Details are shown below. Audio details are similar. Video and audio flag names and descriptions are provided in the tables below.
Video Flag Information
Flag Text
NoVideo
Indicates
No video signal present, or signal is unstable
EmbAud
Invalid
HDMI
NotHDCP
FRun
HDCP
I
3D
NoCable
Analog
Embedded audio data (ASP or HBR) and ACR data present
Video signal detail(s) are unreliable or unavailable
Video mode set to HDMI
HDCP not supported
Free Run video present
HDCP content present
3D video present
Interlaced video present
Video cable not detected
Analog video source
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 154
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Audio Flag Information
Flag Text
NoAudio
EmbAud
Invalid
Mute
UInj
LInj
FRun
LPCM
InvCHST
Mono
Indicates
No audio signal present, or signal is unstable
Embedded audio data (ASP or HBR) and ACR data present
Audio signal detail(s) are unreliable or unavailable
Audio is Muted
Upstream injected audio present
Local injected audio present
Free Run video present
Audio signal is L-PCM
No audio or distorted audio
Audio signal is Mono
F
Switcher Setup:
Save, Load, Restore
G
Video, DXLink, and Audio settings – the settings section of the Configuration page changes depending on the type of signal, whether it is an input or an output, and whether a DXLink unit is attached. A variety of interface controls are used to change the settings (e.g., buttons, sliders, drop-down lists) depending on the values involved. Details for these settings follow this section.
Switcher Setup button options are available on both the Switching and the Configuration pages.
Save and Load buttons – after a system has been set up per the installation’s requirements, the configuration values for the entire switcher’s state (i.e., system settings and routing, video and audio settings, channel names, custom EDIDs, etc.) can be saved and reloaded at any time. The file is saved as a managed content (non-editable) .xdg file with XML and bin data. This file may be reloaded onto the system it was saved from or loaded onto an identical system or backup system.
Saving – To save a configuration, click the Save button (when the Save button is clicked, there is no direct indication that the file is being saved). The CPU begins collecting all of the available system data (may take > 2 minutes) and then packages the file for download. Depending on the browser used in the process, the download may either appear with a Save As dialog box or be saved directly into your Downloads folder. The default file name is "defaultYYYY-MM-DD.xdg."
Loading – To load a configuration, click the Load button. A Warning appears indicating that the action will override all of the current configuration values and reboot the switcher. Click Yes and select the saved configuration (.xdg) file from the dialog box. Click Open to begin the file upload. The file take approximately 30 seconds to load then performs a full system reboot (which takes 3-5 minutes, depending on enclosure size.
While a configuration can be saved at any time, loading a configuration consumes the majority of the available system resources.
For this reason, we recommend disabling code and active switches when loading a configuration. Also, a file should only be loaded onto a system that matches the configuration of the saved file. If the system receiving the file does not match the original system, incongruous information (e.g., a DXLink Fiber Input Board is present when the configuration file tries to load HDMI Input Board information) will be skipped.
Group Restore to Default button – click to open the Warning dialog box below, which requires you to select an A/V Group and an
I/O Group to restore to their factory default settings.
IMPORTANT: When selecting a signal to configure, the Config Viewer button selection, Inputs Only or Outputs Only, must correspond to the input or output button selected.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 155
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Video Settings
Video settings display when the Switch Mode is A/V or Video, the Video tabbed view is selected, and a specific input or output is selected.
NOTE: The Output Video Details provided by the System Configuration interface correspond to information at the output board prior to scaling, not what is sent to the destination display.
Inputs Only
General:
Resolution – displays the detected input Resolution (read-only)
EDID Mode – in the drop-down list, select the EDID (All Resolutions, Wide-Screen, Full-Screen, or Custom) to be
presented to the source
Preferred EDID – in the drop-down list, select the specific resolution/refresh rate to be presented as the preferred resolution to the source
Save EDID button – use to save a copy of the EDID from the selected display to your PC/tablet device
Load EDID button – use to load a saved EDID to the selected input from your PC or device
(EDID files are available in the AMX EDID Library or they can be saved from a specific input or output.)
NOTE: When EDID Mode/All Resolutions is selected, the Preferred EDID drop-down list includes both standard EDIDs and Video
Information Code (VIC) EDIDs (denoted by either a “p” or an “i”). For a complete list of VIC EDIDs for your input boards see the “EDID
Resolutions Supported through Local DDC” section of the applicable board chapter.
HDCP Setting:
HDCP Compliance – click the check box to enable/disable HDCP compliance. When disabled, this serves to notify the source that HDCP encrypted content is not allowed so that it will not try to send encrypted content.
NOTE: For additional EDID configuration information, see page 161.
Outputs Only
General:
Scaling (Mode) – click the button for the desired Scaling mode (Auto, Manual, or Bypass)
Resolution – in the drop-down list, select the output resolution/refresh rate to be used by the scaler; select the “Show only EDID Display Supported (DS)” check box if desired
Aspect Ratio – click either Maintain or Stretch (Zoom and Anamorphic are also available for DXLink outputs)
Save EDID – click this button to save a copy of the EDID from the connected display to your PC/tablet device
NOTE: The scaler may not support all of the Display Supported resolutions. If not, select a scaled resolution from the larger list of
DGX supported resolutions.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 156
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Display Settings:
Video Mute – click the check box to mute the video
Video Freeze – click the check box to freeze the video
Test Pattern – in the drop-down list, select Off, Color Bar, Gray Ramp, SMPTE Bar, HiLo Trak, Pluge, or X-Hatch
Blank Color – in the drop-down list, select Black or Blue
Allow Display Sleep – click the check box to allow the display to go to sleep after the specified time in seconds in the
“Display Sleep Delay(s)” field
Display Sleep Display(s): – Enter the delay in seconds that the display will remain awake after the video route has been disconnected or the input signal is removed
NOTE: While most monitors handle the sleep function well, some monitors continually attempt to wake up, resulting in constant or intermittent screen blanking when no video is present. For the video output attached to the problematic monitor, either uncheck the
On-Screen Display:
Enable OSD – click check box to enable/disable
OSD Color – in the drop-down list, select Black, Blue, White, or Yellow
OSD Position – in the drop-down list, select Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, or Bottom Right
Image Adjustments:
Brightness – use the slider bar to adjust (range: 0 to 100)
Contrast – use the slider bar to adjust (range: 0 to 100)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 157
Switching, Configuration, and Status
DXLink Video Settings
DXLink specific video settings display when a DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber Transmitter or Receiver (or other DXLink equipment) is connected to the selected input or output. These settings display in addition to the normal video settings for the input or output described in the previous section. The Video tabbed view must be selected.
DXLink (Twisted Pair or Fiber) Transmitters (for selected video input)
Video Priority – click either the HDMI, Analog, or Manual button.
AV Source – click Analog or Digital.
Video Type – non-editable.
DXLink Details button – click to display additional settings for the DXLink Transmitter.
TX Settings:
DXLink Quality – green = good, red = poor
the best quality at -100 and the worst quality at 0.
Firmware Version – current version
Friendly Name – current name
Master’s IP address
Subnet Mask – current setting
D. P. S. – current setting
MAC Address – current setting
Auto-setup button
DIP Settings – indicates settings on DIP switch
Reboot button – reboots TX
Refresh button – updates status of TX settings
VGA Settings (DXLink Twisted Pair only) – use sliders to adjust Phase, Horizontal Shift, and Vertical Shift settings.
IMPORTANT: The DXLink settings are not asynchronous. To obtain the latest information, the Refresh button in the dialog box that opens when the DXLink Details button is clicked must be clicked.
DXLink (Twisted Pair or Fiber) Receivers (for selected video output)
DXLink Details button – click to display additional settings for the DXLink Receiver.
RX Settings:
DXLink Quality – green = good, red = poor
the best quality at -100 and the worst quality at 0.
Firmware Version – current version
Friendly Name – current name
Master’s IP address
Subnet Mask – current setting
D. P. S. – current setting
MAC Address – current setting
Auto-setup button
DIP Settings – indicates settings on DIP switch
Reboot button – reboots RX
Refresh button – updates status of RX settings
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 158
digital signal processing via the interface
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Audio Settings
Audio settings display when the Switch Mode is A/V or Audio (for details, see page 152), the Audio tabbed view is selected, and a specific input or output is selected. The audio settings can be used to configure any digital signal processing required for the audio signal that is selected in the Switching view.
Inputs Only
General:
Stereo or Mono buttons – click either.*
Input Gain (dB) – use the slider bar to adjust (-24 dB to +24 dB),
Encoding – PCM (read only)
EDID Mode – from the drop-down list, select the mode (Basic, PCM 2-Channel, PCM Multi-Channel, Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital + DTS, Dolby Digital + MPEG, Dolby Digital + AAC, Dolby TrueHD, or DTS HD Master Audio).
Compression:
change audio routing method
Buttons at top – click Off, Low, Medium, High, or Custom.
Threshold – use the slider bar to adjust (range: 0 to -60).
Attack (ms), Release (ms), and Ratio – adjust the values in the boxes (either enter values or use the arrows)
NOTE: When in Low, Medium, or High, changes to any of the other Compression settings will automatically change the Compressor mode to Custom.
* Setting this option to “Mono” audio on the input results in the left channel being sent to both the left and right output channels.
Outputs Only
General settings:
Encoding – PCM (read only).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 159
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Output Format – click Stereo or Mono.*
Test Tone Enable – click Disable or Enable.
Test Tone Generator – from the drop-down list, select Off, 60Hz, 250Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 5kHz, 10kHz, Pink Noise, or
White Noise.
Audio Routing – click Embedded or Switched.**
* Setting this option to “Mono” audio on the output results in the left and right channels being combined and sent to both the left and right output channels equally.
** With Audio Switching Boards in the system, Audio Routing defaults to Switched.
Levels & Delay:
Mute – click Mute if desired.***
Output Volume (0 to 100)
Min/Max (0 to 100)
Balance (-20 to 20, left to right)
Sync Delay (ms) (0 to 200).
*** Changing the volume level will not un-mute the signal; however, the new volume level is saved and when the Mute button is deselected, the volume returns at the new level.
10-Band Parametric Equalizer:
NOTE: On reboot, the Enabled box always returns to the checked (default) state. To disable the Equalizer options over a reboot, set the “y”
(vertical) vertex to 0 (zero).
Enabled – this check box must be selected before the Equalizer options are available.
Tone Adjust – use the drop-down box to select: Off, Voice, Music, or Movie (Tone Adjust is applied on top of any equalizer adjustments).
Reset EQ – click this button to reset the all of the Equalizer values.
Blue Handles – use the sliders (blue handles) to adjust Equalizer values.
The following drop-down lists can also be used to adjust Equalizer values.
Band – numbered from 1 to 10.
Filter – the options are Bell, Band Pass, Band Stop, High Pass, Low Pass, Treble Shelf, and Bass Shelf.
Frequency – the adjustment range is from 20 to 20000 (Hz).
Gain – the adjustment range is from -12 to 12.
Q – the adjustment range depends on the filter selected:
Bell = 0.1 to 20
Band Pass = 0.1 to 20
Band Stop = 0.1 to 20
High Pass = 0.5 to 1.4
Low Pass = 0.5 to 1.4
Treble Shelf = 0.5 to 1
Bass Shelf = 0.5 to 1
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 160
Switching, Configuration, and Status
DXLink Audio Settings
DXLink specific audio settings display when a DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber Transmitter or Receiver (or other DXLink equipment) is connected to the selected input or output. These settings display in addition to the normal audio settings for the input or output described in the previous section. The Audio tabbed view must be selected.
DXLink (Twisted Pair or Fiber) Transmitter (for selected audio input)
Audio Priority – click either the Auto or Manual button.
Audio Source – click either the HDMI, SPDIF, or Analog button
DXLink Details button – click to display additional settings for the DXLink Transmitter.
TX Settings:
DXLink Quality – green = good; red = poor; number
Firmware Version – current version
Friendly Name – current name
IP Address – for auto-setup, displays integrated
Master’s IP address
Subnet Mask – current setting
D. P. S. – current setting
MAC Address – current setting
Auto-Setup – Status (Enable/Disable) and Force
to Auto-setup button
DIP Settings – indicates settings on DIP switch
Reboot button – reboots TX
Refresh button – updates status of TX settings
DXLink (Twisted Pair or Fiber) Receivers (for selected audio output)
Active Output – click either the HDMI, Analog, or All button.
DXLink Details button – click to display additional settings for the DXLink Receiver.
RX Settings:
indicates degree or lack of quality
Firmware Version – current version
Friendly Name – current name
IP Address – for auto-setup, displays integrated
Master’s IP address
Subnet Mask – current setting
D. P. S. – current setting
MAC Address – current setting
Auto-Setup – Status (Enable/Disable) and Force to
Auto-Setup button
DIP Settings – indicates settings on DIP switch
Reboot button – reboots RX
Refresh button – updates status of RX settings
EDID Configuration
NOTE: Because signals routed through HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards in an Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher normally produce a quality image, you will not need the information in this section unless the installation has special EDID requirements.
A default EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) is stored on the input boards and/or Transmitters. This EDID, which gets presented to the source, includes all necessary timings, audio and video format support, and preferred resolutions for best performance.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 161
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Load and Save EDID
To set an EDID for an input:
1.
From Configuration page / Switch Mode (on the left), click the Video button.
2.
Check to be sure the Config Viewer on the top right is set to Inputs Only.
3.
From the Switching pane on the left, select the video input.
4.
Under General settings from the EDID Mode drop-down list, select the mode (All Resolutions, Wide-Screen, Full-Screen, or
Custom).
5.
Select the Preferred EDID from the drop-down list of resolutions/refresh rates.
6.
Click the Save EDID button.*
* Once the preferred EDID is saved, it can be loaded to another input(s).
To set an EDID for an output:
1.
From Configuration page / Switch Mode (on the left), click the Video button.
2.
Check to be sure the Config Viewer on the top right is set to Outputs Only.
3.
From the Switching pane on the left, select the video output.
4.
Under General settings from the Resolution drop-down list, select the resolution/refresh rate.**
5.
Under General settings, click the Save EDID button.
** Click the “Show only EDID Display Supported (DS)” check box to narrow the drop-down list to show only those resolution/ refresh rate options marked DS (Display Supported).
To set the EDID Mode for an audio input:
1.
From Configuration page / Switch Mode (on the left), click the Audio button.
2.
Check to be sure the Config Viewer on the top right is set to Inputs Only.
3.
From the Switching page components on the left, select the audio input.
4.
Under General settings from the EDID Mode drop-down list, select the mode: Basic, PCM 2-Channel, PCM Multi-Channel,
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital + DTS, Dolby Digital + MPEG, Dolby Digital + AAC, Dolby TrueHD, or DTS HD Master.
Load and Save EDIDs
For custom EDIDs, click the Load EDID button and browse for the .edid file on your device/computer. Once the EDID is loaded, make any necessary changes and use the Save EDID button to save the altered .edid file to your device/computer.
NOTE: Some devices run on a secured file-system. As such, file-system operations (e.g., Load and Save operations) may not be supported by the device’s default capabilities and may require downloading a file manager application.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 162
A
B
C
D
Switching, Configuration, and Status
Status Page
The Status page is used to check a number of the switcher’s components and their states. The components (from top to bottom of page) display status for Alarms, the Chassis, the Master CPU Board, Input and Output Boards, and Input and Output Expansion
Audio Boards. A quick glance at this page will indicate whether the system is running okay (green text will state OK) or if any thing is failing (red text will state FAIL.)
IMPORTANT: The Status page settings are not asynchronous. To obtain the latest information, the Refresh button must be clicked.
The example provided in the figure below is based on an Enova DGX 3200 Switcher with two each standard Input and Output
Boards, as well as two Expansion Audio Boards.
E
F G
A
B
FIG. 99
Status page indicates status of system components
System Auto-Setup check box – select to place the system in auto-setup mode (i.e., the mode wherein the system requires only a single IP address for the integrated Master, and each endpoint is automatically configured for communication via a private LAN hosted by the integrated Master).
The following must be adhered to when using auto-setup mode (default):
Endpoints must be set to DHCP Mode (default)
Endpoints must use NDP Master connection mode (default)
Endpoints must not be currently bound (traditional NetLinx binding) to a Master
Endpoints DIP switch setting for Toggle #3 (network connectivity) is ignored while in auto-setup mode
NOTE: Some devices run on a secured file-system. As such, file-system operations (e.g., Load and Save operations) may not be supported by the device’s default capabilities and may require downloading a file manager application.
Alarms – if any are red, consult the individual Fan, Power, and Temperature components on the page to help pinpoint the problem.
Refresh button – if necessary, use the Refresh button to view system status changes.
Chassis field – this field contains readouts for individual fan speeds, individual power supply status, and the current temperature of the chassis (shown in degrees Celsius). Each readout displays in a color to convey statuses of OK , Fail , or no problems detected
(black). Fan speed information is displayed by individual fans (Fan #) and the fan assembly where each fan is located (FAN ASM #).
Power supply and temperature information is available in each switcher’s General Specifications table in the “Product Overview and
General Specifications” chapter.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 163
Switching, Configuration, and Status
C
D
E
F
G
Master CPU (MCPU) Board field – this field displays information for Status, Model number of the integrated Master, FG (part) number, Version, Temperature (actual degrees in Celsius with OK or FAIL status), and Power (OK or FAIL status).
Input and Output Board fields – these fields give detailed information for each input or output board in the enclosure: Slot, Status,
Type, FG (part) number, Version, Temperature (actual degrees in Celsius with OK or FAIL status), and Power (OK or FAIL status). A red Reboot button at the right cycles power to the individual board.
Input and Output Audio Expansion Boards fields – these fields give detailed information for each expansion input or output board in the enclosure: Slot, Status, Type, FG (part) number, Version, Temperature (actual degrees in Celsius with OK or FAIL status), and
Power (OK or FAIL status). A red Reboot button at the right cycles power to the individual board.
Switcher Setup (Save, Load, and Group Restore to Default) buttons – after a system has been set up per the installation’s requirements, the configuration can be saved and reloaded onto another system(s) or backup system(s) for reuse. The Group
Restore to Default button returns the system to its last previously saved state. This button will restore control values to default
(initial) values. (This Restore button performs the same function for the entire system as the Configuration page’s Restore to
Default button does for individual inputs or outputs.)
Refresh button – if necessary, use the Refresh button to view system status changes.
System Configuration
Interface Tips
System Configuration Interface Tips
To change the network connection type from DHCP (default) to Static IP – navigate to Network/IPv4 Setup; click on Specific
IP Address; enter values into the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields; then click Accept.
To enable/disable auto-setup – navigate to Switcher/Status; click the System Auto-Setup check box to add a check mark
(enabled) or remove a check mark (disabled).
To route audio without the benefit of audio options available via the interface – navigate to Switcher/Configuration; select
Audio Switch Mode; select Outputs Only in the Config Viewer options; select the desired output; select Switched Audio
Routing from the General options.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 164
NetLinx® Studio
NetLinx ® Studio
Overview
Each Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher contains an integrated NetLinx NX Central Controller (Master). Control for Enova DGX 100
Series Switchers is provided through several methods:
Enova DGX Switcher Configuration (an onboard web configurator) – See the Switching, Configuration, and Status chapter
NetLinx Studio – See below
SEND_COMMANDs – See the NetLinx Programming chapter (page 167)
Control panel – See the Control Panel Operation chapter (page 201)
DGX_SHELL Commands – See Appendix C–DGX_SHELL Commands (page 228)
BCS Commands – See the Basic Control Structure (BCS) Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com
NOTE: When routing audio to or from Audio Switching Board connectors using BCS (Basic Control Structure protocol), switching
audio must be executed on Level 2 (see the BCS Programming Guide at www.amx.com).
This chapter focuses on control via NetLinx Studio, AMX’s programming, organization, and support software. This chapter provides
NetLinx Studio information for the Network Administrator during initial setup.
Installing NetLinx Studio
Connecting to a Master
Enabling control characters
Additional information for NetLinx Studio is covered in WebConsole & Programming Guide - NX-Series Controllers at www.amx.com.
NOTE: Instructions on traditional NetLinx binding of DXLink Fiber and DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters and Receivers are available within those products’ Hardware Reference Manuals.
NOTE: Additional support for NetLinx code development is available through the “Language Reference Guide – NetLinx Programming
Language” at www.amx.com.
Installing NetLinx Studio and Connecting to a Master
System Requirements
Minimum web browser requirements – Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later, Mozilla Firefox 3.6.8 or later, or any other web browser compatible with these browsers.
NOTE: User experience may differ due to browser support for HTML5.
NOTE: Best practices for control of the integrated Master include using the most up-to-date version of control software.
To install NetLinx Studio:
1.
Download NetLinx Studio from www.amx.com/products/NetLinxStudio.asp (requires login permissions).
2.
Extract the downloaded files (files are compressed).
3.
Run NetLinx Studio Setup.
4.
Optional – review the NetLinx Studio ReadMe file.
5.
Launch NetLinx Studio.
NOTE: The steps below assume that the Enova DGX is powered on and connected to the public LAN via the LAN 100/1000 port on the enclosure’s CPU.
To connect to a Master:
1.
Launch NetLinx Studio.
2.
From the Settings Menu, select Workspace Communication Settings.
The Workspace Communication Settings dialog box opens.
3.
Click Default Settings.
The Communication Settings dialog box opens.
4.
Select the Network tab.
If the system is displayed in the list – select the system, click the Select button, and then skip to Step 6.
Or
If the system is not in the list – click the Listen for Masters button.
The Listen for Masters dialog box opens.
5.
Click the Start Listening button. When the system appears in the list, click the Stop Listening button, select the system, and click the Select to Add button. Click Exit.
6.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select the system and click the Select button.
7.
Click OK to exit the Communication Settings dialog box. Click OK to exit the Workspace Communication Settings dialog box.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 165
NetLinx Studio Tips
NetLinx® Studio
8.
Right-click in the Workspace Bar and select Refresh System OnLine Tree.
The Workspace Bar refreshes with the system displayed.
Enabling Control Characters in a Terminal or Telnet Session
Control characters (non-alphabet characters) are not enabled by default, and so must be enabled in order to use them in terminal sessions (including Telnet).
To enable Control Characters in a Terminal/Telnet Session:
1.
Launch NetLinx Studio.
2.
From the Settings Menu, select Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.
3.
On the left side of the dialog box, select Terminal - TELNET Windows.
4.
On the right side of the dialog box (near the top), check the box to Send Ctrl characters to port.
5.
Click OK.
NetLinx Studio Tips
To launch the System Configuration interface from NetLinx Studio – right-click on the integrated Master and select Web
Control Page/Launch Web Control Page via either NetLinx Studio or your default browser.
To launch a Telnet session from NetLinx Studio – right-click on the integrated Master and select TELNET Window/Launch
TELNET Window via either NetLinx Studio or a User Defined Program.
To launch a terminal session from NetLinx Studio – select Tools/Terminal Session and configure the connection for either serial or USB settings.
To discover the integrated Master’s IP address from NetLinx Studio – right-click on the integrated Master and select Show
Device Properties.
To set AxLink device numbers from NetLinx Studio – select Tools/DIP Switch... and then make selections from the DIP
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 166
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Integrated Master – NetLinx ® Programming
Overview
IMPORTANT: The SEND_COMMANDs listed in this chapter are for the Switcher, Video Input and Output Boards, and Audio Switching
Input and Output Boards. For information on using NetLinx Studio, the System Configuration interface, and additional NetLinx commands, see the “WebConsole & Programming Guide – NX-Series Controllers” (available at www.amx.com).
The integrated NetLinx Master on the Enova DGX Switcher recognizes SEND_COMMANDs. Use NetLinx Studio (v4.0 or later is required) to send these commands to the Enova DGX Switcher, or use these commands in standard compiled NetLinx Programming code running on the integrated NetLinx Master.
The Device in <Device:Port:System> is the Enova DGX enclosure’s device number (see “Device Numbering” below).
NOTE: If a single Master control point is desired for multiple Enova DGX enclosures, write the NetLinx code to provide the connection between the Masters.
Device Numbering
The NX Master number (00000) and the Device ID number (default 05002) are listed in NetLinx Studio’s OnLine Tree (FIG. 100).
The Device number is also listed in the System Configuration interface (under System/Devices).
Integrated NX Master
Device ID number
OnLine Tree tab
FIG. 100
NetLinx Studio OnLine Tree - indicating Master number and device number and ports for Enova DGX
NOTE: For additional information on using NetLinx Studio, refer to the “Instruction Manual – NetLinx Studio” (at www.amx.com).
NOTE: For NetLinx programming purposes, each AxLink device must be assigned a unique number to locate that device on the bus.
The range for AxLink device numbers is 1-255.
IMPORTANT: Best practices for using SEND_COMMANDs with DXLink endpoints include sending commands to the specific input or output port of the Enova DGX switcher (e.g., 5002:4:0 for input/output channel 4). For a complete list of NetLinx Programming
Commands, Channels, Levels and Port mapping, see the “Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers Hardware Reference
Manual” at www.amx.com.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 167
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Enclosure Port Mapping
Enova DGX 800 Port Mapping
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
13
14
15
16
17
Input Port Mapping
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Input 1
4
Audio/Video Input 2
Audio/Video Input 3
Audio/Video Input 4
Audio/Video Input 5
Audio/Video Input 6
Audio/Video Input 7
Audio/Video Input 8
Audio Input 9
Audio Input 10
Audio Input 11
Audio Input 12
Audio Input 13
Audio Input 14
Audio Input 15
Audio Input 16
Downmix Input 17
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
13
14
15
16
Output Port Mapping
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Output 1
4
Audio/Video Output 2
Audio/Video Output 3
Audio/Video Output 4
Audio/Video Output 5
Audio/Video Output 6
Audio/Video Output 7
Audio/Video Output 8
Audio Output 9
Audio Output 10
Audio Output 11
Audio Output 12
Audio Output 13
Audio Output 14
Audio Output 15
Audio Output 16
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
Enova DGX 1600 Port Mapping
Input Port Mapping
Port # Description
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Audio/Video Input 1
Audio/Video Input 2
Audio/Video Input 3
Audio/Video Input 4
Audio/Video Input 5
Audio/Video Input 6
Audio/Video Input 7
Audio/Video Input 8
Audio/Video Input 9
Audio/Video Input 10
Audio/Video Input 11
Audio/Video Input 12
Audio/Video Input 13
Audio/Video Input 14
Audio/Video Input 15
Audio/Video Input 16
Audio Input 17
Audio Input 18
Audio Input 19
Audio Input 20
Audio Input 21
Audio Input 22
Audio Input 23
Audio Input 24
Downmix Input 25
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
5002:19:0
5002:20:0
5002:21:0
5002:22:0
5002:23:0
5002:24:0
5002:25:0
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
5002:10:0
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
19
20
21
22
23
24
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Output Port Mapping
Port # Description Address
Audio/Video Output 1
Audio/Video Output 2
Audio/Video Output 3
Audio/Video Output 4
Audio/Video Output 5
Audio/Video Output 6
Audio/Video Output 7
Audio/Video Output 8
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
Audio/Video Output 9 5002:9:0
Audio/Video Output 10 5002:10:0
Audio/Video Output 11 5002:11:0
Audio/Video Output 12 5002:12:0
Audio/Video Output 13 5002:13:0
Audio/Video Output 14 5002:14:0
Audio/Video Output 15 5002:15:0
Audio/Video Output 16 5002:16:0
Audio Output 17
Audio Output 18
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
Audio Output 19
Audio Output 20
5002:19:0
5002:20:0
Audio Output 21
Audio Output 22
Audio Output 23
Audio Output 24
5002:21:0
5002:22:0
5002:23:0
5002:24:0
168
Enova DGX 3200 Port Mapping
Input Port Mapping
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
29
40
41
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Input 1
Audio/Video Input 2
Audio/Video Input 3
Audio/Video Input 4
Audio/Video Input 5
Audio/Video Input 6
Audio/Video Input 7
Audio/Video Input 8
Audio/Video Input 9
Audio/Video Input 10
Audio/Video Input 11
Audio/Video Input 12
Audio/Video Input 13
Audio/Video Input 14
Audio/Video Input 15
Audio/Video Input 16
Audio/Video Input 17
Audio/Video Input 18
Audio/Video Input 19
Audio/Video Input 20
Audio/Video Input 21
Audio/Video Input 22
Audio/Video Input 23
Audio/Video Input 24
Audio/Video Input 25
Audio/Video Input 26
Audio/Video Input 27
Audio/Video Input 28
Audio/Video Input 29
Audio/Video Input 30
Audio/Video Input 31
Audio/Video Input 32
Audio Input 33
Audio Input 34
Audio Input 35
Audio Input 36
Audio Input 37
Audio Input 38
Audio Input 39
Audio Input 40
Downmix Input 41
5002:30:0
5002:31:0
5002:32:0
5002:33:0
5002:34:0
5002:35:0
5002:36:0
5002:37:0
5002:38:0
5002:39:0
5002:20:0
5002:21:0
5002:22:0
5002:23:0
5002:24:0
5002:25:0
5002:26:0
5002:27:0
5002:28:0
5002:29:0
5002:40:0
5002:41:0
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
5002:19:0
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Output Port Mapping
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
29
40
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Output 1
Audio/Video Output 2
Audio/Video Output 3
Audio/Video Output 4
Audio/Video Output 5
Audio/Video Output 6
Audio/Video Output 7
Audio/Video Output 8
Audio/Video Output 9
Audio/Video Output 10
Audio/Video Output 11
Audio/Video Output 12
Audio/Video Output 13
Audio/Video Output 14
Audio/Video Output 15
Audio/Video Output 16
Audio/Video Output 17
Audio/Video Output 18
Audio/Video Output 19
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
5002:19:0
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
Audio/Video Output 20 5002:20:0
Audio/Video Output 21 5002:21:0
Audio/Video Output 22 5002:22:0
Audio/Video Output 23 5002:23:0
Audio/Video Output 24 5002:24:0
Audio/Video Output 25 5002:25:0
Audio/Video Output 26 5002:26:0
Audio/Video Output 27 5002:27:0
Audio/Video Output 28 5002:28:0
Audio/Video Output 29 5002:29:0
Audio/Video Output 30 5002:30:0
Audio/Video Output 31 5002:31:0
Audio/Video Output 32 5002:32:0
Audio Output 33 5002:33:0
Audio Output 34
Audio Output 35
Audio Output 36
Audio Output 37
Audio Output 38
Audio Output 39
Audio Output 40
5002:34:0
5002:35:0
5002:36:0
5002:37:0
5002:38:0
5002:39:0
5002:40:0
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 169
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Enova DGX 6400 Port Mapping
Input Port Mapping
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
29
44
45
46
47
48
40
41
42
43
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Input 1
Audio/Video Input 2
Audio/Video Input 3
Audio/Video Input 4
Audio/Video Input 5
Audio/Video Input 6
Audio/Video Input 7
Audio/Video Input 8
Audio/Video Input 9
Audio/Video Input 10
Audio/Video Input 11
Audio/Video Input 12
Audio/Video Input 13
Audio/Video Input 14
Audio/Video Input 15
Audio/Video Input 16
Audio/Video Input 17
Audio/Video Input 18
Audio/Video Input 19
Audio/Video Input 40
Audio/Video Input 41
Audio/Video Input 42
Audio/Video Input 43
Audio/Video Input 44
Audio/Video Input 45
Audio/Video Input 46
Audio/Video Input 47
Audio/Video Input 48
Audio/Video Input 20
Audio/Video Input 21
Audio/Video Input 22
Audio/Video Input 23
Audio/Video Input 24
Audio/Video Input 25
Audio/Video Input 26
Audio/Video Input 27
Audio/Video Input 28
Audio/Video Input 29
Audio/Video Input 30
Audio/Video Input 31
Audio/Video Input 32
Audio/Video Input 33
Audio/Video Input 34
Audio/Video Input 35
Audio/Video Input 36
Audio/Video Input 37
Audio/Video Input 38
Audio/Video Input 39
5002:30:0
5002:31:0
5002:32:0
5002:33:0
5002:34:0
5002:35:0
5002:36:0
5002:37:0
5002:38:0
5002:39:0
5002:20:0
5002:21:0
5002:22:0
5002:23:0
5002:24:0
5002:25:0
5002:26:0
5002:27:0
5002:28:0
5002:29:0
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
5002:19:0
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
5002:40:0
5002:41:0
5002:42:0
5002:43:0
5002:44:0
5002:45:0
5002:46:0
5002:47:0
5002:48:0
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
Output Port Mapping
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
29
44
45
46
47
48
40
41
42
43
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Port # Description
1 Audio/Video Output 1
Audio/Video Output 2
Audio/Video Output 3
Audio/Video Output 4
Audio/Video Output 5
Audio/Video Output 6
Audio/Video Output 7
Audio/Video Output 8
Audio/Video Output 9
Audio/Video Output 10
Audio/Video Output 11
Audio/Video Output 12
Audio/Video Output 13
Audio/Video Output 14
Audio/Video Output 15
Audio/Video Output 16
Audio/Video Output 17
Audio/Video Output 18
Audio/Video Output 19
5002:10:0
5002:11:0
5002:12:0
5002:13:0
5002:14:0
5002:15:0
5002:16:0
5002:17:0
5002:18:0
5002:19:0
Address
5002:1:0
5002:2:0
5002:3:0
5002:4:0
5002:5:0
5002:6:0
5002:7:0
5002:8:0
5002:9:0
Audio/Video Output 20
Audio/Video Output 21
Audio/Video Output 22
Audio/Video Output 23
Audio/Video Output 24
Audio/Video Output 25
Audio/Video Output 26
Audio/Video Output 27
Audio/Video Output 28
Audio/Video Output 29
Audio/Video Output 39
Audio/Video Output 40
Audio/Video Output 41
Audio/Video Output 42
Audio/Video Output 43
Audio/Video Output 44
Audio/Video Output 45
Audio/Video Output 46
Audio/Video Output 47
Audio/Video Output 48
5002:20:0
5002:21:0
5002:22:0
5002:23:0
5002:24:0
5002:25:0
5002:26:0
5002:27:0
5002:28:0
5002:29:0
Audio/Video Output 30 5002:30:0
Audio/Video Output 31 5002:31:0
Audio/Video Output 32 5002:32:0
Audio/Video Output 33 5002:33:0
Audio/Video Output 34 5002:34:0
Audio/Video Output 35 5002:35:0
Audio/Video Output 36 5002:36:0
Audio/Video Output 37 5002:37:0
Audio/Video Output 38 5002:38:0
5002:39:0
5002:40:0
5002:41:0
5002:42:0
5002:43:0
5002:44:0
5002:45:0
5002:46:0
5002:47:0
5002:48:0
170
Input Port Mapping
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
81
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
67
68
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
57
58
Audio/Video Input 49
Audio/Video Input 50
Audio/Video Input 51
Audio/Video Input 52
Audio/Video Input 53
Audio/Video Input 54
Audio/Video Input 55
Audio/Video Input 56
Audio/Video Input 57
Audio/Video Input 58
Audio/Video Input 59
Audio/Video Input 60
Audio/Video Input 61
Audio/Video Input 62
Audio/Video Input 63
Audio/Video Input 64
Audio Input 65
Audio Input 66
Audio Input 67
Audio Input 68
Audio Input 69
Audio Input 70
Audio Input 71
Audio Input 72
Audio Input 73
Audio Input 74
Audio Input 75
Audio Input 76
Audio Input 77
Audio Input 78
Audio Input 79
Audio Input 80
Downmix Input 81
5002:69:0
5002:70:0
5002:71:0
5002:72:0
5002:73:0
5002:74:0
5002:75:0
5002:76:0
5002:77:0
5002:78:0
5002:79:0
5002:80:0
5002:81:0
5002:59:0
5002:60:0
5002:61:0
5002:62:0
5002:63:0
5002:64:0
5002:65:0
5002:66:0
5002:67:0
5002:68:0
5002:49:0
5002:50:0
5002:51:0
5002:52:0
5002:53:0
5002:54:0
5002:55:0
5002:56:0
5002:57:0
5002:58:0
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Output Port Mapping
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
67
68
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
57
58
Audio/Video Output 49 5002:49:0
Audio/Video Output 50 5002:50:0
Audio/Video Output 51 5002:51:0
Audio/Video Output 52 5002:52:0
Audio/Video Output 53 5002:53:0
Audio/Video Output 54 5002:54:0
Audio/Video Output 55 5002:55:0
Audio/Video Output 56 5002:56:0
Audio/Video Output 57 5002:57:0
Audio/Video Output 58 5002:58:0
Audio/Video Output 59 5002:59:0
Audio/Video Output 60 5002:60:0
Audio/Video Output 61 5002:61:0
Audio/Video Output 62 5002:62:0
Audio/Video Output 63 5002:63:0
Audio/Video Output 64 5002:64:0
Audio Output 65
Audio Output 66
5002:65:0
5002:66:0
Audio Output 67
Audio Output 68
5002:67:0
5002:68:0
Audio Output 69
Audio Output 70
Audio Output 71
Audio Output 72
Audio Output 73
Audio Output 74
Audio Output 75
Audio Output 76
Audio Output 77
Audio Output 78
Audio Output 79
Audio Output 80
5002:69:0
5002:70:0
5002:71:0
5002:72:0
5002:73:0
5002:74:0
5002:75:0
5002:76:0
5002:77:0
5002:78:0
5002:79:0
5002:80:0
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 171
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
NetLinx Channels and Levels
NetLinx Channels
NetLinx Channels
Channel Type Usage
Output Audio (Switched Audio Only)
24
25
CMD
CMD
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
26
199
164
165
CMD
CMD, FDBK
CMD
CMD
Pulse
ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
DXLink TX VGA Input Video
83 CMD
84
132
CMD
CMD
133
134
135
Output Video
CMD
CMD
CMD
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
Pulse, ON/OFF
210
213
CMD, FDBK
CMD, FDBK
234 CMD, FDBK
System Alarm Status
216
217
218
FDBK
FDBK
FDBK
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ports
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
DXLink TX VGA Inputs
All A/V Outputs
All A/V Outputs
All A/V Outputs
Responds on 5002:1:0
Responds on 5002:1:0
Responds on 5002:1:0
Description
Volume Up
Volume Down
Volume Mute Toggle
Volume Mute
Balance Ramp Up
Balance Ramp Down
Video In Phase Up
Video In Phase Down
Video In V Shift Up
Video In V Shift Down
Video In H Shift Up
Video In H Shift Down
Video Mute
Video Freeze
On-Screen Display (OSD)
Fan Alarm Status
Temperature Alarm Status
Power Alarm Status
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 172
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
NetLinx Levels
NetLinx Levels
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
Level
Input Audio
Ports
5 All A/V & ASB Inputs
Output Audio (Switched Audio Only)
31
32
1
2
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
All A/V & ASB Outputs
DXLink TX VGA Input Video
17 DXLink TX VGA Inputs
19 DXLink TX VGA Inputs
Output Video
20
22
All A/V Outputs
All A/V Outputs
Output Switching Levels
50 All A/V Outputs
Range
-24 to 24
0 to 100
-20 to 20
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-12 to 12
-50 to 50
-10 to 10
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to Max Input
51 All A/V & ASB Outputs
Function
-24 dB to 24 dB
Output Volume
Output Balance
Audio EQ Band 1
Audio EQ Band 2
Audio EQ Band 3
Audio EQ Band 4
Audio EQ Band 5
Audio EQ Band 6
Audio EQ Band 7
Audio EQ Band 8
Audio EQ Band 9
Audio EQ Band 10
Video Input Horizontal Shift
Video Input Vertical Shift
Video Output Brightness
Video Output Contrast
0 to Max Input
Video Switching: Level 50 for each output will be a value from 0 to Highest
Video Input Port indicating which video input is switched to that output.
Changing the value of this level results in a video switch.
Audio Switching: Level 51 for each output will be a value from 0 to Highest
Audio Input Port indicating which audio input is switched to that output.
Changing the value of this level results in a audio switch.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 173
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Digital Media Switchers: SEND_COMMANDs
IMPORTANT: The SEND_COMMANDs listed in this section are for the switcher only. For additional information on NetLinx commands used in conjunction with this product, see “WebConsole & Programming Guide – NX-Series Controllers” (available at www.amx.com).
Note the following port information:
Commands derive their port addressing from the target D:P:S (Device:Port:System).
To distinguish the functionality of signal input and output ports from the overlapped device port numbers, the signal input
and output numbers are part of the command’s action.
Video (with/without AIE*) input and output ranges:
Enova DGX 800: 1-8
Enova DGX 1600: 1-16
Enova DGX 3200: 1-32
Enova DGX 6400: 1-64
Audio Switching Board input and output ranges**:
Enova DGX 800: 1-8 embedded audio, 9-16 audio only^
Enova DGX 1600: 1-16 embedded audio, 17-24 audio only^
Enova DGX 3200: 1-32 embedded audio, 33-40 audio only^
Enova DGX 6400: 1-64 embedded audio, 65-80 audio only^
* Because the Audio Insert/Extract Board can be set to insert/extract audio into/out of video inputs or outputs, the audio signals from these boards switch as embedded audio in conjunction with the corresponding video signals.
** Audio Switching Board signal routing is accomplished via SEND_COMMANDs (see below), via the System Configuration interface
(see page 149), or as embedded audio only via the control panel (see page 201).
^ For each system, one port is available as an additional input for downmix. The downmix port number follows sequentially after the last audio only port (e.g., an Enova DGX 800 Switcher’s downmix port is port number 17).
NOTE: All text is based on a Unicode index.
Switcher SEND_COMMANDs
Command
AI<input>O<output>
Switches audio input port
<input> to audio output port
<output>.
NOTE: This command is only available when ASB boards are in the system and correctly installed (HSSI cable connected for Enova DGX
800,1600, and 3200).
Description
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AI<input>O<output>'"
Variables: input = The source audio input port number to switch from.
output = The destination audio output port number to switch to.
NOTE: For information on Audio Switching Board input and output ports, see the information at the top of this page.
Example:
?AUTO_SETUP
Requests the current state of the
Auto-setup mode.
NOTE: Mode is also visible on the System Configuration interface’s Switcher/Status page.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'AI2O1,2'"
Switch audio input port #2 to audio outputs #1 and #2.
TIP: Any input can be switched to one, many, or all outputs.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUTO_SETUP'"
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?AUTO_SETUP'"
Returns a response of the form: ON|OFF
NOTE: Command affects system-wide Auto-setup ON|OFF settings. AUTO_SETUP
Enables or Disables Auto-setup mode.
NOTE: Mode can also be set via the System Configuration interface’s Switcher/Status page.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUTO_SETUP-<ON|OFF>'"
Variables:
ON (default) = Enables Auto-setup so connected endpoints with default factory settings will automatically be bound to the DGX Master and given specific Private IP addresses and device numbers based on their channel number (see “Automatic Configuration of AMX Devices via ICS
OFF = Disables Auto-setup so connected endpoints will revert to traditional NDP/DHCP binding
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'AUTO_SETUP-OFF'"
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 174
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Switcher SEND_COMMANDs
CI<input>O<output>
Switches both the audio and video input port to the output port.
CL<L#>I<I#>O<O#>
?EXT_AUD
Requests the functional status of the Audio Switching Boards.
NOTE: This command does not apply to AIE Boards.
?FAN_ALARM
Requests the Fan Alarm State of the Switcher.
?FAN_SPEED
Requests the speed of the fans inside the Enova DGX Switcher.
?FG
Requests the Switcher’s FG
Number.
?IFCONFIG
Requests interface configuration settings.
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'CI<input>O<output>'"
Variables: input = The source input port number to switch from.
output = The destination output port number to switch to.
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'CI2O1'"
Switch (audio/video) input port #2 to output #1.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'CI3O1,2'"
Switch (audio/video) input port #3 to outputs #1 and #2.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'CI0O1,2,3'"
Disconnects output ports #1, #2, and #3.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'CL<Switch Level>I<Input>O<Outputs>'"
Variables: switch level = ALL, VIDEO, AUDIO input = The source input port number to switch from.
(Input of “0” acts as a disconnect for the routed Output(s)) output = The destination output port number to switch to.
NOTE: Returns TRUE only when the ASB cards are all inserted properly and the HSSI cable is attached (as directed for 800/1600/3200 systems).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?EXT_AUD'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0,"'?EXT_AUD'"
Returns a response of the form: TRUE|FALSE
NOTE: The fan alarm is triggered by one or more slow or stopped fan unit.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?FAN_ALARM'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?FAN_ALARM'"
Returns a response of the form: ON|OFF
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?FAN_SPEED-<Fan>'"
Variable:
Fan = Fan is an optional command, to query a specific fan
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0,"'?FAN_SPEED'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: FAN_SPEED-[<Fan1>,<Fan2>,..<FanN>]
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0,"'?FAN_SPEED-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: FAN_SPEED-1,<Fan1>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?FG'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?FG'"
NOTE: All changes to IP settings require a system reboot to take effect.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?IFCONFIG-1'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?IFCONFIG-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'IFCONFIG-
1,UP,S,ip=10.35.91.228,gw=10.35.90.1,mask=255.255.255.0,hn=mydgx'"
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 175
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Switcher SEND_COMMANDs
IFCONFIG
Allows a User to setup a secondary Public Ethernet interface on the Enova DGX
Switcher.
?INPUT
Requests the input connected to an output.
?MODEL
Requests the Switcher’s model type.
?OUTPUT
Requests the output(s) connected to an input.
?POWER_ALARM
Requests the Power Alarm State of the Switcher.
REBOOT
Reboots the Switcher.
NOTE: All changes to DHCP settings require a system reboot to take effect.
Syntax follows:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'IFCONFIG-1,<enablement>,<mode>,<IP Address>,<Gateway>,
<Netmask>,<Hostname>'"
Variables:
Enablement = UP or DOWN
Mode = D (DHCP) or S (Static)
IP Address = Valid IP Address
Gateway = Valid Gateway Address
Netmask = Valid Netmask
Hostname = 32 Character String
NOTE: The gateway, IP address, and netmask variables are only needed for Static IP addresses.
Example Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'IFCONFIG-
1,UP,S,ip=10.35.90.228,gw=10.35.90.1,mask=255.255.255.0,hn=mydgx'"
Enables Static IP Address.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'IFCONFIG-1,UP,D'"
Enables Dynamic IP Address.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'IFCONFIG-1,DOWN'"
Disables IP connection.
Normally, if the output port is not connected to any input port then the reply will indicate this with an input port number of ZERO (0).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?INPUT-<Switch Level>,<Output>'"
Variables:
Switch Level = AUDIO or VIDEO.
Output = The output port number.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?INPUT-AUDIO,1'"
TIP: Think of the command as asking, “Which audio input port is connected to output port #1?”
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
SWITCH-L<AUDIO|VIDEO>I<Input>O<Output>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?MODEL'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?MODEL'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
MODEL-<type> types = AMX Enova DGX 800, AMX Enova DGX 1600, AMX Enova DGX 3200, AMX Enova DGX 6400
Normally, if the output port is not connected to any input port then the reply will indicate this with an output port number of ZERO (0).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?OUTPUT-<Switch Level>,<Input>'"
Variables:
Switch Level = AUDIO or VIDEO or ALL (both Audio and Video).
Input = The source input port number.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?OUTPUT-VIDEO,1'"
TIP: Think of the command as asking, “Which video output port is connected to input port #1?”
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
SWITCH-L<AUDIO|VIDEO>I<Input>O<Output>
NOTE: The power alarm is triggered by a lack of power to any of the internal cards, any input or output card, or any of the power supplies.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?POWER_ALARM'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?POWER_ALARM'"
Returns a response of the form: ON|OFF
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'REBOOT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'REBOOT'"
Results in the Switcher rebooting.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 176
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Switcher SEND_COMMANDs
?TEMP
Requests the temperature detected inside the Switcher.
Temperature values are returned in Celsius.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?TEMP'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?TEMP'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
TEMP-<temperature value in degrees Celsius>.
?TEMP_ALARM
Requests the Temperature Alarm
State of the Switcher.
VI<input>O<output>
Switch input to one or more outputs for switcher level Video.
NOTE: The temperature alarm is triggered by heat sensors on both center boards and Input and
Output boards.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?TEMP_ALARM'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'?TEMP_ALARM'"
Returns a response of the form: ON|OFF
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
TIP: Set <input> to 0 for disconnect.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'VI<input>O<output>'"
Variables: input = The source video input port number to switch from output = The destination video output port number to switch to
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'VI2O1'"
Switch video input port #2 to video output #1.
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:0, "'VI3O1,2'"
Switch video input port #3 to video output ports #1 and #2.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 177
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Input/Output Boards: SEND_COMMANDs
IMPORTANT: The SEND_COMMANDs listed in this section are for standard Input and Output Boards only (HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted
Pair, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, and DXLink Fiber). SEND_COMMANDs for Audio Switching Boards are covered on page 188.
For additional information on NetLinx commands used in conjunction with this product, see the “WebConsole & Programming Guide –
NX-Series Controllers” (available at www.amx.com).
Variables for I# and O#
The I# (input port number) and O# (output port number) variables in the following table depend on the input and output ranges.
Standard board (with/without audio from audio boards) input and output ranges are:
Enova DGX 800: 1-8
Enova DGX 1600: 1-16
Enova DGX 3200: 1-32
Enova DGX 6400: 1-64
NOTE: All text is based on a Unicode index.
Standard Input SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?AUDIN_DIGITAL
Requests the format of the specified audio port.
AUDIN_DIGITAL
Sets the format of the specified audio port.
?AUDIN_ENCODING
Requests the Audio input’s encoding.
?AUDIN_NAME
Requests the name of the specified input port.
AUDIN_NAME
Sets the name of the specified input port to <name>.
NOTE: The Input name may be changed using either the
VIDIN_NAME or AUDIN_NAME command. Both commands are used to change the same name attribute and do not create separate names for video or audio.
?AUDIN_STATUS
Determines if there is audio present on a port.
?VIDIN_CABLE_CONNECTED
Determines if a Video Source is connected to a Video Input Port.
Description
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_DIGITAL'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_DIGITAL'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_DIGITAL-<format>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDIN_DIGITAL-<format>'"
Variable: format = PCM-2CH, PCM-8CH, DOLBY DIGITAL, TRUEHD, DTS, DTSHD, MPEG, AAC
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'AUDIN_DIGITAL-AAC'"
Sets the audio format for the audio input port to AAC.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_ENCODING'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_ENCODING'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_ENCODING-<PCM|COMPRESSED|HBR>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_NAME'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_NAME'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_NAME-<name>
The <name> length is limited to 31 characters. Specifying a longer name results in truncation to the
31 character length limit.
Valid characters are:
• a-z (lowercase letters)
• A-Z (uppercase letters)
• 0-9 (numerals)
• #.-_=+ (special characters: hash, period, dash, underscore, equal, plus, <space> [space characters at the beginning of a name are truncated])
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDIN_NAME-<name>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'AUDIN_NAME-MyStereo'"
Sets the name of input port #1 to MyStereo.
This is used for the On Screen Display feature.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_STATUS-<VALID SIGNAL|NO SIGNAL>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <dev>, "'?VIDIN_CABLE_CONNECTED'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <5002:1:1>, "'?VIDIN_CABLE_CONNECTED'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_CABLE_<CONNECTED|DISCONNECTED>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 178
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Input SEND_COMMANDs
?VIDIN_EDID
Requests the EDID source being mirrored by the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDIN_EDID
Sets the EDID for the input port addressed by D:P:S (default is
ALL RESOLUTIONS).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_EDID'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_EDID'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_EDID-<source>
See the VIDIN_EDID command for the list of potential sources.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_EDID-<source>'"
Variables:
Source = All Resolutions, Wide-screen, Full-screen, Custom, 4K
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_EDID-Wide-screen'"
?VIDIN_EDID_DATA
Requests the EDID of a Video
Input Port.
VIDIN_EDID_DATA
Sets the EDID of a Video Input
Port.
?VIDIN_FORMAT
Requests the input format of the video port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?VIDIN_HDCP
Requests the video input HDCP compliance setting of the specified video input port.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_EDID_DATA'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11, "'?VIDIN_EDID_DATA'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_EDID_DATA-
00FFFFFFFFFFFF0005B800150100000001180103800000780
A14E5A3564C9D250E5054200000D100D1E8D1FCB3008100
81C061003118DE0DD0D820902E102448130000000000001A
011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E000000FD0017
780F6611000A202020202020000000FC00414D585F48444D4
93576310A200139020323F067030C002000802C4E10202122
1F2805142F290403120723090707830100008F2F78D0511A2
7405890340056502100001E0E1F008051001E3040803E01565
021000018DE0DD0D820902E10244813005650210000184E0C8
0C020902D102040130056502100001E00000000000000000000
000000000000000000008E
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'VIDIN_EDID_DATA-<EDID Data>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'VIDIN_EDID_DATA-
00FFFFFFFFFFFF0005B800150100000001180103800000780
A14E5A3564C9D250E5054200000D100D1E8D1FCB3008100
81C061003118DE0DD0D820902E102448130000000000001A
011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E000000FD0017
780F6611000A202020202020000000FC00414D585F48444D4
93576310A200139020323F067030C002000802C4E10202122
1F2805142F290403120723090707830100008F2F78D0511A2
7405890340056502100001E0E1F008051001E3040803E01565
021000018DE0DD0D820902E10244813005650210000184E0C8
0C020902D102040130056502100001E00000000000000000000
000000000000000000008E'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_FORMAT'"
Variables:
Format = HDMI, DVI, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT, COMPOSITE, VGA (for Multi-Format inputs)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1, "'?VIDIN_FORMAT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDIN_FORMAT-<format>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_HDCP'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1, "'?VIDIN_HDCP'"
Returns a string of the form:
VIDIN_STATUS-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 179
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Input SEND_COMMANDs
VIDIN_HDCP
Sets the video input HDCP compliance setting of the specified video input port.
NOTE: VIDIN_HDCP commands for Solecis switchers must be sent directly to the Solecis unit, not sent via the 5002 device.
When VIDIN_HDCP is disabled, the addressed video input will appear to any source as not being HDCP compliant.
For computer sources that encrypt all video when connected to an HDCP compliant display, disabling
HDCP compliance on the input will cause the computer to send non-encrypted video which can then be routed to non-compliant displays and video conferencing systems.
NOTE: It may be necessary to disconnect and re-connect PC sources after changing this setting.
IMPORTANT: Disabling HDCP compliance for sources that do not support non-compliant displays
(such as DVD and Blu-Ray players) is not recommended and may affect the source’s ability to send video.
Syntax:
?HDCPSTATUS
Request the video input encryption status addressed by the D:P:S
?VIDIN_NAME
Requests the input name of the specified video port.
VIDIN_NAME
Sets the name of the specified port to <name>.
NOTE: The Input name may be changed using either the
VIDIN_NAME or AUDIN_NAME command. Both commands are used to change the same name attribute and do not create separate names for video or audio.
?VIDIN_PREF_EDID
Requests the preferred resolution of the EDID source being mirrored by the specified video port.
VIDIN_PREF_EDID
Sets the preferred resolution for the EDID source to mirror in the specified video input port
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_HDCP-<option>'"
Variables: option = ENABLE, DISABLE (default = ENABLE)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_HDCP-ENABLE'"
Enables the HDCP compliance of video input port #1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?HDCPSTATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?HDCPSTATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
HDCPSTATUS-<status string> status string = ENABLE, DISABLE, or ERROR.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDIN_NAME'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_NAME'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDIN_NAME-<name>
The <name> length is limited to 31 characters. Specifying a longer name will result in truncation to the 31 character length limit.
Valid characters are:
• a-z (lower case letters)
• A-Z (upper case letters)
• 0-9 (numeric)
• #.-_=+ (special characters hash, period, dash, underscore, equal, plus <space>
[space characters at the beginning of a name are truncated])
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_NAME-<name>'"
Variables: name = A string name (e.g., PC 1)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_NAME-MyPC'"
Sets the name of input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to MyPC. This is used for the On Screen Display feature.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,“'?VIDIN_PREF_EDID'”
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,“'?VIDIN_PREF_EDID'”
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_PREF_EDID-<resolution>
IMPORTANT: You can only set the preferred resolution if you use the VIDIN_EDID command to set the EDID source to All Resolutions, Wide-screen, Full-screen, or 4K.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,“'VIDIN_PREF_EDID-<resolution>'”
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,“'VIDIN_PREF_EDID-1280x1024,60'”
?VIDIN_RES_REF
Requests the resolution of the video input port addressed by the D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_RES_REF'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_RES_REF'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_RES_REF-<h>x<v>,<rate>.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 180
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Input SEND_COMMANDs
?VIDIN_STATUS
Requests the video input status of the video input port addressed by the D:P:S
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDIN_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1, "'?VIDIN_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDIN_STATUS-<status string> status string = NO SIGNAL, UNKNOWN SIGNAL, or VALID SIGNAL.
Standard Output SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?AUDOUT_ENCODING
Requests the audio output’s encoding.
?AUDOUT_NAME
Requests the name of the specified output port.
AUDOUT_NAME
Sets the name of the specified output port to <name>.
NOTE: The Output name may be changed using either the
VIDOUT_NAME or
AUDOUT_NAME command.
Both commands are used to change the same name attribute and do not create separate names for video or audio.
?VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO
Requests the aspect ratio of the video output port addressed by the D:P:S.
Description
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDOUT_ENCODING'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1,"'?AUDOUT_ENCODING'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDOUT_ENCODING-<PCM|COMPRESSED|HBR>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDOUT_NAME'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1,"'?AUDOUT_NAME'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDOUT_NAME-<name>
The <name> length is limited to 31 characters. Specifying a longer name results in truncation to the
31 character length limit.
Valid characters are:
• a-z (lowercase letters)
• A-Z (uppercase letters)
• 0-9 (numerals)
• #.-_=+ (special characters: hash, period, dash, underscore, equal, plus, <space> [space characters at the beginning of a name are truncated])
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDOUT_NAME-<name>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1,"'AUDOUT_NAME-MyStereo'"
Sets the name of the Output port to MyStereo. This is used for the On Screen Display feature.
VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO
Sets the aspect ratio of the video output port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_BLANK
Requests the image setting of the video blanking feature on the video port addressed by the
D:P:S.
VIDOUT_BLANK
Sets the image of the video blanking feature for the video output port addressed by the
D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1, "'?VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO-<ratio>
NOTE: See the VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO command for the list of aspect ratios.
NOTE: The <ratio> value is case sensitive.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO-<ratio>'"
Variables: ratio = MAINTAIN, STRETCH, ZOOM, ANAMORPHIC (dependent on board type)
NOTE: This command also accepts FULL in place of MAINTAIN.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1, "'VIDOUT_ASPECT_RATIO-ZOOM'"
Sets the output port’s aspect ratio to zoom.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_BLANK'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_BLANK'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_BLANK-<image>
See the VIDOUT_BLANK command for the list of images.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_BLANK-<image>'"
Variables: image = black, blue
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_BLANK'"
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 181
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Output SEND_COMMANDs
?VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS
Requests the output brightness of the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS
Sets the output brightness of the video port addressed by the
D:P:S to <value>.
?VIDOUT_CABLE_CONNECTED
Determines if a Video Display is connected to a Video Output
Port.
?VIDOUT_CONTRAST
Requests the output contrast of the video port addressed by the
D:P:S.
VIDOUT_CONTRAST
Sets the output contrast of the video port addressed by the
D:P:S to <value>.
?VIDOUT_EDID_DATA
Requests the EDID of a Video
Output Port.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS-<value>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS-<value>'"
Variables:
Value = 0 to 100
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_BRIGHTNESS-50'"
Sets the brightness of video output port (#1 based on D:P:S) to 50.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <dev>,"'?VIDOUT_CABLE_CONNECTED'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <5002:1:1>,"'?VIDOUT_CABLE_CONNECTED'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_CABLE_<CONNECTED|DISCONNECTED>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_CONTRAST'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_CONTRAST'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_CONTRAST-<value>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_CONTRAST-<value>'"
Variables:
Value = 0 to 100
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_CONTRAST-50'"
Sets the contrast of video output port (#1 based on D:P:S) to 50.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDOUT_EDID_DATA'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11, "'?VIDOUT_EDID_DATA'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_EDID_DATA-
00FFFFFFFFFFFF0005B800150100000001180103800000780
?VIDOUT_EDID_LIST
Returns a list of resolutions the connected display supports.
?VIDOUT_FORMAT
Requests the Video Format of the
Video Output Port
?VIDOUT_FREEZE
Requests the status of the freeze option of the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
A14E5A3564C9D250E5054200000D100D1E8D1FCB3008100
81C061003118DE0DD0D820902E102448130000000000001A
011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E000000FD0017
780F6611000A202020202020000000FC00414D585F48444D4
93576310A200139020323F067030C002000802C4E10202122
1F2805142F290403120723090707830100008F2F78D0511A2
7405890340056502100001E0E1F008051001E3040803E01565
021000018DE0DD0D820902E10244813005650210000184E0C8
0C020902D102040130056502100001E00000000000000000000
000000000000000000008E
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_EDID_LIST'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11,"'?VIDOUT_EDID_LIST'"
VIDOUT_EDID_LIST-
["1360x768,60,DS","1280x720,60,DS","1920x540i,60,DS","1920x1080,60,DS","720x480,59,DS","
1440x240i,59,DS","1920x1080,24,DS","640x480,59,DS"]
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_FORMAT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_FORMAT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_FORMAT-<HDMI|DVI>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_FREEZE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_FREEZE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_FREEZE-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 182
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Output SEND_COMMANDs
VIDOUT_FREEZE
Enables or disables the Freeze setting on the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
If enabled, then the Freeze setting is on. If disabled, then the Freeze setting is off.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_FREEZE-<ENABLE|DISABLE>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_FREEZE-ENABLE'"
?VIDOUT_HDCP_STATUS
Requests the HDCP Status of a
Video Output Port.
?VIDOUT_MUTE
Requests to see if video mute is enabled or disabled.
VIDOUT_MUTE
Enables or disables video mute.
?VIDOUT_NAME
Requests the input name of the specified video port.
VIDOUT_NAME
Sets the input name of the specified video port to <name>.
NOTE: The Output name may be changed using either the
VIDOUT_NAME or
AUDOUT_NAME command.
Both commands are used to change the same name attribute and do not create separate names for video or audio.
?VIDOUT_OSD
Requests whether the video port addressed by the D:P:S has the
OSD setting enabled or disabled.
VIDOUT_OSD
Enables or Disables the On
Screen Display (OSD) setting on the video port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR
Requests the On Screen Display
(OSD) color on the display connected to the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_HDCP_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_HDCP_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_HDCP_STATUS-<ENABLED|DISABLED|ERROR>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_MUTE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_3,"'?VIDOUT_MUTE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_MUTE<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_MUTE-<ENABLE|DISABLE>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_6,"'VIDOUT_MUTE-ENABLE'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_NAME'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_NAME'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDOUT_NAME-<name>
The <name> length is limited to 31 characters. Specifying a longer name will result in truncation to the 31 character length limit.
Valid characters are:
• a-z (lower case letters)
• A-Z (upper case letters)
• 0-9 (numeric)
• #.-_=+ (special characters hash, period, dash, underscore, equal, plus <space>
[space characters at the beginning of a name are truncated])
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_NAME-<name>'"
Variables: name = A string name. e.g.: "Monitor 1"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_NAME-MyMonitor'"
Sets the name of Output port #1 to MyMonitor. This is used for the On Screen Display feature.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_OSD'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_OSD'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_OSD-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
If enabled, then the OSD setting is on. If disabled, then the OSD setting is off.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_OSD-<ENABLE|DISABLE>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_OSD-ENABLE'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR-<color>.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 183
VIDOUT_RES_REF commands
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Output SEND_COMMANDs
VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR
Determines the On Screen
Display (OSD) color scheme on the display connected to the video port addressed by the
D:P:S.
NOTE: Color option settings for OSD are combinations of a background color with a contrasting font color.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR-<color>'"
Variables: color = black, blue, white, yellow
Schemes:
Options Background Font
Black Black White
Blue Blue Yellow
White White Black
Yellow Yellow Blue
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_OSD_COLOR-BLACK'"
?VIDOUT_OSD_POS
Requests the On Screen Display
(OSD) position on the display connected to the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDOUT_OSD_POS
Determines the On Screen
Display (OSD) position on the display connected to the video port addressed by the D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_RES_REF
Requests the resolution and refresh rate of the video output port addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDOUT_RES_REF
Sets the resolution and refresh rate of the video output port addressed by D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_SCALE
Requests to see which scaling mode the video output port addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDOUT_SCALE
Sets the scaling mode for the video output port addressed by
D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_SLEEP
Requests whether a a Video
Output port turns off TMDS lines.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_OSD_POS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_OSD_POS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_OSD_POS-<position>.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_OSD_POS-<position>'"
Variables: position = TOP LEFT, TOP RIGHT, BTM RIGHT, BTM LEFT
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_OSD_POS-TOP LEFT'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDOUT_RES_REF'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_RES_REF'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_RES_REF-<h>x<v>,<rate>
Invalid combinations are ignored by the All-In-One Presentation Switcher.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_RES_REF-<horizontal>x<vertical>,<refresh-rate>'"
Variables:
Horizontal = An integer value representing the horizontal.
Vertical = An integer value representing the vertical.
(May have an additional qualifier such as 'i' or 'p')
Refresh-rate = An integer value representing the refresh rate.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_RES_REF-1280x1024,60'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDOUT_SCALE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1, "'?VIDOUT_SCALE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDOUT_SCALE-<scale>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_SCALE-<scale>'"
Variables: scale = Auto, Manual, or Bypass
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_SCALE-AUTO'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?VIDOUT_SLEEP'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11, "'?VIDOUT_SLEEP'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_SLEEP-ENABLE
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 184
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Standard Output SEND_COMMANDs
VIDOUT_SLEEP
Sets if a Video Output port turns off TMDS lines.
NOTE: While most monitors handle the sleep function well, some monitors continually attempt to wake up, resulting in constant or intermittent screen blanking when no video is present. For the video output attached to the problematic monitor, either uncheck the Allow Display Sleep option
and set the Blank Color in the System Configuration interface (see page 149) or set
VIDOUT_SLEEP-DISABLE
and VIDOUT_BLANK-<color>.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_SLEEP-<ENABLE|DISABLE>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1,"'VIDOUT_SLEEP-ENABLE'"
?VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY
Requests the amount of seconds the blanking color is displayed before the TMDS lines turn off.
VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY
Sets the amount of seconds the blanking color is displayed before the TMDS lines turn off.
?VIDOUT_STATUS
Requests the video status of the video output port addressed by the D:P:S.
?VIDOUT_TESTPAT
Requests the test pattern setting.
VIDOUT_TESTPAT
Sets the test pattern to display.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11,"'?VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY-600
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY-<time>'"
Variables: time: 1-32737 (in seconds)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:11,"'VIDOUT_SLEEP_DELAY-600'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDOUT_STATUS-<NO SIGNAL|UNKNOWN SIGNAL|VALID SIGNAL>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDOUT_TESTPAT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'?VIDOUT_TESTPAT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDOUT_TESTPAT-<pattern>
NOTE: See the VIDOUT_TESTPAT command for the list of test patterns.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDOUT_TESTPAT-<pattern>'"
Variables: pattern = Off, Color Bar, Gray Ramp, SMPTE Bar, HiLoTrak, Pluge, X-Hatch
(These options are not case sensitive.)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'VIDOUT_TESTPAT-X-Hatch'"
Sets the test pattern to display to “X-Hatch.”
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 185
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
DXLink Input and Output Boards: SEND_COMMANDs
NOTE: This section only applies to DXLink Twisted Pair, DXLink Twisted Pair 4K, and DXLink Fiber Input and Output Boards.
DXLink SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?AUDIN_FORMAT
Requests the input format of the audio port addressed by the
D:P:S.
AUDIN_FORMAT
Sets the input format of the audio port addressed by the
D:P:S to HDMI, SPDIF, or
ANALOG.
?AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO
Requests the format setting of an audio input port.
AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO
Enables or disables the audio input port addressed by the
D:P:S.
Description
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_FORMAT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_FORMAT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_FORMAT-<HDMI|SPDIF|ANALOG>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDIN_FORMAT-<format>'"
Variables: format = HDMI, SPDIF, ANALOG
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'AUDIN_FORMAT-<HDMI>'"
Sets the format of audio input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to HDMI.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO-<setting>'"
Variables: setting = ENABLE or DISABLE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'AUDIN_FORMAT_AUTO-ENABLE'"
?AUDOUT_FORMAT
Requests the output format of the audio port addressed by the
D:PS.
AUDOUT_FORMAT
Sets the output format of the audio port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?DXLINKIN_LINK_STATUS
Requests if an Endpoint is connected to the Input Board.
?DXLINKOUT_LINK_STATUS
Requests if an Endpoint is connected to the Output Board.
?DXLINKIN_QUALITY
Requests a value that represents the quality of the signal between an Input Port and an Endpoint.
?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY
Requests a value that represents the quality of the signal between an Output Port and an Endpoint.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?AUDOUT_FORMAT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1,"'?AUDOUT_FORMAT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDOUT_FORMAT-<format>.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'AUDOUT_FORMAT-<format>'"
Variables: format = HDMI, Analog, All
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_OUTPUT_1,"'AUDOUT_FORMAT-<HDMI>'"
Sets the format of audio output port (#1 based on D:P:S) to HDMI.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKIN_LINK_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND INPUT_1,"'?DXLINKIN_LINK_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DXLINKIN_LINK_STATUS-<DISCONNECTED|CONNECTED>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKOUT_LINK_STATUS'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND OUTPUT_1,"'?DXLINKOUT_LINK_STATUS'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DXLINKOUT_LINK_STATUS-<DISCONNECTED|CONNECTED>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKIN_QUALITY'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND INPUT_1,"'?DXLINKIN_QUALITY'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DXLINKIN_QUALITY--22
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND OUTPUT_1,"'?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DXLINKOUT_QUALITY--22
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 186
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
DXLink SEND_COMMANDs
?DXLINKIN_QUALITY_ALARM
Alarm is triggered when cable quality is beyond the threshold where overall performance issues are likely to occur.
?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY_ALARM
Alarm is triggered when cable quality is beyond the threshold where overall performance issues are likely to occur.
?VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT
Requests setting for the Auto
Select mode for the input signal addressed by the D:P:S.
VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT
Enables or disables the Auto
Select mode for the input signal addressed by the D:P:S.
?VIDIN_HSHIFT
Requests the input horizontal shift of the specified VGA video port.
VIDIN_HSHIFT
Sets the horizontal shift of the specified video port to <value>.
?VIDIN_PHASE
Requests the input phase of the specified VGA video port.
VIDIN_PHASE
Sets the input phase of the specified VGA video port.
?VIDIN_VSHIFT
Requests the vertical shift value of the specified RGB video input port.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKIN_QUALITY_ALARM'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND INPUT_1,"'?DXLINKIN_QUALITY_ALARM'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
DXLINKIN_QUALITY_ALARM-OFF or DXLINKIN_QUALITY_ALARM-ON
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY_ALARM'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND OUTPUT_1,"'?DXLINKOUT_QUALITY_ALARM'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
DXLINKOUT_QUALITY_ALARM-OFF or DXLINKOUT_QUALITY_ALARM-ON
NOTE: VIDIN_AUTO commands for Solecis Switchers must be sent directly to the Solecis unit, not sent via the 5002 device.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <dev>, "'?VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <5002:1:1>, "'?VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
NOTE: VIDIN_AUTO commands for Solecis Switchers must be sent directly to the Solecis unit, not sent via the 5002 device.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <dev>, "'VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT-<setting>'"
Setting = ENABLE or DISABLE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <5002:1:1>, "'?VIDIN_AUTO_SELECT-ENABLE'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDIN_HSHIFT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_HSHIFT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
VIDIN_HSHIFT-<value>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_HSHIFT-<value>'"
Variables: value = -50 to 50
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_HSHIFT-2'"
Sets the Horizontal shifting of VGA video input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to 2 (shift to right).
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_HSHIFT--3'"
Sets the horizontal shifting of VGA video input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to -3 (shift to left).
NOTE: This command is valid only for inputs whose format is set to VGA.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDIN_PHASE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_PHASE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_PHASE-<value>
NOTE: This command is valid only for inputs whose format is set to VGA.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_PHASE-<value>'"
Variables: value = 0 to 31
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_PHASE-23'"
Sets the phase of video input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to 23.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'?VIDIN_VSHIFT'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'?VIDIN_VSHIFT'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: VIDIN_VSHIFT-<value>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 187
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
DXLink SEND_COMMANDs
VIDIN_VSHIFT
Sets the vertical shift of the video port addressed by the
D:P:S to <value>.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_VSHIFT-<value>'"
Variables: value = -10 to 10
Example:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'VIDIN_VSHIFT-2'"
Sets the vertical shift of RGB video input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to 2 (shift upward).
SEND_COMMAND VIDEO_INPUT_1,"'VIDIN_VSHIFT--3'"
Sets the vertical shift of RGB video input port (#1 based on D:P:S) to -3 (shift downward).
Audio Switching Boards: SEND_COMMANDs
IMPORTANT: The SEND_COMMANDs listed in this section are for Audio Switching Boards only. For additional information on NetLinx commands used in conjunction with this product, see the “WebConsole & Programming Guide – NX-Series Controllers” (available at www.amx.com).
NOTE: This section does not apply to Audio Insert/Extract Boards.
Note the following port information:
Commands derive their port addressing from the target D:P:S (Device:Port:System).
ASB Commands can be sent to any input/output, but are only available when Audio Switching Boards are present in the system (and connected via an HSSI connector for Enova DGX 800, 1600, and 3200 systems).
For each system, one port is available as an additional input for downmix. The downmix port number follows sequentially after the last audio only port (e.g., an Enova DGX 800 Switcher’s downmix port is port number 17).
Audio Switching Boards signal routing is accomplished either via SEND_COMMANDs (see below) or via the System Configuration
NOTE: All text is based on a Unicode index.
Audio Switching Board SEND_COMMANDs
Audio Input SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?AUDIN_COMPRESSION
Requests the compression setting for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDIN_COMPRESSION
Sets the compression for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK
Requests the compression attack for the audio port.
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK
Sets the duration of the attack phase while compressing for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
Description
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDIN_COMPRESSION-<setting>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_COMPRESSION command for the list of settings.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION-<setting>'"
Variable: setting = off, low, medium, high, custom
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION-high'"
Sets the compression setting of the audio input port #1 to high.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_1, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK-<attack>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK command for the attack range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK-<attack>'"
Variable: attack = 1 to 2000
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_ATTACK-200'"
Sets the compression attack for the audio port to 200.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 188
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Input SEND_COMMANDs
?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO
Requests the compression ratio for the audio port.
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO
Sets the compression ratio for the audio input port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE
Requests the compression release for the audio port.
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE
Sets the duration of the release phase while compressing for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH
Requests the compression threshold for the audio port.
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH
Sets the compression threshold for the audio input port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDIN_GAIN
Requests the gain of the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDIN_GAIN
Sets the gain for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S to <gain>.
?AUDIN_STEREO
Requests the stereo setting of the audio input port addressed by the
D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO-<ratio>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO command for the compression ratio range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO-<ratio>'"
Variable: ratio = 1 to 20
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RATIO-5'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_1, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE-<release>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE command for the compression release range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE-<release>'"
Variable: release = 10 to 5000 (in ms)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_RELEASE-200'"
Sets the compression release for the audio port to 200.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'?AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH-<threshold>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH command for the compression threshold range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH-<threshold>'"
Variable: threshold = 0 to -60 (in dB)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_COMPRESSION_THRESH--10'"
Sets the threshold while compressing for selected audio input port to -10 dB.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_GAIN'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'?AUDIN_GAIN'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDIN_GAIN-<gain>
NOTE: See the AUDIN_GAIN command for the gain range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_GAIN-<gain>'"
Variable: gain = -24 to 24 (in dB)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_GAIN-12'"
Sets the gain of the audio input port to 12 dB.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDIN_STEREO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'?AUDIN_STEREO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDIN_STEREO-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 189
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Input SEND_COMMANDs
AUDIN_STEREO
Enables or disables the stereo setting on the audio input port addressed by the D:P:S.
NOTE: If enabled, the stereo setting is on. If disabled, the stereo setting is off, which means it is mono.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDIN_STEREO-<setting>'"
Variable: setting = stereo setting, either ENABLE or DISABLE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_INPUT_1, "'AUDIN_STEREO-ENABLE'"
Audio Output
SEND_COMMANDs
Audio Output SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?AUDOUT_BALANCE
Requests the current balance setting for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
Description
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_BALANCE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_BALANCE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_BALANCE-<balance>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_BALANCE command for the balance range.
Syntax: AUDOUT_BALANCE
Sets the left and right balance for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_BALANCE-<balance>'"
Variable: balance = -20 to +20 steps, left to right (default value is 0).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_BALANCE-5'"
Sets balance to favor the right speaker for audio output port #1 to 5 steps (+).
?AUDOUT_DELAY
Requests the delay for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_DELAY
Sets the delay for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDOUT_EQ_CF
Requests the center frequency on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_EQ_CF
Sets the center frequency on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_BALANCE--5'"
Sets balance to favor the left speaker for audio output port #1 to 5 steps (-).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_DELAY'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_DELAY'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_DELAY-<delay>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_DELAY command for the delay range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_DELAY-<delay>'"
Variable: delay = 0 to 200 (in ms)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_DELAY-50'"
Sets the delay for the audio output port to 50 milliseconds.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_CF-<band>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_CF-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_CF-<band>,<value>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_EQ_CF command for the band and value ranges.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_CF-<band>,<value>'"
Variables: band = 1 to 10 value = 20 to 20000 (in Hz)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_EQ_CF-1=80'"
Sets the center frequency on band #1 of audio port 1 equalizer to 80.
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_2, "'AUDOUT_EQ_CF-5=100'"
Sets the center frequency on band #5 of audio port 2 equalizer to 100.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 190
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Output SEND_COMMANDs
?AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE
Requests audio EQ enabled status.
AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE
Enables or disables audio EQ on all ports.
?AUDOUT_EQ_FT
Requests the filter type on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_EQ_FT
Sets the filter type on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S to <filter type>.
?AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN
Requests the gain on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN
Sets the gain on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the
D:P:S to <value>.
?AUDOUT_EQ_MODE
Requests the current mode of the equalizer for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_EQ_MODE
Sets the mode for the equalizer for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDOUT_EQ_Q
Requests the quality factor (Q) on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE-<ON|OFF>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE-<setting>'"
Variables: setting = desired EQ state, either ON or OFF
Example:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'AUDOUT_EQ_ENABLE-OFF'"
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_FT-<band>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_FT-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_FT-<band>,<filter>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_EQ_FT command for the band range and filter types.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_FT-<band>=<filter type>'"
Variables: band = 1 to 10 if on the audio output port.
filter type = Bell, Band Pass, Band Stop, High Pass, Low Pass, Treble Shelf, Bass Shelf
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_EQ_FT-1=Low Pass'"
Sets the filter type on band #1 of audio port 1 equalizer to Low Pass.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-<band>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-<band>,<value>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN command for the band and value ranges.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-<band>,<value>'"
Variables: band = 1 to 10 value = -12 to 12 (in dB)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-1,8'"
Sets the gain on band #1 of audio port 1 equalizer to 8.
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_2, "'AUDOUT_EQ_GAIN-5,-10'"
Sets the gain on band #5 of audio port 2 equalizer to -10.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "?'AUDOUT_EQ_MODE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_MODE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_MODE-<mode>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_EQ_MODE command for the list of mode settings.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_MODE-<mode>'"
Variables: mode = off, voice, music, movie
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_EQ_MODE-movie'"
Sets the equalizer to favor the sounds of a movie for the audio output port.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_Q-<band>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_EQ_Q-1'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_EQ_Q-<band>,<factor>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_EQ_Q command for the list of band and factor ranges.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 191
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Output SEND_COMMANDs
AUDOUT_EQ_Q
Sets the quality factor (Q) on the specified equalizer band on the audio output port addressed by the D:P:S to <value>.
?AUDOUT_MAXVOL
Requests the current maximum volume for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_MAXVOL
Sets the maximum volume for the audio port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?AUDOUT_MINVOL
Requests the current minimum volume for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_MINVOL
Sets the minimum volume for the audio port addressed by the
D:P:S.
?AUDOUT_MUTE
Requests audio mute status.
AUDOUT_MUTE
Enables or disables audio muting on the specified port/channel.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_EQ_Q-<band>,<factor>'"
Variables: band = 1 to 10 if on the audio output port.
factor = range depends on filter type (AUDOUT_EQ_FT)
Bell range = 0.1 to 20.0
Band Pass range = 0.1 to 20.0
Band Stop range = 0.1 to 20.0
High Pass range = 0.5 to 1.4
Low Pass range = 0.5 to 1.4
Treble Shelf range = 0.5 to 1.0
Bass Shelf range = 0.5 to 1.0
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_EQ_Q-1,8'"
Sets the Q on band #1 of the audio port 1 equalizer to 8.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_MAXVOL'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_MAXVOL'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_MAXVOL-<maximum>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_MAXVOL command for the maximum volume range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_MAXVOL-<maximum>'"
Variable: maximum = 0 to 100 (in %)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_MAXVOL-75'"
Sets the maximum for the audio output port to 75%.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_MINVOL'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_MINVOL'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_MINVOL-<minimum>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_MINVOL command for the minimum volume range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_MINVOL-<minimum>'"
Variable: minimum = 0 to 100 (in %)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_MINVOL-5'"
Sets the minimum for the audio output port to 5%.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_MUTE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'?AUDOUT_MUTE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_MUTE-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_MUTE-<setting>'"
Variables: setting = desired mute state, either ENABLE or DISABLE
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'AUDOUT_MUTE-DISABLE'"
SEND_COMMAND AUD_OUTPUT_4, "'AUDOUT_MUTE-ENABLE'"
AUDOUT_RESET_EQ
Restores each of the 10 EQ bands on a given port to default settings.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_RESET_EQ'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_RESET_EQ'"
Resets EQ bands to default settings on audio output port.
NOTE: Default values for EQ bands are – Gain = 0, Center frequency = 31, Q factor = 1.4, and
Filter type = BELL.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 192
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Output SEND_COMMANDs
?AUDOUT_STEREO
Request if audio amp output is in stereo.
AUDOUT_STEREO
Enables or disables audio amp output in stereo.
?AUDOUT_TESTTONE
Requests the current frequency of the test tone for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_TESTTONE
Sets the frequency of a test tone for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
?AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE
Requests the current setting of the test tone for the audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE
Enables or disables the test tone for audio ports.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_STEREO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'?AUDOUT_STEREO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_STEREO-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
NOTE: If enabled, the stereo setting is on. If disabled, the stereo setting is off, which means it is mono.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_STEREO-<setting>'"
Variables: setting = stereo setting, either ENABLE or DISABLE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND dxDev, "'AUDOUT_STEREO-ENABLE'"
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_TESTTONE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_TESTTONE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_TESTTONE-<frequency>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_TESTTONE command for the frequency setting.
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_TESTTONE-<frequency>'"
Variable: frequency = off, 60Hz, 250Hz, 400Hz, 1KHz, 3KHz, 5KHz, 10KHz, PINK NOISE, WHITE NOISE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_TESTTONE-250Hz'"
Sets a test tone of 250 Hz to play for the audio output port.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE-<ENABLE|DISABLE>
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE-<setting>'"
Variables: setting = Test tone setting, either ENABLE or DISABLE
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_TESTTONE_ENABLE-ENABLE'"
?AUDOUT_VOLUME
Requests the volume setting of the specified audio output port addressed by the D:P:S.
AUDOUT_VOLUME
Sets the volume on the audio output specified by the D:P:S to
<value>.
?HDMIOUT_AUDIO
Requests the HDMI output port followed by the specified audio port addressed by the D:P:S.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?AUDOUT_VOLUME'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?AUDOUT_VOLUME'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
AUDOUT_VOLUME-<value>
NOTE: See the AUDOUT_VOLUME command for the volume value range.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'AUDOUT_VOLUME-<VALUE>'"
Variable: value = 0 (-100 dB) to 100 (0 dB)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'AUDOUT_VOLUME-50'"
Sets the volume of audio output port #1 to 50 (-50 dB).
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?HDMIOUT_AUDIO'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'?HDMIOUT_AUDIO'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form:
HDMIOUT_AUDIO-<option>
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 193
Integrated Master – NetLinx® Programming
Audio Output SEND_COMMANDs
HDMIOUT_AUDIO
Sets the output used by the
HDMI output port.
Determines which output the HDMI output port addressed by the D:P:S will use.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'HDMIOUT_AUDIO-<option>'"
Variable: option = embedded, switched
Example:
SEND_COMMAND AUDIO_OUTPUT_1, "'HDMIOUT_AUDIO-embedded'"
Sets the audio output port (#1 based on D:P:S) to use the audio associated with the HDMI source.
Audio Switching Board Downmix SEND_COMMANDs
Downmix SEND_COMMANDs
Command
?DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC
Requests the Dynamic Range
Compression setting on the downmix channel.
DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC
Enables or disables Dynamic
Range Compression on the downmix channel.
Description
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'?DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC-<AUTO|ON|OFF>
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC-<option>'"
Variables: option = AUTO, ON, OFF (default = AUTO)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'DOWNMIX_DOLBY_DRC-<OFF>'"
?DOWNMIX_SOURCE
Requests the input port acting as the source for the downmix option.
DOWNMIX_SOURCE
Sets an input port to act as the source for the downmix option.
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'?DOWNMIX_SOURCE'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'?DOWNMIX_SOURCE'"
Returns a COMMAND string of the form: DOWNMIX_SOURCE-<input>
IMPORTANT: This command must be sent to D:P:S port 1.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "'DOWNMIX_SOURCE-<input>'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'DOWNMIX_SOURCE-<13>'"
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 194
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Overview
The NetLinx Studio software application (available for free download from www.amx.com) provides the ability to transfer firmware
KIT files to a NetLinx device or a Master (such as the integrated Master on the Enova DGX Switcher).
Preparation Checklist for Firmware Upgrade
IMPORTANT: Verify that you are using the latest version of NetLinx Studio and the latest firmware KIT files for both the integrated
Master and the Enova DGX Switcher.
Preparation Checklist:
Launch NetLinx Studio. Under the Settings menu, check the Master Communication Settings.
Verify that the latest version of NetLinx Studio is on your PC.
If the version is not the latest –
Open NetLinx Studio’s Help menu and select Web Update to obtain the latest version.
Or
Go to www.amx.com and login as a Dealer to download the latest version.
If you need to establish a LAN connection – Insert one end of an RJ-45 cable into the LAN 100/1000 port on the Enova DGX enclosure, and connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a network with a DHCP server. (The upgrade can also be done with a static IP address.)
Open the OnLine Tree (OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window), which displays information about each online device, including the current firmware version.
Determine the Device Number assigned to the target Enova DGX Switcher.
The integrated Master’s device number is always 0 (zero) and cannot be changed.
By default, the Device Number assigned to the Enova DGX Switcher in NetLinx Studio is 05002.
Before attempting to upgrade the firmware, you must have the appropriate KIT files.
Go to www.amx.com and download the latest firmware files for the system from the Enova DGX 800, Enova DGX 1600,
Enova DGX 3200, or Enova DGX 6400 product page.
Check the cache settings in your web browser and set to “Every time I visit the webpage” (otherwise, the progress status will
not be accurate). When the upgrade is complete, remember to change back to the original cache settings. If you need
TIP: Place KIT files on a local drive for speedy throughput.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 195
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Sending Firmware (*.KIT) Files to the Enova DGX
NOTE: A KIT file (*.KIT) is a package of several files, all of which are required to upgrade the firmware and are available online at www.amx.com. Firmware download links are provided in the relevant product page.
NetLinx Devices such as the Enova DGX Switcher use KIT files for firmware upgrades.
The Enova DGX Switcher contains two components (devices) which each require a Kit file. These two components must be kept at compatible firmware versions for proper operation.
NetLinx integrated Master Controller – Device ID 0 (zero)
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200/6400 Switcher – Default Device ID 5002
IMPORTANT: Any programs using the USB connection to an Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher must be halted prior to the upgrade process being initiated to avoid breaking the USB link to the PC.
CAUTION: If for any reason the KIT file transfer or the upgrade process fails, continue to retry until successful. Do not reboot or power cycle the Enova DGX Switcher or change the connections until the files are transferred and the upgrade process is complete.
Failure to complete both the transfer of files and the upgrade successfully may require a factory repair of the Enova DGX Switcher.
To send a KIT file to the Enova DGX:
1.
Complete any necessary items under the “Preparation Checklist” on the previous page.
2.
In NetLinx Studio, choose Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog
(FIG. 101).
Browse for folder containing the KIT file
FIG. 101
Send To NetLinx Device dialog (NetLinx Studio)
3.
Click the Browse (...) button to navigate to the target directory (FIG. 102) in the Browse For Folder dialog. Select the desired files (for the Master upgrade and the switcher upgrade); click OK.
FIG. 102
Browse For Folder dialog
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 196
4.
Select the “Master” KIT file from the Files list.
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Directory path
KIT files
IMPORTANT: If both require updates, always upgrade in the following order:
Device 0 – NetLinx integrated Master
Device 5002 (default) – Enova DGX
FIG. 103
Send To NetLinx Device dialog showing KIT file for the integrated Master selected
The selected directory path is displayed in the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (Location field).
Assuming the specified target directory contains one or more KIT files, the KIT files in the selected directory are displayed in the Files list along with the last modified date and time.
5.
Check the number for the device to be upgraded in the Device text box.
The device number assigned to the integrated Master is 0 (zero).
The switcher’s default device number is 5002. (If the device number has been changed, use the OnLine Tree to determine it.)
6.
Review the File and Target Device information before you send the KIT file.
Master Upgrade
7.
Click Send. A status bar is provided under Progress. NetLinx Studio transfers the files to the integrated Master on the Enova
DGX Switcher and then tells the system to reboot.
During the Master upgrade process, some of the LEDs on the CPU go through an extended series of blinking. When finished, all LEDs return to their normal state.
Enova DGX 100 Series Upgrade (Offline Upgrade)
IMPORTANT: Upgrading the switcher's firmware can take a considerable amount of time depending on the components being upgraded in the system. To monitor progress, see the bulleted list in Step 8.
8.
Select the “Enova DGX” KIT file from the files list. Click Send. A status bar is provided under Progress. NetLinx Studio transfers the files to the Enova DGX Switcher and then tells the system to restart, at which time the upgrade process begins. During the switcher’s upgrade process, the Enova DGX Switcher stays offline (does not display in OnLine Tree).
To check the progress during the switcher’s upgrade process, any or all of the following can be monitored:
Some of the LEDs on the CPU blink*** depending on the components being upgraded.
The I/O buttons flash one at a time, starting with Input 1 and going through to the last output. The flashing sequence
repeats until the upgrade is complete.
Upgrade status is displayed in the System Configuration interface and updates periodically.* The “XXofYY” indicates the current file number being processed and the total number of upgrade files (some update slowly - some quickly). The
“XX_DviHdmiOutAp” indicates that “XX” is the file for a DVI or HDMI output board (or whatever component is being upgraded). The “__%” indicates the progress of the “XX” file.
Upgrade status is displayed on the Control Panel's LCD and updates periodically. The display is identical to the message
in the System Configuration interface.
Enova DGX 6400 only - the power indicator LED on the front flashes green to indicate the system's input/output boards are being upgraded.**
IMPORTANT: Power cycles will not abort the upgrade; let it run until completion.
Once the upgrade is complete (to determine when, see “Important” above Step 8):
The LEDs return to normal.
Displays in the System Configuration interface and on the Control Panel's LCD.
The Enova DGX Switcher comes back online (displays in OnLine Tree).
* To open the System Configuration interface, enter the IP address (available through the Control Panel's LCD menu: Function/
Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address) in your web browser.
** The LED's response to power functions supersedes the upgrade function.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 197
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Changing the Proxy Setting
If the System Configuration interface does not open during setup, try the following troubleshooting strategies:
Check all power, signal, and link connections on all of the equipment.
Check LED indicators for the TCP/IP (RJ-45) connector on the Enova DGX enclosure.
Try connecting to the System Configuration interface again.
If the System Configuration interface still does not open, you may need to add an exception in the Proxy Setting dialog box.
The following instructions apply to Internet Explorer. To change these settings in another browser, consult its Help file.
To add an exception to the proxy setting information:
1.
From the Tools menu on the browser, select Internet Options.
The Internet Options dialog box opens.
2.
Select the Connections tab.
3.
Click LAN Settings.
The Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box opens.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers
Connections tab
LAN Settings button
198
If the Proxy server box is checked, go to Step 4.
If the Proxy server box is not checked, check it before going to Step 4.
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Be sure Proxy server box is checked
4.
Click Advanced.
The Proxy Settings dialog box opens.
Enter Enova DGX Switcher’s IP address
5.
In the Exceptions field, enter the appropriate IP address for the Enova DGX Switcher (see page 214).
6.
Click OK to exit each of the dialog boxes used in these steps.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 199
Firmware Upgrade & Info for Network Admin
Checking Cache Settings in a Web Browser
Before starting a firmware upgrade, we recommend checking the cache settings (used for storing pages) in your web browser and changing the setting to “Every time I visit the webpage” (otherwise, the progress status of the upgrade will not be accurate).
To check and change the cache settings in a web browser:
1.
Open Internet Explorer.
2.
From the Tools menu (sometimes displayed as a gear icon in upper right of screen), select Internet Options.
The Internet Options dialog box opens.
Settings button
3.
On the General tab under Browsing History, click Settings.
The Website Data Settings dialog box opens
Select “Every time I visit the webpage”
4.
Under “Check for new versions of stored pages,” click the “Every time I visit the webpage” radio button.
5.
Click OK to exit.
6.
When the upgrade is complete, repeat steps to restore original setting.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 200
Control Panel Operation
Control Panel Operation
Control Panel Overview
The Enova DGX Control Panels (standard on all enclosures) are used for controlling system switches and system attributes. All
Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher control panels function the same, but have input and output key support respective to their size.
NOTE: For information on additional control options, see page 32.
The Control Panel has an LCD, a Function Key, Control Dial, Select Key, Cancel Key, Take Key, Input and Output Keys, and Power
Indicator. The Control Dial and Select Key work together for scrolling through the menu items displayed on the LCD to place the system into various modes (the types of operations, e.g., Change Mode to execute switches) or to access lists for control operations. Once in the desired mode, use the Input and Output Keys to select values and the Take Key to execute the operations
(some modes require using the Control Dial and/or Select Key to select values).
LCD Control Dial Input Keys
Power Indicator
Function Key Take Key
Cancel Key Select Key
Output Keys
FIG. 104
Control Panel, shown on an Enova DGX 3200
Control Keys and Dial
TIP: One of the most used functions of the Control Panel is quickly retrieving the IP address through the Control Panel’s LCD menu
(Function/Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address).
Function Key
The Function Key accesses the Function menu on the LCD. As the Control Dial is scrolled, the menu displays the various command options, e.g., Change and Status. The Function Key can be pressed at any time to return the display to the Function menu. For an
overview of the menu options, see page 202.
Select Key
The Select Key enters a selection. In addition, the Select Key can be used to execute global presets. However, the Select Key cannot execute or disconnect switches. Pressing the Take key executes or disconnects switches.
Cancel Key
Pressing the Cancel Key clears an incomplete operation and returns the display to the beginning of a submenu or list. The Cancel
Key cannot undo a completed operation, e.g., an operation followed by the pressing of the Take Key or an audio adjustment made with the Control Dial. If the Cancel Key flashes, an error has occurred; a flashing Cancel Key must be pressed before continuing.
Take Key
The Take Key functions much like the Enter Key on a computer keyboard. Pressing the Take Key instructs the system to execute or disconnect a switch. Prior to pressing the Take Key, the individual operation component(s) are selected by pressing the appropriate key(s).
Control Dial
The Control Dial scrolls through the menu options and adjusts values, such as volume. The Control Dial is used in conjunction with the Select Key to choose the commands and values on the LCD and change virtual matrices between standard virtual matrix configurations and any custom virtual matrices.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 201
Control Panel Operation
Input and Output Keys
Input and Output Keys correspond to the input and output connections on the rear of the enclosure. These keys are used to select the inputs and outputs for routing source signals to destination devices, as well as for status and audio operations. Input Keys are also used for locking and unlocking the Control Panel.
When an Input or Output Key is pressed, the channel name* displays on the LCD. Hold the key down to display the name longer.
The color of the Input and Output Keys indicate availability or selection:
Blue key – indicates the input or output is available for selection as part of the current operation.
White or flashing white key – indicates an input or output has been selected and that additional action is required to complete the operation. When verifying Status, the key corresponding to the selected input or output is white; a key(s) for the input or outputs that are connected to the selected key turn white. When a key is flashing white, it cannot be unselected and does not display label information on the LCD when pressed. Select another key or press the Cancel Key to unselect.
Non-illuminated key – indicates the input or output is not available for the current operation, e.g., if the enclosure’s configuration size is not a full 32x32, some keys are always unavailable (never illuminated) because they do not have a corresponding connector on the rear.
FIG. 105 shows various keys states while in Change Mode. Input Key 19 is flashing white, indicating that input was selected first.
Outputs Keys 4 and 5 are white, indicating that those outputs have also been selected (and can be unselected). The switch from
Input 19 to Outputs 4 and 5 will be executed when the Take Key is pressed. Note that Keys 21 through 24 in the second row of inputs are not available (i.e., a board has not been installed for these inputs).
Key flashing white (input selected)
Keys not illuminated
(inputs not available)
Blue keys
(outputs available)
White keys
(outputs selected)
Blue keys
(outputs available)
FIG. 105
Example of key states during Change Mode (Control Panel on an Enova DGX 3200)
LCD when the Input or Output Key is pressed. The channel name default is “Input Name” or “Output Name.” The control panel’s
LCD is limited to 20 characters and will truncate any longer names that are pulled from the System Configuration interface.
Menus and Modes
The Function menu and its submenus access the modes and functions used to control the system.
The modes are Change, Virtual Matrix, Status, Disconnect, Setup Options, Lock Panel, Adjust
Audio*, Global Preset, and Master Info. While in a mode, the same command can be repeated, without having to return to the Function menu to re-select the mode.
Use the Control Dial and Select Key to navigate the Function menu, and submenus.
The Function menu and the submenus are loop menus, which means that each menu returns to its first item after you scroll past its last item.
* Adjust Audio Mode is functional only when Audio Switching Boards are in the system. When no
Audio Switching Boards are present, any commands for Adjust Audio are ignored.
NOTE: A clear label with white lettering that shows the entire LCD Function menu (as shown on the right) is included in the Control Panel Label Kit shipped with the system. Dust surface of panel near the LCD with a dry cloth (if necessary, use a non-abrasive cleaner), peel the backing off of the label, and firmly press the label on the panel.
The Function menu (see right) and its submenus access the following modes and functions:
Change
Selecting Change places the system in Change Mode. The Control Panel must be in Change Mode to execute switches. While in Change Mode, select the Input and Output(s) Keys followed by the
Take Key to execute switches (see top of the page).
Function menu structure
Virtual Matrix
Selecting the Virtual Matrix Mode accesses the virtual matrices designated for the system in the configuration file (VM 0, VM 1, and
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 202
Control Panel Operation
Status
Selecting Status places the system in Status Mode. Status Mode is used to confirm signal routing or routing to multiple outputs
without risk of accidentally executing a switch (see page 207).
Disconnect
Selecting Disconnect places the system in Disconnect Mode. While in Disconnect Mode, select the Input or Output Key(s) followed
routing of selected inputs or outputs.
Setup Options
regarding the integrated Master, change the default virtual matrix, reload the configuration file (when directed to do so by technical support), and change the password.
Lock Panel
Selecting Lock Panel places the Control Panel in Lock Mode at which time the password is entered to lock the panel. Locking the
panel prohibits access to the system and can prevent accidental switching (see page 209).
Adjust Audio
Selecting Adjust Audio accesses the Adjust Audio submenu. From this menu you can place the panel in Output Volume Mode,
Mute/Unmute Mode, or Input Gain Mode (see page 210).
Global Preset
Enova DGX Control Panel operation consists of the following four basic tasks:
Choosing a mode, submenu, or list: press the Function Key to access the Function menu. Use the Control Dial and Select
Key to choose the desired mode, submenu, list, or list item.
Selecting inputs or outputs: press the corresponding Input or Output Key. Selected keys will change color or flash, depending on the routing state.
Selecting values for fields: use the Control Dial and Select Key (e.g., virtual matrices, volume, presets).
Executing a command: press the Take Key.
Labeling Input and Output Keys
Each Enova DGX Switcher ships with a kit for custom labeling. To order additional kits, contact your AMX representative. The
Control Panel Label Kit (KA1056-01) includes:
Perforated card stock sheets – Print, separate labels, and slide into holders.
Label holders – Attach to the front panel above each row of Input and Output Keys.
LCD Function menu label – Shows entire LCD menu structure (see Note on previous page).
The label template (.xlt template formatted in Microsoft Excel) for labeling the input and output keys is available at www.amx.com.
Slide label into holder before attaching to Control Panel
FIG. 106
Customize labels to designate sources and destinations (Control Panel on an Enova DGX 3200)
TIP: When the labels are ready to print, we recommend printing a sample on plain paper first.
To create and install labels for Input and Output Keys:
1.
At www.amx.com, search for Control Panel Label Form Template.
2.
Under AutoPatch Tools in the right-hand column, click on Control Panel Label Form Template.
3.
Type the labels in the preformatted cells on the template according to the instructions in the template (if desired, use standard
Excel editing tools to alter font size, spacing, color, etc.). Do not modify the cell size.
4.
Save the file for future use (recommended).
5.
Print the labels on the perforated sheets provided, using any standard laser printer.
6.
Trim off the excess label insert material where indicated.
7.
Separate the label strips at their perforations (bend back and forth first).
8.
Slide the first label strip into a plastic label holder (position with open edge of holder up).
9.
Peel the adhesive backing off the label holder and press the holder firmly onto the Control Panel above the appropriate Input or Output Keys. The silk screened labels on the front panel will aid in label holder alignment.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the remaining labels.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 203
Control Panel Operation
Executing Switches
A switch is an active connection between an input (source) device and one or more output (destination) devices. The signals routed in a switching operation are individual signals or groups of individual signals coming through the connectors on the rear of an enclosure. You can execute switches from the Control Panel using the steps below or by defining and executing a global preset (see
The LCD displays the VM (default VM 0) in the upper-right corner; this is the virtual matrix that operations are currently being executed on. Switches are executed on the default virtual matrix unless otherwise specified. When specifying a virtual matrix, be sure it includes the signal(s) you want to route.
Virtual matrix definitions reside in the configuration information in an enclosure’s CPU. If you need to change the virtual matrix that
see page 213 for “Setup Options.”
When an Input or Output Key is pressed, the LCD displays the channel name. Hold the key down to display the name longer.
Return to the Function menu at any time by pressing the Function Key.
NOTE: When you put the panel in Change Mode, available keys will be illuminated in blue and any unavailable ones will not be illuminated. The first blue key selected flashes white and the next key(s) selected turns white. You can toggle the non-flashing white keys between the selected (white) and unselected (blue) state before pressing the Take Key. For an example, see FIG. 105 on page 202.
In an execute switch command either an input or an output may be selected first. To switch to multiple outputs, the Input Key must be selected first. Use the Control Panel to select and unselect Input and Output Keys to modify the switch as long as the keys are not flashing. Once satisfied with the switch selections, press the Take Key to execute it. (Or, if not satisfied with the selections, press the Cancel Key and start over.)
For new installations, we recommend executing a test switch to verify the system is working correctly before attaching all inputs and outputs. To execute a test switch, attach the first input (source) and first output (destination) and then complete the directions below. For more information on test switches, see page 204.
Before executing the test switch below, use the directions on page 206 to disconnect the factory default switch (i.e., disconnect
Input 1 which is connected to all outputs on Virtual Matrix 1 when it leaves the factory).
The directions below switch Input 1 to Output 2 on VM 0.
To execute a test switch:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Press the Select Key to choose Change.
The system is in Change Mode (the available Input and Output Keys turn blue).
Current virtual matrix
3.
Press Input Key 1.
Input Key 1 flashes indicating that it is ready to switch.
(Any outputs currently connected to a selected input will turn white.)
4.
Press Output Key 2.
Output Key 2 illuminates indicating that it is ready to accept the switch.
5.
Press the Take Key.
Input 1 switches to Output 2, and the keys turn blue.
The panel remains in Change Mode until the Function Key is pressed.
6.
Press Input Key 1 again to toggle it off, and Press the Take Key to disconnect the test switch.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 204
Control Panel Operation
Controlling Switches on Systems with Audio Switching Boards
IMPORTANT: The control panel does not have direct control of the audio signal on the Audio Switching Boards. The analog audio signal from the Audio Switching Board must first replace the embedded audio on the HDMI signal via a SEND_COMMAND (see
the video as a breakaway.
Control of video and audio switching on systems with Audio Switching Boards works as follows:
To switch digital video with its embedded audio, use either VM 0 (All) or VM 1 (Video).
To switch the embedded audio* separately from the digital video (as a breakaway audio signal), use VM 2. (When switching on VM 0 or VM 1, the embedded audio is still present.)
* The embedded audio can also be analog audio from the Audio Switching Boards which has been used to replace the embedded
audio via a SEND_COMMAND (see page 167).
Changing the Virtual Matrix
Enova DGX Switchers support three virtual matrices for switching signals:
VM 0 Default (Audio follow Video)
VM 1 Video Breakaway
VM 2 Audio Breakaway
VM 0 is the factory default; we do not recommend changing the established VM numbers. If you create a custom configuration, you will need to change the virtual matrix on the Control Panel to execute switches (or other operations) using the custom virtual matrix.
IMPORTANT: When audio is embedded on HDMI, the audio switches on the same VM as the video (VM 0 or VM 1). If the system contains Audio Switching Boards, embedded audio can be switched independently on VM 2. If the system does not contain Audio
Switching Boards, VM 2 is not functional.
The directions below give steps to change from routing signals on VM 0 (Default) to routing on VM 1 (Video).
To change the virtual matrix:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Virtual Matrix by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The V.Matrix list appears.
4.
Scroll with the Control Dial to 1:Video.
Current virtual matrix
5.
Press the Select Key to enter your selection.
The display returns to the top of the V.Matrix
submenu.
VM 1 becomes the new virtual matrix used for all operations.
Newly selected virtual matrix
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 205
Control Panel Operation
6.
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
The system is ready to execute operations on VM 1. The system will remain on VM 1 for all operations until the virtual matrix is changed or the power is cycled (at which time the Control Panel will switch on the default virtual matrix).
NOTE: To change the default virtual matrix, see the instructions on page 215.
Disconnecting Switches
Disconnecting a switch deactivates the connection between an input (source) and one or more output (destination) devices.
Disconnecting an input will disconnect all outputs currently receiving the input's signal. An output can only be connected to one input; therefore, disconnecting an output will only disconnect the connection between the output and the input that is routed to it.
Inputs and outputs can be selected in the same disconnect command.
Disconnect inputs or outputs from the Control Panel using the steps below. If you need to change the virtual matrix, see “Changing
the Virtual Matrix” on page 205.
NOTE: When you put the panel in Disconnect Mode, the available keys will be illuminated in blue and any unavailable ones will not be illuminated. When you select a blue key, it turns white. You can toggle the keys between the selected (white) and unselected (blue) state before pressing the Take Key. An example is provided in FIG. 105 on page 202.
Once the Control Panel is in Disconnect Mode, inputs and outputs can be selected and unselected by pressing the corresponding
Input and Output Keys. The disconnect command is not executed until the Take Key is pressed. Pressing the Cancel Key clears an incomplete disconnect command and returns the display to the beginning of the submenu.
While in Disconnect Mode, the Control Panel will not show current routing for the inputs and outputs that are selected.
CAUTION: Disconnecting an input disconnects all outputs receiving that source signal even if a specific output(s) is selected at the same time.
The following example disconnects Inputs 1 and 3 and all outputs connected to them as well as Output 9.
To disconnect inputs and outputs:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Disconnect by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The system is in Disconnect Mode (all the available Input and Output Keys turn blue).
4.
Press Input Keys 1 and 3 and Output Key 9.
The keys turn white indicating that they are selected.
Virtual matrix
5.
Press the Take Key.
Inputs 1 and 3 (and all outputs connected to them) and Output 9 are disconnected as soon as the Take Key is pressed and the keys turn blue.
6.
Make additional disconnects.
Or
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 206
Control Panel Operation
Verifying Signal Status
The status of inputs or outputs can be checked using the Enova DGX Control Panel. Signal status can be verified to confirm that a switch has executed properly or to confirm correct routing to multiple outputs (destinations). Verifying an input will illuminate all outputs currently receiving the input’s signal. An output can only be connected to one input (source); therefore, verifying the status of an output will illuminate only the one input that is currently routed to it.
Once the Control Panel is in Status Mode, inputs and outputs can be selected by pressing the corresponding Input and Output Keys without changing the routing state. The panel stays in Status Mode until the Function Key is pressed.
To verify the status of a signal:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Status by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The system is in Status Mode (all available Input and Output Keys turn blue).
Virtual matrix
4.
Press the Input Key that corresponds to the input you want to check.
The selected Input Key turns white, and any Output Keys receiving the input signal also turn white.
Or
Press the Output Key that corresponds to the output you want to check.
The selected Output Key turns white, and if an Input Key routed to it, that key also turns white.
5.
Select another signal to verify.
Or
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Defining and Executing Global Presets
Global presets are predefined sets of switches that can easily be executed at one time. Each global preset is a snapshot of the system’s routing state and output volume settings at a particular time which can be recalled at a later time. The system must be routed to the desired state before defining a global preset.
Global presets can be defined or recalled using either the Control Panel or BCS commands interchangeably. The Control Panel on the Enova DGX Switcher supports up to 64 global presets. Because all 64 potential global preset numbers are displayed in the
Global Preset submenu, be aware that nothing indicates which of the numbers have been assigned a routing state. A system state can be restored at any time by selecting the assigned global preset number.
Depending on whether or not the system includes Audio Switching Boards, global presets operate in one of two ways in Enova DGX
100 Series Switchers.
In a system without Audio Switching Boards –
A global preset number can be assigned to a routing state during runtime and stored by the system, allowing you to replicate an entire system’s routing state.
NOTE: The global preset will not affect the injection/extraction setting on any channel of any AIE Board.
In a system with Audio Switching Boards –
A global preset number can be assigned to a routing state during runtime and stored by the system, allowing you to replicate a subset of the system state. The system routing state includes all signal routings and audio settings for Mute/Unmute and Output
Volume; however, it excludes any down-mix switching routes. Global presets cannot capture Digital Signal Processing settings.
TIP: If a backup of a given entire system state is required when Audio Switching Boards are in the system (including Digital Signal
Processing settings), the System Configuration interface’s Switcher-Setup-Save function can save all of the system’s configuration
values in a file that can be loaded back to the Switcher when needed (see page 155).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 207
Control Panel Operation
CAUTION: We strongly recommend keeping track of the number and the system state routing used for each global preset. If a previously used number is assigned to another system state (using either the Control Panel or BCS commands), the former state will be automatically overwritten.
The instructions below define an example Global Preset 3, and the instructions at the bottom of the page are used to execute a predefined Global Preset 3.
IMPORTANT: Wait approximately ten seconds for the system to store the global preset setting before executing another operation.
To define a global preset:
1.
Route the system to the desired state.
2.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
3.
Locate Global Preset by scrolling with the Control Dial.
4.
Press the Select Key.
The Global Preset submenu appears.
5.
Scroll with the Control Dial to Define Global.
Press the Select Key.
The Define Global list appears.
6.
Scroll with the Control Dial until Global Preset 3 appears.
7.
Press either the Select Key or the Take Key.
8.
Wait approximately ten seconds for the system to store the global preset setting.
The current routing state can now be recalled as Global Preset 3, and the system returns to the Global Preset submenu.
9.
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
To execute a global preset:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Global Preset by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
Execute Global appears.
4.
Press the Select Key.
The Execute Global Preset list appears.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 208
Control Panel Operation
5.
Scroll with the Control Dial until Global Preset 3 appears.
6.
Press either the Select Key or the Take Key.
Global Preset 3 is executed. The system now reflects the routing state that it was in when Global Preset 3 was defined.
The system returns to the Global Preset submenu.
7.
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
NOTE: Status is not invalidated by global presets.
Locking and Unlocking
Locking the Enova DGX Control Panel prohibits access to the system and can prevent accidental switching. While the panel is locked, BCS commands still work; however, they cannot be used to unlock the panel. The panel remains locked if the power is cycled.
The password used to lock and unlock the panel consists of a sequence of five input keys. The factory default password is the first five Input Keys (1-2-3-4-5). A new password can be set using any combination of five keys from Input 1 through Input 8 (for instructions, see page 216).
CAUTION: We strongly recommend recording passwords in a secure place; the Control Panel cannot be used to retrieve a lost password.
If the password is lost while the system is locked, contact technical support (see page 60).
Locking the Control Panel
If you enter the wrong password while attempting to lock the Control Panel, the LCD displays “Invalid Password” and the Cancel
Key flashes. Press the Cancel Key to clear the error and enter the correct password.
NOTE: For security purposes, the Input Keys do not turn white when pressed while locking and unlocking the panel.
To lock the Control Panel:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Lock Panel by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The system is in Lock Mode (Input Keys 1 through 8 turn blue).
4.
Press the Input Keys in the following order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (default password).
The panel is locked, and all Input and Output Keys turn off.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 209
Control Panel Operation
Unlocking the Control Panel
When the panel is locked and you press any key, the Unlock Panel Screen appears. You have ten (10) seconds to enter the password or the Control Panel remains locked. If you wait longer than 10 seconds, press any key again before entering the password.
If you enter the wrong password while attempting to unlock the Control Panel, an invalid password message appears and the
Cancel Key flashes. Press the Cancel Key to clear the error and enter the correct password.
To unlock the Control Panel:
1.
Press any key.
The Unlock Panel Screen appears (Input Keys 1 through 8 turn blue).
You must enter the password within ten (10) seconds.
2.
Press the Input Keys in the following order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (default password).
The panel unlocks and returns to the Function menu.
Adjusting Audio (Systems with Audio Switching Boards Only)
IMPORTANT: This section on Adjusting Audio does not apply to Audio Insert/Extract Boards.
If the Enova DGX System contains Audio Switching Boards, the control panel supports three Audio Modes for adjusting the embedded audio: Output Volume, Mute/Unmute, and Input Gain. If Audio Switching Boards are not contained within the enclosure, the Adjust Audio control panel option will be nonfunctional.
IMPORTANT: The Control Panel cannot directly access the audio on an Audio Switching Board. The Control Panel can only adjust the audio from an Audio Switching Board after it has been embedded on a video board.
When the panel is placed in any of the Audio Modes, available keys will be blue and any unavailable ones will not be illuminated.
When you select a blue key, it turns white indicating that it is ready for the audio adjustment.
Audio Adjustments on the Control Panel
May be made at any time during normal operation
Are made in real time as the Control Dial is turned
Do not require pressing the Take Key
Remain in effect until changed
Can be made on any VM that contains audio
Affect only embedded audio on the digital signals (the Control Panel cannot access the Audio Switching Boards’ audio only inputs and outputs)
Adjusting Volume
The Adjust Volume Screen displays the current volume setting and the range available for the specific audio output signal that has been selected for adjustment. For more information on audio signals and specifications, see the “Audio Switching Boards” chapter
that destination when it is switched on any other VM containing audio.
Adjusting Output Volume
To adjust the volume:
1.
Route the source (input) to the destination (output) to be adjusted (on any VM which includes the audio).
NOTE: Audio adjustments can be made without routing the switch.
2.
Press the Function Key. The Function menu appears.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 210
Control Panel Operation
3.
Locate Adjust Audio by scrolling with the Control Dial.
4.
Press the Select Key.
The Adjust Audio submenu appears.
5.
Press the Select Key again to choose Output Volume.
The panel is in Output Volume Mode (all Input Keys are turned off, and the available Output Keys turn blue).
Routing level
6.
Press the Output Key that corresponds to the output to be adjusted.
The Adjust Volume Screen appears, displaying the volume range of the audio signal and the current volume setting for the selected output.
Current volume setting
Volume range
7.
Adjust the volume by scrolling with the Control Dial.
The volume audibly adjusts as you scroll the Control Dial.
8.
Select another output to adjust.
Or press the Cancel Key to return to the Adjust Audio submenu. (The Cancel Key does not undo the audio adjustments.)
Or press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
NOTE: If the selected output is muted, “Muted” displays as the current setting (FIG. 107). Turning the Control Dial will unmute a muted output and adjust the Volume.
FIG. 107
Example of muted output in Output Volume Mode
To reapply mute, see the following.
Muting and Unmuting Outputs
NOTE: The mute/unmute option applies to output volume only and is not available for input gain.
To mute an output:
1.
Press the Function Key. The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Adjust Audio by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key to enter the selection.The Adjust Audio submenu appears.
4.
Scroll the Control Dial to Mute/Unmute.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 211
Control Panel Operation
5.
Press the Select Key.
The system is in Mute Mode (all Input Keys are turned off, and the available Output Keys turn blue), and any muted Output
Keys turn white.
Routing level
6.
Press the Output Key that corresponds to the output to be muted.
The output is muted, and the Output Key turns white.
7.
Select another output to mute.
Or press the Cancel Key to return to the Adjust Audio submenu. (The Cancel Key does not undo the audio adjustments.)
Or press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
To unmute an output while in Mute Mode:
1.
Press the muted (white) Output Key.
The output is unmuted, and the Output Key turns blue.
Adjusting Input Gain
The purpose of “Input Gain Control” is to allow input (source) signals of varying amplitudes to be equalized before they are routed and the volume is adjusted. Equalizing input signals provides a consistent reference for volume adjustments and eliminates jumps when routing between different inputs.
Typical uses for input gain (the nominal level of the signal from the source device) include switching consumer and professional grade audio equipment (whose levels can vary noticeably) in the same matrix switcher. Input gain adjustment is also used for equalizing amplitudes between balanced and unbalanced source inputs.
The Adjust Input Gain Screen displays the current gain setting and the range available for the specific audio input signal that has been selected for adjustment. For more information on audio signals and specifications, see the “Audio Switching Boards” chapter
CAUTION: We strongly recommend that input gain adjustments be made only by a qualified dealer or installer.
The following steps tell how to adjust input gain as part of the process of equalizing input levels.
To adjust input gain:
1.
Route the source (input) to be adjusted to the destination (output); see page 204.
NOTE: Audio adjustments can be made without routing the switch.
2.
Press the Function Key. The Function menu appears.
3.
Locate Adjust Audio by scrolling with the Control Dial.
4.
Press the Select Key to enter the selection.
The Adjust Audio submenu appears.
5.
Scroll the Control Dial to Input Gain.
6.
Press the Select Key.
The system is in Input Gain Mode (the available Input Keys turn blue, and all Output Keys are turned off).
7.
Press the Input Key that corresponds to the source that was routed in Step 1.
The Adjust Input Gain Screen appears, displaying the gain range of the audio signal and the current gain setting.
Current gain setting
Input gain range
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 212
Control Panel Operation
8.
Adjust the input gain by scrolling with the Control Dial.
The gain audibly adjusts as you scrolling the Control Dial.
9.
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 as necessary for additional sources (inputs) that will be routed to the same destination (output).
Setup Options
The following options are available under the Setup Options submenu:
Software Version – to display software version information for the Control Panel
Master Info – to display information for the integrated Master*
Default VM – to change the factory default virtual matrix
Reload Config – is not used in normal operations; use only when directed to do so by technical support
Change Password – to change the password from the factory default
* Useful for quickly finding the system’s IP address (Function/Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address).
Software Version
The Software Version Screen provides the following information:
Driver – Control Panel’s firmware version
Built – date the Control Panel’s software was built
Host – software version of the initial operating system (IOS) for the Control Panel
XNet ID – Control Panel’s XNet device number
FP Link baud 9600 – indicates the Control Panel (FP = Front Panel) and the baud rate
Use the following steps to check the software version information for the Control Panel.
To check the software version information:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The Setup Options submenu appears.
Locate Software Version by scrolling with the Control Dial.
4.
Press the Select Key again to choose Software Version.
The Software Version Screen appears.
Version number
5.
Scroll with the Control Dial to see additional Software Version information.
6.
Press the Cancel Key to return to the Setup Options submenu.
Or
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 213
Control Panel Operation
Master Info
The Master Info Screen provides the following information for the integrated Master:
System Number – indicates the system number
Serial Number – indicates the system’s serial number
MAC Address – indicates the system’s MAC address
IP Address – indicates the IP address*
IP Device Type – indicates either DHCP or non-DHCP
Subnet – indicates the Network setting for the subnet mask*
Gateway – indicates the Network setting for the gateway
Host Name – indicates the host name for the system
DNS Address – indicates the DNS IP address for the system*
Master Version – indicates the version of the integrated Master
Switcher Version– indicates the version of the switcher
Controller Version – indicates the version for the controller
* The enclosure must be connected to a network before its IP address will display. Also note that IPv6 addresses are truncated to fit the 20 character limit on the LCD.
Use the following steps to check information for the integrated Master.
To check the integrated Master Info:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The Setup Options submenu appears.
Locate Master Info by scrolling with the Control Dial.
4.
Press the Select Key again to choose Master Info.
The Master Info Screen appears.
5.
Press the Select Key again to choose System Number.
Or
Scroll with the Control Dial to choose other Master Info information.
6.
Press the Cancel Key to return to the Setup Options submenu.
Or
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 214
Control Panel Operation
Default Virtual Matrix
The factory default virtual matrix for the Enova DGX Switcher is VM 0. You have the option of changing the factory default virtual matrix for your system. When you choose a new default virtual matrix, the system will revert to that virtual matrix each time the system is powered up even if you changed the virtual matrix using the V.Matrix list during normal operation. The power must be cycled before the default virtual matrix changes are implemented. If you want to immediately switch on the default matrix, either
change the current virtual matrix (see page 205) or cycle the power.
The following example changes the default virtual matrix from VM 0 to VM 2, the audio matrix.
To change the default virtual matrix:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The Setup Options submenu appears.
4.
Scroll to Default VM.
Press the Select Key.
The Default VM list appears.
5.
Scroll to 2:Audio.
Current default virtual matrix
6.
Press the Select Key.
The display returns to the top of the Setup Options submenu.
7.
Cycle power to implement VM 2 as the default virtual matrix.
Or
power. (The next time power is cycled, VM 2 will be implemented as the default virtual matrix.)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 215
Control Panel Operation
Reload Config
The Reload Config option is not used in normal operations. Use this option only when directed to do so by technical support.
To reload the configuration file to the Control Panel:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The Setup Options submenu appears.
4.
Scroll to Reload Config.
5.
Press the Select Key.
The configuration file reloads to the Control Panel and the display returns to the top of the Setup Options submenu.
6.
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Setting the Password
The Enova DGX Control Panel’s default password is “1 2 3 4 5” entered using the first five input keys. A new password can be set using any combination of five of the Input Keys 1 through 8 when the LCD displays “Enter New PWD” (Step 5 in the following procedure). In the Change Password Mode (selected in Step 4), the keys available to use in a password will illuminate blue.
CAUTION: We strongly recommend recording the new password in a secure place; the Control Panel cannot be used to retrieve a lost password.
If the password is lost while the system is locked, contact technical support (see page 60).
To set the password:
1.
Press the Function Key.
The Function menu appears.
2.
Locate Setup Options by scrolling with the Control Dial.
3.
Press the Select Key.
The Setup Options submenu appears.
Locate Change Password by scrolling with the Control Dial.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 216
4.
Press the Select Key.
The LCD displays the prompt Enter Current PWD.
Using the illuminated keys, input the current password. (The default password is 1 2 3 4 5.)
Control Panel Operation
5.
The LCD displays the prompt Enter New PWD.
Using any combination of the illuminated keys, input the new password.
(To change any entries, press the Cancel Key – restarting the process – and reenter from the start.)
The LCD displays Reenter New PWD.
6.
Re-enter the new password.
If the re-entered password matches, the system accepts it as the new password, and the LCD displays Password Reset. Press the Take Key and go to Step 7.
Or
If the re-entered password does not match, the LCD displays Invalid Password. Press the Cancel Key to return to Enter New
PWD screen and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7.
When the new password is successfully reset, press the Cancel Key to return to the Setup Options submenu.
Or
Press the Function Key to return to the Function menu.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 217
Control Panel Operation
System Error Codes and Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of the most common error codes that may appear on an Enova DGX Control Panel. The table below lists the error code, the name of the code, the meaning of the code, and some basic troubleshooting strategies (additional error code troubleshooting strategies are included on page 218). The codes in the table are not intended to be comprehensive. If
The first letter of the error code indicates the following:
E = Error
W = Warning
A = Alarm* (requires immediate attention)
I = Information*
* Because these codes very rarely appear, they are not included in the table.
For the following instructions, establish serial control and open a terminal emulation program, e.g., the terminal in NetLinx Studio
(Tools/Terminal Session).
To enable error code reporting:
1.
Enter $ERR=1!
The system responds with a V.
NOTE: If the power is cycled after this procedure, you will need to enable error code reporting again.
To turn off error code reporting:
1.
Enter $ERR=0!
Most Common System Error Code
Error Code Name Meaning
EFF8002
Enclosure timeout error
The operation was not completed before the timer expired.
Basic Troubleshooting Strategies
• Resend the command.
• Check the power indicators.
• Check that the command was sent using the correct virtual matrix.
Error Code Troubleshooting
Error codes can appear either on the Control Panel LCD or in a terminal emulation program, e.g., the terminal in NetLinx Studio
(Tools/Terminal Session).
When you are using a Control Panel, one of the most common troubleshooting strategies is to resend the command to see if the error was simply a timeout error.
When you are using BCS commands, one common troubleshooting strategy is to enter the command again. Often the command has just been entered incorrectly (e.g., omitting an output in a Change command). In other cases, the command has specified a value that is not valid (e.g., a global preset number that does not correspond to a defined global preset).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 218
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Applicability
This appendix covers the removal and replacement procedure for the Enova DGX input and output boards listed in the tables below.
Enova DGX input and output boards are hot-swappable, i.e., the procedure can be done while the system is powered up. The Enova
DGX Audio Switching Boards are hot-swappable. The Enova DGX AIE Boards are not hot-swappable.
Input and Output Boards
Enova DGX HDMI Boards
Type
Input
Input
Output
Part #
FG1058-540
FG1061-540
FG1058-550
Model
DGX-I-HDMI
DGX-I-HDMI-4K
DGX-O-HDMI
Enova DGX DVI Boards
Type
Input
Output
Part #
FG1058-600
FG1058-610
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair Boards
Type
Input
Output
Part #
FG1058-570
FG1058-580
Enova DGX DXLink™ Twisted Pair 4K Boards
Type
Input
Output
Part #
FG1061-570
FG1061-580
Model
DGX-I-DVI
DGX-O-DVI
Model
DGX-I-DXL
DGX-O-DXL
Model
DGX-I-DXL-4K
DGX-O-DXL-4K
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a Solecis Digital Switcher to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board in an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher, both the Solecis unit and all DXLink Twisted Pair boards must be upgraded with the latest available firmware versions.
Solecis units must be upgraded before connecting a unit to an upgraded input board.
IMPORTANT:
DXLink Fiber Boards, Duplex and Simplex
Type Part #
Input
Output
FG1058-622
FG1058-632
Input FG1058-620
Model
DGX-I-DXF-MMD
DGX-O-DXF-MMD
DGX-I-DXF-SMD
Output
Input
FG1058-630
FG1058-623
Output FG1058-633
Input FG1058-621
Output FG1058-631
DGX-O-DXF-SMD
DGX-I-DXF-MMS
DGX-O-DXF-MMS
DGX-I-DXF-SMS
DGX-O-DXF-SMS
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 219
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Expansion Boards
IMPORTANT: Audio Switching Boards and AIE Boards are not compatible with each other and cannot be used in the same system. If both types are installed in the same enclosure, neither will work unless one type is removed (if both types of boards are present, the audio subsystem is disabled).
Audio Switching Board Sets*
Type
Audio Switching Board Set (one each, input and output) for Enova DGX 800/1600
Audio Switching Board Set (one each, input and output) for Enova DGX 3200
Audio Switching Board Set (two each, input and output) for Enova DGX 6400
Part #
FG1061-716
FG1061-732
FG1061-764
Model
DGX800/1600-ASB
(Enova DGX 800/1600 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
DGX3200-ASB
(Enova DGX 3200 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
DGX6400-ASB
(Enova DGX 6400 AUD SWITCH BOARD KIT)
* Use the same procedures for adding or replacing boards as a regular Input or Output Board. For Audio Switching Boards
connector wiring information, see page 134.
CAUTION: Enova DGX 6400 – Audio Switching Input Boards must be installed directly above standard Input Boards in left and right slots and Output Boards must be installed directly below standard Output boards in left and right slots.
Enova DGX Audio Insert/Extract Board
Type
Audio Insert/Extract
Part #
FG1058-705
Model
DGX-AIE
AIE Boards can be replaced or added using the procedure in this appendix. However, we recommend using the procedure in the
“Audio Insert/Extract Board” chapter because it includes instructions for setting the DIP switches to insert or extract audio (see
IMPORTANT: If you plan to use the instructions in this appendix, remember that Enova DGX expansion boards must be installed in expansion board slots. Although Audio Switching Boards are hot-swappable, Audio Insert/Extract Boards are not hot-swappable; be sure to power down the system.
Procedure Overview
IMPORTANT: Adding or replacing boards should only be done by personnel trained to handle ESD sensitive parts and assemblies.
ESD WARNING: To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal Enova DGX materials. Use an ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip attached to a good ground source.
Items Required
Enova DGX board(s)
Phillips #1 screwdriver
ESD wristband and cord with alligator clip
PC with NetLinx Studio (or another terminal emulation program) and a null modem serial cable (RS-232)
Safety Recommendations for Laser Products
WARNING: DXLink Fiber uses a Class 1 laser product to send signals. While the Class 1 category indicates that the invisible laser used is safe, we recommend avoiding direct eye exposure when using any optical fiber product (see the OSHA directive on
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
IMPORTANT: No user serviceable parts are included inside Enova DGX enclosures; service should only be done by qualified personnel.
Exercise caution when installing DXLink Fiber products to avoid direct eye exposure to invisible laser radiation. Follow the recommendations below whenever installing or working with these fiber products.
Be sure to apply the power only after all fiber connections are made and no fiber ends are exposed.
Do not remove dust plugs from DXLink Fiber connectors or the dust caps from the fiber cables until establishing connections; avoid direct eye exposure.
Make sure all cables, including fiber cables, are correctly connected and/or terminated.
Before you unplug a fiber cable on an input board, disconnect the power on the Transmitter that is connected to the input.
Before you unplug a fiber cable on an output board, disconnect the switch for that output connector.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 220
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Adding or Replacing a Board
IMPORTANT: When replacing a board, be sure to install the new board in the same slot that held the original board to make sure the switching commands are correct.
Enova DGX 100 Series Switchers are configured to accommodate a full enclosure’s worth of boards and do not require modification to the configuration file when a board is added.
CAUTION: Cable management bars are not to be used as handles to remove or install boards.
In the following procedure, read each step entirely. The steps include helpful tips to avoid damage to the enclosure’s internal cables and connectors.
IMPORTANT: The Audio Insert/Extract board is not hot-swappable; when installing an AIE Board, be sure to power down the system.
To remove and replace an Enova DGX board:
1.
Optional – If the board being replaced has custom settings that have not been saved, use the System Configuration interface
to save the settings now (see page 155).
2.
Enova DGX 3200 only – Loosen the captive screw on each end of the connector numbering plate above the boards, and set the plate aside.
Captive screws for numbering plate
FIG. 108
Enova DGX 3200 only - Two captive screws hold numbering plate above boards
3.
If applicable – Label and disconnect all cables on the board being replaced. If cables from adjoining boards obstruct access, label and disconnect them as necessary.
4.
Remove blank board plate – Remove the screw that holds the board plate in place (for Enova DGX 3200, see FIG. 109; for
Enova DGX 800/1600/6400, see FIG. 110). Pull the plate out of the board slot opening (the tab on the end of the board plate fits in a slot near where the ejector handle would otherwise go). The plate consists of an aluminum sleeve with a black metal piece, which slides in and out of the sleeve, and an EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) gasket.
Or
Remove current board – Remove the pan head screw that holds the board in place (for the Enova DGX 3200, see FIG. 109; for the Enova DGX 800/1600/6400, see FIG. 110). Push on the board’s extractor handle as far as it will go (about a 45° angle).
With the handle extended, carefully pull the board straight out of the board slot. Place the board in an ESD approved static shield bag and set aside.
One screw holds each board or board plate in place
Expansion slot
Push board extractor handle down into extended position
Expansion slot Board guides
FIG. 109
Vertical boards - Remove screw, push board extractor handle down, and then pull board straight out
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 221
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
One screw holds each board or board plate in place
AC
DC
F L T
AC
DC
F L T
Expansion slot
Push board extractor handle toward center of enclosure into extended position
Expansion slot
Board guides
FIG. 110
Horizontal boards - Remove screw, push extractor handle right (input) or left (output), pull board straight out
CAUTION: Each Enova DGX board has an EMI gasket along one edge of the faceplate. Handle the boards carefully to avoid dislodging or damaging the gasket on the board being installed and the gasket on the adjacent board or blank plate.
CAUTION: For DXLink Fiber Boards, do not remove dust plugs from their fiber connectors until Step 12.
5.
Audio Switching Boards only –
Do not install in enclosure with AIE boards.
Must be installed in pairs.
Must be installed in expansion slots.
Enova DGX 6400 only – Be sure to install all four boards in correct expansion slots (see page 129).
For Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 systems only – Attach HSSI cable from SMA port on ASB Input Board to SMA port on ASB
Output Board.
6.
configure the insert/extract functionality). Flip the DIP switch for each connector that needs its setting changed. We recommend writing down the setting for each connector to make verifying correct audio switching behavior easier in Step 14.
AIE Boards can only be installed in an expansion slot (FIG. 109 and FIG. 110).
IMPORTANT: Unused AIE connectors must be set to “Disable/Extract.”
7.
Install vertical boards – With the board’s extractor handle in the extended (unlocked) position, line up the board’s edges on the board guides that are along the top and bottom of the board slot (FIG. 109).
Or
Install horizontal boards – With the board’s extractor handle in the extended (unlocked) position, line up the board’s edges on the board guides that are along the left and right of the board slot (FIG. 110). Note that input boards have board guides at the top of the slot and board guides for the output boards are at the bottom of the slot due to their reversed orientation in the enclosure.
8.
Begin pushing the board into the slot until the extractor handle starts to engage the metal extractor plate (the extractor handle moves into its folded position).
When the extractor handle starts to lift, flip the handle toward the center of the board until it snaps into its folded (locked) position, which firmly seats the board.
9.
Fasten the screw (which was removed in Step 4) that holds the board in place. This screw must be tightened securely before cables are attached in Step 12.
10. If the enclosure was powered down – Plug the AC power cords back into the power supplies.
11. Verify that the system recognizes the board: a. Launch the System Configuration interface b. c.
Navigate to the Switcher/Status page.
Scroll down to the Input or Output Board slot number of the new board.
(Audio boards will be listed under “expansion boards.”) d. e.
Ensure that the board’s Status is “OK” and that the Type field is correct.
If the fields do not reflect the board you have inserted, or the board Status states “FAIL,” re-seat the board and check the
Status page again.
NOTE: If using a cable management bar, tie the cable to the cable management bar far enough below the connector to allow for the manufacturer’s recommended bend radius.
12. Attach cables to the board’s connectors* and reconnect any other cables that were disconnected in Step 3
(if applicable – tie cables to cable management bars). If the enclosure was powered down – Reapply power.
13. Optional – If you have custom board settings to load to the board, use the System Configuration interface to load them now
(see
14. Execute a test switch using a connection on the new board to be sure that video is present at the destination
(Control Panel: press Function Key, Select Key, Input Key, Output Key, and Take Key).
Additional testing for Audio Insert/Extract Board functionality:
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 222
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Insert function – If the DIP switch for the audio connector is set to insert, the video signal from the corresponding video input or output will carry the inserted audio; check that the inserted audio is present with the display.
Extract function – If the DIP switch for the audio connector is set to extract, the audio will be extracted from the corresponding video input or output signal; check the auxiliary or supplemental audio equipment involved to be sure the extracted audio signal is present where expected.
If the test switch does not work, see “Board Troubleshooting” on the next page.
* If you need cabling information, see the specific board chapter in this manual.
IMPORTANT: If for any reason a board slot is left empty, be sure to attach a blank plate to cover it.
15. Enova DGX 3200 only – Replace connector numbering plate removed in Step 2.
Additional Board Information
If necessary, the System Configuration interface
is available for configuring the boards listed below (see page 149).
HDMI and 4K HDMI Boards
For information on HDMI and 4K HDMI Boards, see page 61.
DVI Boards
For information on DVI Boards, see page 73.
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Boards
DXLink Twisted Pair Boards
DXLink Fiber Boards
Audio Switching Board
For compete information on the Audio Switching Boards, see page 128.
Audio Insert/Extract Board
For compete information on the Audio Insert/Extract Board, see page 140.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 223
Appendix A – Adding or Replacing Boards
Board Troubleshooting
Problems with Board Power Up
To verify that all I/O boards have been powered up after hot-swapping, enter ~scri6v3! in a terminal emulation program and verify that none of the boards report an “alarm” (FIG. 111).
~scri6v3!
[io board 13 pol 1] good
[status flags] 0x0
[voltage] 4.93v
[current] 1.33a
[temp] 29.2c
[io board 14 pol 1] alarm
[status flags] 0x2
[voltage] 0.00v
[current] 0.35a
[temp] 0.0c
[10 board 15 pol 1] good
[status flags] 0x0
[voltage] 4.96v
[current] 1.33a
[temp] 29.1c
Alarm notification for I/O board 14
FIG. 111
Terminal information showing an “alarm” for a board that has not powered up correctly
If an alarm is reported, the board must be manually powered back up using the DGX_SHELL command power ON BCPUx where x is
the slot number of the board (for additional information on DGX_SHELL commands, see page 228.
Additional Troubleshooting Information
For general problems or problems with specific boards, see the “Troubleshooting” sections for the following:
General troubleshooting – page 60
DXLink Fiber Boards – page 126
Audio Switching Boards – page 139
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 224
Appendix B – Replacing Battery on CPU
Appendix B – Replacing Battery on CPU
Applicability
This appendix provides instructions for removing and installing the battery on the CPU for the Enova DGX 100 Series and setting the CPU’s clock. The procedure can be done while the enclosure is in a rack, but the system must be powered down.
The Enova DGX Switcher uses a coin-type (button cell) lithium battery in a timekeeper function. Only one CPU battery is installed within a given enclosure. The battery can be expected to have up to 4.25 years of usable life under very adverse conditions. Actual life is appreciably longer under normal operating conditions. This calculation is based on storing the unit without power in 50° C
(122° F) temperature until battery levels are no longer acceptable.
WARNING: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Removing and Installing
CAUTION: Do not remove the CPU board until you are ready to install the CPU battery, unless directed to do so by technical support.
Items Required
Replacement battery for Enova DGX CPU
Phillips #1 screwdriver
ESD wristband and cord with alligator clip
ESD WARNING: To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal Enova DGX materials. Use an ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip attached to a good ground source.
Instructions are provided for removing and installing the battery on the CPU and setting the CPU’s clock.
To remove and install an Enova DGX CPU battery and set the CPU’s clock:
1.
Disconnect all AC power cords (Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – two power cords; Enova DGX 6400 - four power cords). Make sure that none of the power supply LEDs are illuminated.
2.
Disconnect all cables connected to the CPU and unplug the AxLink connector.
3.
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200 – Remove the three screws from the CPU faceplate as indicated below.
FIG. 112
Remove screws indicated
TIP: Removal of the CPU board is easier if the two metal plates under the CPU are removed first.
4.
Enova DGX 6400 – Remove the four screws from the CPU faceplate.
CPU board
CPU board
FIG. 113
Remove screws from faceplate
5.
Remove the CPU faceplate and set aside.
IMPORTANT: The CPU does not need to be extracted all the way to replace the battery.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 225
Appendix B – Replacing Battery on CPU
6.
Use the tab indicated in FIG. 114 to pull the CPU board approximately four inches straight out of the enclosure.
Tab for pulling CPU board
TIP: The CPU battery is fully exposed when the CPU board is extended four inches.
FIG. 114
Use tab indicated to pull CPU board about four inches straight out (Enova DGX 6400 shown)
7.
Locate the CPU battery on top of the CPU.
CPU battery in bracket
FIG. 115
Locate CPU battery on top of the CPU in battery bracket
8.
Pull the dead battery out from under the bracket that holds it in place.
TIP: Place thumbnail into access slot under front side of battery and simultaneously push down on the far lip of the battery while pulling the battery clear of the bracket.
9.
Dispose of battery as mandated by your area or country guidelines.
10. Slide the replacement battery, positive side up (+), into place under the battery bracket.
11. Slowly push the CPU board back into the slot firmly enough to make a good electrical connection (avoid pushing on the connectors). When the board is fully inserted, the faceplate that covers the CPU should sit flush with the back metal.
12. Reattach the faceplate with the screws that were removed in Step 3 (Enova DGX 800/1600/3200) or Step 4 (Enova DGX
6400).
13. Plug in all AC power cords.
14. Check the Status LED on the CPU for indications of normal display (see table below FIG. 116).
System Status LED
FIG. 116
Check System Status LED indicator on CPU
CPU LED Indicator
System Status
Normal Display
• Solid amber during boot load (10 sec)
• Solid green during app load (1-4 minutes, depending on system configuration)
• Flashing green when ready
Cautionary Display
Blinking red/green: MCPU is in a fault state. Power cycle may recover; otherwise, contact technical support.
15. Re-attach the cables that were removed in Step 2 and replug the AxLink connector.
16. Execute a test switch to be sure the system is working correctly (see page 204).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 226
Appendix B – Replacing Battery on CPU
The remaining steps are not optional (except for Steps 22 and 23). They must be completed to set the date and time information on the CPU’s clock.
17. Open the System Configuration interface (type the integrated Master’s IP address* in the address bar of the browser and press the Enter key).
18. From the Network drop-down menu, select Date / Time.
19. Under Clock Manager, select the desired Timezone from the drop-down list.
20. Under Time Sync, select either Network Time or Stand Alone (if Stand Alone, enter additional information).
21. Under Re-Sync Period, select the desired length of time from the drop-down list.
22. Optional – under Daylight Savings Time Manager, select either Off or On (if On, select additional options).
23. Optional – Under NIST Server Manager, select a Server Name (or add a server using the +Add Server button on the right).
24. Click Accept.
* The IP address is available through the Control Panel’s LCD menu: Function/Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address.
CPU Troubleshooting
First:
Check all cable connections, check the System Status LED, and execute a test switch.
If the System Status LED is still not illuminated or the test switch does not work:
Remove and re-seat the CPU board to see if the CPU establishes the connection.
If the System Status LED on the CPU does not display normal indications:
Contact technical support (see page 60).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 227
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Overview DGX_SHELL Commands
The Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher supports a number of shell (command-line interpreter) commands for a variety of functions, both basic and advanced.
General Rules and Information for DGX_SHELL Commands
DGX_SHELL commands are case sensitive.
All commands in the DGX_SHELL require an Enter to execute.
Enter help or ? to display a list of the commands supported in the DGX_SHELL.
Enter help
<command>
for detailed usage and options on a specific command.
Enter help
-v
to display all commands and descriptions.
The DGX_SHELL interface does not use an automatic timeout.
The DGX_SHELL interface is the default terminal emulation interface. BCS commands can be entered either through the
instructions on page 229).
During firmware upgrades, the prompt changes to “(upgrading) DGX_SHELL>” and some commands will not be accessible until the upgrade is complete. (Use the “help” command to display accessible commands.)
Although the Help file lists all of the DGX_SHELL commands available for the Enova DGX Switcher, only information on the basic commands (those most useful during installation and setup) are provided in this appendix. The remaining commands (which are also listed in the Help file) are used mainly by technical support for troubleshooting. For additional information on any of the advanced commands, contact www.amx.com/techsupport.
CAUTION: Incorrect use of advanced DGX_SHELL commands has the potential to alter the operation of the system. We recommend that advanced commands only be entered in conjunction with instructions from technical support.
To enter the DGX_SHELL terminal interface:
1.
Use a null modem serial cable to connect a PC to the Control port (RS-232 serial) on the enclosure (pinout for PC to enclosure: 5 GND to 5 GND, 2 RXD to 3 TXD, and 3 TXD to 2 RXD).
2.
Open NetLinx Studio (v4.0 or later).
3.
Select Tools/Terminal Session (if you use another terminal emulation program, be sure to set the COM port and the communication settings per Step 4).
The Terminal Window Communication Settings dialog box opens.
4.
Set the COM port and the Serial Settings (Enova DGX 100 Series default settings: 115200 Baud / 8 / None / 1 / None).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 228
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
5.
Click OK.
The Terminal window opens.
DGX_SHELL>
NOTE: If the terminal is open while the Switcher is booting, the terminal window displays status for firmware, hardware, and Ethernet ports. If the terminal is opened after the switcher has completed the boot process, the terminal window is blank. In either case, press
ENTER to display the DGX_SHELL prompt and begin entering DGX_SHELL commands.
6.
At the prompt (DGX_SHELL>), type the command and press the Enter key.
To switch between DGX_SHELL and BCS interfaces:
1.
From the DGX_SHELL prompt, type “bcs” followed by <enter> and enter the BCS interface.
2.
Enter BCS command(s). (For information on BCS commands, see the Basic Control Structure Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com.)
3.
Press CTRL+C to exit the BCS interface and return to the DGX_SHELL interface.
NOTE: In order to be able to send a Control Character (i.e., CTRL+C), Control Characters must be enabled for your Terminal (see
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 229
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Product to Board Slot Correspondence
When a board slot is the target in a DGX_SHELL command, the command specifies BCPUx, where x is the board slot number. To determine the number of the correct board slot to enter in this command, see the following table which provides board slot to product correspondence for Enova DGX Switchers. Note that the board slot numbering starts with the first input board and continues through the output boards.
NOTE: For targets that need to pinpoint the specific channel on a board, use BCPU:x:y, where the variable y = 0, 1, 2, or 3
(i.e., 0 = the first input or output channel on the board, 1 = the second channel, 2 = the third channel, and 3 = the forth channel).
Product to Board Slot Correspondence
NOTE: Board slot numbering does not include boards in the expansion board slots.
Product to Board Slot Correspondence
Product Board Orientation
Enova DGX 800
Enova DGX 1600
Enova DGX 3200
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Board Slot Number
1
4
1
2
3
8
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
Connector Numbers
Inputs 1-4
Inputs 5-8
Outputs 1-4
Outputs 5-8
Inputs 1-4
Inputs 5-8
Inputs 9-12
Inputs 13-16
Outputs 1-4
Outputs 5-8
Outputs 9-12
Outputs 13-16
Inputs 1-4
Inputs 5-8
Inputs 9-12
Inputs 13-16
Inputs 17-20
Inputs 21-24
Inputs 25-28
Inputs 29-32
Outputs 1-4
Outputs 5-8
Outputs 9-12
Outputs 13-16
Outputs 17-20
Outputs 21-24
Outputs 25-28
Outputs 29-32
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 230
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Product to Board Slot Correspondence
Product
Enova DGX 6400
Board Orientation
Horizontal
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
32
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Board Slot Number
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Inputs 61-64
Outputs 1-4
Outputs 5-8
Outputs 9-12
Outputs 13-16
Outputs 17-20
Outputs 21-24
Outputs 25-28
Outputs 29-32
Outputs 33-36
Outputs 37-40
Outputs 41-44
Outputs 45-48
Outputs 49-52
Outputs 53-56
Outputs 57-60
Outputs 61-64
Connector Numbers
Inputs 1-4
Inputs 5-8
Inputs 9-12
Inputs 13-16
Inputs 17-20
Inputs 21-24
Inputs 25-28
Inputs 29-32
Inputs 33-36
Inputs 37-40
Inputs 41-44
Inputs 45-48
Inputs 49-52
Inputs 53-56
Inputs 57-60
* In the Enova DGX 6400, the numbering for input boards starts at the top left of the enclosure going down half way, continuing at the top right of the enclosure going down; the output boards repeat the same pattern in the lower portion of the enclosure (for
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 231
BCS DGX_SHELL
Command
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands
The DGX_SHELL commands listed in the table below can be sent directly to the Enova DGX Switcher via any standard emulation terminal once you enter the DGX_SHELL.
IMPORTANT: DGX_SHELL commands are case-sensitive.
NOTE: BCPU is the acronym for Board CPU, and AIE is the acronym for Audio Insert/Extract (board).
At the DGX_SHELL prompt, type help or a question mark (?) and press the Enter key to access the Help Menu, which displays all of the DGX_SHELL commands, including the basic ones described in the table below.
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands
? help help -a help -v
Command Description
Either of these commands displays all of the supported commands: those listed in this table, plus advanced
commands for troubleshooting (for technical support; see page 60).
The help -a command displays a list of all available commands, their descriptions, and detailed usage
The help -v (verbose) command lists the commands and their descriptions.
Usage: help {-a}{-v}
NOTE: -a and -v can also be used with the ?. help <cmd> exit announce
Either of these commands displays detailed usage and options for the command specified.
Usage: help {<command>} or ? {<command>}
Exits the shell session.
This command is used to display AIPNet Ethernet messages.
Usage: announce
Example:
DGX_SHELL> announce
Input Board 1: BCPU1
MAC Address - 02.D0.47.01.03.00
bcs
IP Address - 0.0.0.0
Position - Card Hub
Slot Address - 0
Channel ID - 0
SW Cfg Stat - Success
Input Board 3: BCPU3
MAC Address - 02.D0.47.01.04.00
IP Address - 0.0.0.0
Position - Card Hub
Slot Address - 2
Channel ID - 0
SW Cfg Stat - N/A
Output Board 1: BCPU9
MAC Address - 02.D0.47.02.0B.00
IP Address - 0.0.0.0
Position - Card Leaf
Slot Address - 9
Channel ID - 0
SW Cfg Stat - N/A
Input Expansion Board: EXPIN
Output Expansion Board: EXPOUT
This command is used to send BCS commands via the DGX_SHELL interface.
Usage: bcs {<bcs_syntax_cmd>}
<bcs_syntax_cmd> = bcs syntax command string
NOTE: For instructions on switching between the DGX_SHELL and BCS interface, see page 229.
CAUTION: If sending BCS commands over Telnet – You must first enter the BCS command environment
before sending BCS commands. At the DGX_SHELL prompt, type: bcs <enter> and then type the BCS command. The Telnet connection does not allow in-line BCS commands while in the DGX_SHELL interface
(e.g., DGX_SHELL> bcs CL1I6O24T {INVALID}).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 232
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands channel This command is used to read or write video settings for the designated channel (using the command alone results in a dump of the entire system).
IMPORTANT: The channel index (BCPUx:y) relates to the physical input or output port on an input or output board, whose hardware numbering is complex due to the varying orientation of the boards on different Enova DGX products (see the “Product to Board Slot Correspondence” table on page 230).
We recommend using the variables Ix and Ox to specify the desired input and output channels (e.g., enter channel -v I25
for Input 25).
NOTE: To persist the -m scaler change to flash (for power on scaler setting), the -p (persist) must also be sent.
Usage: channel {-a}{-d <hex_string>}{-m <hex_string>}{-o <hex_string>}{-p}
{-s <hex_string>}{-v}{Ix|Ox|BCPU|BCPUx|BCPUx:y|BCPUx:y:z}
Options:
-a ar_policy <HEX_BYTE>
-d flash_dtd <HEX_DTD_STRING>
-m mode <HEX_BYTE> 00 = Auto, 01 = Manual, 02 = Bypass
-o override_dtd <HEX_DTD_STRING>
-p persist
-s sharpness <HEX_BYTE>
-v verbose
Target:
BCPU
BCPUx x = 1-32 (boardID) where x = 1-32 for Enova DGX 6400; x = 1-16 for Enova DGX 3200; x = 1-8 for
Enova DGX 1600; x = 1-4 for Enova 800
BCPUx:y y = 0-3 (channel-hardware order)
BCPUx:y:z z = 0-7 (port)
Example 1:
DGX_SHELL> channel -v BCPU19:0
Output: 9 (BCPU19:0:7) Video: 1920x1080p,59.9Hz Audio: 48 kHz, 16 bits clear date echo history
DTD:
02 3A 80 18 71 38 2D 40
58 2C 45 00 00 00 00 00
00 1E
AUX_MODE:
00 01 00
AUX_POLICY:
01 01 00
AUX_SHARPNESS:
02 01 00
Example 2:
DGX_SHELL> channel -m 02 BCPU7:0
[sets the scaler mode of BCPU7:0 to Bypass (02)]
Output: BCPU7 Channel: 0 port: 0 Video: 1920x1080p,60.0Hz
DGX_SHELL> channel -p BCPU7:0
[persists the power-on scaler mode to flash for BCPU7:0]
Output: BCPU7 Channel: 0 port: 0 Video: 1920x1080p,60.0Hz
This command is used to clear the terminal screen.
Usage: clear
This command displays both run-time clock and system time information and the time of the last NTP (Network
Time Protocol) update.
• rtc is the time held by the real time clock chip. The last updated is the beginning of unix time.
• systime (system time) is the time known by the coldfire and is generated locally.
Usage: date
This command is used to print a string back to the terminal.
Usage: echo "string"
Example:
DGX_SHELL> echo "Hello World!"
Hello World!
This command is used to display a list of previously invoked commands.
Usage: history
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 233
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands ifconfig This command displays network interface information for private and public networks.
Usage: ifconfig {-e <interface>}
Interface: 0 (Private Network) or 1 (Public Network)
Example:
DGX_SHELL> ifconfig log logtail manage
Ethernet Port 0 MAC 00:d0:47:01:10:4d
link up
state: 3
ipaddr 198.18.128.1
ipmask 255.255.0.0
gateway 198.18.0.1
Ethernet Port 1 MAC 00:d0:47:01:10:c3
link up
state: 1
ipaddr 0.0.0.0
ipmask 0.0.0.0
gateway 0.0.0.0
This command is used to view and manage system logs. Contact Technical Support for usage.
This command is used to display log content and is filterable by logger, level, and number of entries.
Usage: logtail {-s} {-l <level>} {-n <log name>} {-e <entries> | -a}
Options:
-s Lists all loggers and levels.
-l Filters output by log entry level. If not specified, defaults to DEBUG.
1 - FATAL -only fatal entries are output
2 - ERROR
3 - WARN
4 - INFO
5 - DEBUG - all entries are output
-n Text name of logger(s) to tail. If not specified, defaults to all loggers.
-e Outputs from most recent specified entries. If not specified, defaults to 0 (zero).
-a (All) outputs from oldest entry
This command allows the firmware version to be rolled back to either a previous version or the factory version.
Usage: manage firmware
Example:
DGX_SHELL> manage firmware
Current Version: 3.0.1
Previous Version: UNAVAILABLE
Factory Version: UNAVAILABLE
To install a firmware version:
Enter P (Previous), F (Factory) or press return to cancel:
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 234
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands mxlog This command is used to set or view logging levels.
Usage: mxlog <logger> <level>
Loggers: main network aipnet sdCard shell fileTransfer
C_IcspStack
C_IcspDevice
C_IcspMsg
C_IcspTransport ftp config
CommandManager
Cage
PortManager icsp_device oid_get oid_set oid_receive edid i2c srm initflags
Levels:
NONE (0) - no entries are logged
FATAL (1) - only fatal are logged
ERROR (2) - error and above logged
WARN (3) - warning and above logged
INFO (4) - info and above logged
DEBUG (5) - all entries are logged
Example:
DGX_SHELL> mxlog Cage WARN
Logger Cage level set to WARN (3) ping This command sends an echo request message to the target.
Usage: ping {n:} [BCPUx|TXx|RXx|CENTERx|PPIC|EXPIN|EXPOUT]
Options:
-n <count> number of echo request originated
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 235
reset command
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands reboot reset sc
This command can be used to reboot individual components or the system as a whole.
NOTE: DXLink Twisted Pair I/O Boards only - The reboot command can be used to reboot a specific endpoint connected to the board. Use the y variable to specify the connector attached to the endpoint (the
DXLink Twisted Pair Module or Wallplate) you want to reboot.
Usage: reboot {abdf:iprsu}{MCPU}{BCPU|BCPUx|BCPUx:y|BCPUx:y:z}{CENTER|CENTERx}{PPIC}
{EXPIN|EXPINx}{EXPOUT|EXPOUTx}
NOTE: EXPIN refers to an expansion board on the input side of the enclosure; EXPOUT refers to an expansion board on the output side.
Options:
-a ac power cycle
-b backplane reset line
-d delay <seconds>
-f force (suppress prompting)
-i immediate
-p ppic reset line; hardware reboot of the PowerPic - toggle its MCLR (Hardware Master Clear) pin
-r redundant reset (backplane reset line) hardware reboot of all boards except the CPU board - toggles their
MCLR (Hardware Master Clear) pins
-s staged reset
-u subsystem <default=0 remote_power=1 local_transport=2 endpoint_transport=3 ethernet_phy=4 ethernet_switch=5 av_path=6>
Target:
MCPU
BCPU
BCPUx x = 1-4 (DGX800), 1-8 (DGX1600), 1-16 (DGX3200), 1-32 (DGX6400)
BCPUx:y y = 0-3 (channel-hardware order, variable only applies to DXLink Twisted Pair I/O Boards)
BCPUx:y:z z = 0-7 (port)
CENTER use for an Enova DGX 800/1600 or to target all centers in an Enova DGX 3200/6400
CENTERx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 3200/6400
PPIC
EXPIN (expansion board in the input section of the enclosure)
EXPINx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 6400 (expansion board in input section of enclosure)
EXPOUT (expansion board in the output section of the enclosure)
EXPOUTx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 6400 (expansion board in output section of enclosure)
• If no specific targets are chosen, the command will apply to all possible targets.
• If -r is selected, a hardware line to all I/O boards is forced low then released, causing the boards to experience a hard MCLR (Hardware Master Clear).
• If -s is selected, in addition to having the main power supplies turned off, a hardware connection to the
PowerPIC is forced low then released, causing the PowerPIC to experience a hard MCLR.
This command resets settings and other system data to their default values.
Usage: reset [options] <action>
Actions: factory
(apply system default settings to MCPU and BCPUs)
Options:
--help, -h
(displays command usage information. NOTE: In elevated shell user levels, run reset -h to display information on additional options.)
Example:
reset factory Apply defaults to MCPU and BCPUs
This command sends an ICSP Send Command to a Port of the 5002 device.
Usage: sc
Actions:
<port> <command> Destination Device Port and Command
Example: sc 1 AUDOUT_MUTE-ENABLE
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 236
set command
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands set show
This command displays a list of configuration variables indicating the current setting. A variable’s setting can be altered, except for the ones marked “# READONLY.” “# VOLATILE” indicates that the value set will be reset to the default value if the MCPU reboots.
auto_setup_disabled=1,2,3,4
(DXLink Twisted Pair and DXLink Fiber only) bdf_writeprotect=ON shell_start_cmdstr_COM1= shell_start_cmdstr_COM2= shell_start_cmdstr_telnet= com1_baudrate=115200 com2_baudrate=115200 com3_baudrate=115200 com1_data_bits=8 com2_data_bits=8 com1_stop_bits=1 com2_stop_bits=1 com1_parity=none com2_parity=none mcpu_eth1_enabled=DISABLE mcpu_eth1_hostname= mcpu_eth1_dhcp_enabled=DHCP mcpu_eth1_ip_address=0.0.0.0
mcpu_eth1_subnet_mask=0.0.0.0
mcpu_eth1_default_gateway=0.0.0.0
BCPUx_debug_enabled=none
BCPUx_ip_address=10.0.0.64
BCPUx_mac_address=02:d0:47:00:10:4d # READONLY
BCPUx_syslog_enabled=OFF
BCPUx_syslog_server_port=514
BCPUx_syslog_server_ip_address=0.0.0.0
BCPUx_syslog_server_mac_address=00:00:00:00:00:00
BCPUx_bg_vsync_disabled=OFF
BCPUx_dxlink_force_uni_mode_en=none
BCPUx_dxlink_mode_actual=1(Link-lost),2(Bi),3(Lin# READONLY ink-lost)
BCPUx_auto_setup_disabled=none
PPIC_ethernet_mirroring=OFF # VOLATILE
PPIC_ethernet_mirrored_ports=none # VOLATILE
PPIC_icslan_multiport=private # VOLATILE
Usage: set {-d}{-v}{<name>}{=}{value}
Options:
-d default Restore the variable’s default value.
-v verbose Print the variable’s description and syntax.
Target (target names contain a following underscore):
BCPU_
BCPUx x = 1-4 (DGX800), 1-8 (DGX1600), 1-16 (DGX3200), 1-32 (DGX6400)
CENTER use for an Enova DGX 800/1600 or to target all centers in an Enova DGX 3200/6400
CENTERx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 3200/6400
PPIC_
EXPIN (expansion board in the input section of the enclosure)
EXPINx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 6400 (expansion board in input section of enclosure)
EXPOUT (expansion board in the output section of the enclosure)
EXPOUTx where x = 1-4 for an Enova DGX 6400 (expansion board in output section of enclosure)
EXPCPU_
This command displays system information.
Usage: show {aie|bdf|pop|status|stats|version}
{BCPU|BCPUx|BCPUx:y|BCPUx:y:z}{CENTER|CENTERx}{PPIC}{EXPIN|EXPINx} {EXPOUT|EXPOUTx}
NOTE: When displaying information for BCPUs, DXLink Fiber Boards will report as “DxLinkFiber” for Duplex
Boards and “DxLinkSimplex” for Simplex Boards.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 237
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
Basic DGX_SHELL Commands splash su switch unset
This command prints splash screen information.
Usage: splash {i:v:}
Options:
-i <PID_number> 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9 supported
-v <verbosity> levels 1-3
Example 1:
DGX_SHELL> splash
[1:Enclosure] AMX Enova DGX 3200
[2:Storage Blocks] cleared
[3:Communication Interfaces] count = 5
[4:Hardware Boards] detected
[5:VM Configuration] count = 5
[6:Power System] good
[7:System Sensors] detected
[9:BCPU Info]
Example 2:
DGX_SHELL> splash -i1 -v2
[1:Enclosure] AMX Enova DGX 3200
[host software] 1.0.8
[hardware driver] 3.0.0.3_20150916 D
[build date] 2015-09-16 11:00:02
[pld version] A1
[fbpld version] A0
[xnet address] 0x110c3
[fp xnet address] 0x157c7
[nvram status] valid.. user preferences restored
[nvram magic] 0xdedafabb
[target id] 0
[hardware id] 0
[srm version] gen: 1 version: 5 build: 1
This command changes the user privilege level from basic (default) to Super User, enabling advanced commands.
Usage: su {<system>} {<password>}
Example: su enova 12amx34
NOTE: Super User privileges are lost and only basic DGX_SHELL commands are available on closing the terminal.
This command graphically displays a matrix switching table with outputs on the top and inputs on the left, indicating the routing state of switches.
Usage: switch <VM>
VM (Virtual Matrix):
0 - Video with embedded audio matrix (default switching matrix) showing 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, or 64x64
1 - Video only matrix showing 8x8, 16x16, 32x32, or 64x64
2 - Audio only matrix showing 16x16, 24x24, 40x40, or 80x80
Example:
DGX_SHELL> switch 1
outputs a matrix similar to the example matrix switching table in FIG. 117 on the following page.
This command returns a variable to its default state.
Usage: unset <target> <variable>
Example:
DXG_SHELL> unset BCPU10_auto_setup_disabled
BCPU10_auto_setup_disabled=none version This command displays the system component versions.
Usage: version
Example:
DGX_SHELL> version
AMX Enova DGX 3200
Copyright Harman International, AMX by Harman 2015
Serial: 000000000
Firmware:
Bootloader: 1.0.8
Application: 3.0.0.3_20150916
System: 3.0.1
Hardware:
Target ID: 0.0
System ID: 0x01
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 238
Appendix C – DGX_SHELL Commands
FIG. 117
DGX_SHELL switch
command displays matrix switching status in a table (Enova DGX 1600 shown)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 239
Appendix D – Telnet Communication with Enova DGX 100 Series CPU
Appendix D – Telnet Communication with Enova DGX 100 Series CPU
Overview
One of the features of the Enova DGX 100 Series switchers is that, by default with auto-setup mode enabled, the entire DGX system
(including all DXLink endpoints in auto-setup mode) only consumes a single public IP address. However the Enova DGX 100 Series switchers also have a secondary internal Ethernet port which can be enabled for diagnostics and/or control purposes. By default, this port is disabled, but may be enabled or disabled through either NetLinx Studio or through a serial connection to the DGX.
This Appendix covers methods for enabling, disabling, and confirming the setting of the Telnet connection to an Enova DGX 100
Series CPU. This Appendix does not cover Telnet connection with the NX Master or directly to DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber
(DXLink Twisted Pair) or page 122 (DXLink Fiber).
NOTE: The BCS Tunnel (port 15000) is not supported in Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers.
Enabling the Telnet Session
The Telnet session (via internal Ethernet port) may be enabled through either NetLinx Studio or through a serial connection to the
DGX. Whenever this port is enabled, the DGX consumes two public IP addresses.
IMPORTANT: Toggling IP settings (DHCP or Static IP) or enabling/disabling the Telnet internal Ethernet port via a serial connection requires rebooting the DGX for the change(s) to take effect. Rebooting is not required when adjusting these settings via NetLinx
Studio.
To enable the Telnet session via NetLinx Studio:
1.
Open NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
2.
Right-click on the Enova integrated Master (00000 device) and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx
Studio. The terminal opens.
3.
Type the following command string <with appropriate values for your installation>:
For DHCP Telnet - send_command 5002:1:1, "'IFCONFIG-1,UP,D,hn=<hostname>'"
For Static IP Telnet - send_command 5002:1:1, "'IFCONFIG-1,UP,S,ip=<IP Address>,gw=<Default Gateway>, mask=<Subnet Mask>,hn=<Hostname>'"
Example - send_command 5002:1:1, "'IFCONFIG-1,UP,S,ip=10.103.4.155,gw=10.103.4.1, mask=255.255.255.0,hn=DGX_Telnet'"
4.
Launch the Telnet session (see section on the following page).
To enable the Telnet session via DGX_SHELL commands:
TIP: Settings after mcpu_eth1_dhcp_enabled are not required unless enabling Telnet with a Static IP address.
1.
Enter the DGX_SHELL terminal interface (see instructions on page 228).
2.
Send the DGX_SHELL commands to enable Telnet <with appropriate values for your installation>:
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_enabled=ON
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_hostname=<Hostname>
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_dhcp_enabled=<either DHCP or STATIC>
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_ip_address=<IP Address>
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_subnet_mask=<Subnet Mask>
DGX_SHELL> set mcpu_eth1_default_gateway=<Default Gateway>
3.
Reboot the Enova DGX.
4.
Launch the Telnet session (see section on the following page).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 240
Appendix D – Telnet Communication with Enova DGX 100 Series CPU
Using the Telnet Connection
With the Telnet connection enabled, the Telnet session can be launched and DGX_SHELL (default) or BCS commands can be used in the terminal window.
To launch the Telnet session:
NOTE: Commands sent over the Telnet session rather than a serial connection may be markedly slower due to the difference in speeds possible from a direct connection to that of TCP over a network.
1.
Open a terminal emulation program.
2.
Configure the terminal session with the following settings:
Connection type / Service – Telnet
Host Name / Address – <Telnet IP Address>
TCP Port – 23
3.
Open the terminal window.
4.
Basic Control Structure Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com).
NOTE: You must first enter the BCS command environment before sending BCS commands. At the DGX_SHELL> prompt, type: bcs <enter>
and then type the BCS command. The Telnet connection does not allow in-line BCS commands while in the
DGX_SHELL interface (e.g., DGX_SHELL> bcs CL1I6O24T {INVALID}).
Telnet Default Communication
To set the Telnet connection to start in BCS:
1.
Launch the Telnet session.
2.
Type the following DGX_SHELL command string:
DGX_SHELL> set shell_start_cmdstr_telnet=bcs
3.
Close the Telnet session.
4.
Open a new Telnet session and press <enter>.
5.
Begin entering BCS commands (for BCS commands, see the Basic Control Structure Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com).
To set the Telnet connection to start in the DGX_SHELL:
1.
Launch the Telnet session.
2.
Press CTRL+C to exit the BCS environment and enter the DGX_SHELL.
3.
Type the following DGX_SHELL command string:
DGX_SHELL> unset shell_start_cmdstr_telnet
4.
Close the Telnet session.
5.
Open the Telnet session and press <enter>.
6.
Begin entering DGX_SHELL commands (for DGX_SHELL commands, see page 228).
To confirm the Telnet session's starting environment:
1.
From the DGX_SHELL, type the following DGX_SHELL command:
DGX_SHELL> set
2.
Scroll through the command's output for the line: shell_start_cmdstr_telnet=
3.
Confirm that the setting = <blank> (which means DGX_SHELL) or <bcs>.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 241
Appendix D – Telnet Communication with Enova DGX 100 Series CPU
Disabling the Telnet Session
The Telnet session (via internal Ethernet port) may be disabled through either NetLinx Studio or through a serial connection to the
DGX. With this port disabled and with auto-setup mode enabled, the DGX consumes one public IP address.
IMPORTANT: Toggling IP settings (DHCP or Static IP) or enabling/disabling the Telnet internal Ethernet port via a serial connection requires rebooting the DGX for the change(s) to take effect. Rebooting is not required when adjusting these settings via NetLinx
Studio.
To disable the Telnet session via NetLinx Studio:
1.
Open NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
2.
Right-click on the Enova integrated Master (00000 device) and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx
Studio. The terminal opens.
3.
Type the following command string <with appropriate values for your installation>:
If using Static IP – send_command 5002:1:1, "'IFCONFIG-1,DOWN,S,<Default Gateway>'"
If using DHCP – send_command 5002:1:1, "'IFCONFIG-1,DOWN,D,gw=<Default Gateway>'"
To disable the Telnet session via DGX_SHELL command:
1.
Enter the DGX_SHELL terminal interface (see instructions on page 228).
2.
Send the DGX_SHELL command to disable Telnet:
DGX_SHELL> unset mcpu_eth1_enabled
3.
Reboot the Enova DGX.
Confirming Telnet Session is Enabled/Disabled
The Telnet session's status (enabled/disabled) may be checked through either NetLinx Studio or through a serial connection to the
DGX.
To confirm the Telnet session is enabled or disabled via NetLinx Studio:
1.
Open NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
2.
Right-click on the Enova Integrated Master (000000 device) and select TELNET Window/Launch TELNET Window via NetLinx
Studio. The terminal opens.
3.
Type the following command string into the terminal:
SEND_COMMAND 5002:1:1, "'?ifconfig-1'"
4.
Scroll through the output response (e.g., IFCONFIG-1,UP,S,ip=10.103.4.155,gw=10.103.4.1, mask=255.255.255.0,hn=DGX_Telnet
) and look for a setting of either UP (Telnet enabled) or DOWN (Telnet disabled).
To confirm the Telnet session is enabled or disabled via serial connection:
1.
Enter the DGX_SHELL terminal interface (see instructions on page 228).
2.
Send the following DGX_SHELL command:
DGX_SHELL> set
3.
Scroll through the command's response and look for the line: mcpu_eth1_enabled=<ENABLE or DISABLE>.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 242
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Applicability
The instructions in this appendix cover the process for upgrading an Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Digital Media Switcher to an Enova
DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switcher. These instructions also cover the process for downgrading an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher to an Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Digital Media Switcher. These procedures can be done while the enclosure is in a rack, but the system must be powered down.
NOTE: For a list of differences between an Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 system and a 100 Series system (including required changes for
Upgrade Sequence Overview
While you can upgrade the system in a different sequence than the instructions provided below, this sequence is the most straightforward method for upgrading your system and associated endpoints. Note that endpoints may be inaccessible after CPU upgrade until the enclosure upgrade has been completed.
Recommended Upgrade Sequence
1.
Upgrade any Solecis Digital Switchers (see below).
2.
Upgrade the front control panel (see
3.
Replace the current (8/16/32/64) CPU Board with an Enova DGX 100 Series CPU (see
NOTE: If ASB boards will be used in the upgraded system, install them prior to applying power to the system for the first time with a 100 Series CPU installed.
4.
Upgrade the enclosure (see
5.
Upgrade any DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber endpoints (see
Upgrading a Solecis Digital Switcher
Upgrading firmware on a Solecis Digital Switcher requires downloading the latest firmware files from www.amx.com and using
NetLinx Studio to transfer the files to the target switcher.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a Solecis Digital Switcher to a DXLink Twisted Pair Input Board in an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital
Media Switcher, both the Solecis unit and all DXLink Twisted Pair boards must be upgraded with the latest available firmware versions.
Solecis units must be upgraded before connecting a unit to an upgraded input board.
To Upgrade a Solecis Digital Switcher:
1.
Download and unzip the “Solecis Digital Switcher Firmware” .zip file: a. b. c.
Navigate to the Solecis switcher’s product page at www.amx.com.
Locate the Firmware Files section on the right side of the page and select the .zip file for download.
Unzip and open the downloaded file folder.
2.
Optional – Open and review the Readme file.
3.
Launch NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
4.
In the OnLine Tree tab, right-click in the Workspace Bar and select Refresh System OnLine Tree.
Verify that the Solecis switcher is listed in the OnLine Tree.
5.
Select Tools/Firmware Transfers/Send to NetLinx Device.
The Send to NetLinx Device dialog box appears.
Browse for the downloaded (unzipped)
Solecis firmware file
Select the Solecis .kit file
FIG. 118
Send to NetLinx Device dialog box
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 243
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
6.
Click the Browse button (...) and navigate to the downloaded file.
7.
Select the file for the Solecis switcher (.kit file). Click Send.
8.
Click Close once the download process is complete. Reboot the Solecis switcher.
9.
In the OnLine Tree, right-click on the switcher and select Refresh System.
(This establishes a new connection and refreshes the device list and their firmware versions in your system.)
NOTE: Once the process is complete, you can upgrade the remaining firmware files. All device files must be kept at compatible firmware versions for proper operation. Therefore, all files should be used when upgrading any firmware associated with the
Integrated switchers.
Upgrading the Control Panel
IMPORTANT: The new control panel functionality provided by the Enova DGX 100 Series CPU will not be available until the CPU is replaced. The Enova DGX must remain powered during the upgrade process.
To upgrade the control panel:
1.
Turn off AC power to the enclosure. Make sure none of the power supply LEDs are illuminated.
2.
Loosen the four captive screws on the control panel.
Enova DGX 3200 Enova DGX 6400
Captive screws
FIG. 119
Loosen 4 captive screws (screw location varies slightly depending on model)
3.
Slowly pull the control panel straight out from the enclosure. Support control panel during upgrade.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the control panel’s power cable from its connector.
4.
Apply power to the enclosure.
5.
Connect a null modem serial cable to the serial (DB-9) port on the control panel.
Serial (DB-9) port
Communication cable
Power cable
FIG. 120
Control panel cables/ports (appearance varies slightly depending on model)
6.
Connect the other end of the serial cable to a PC.
7.
Download and unzip the “Enova DGX 100 Series Front Panel Firmware” .zip file: a. b.
Navigate to the Enova DGX 100 Series product pages at www.amx.com.
Locate the Firmware Files section on the right side of the page and select the .zip file for download.
c. d.
Unzip and open the downloaded file folder.
Click the setup.exe file to install the AppCodeLoader program on your PC or device.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 244
8.
Open the AppCodeLoader program.
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Serial Port Settings shown at defaults
Should match when
Ignore all “Type of Switcher” options and buttons in this row for this procedure
Progress bar (shows upgrade status)
FIG. 121
AppCode Loader
9.
Set Serial Port Settings for your system: a. b.
Set Baud Rate to 9600
Set Com port per your system’s requirements (1-9 are available options)
10. Browse for the “image-v2.x.x.enc” file (downloaded from www.amx.com) to upload.
The “Restart after Upload” check box must be selected.
11. Click the “Start Upload” button and wait for the upload to finish.
The [Expected Checksum] and [Returned Checksum] will match when the upload is complete (update takes about 3 minutes and says “Upload Successful!” when complete).
NOTE: If the Appcode Loader fails to start the upload, check your Com port and cable connection and click the “Start Upload” button again.
NOTE: After “Start Upload,” the program changes the baud rate to 57600 and puts the front panel in IOS mode indicated in the text in the app window, and also on the front panel itself. The front panel LCD shows “IOS Mode Contact Tech Support.”
12. Click Exit.
13. Turn off AC power to the enclosure. Make sure none of the power supply LEDs are illuminated.
14. Replace control panel and tighten the four captive screws – be careful not to pinch the wires when securing the control panel.
15. Apply power to the enclosure.
16. Required – Complete the directions on the following pages to upgrade the CPU, then the enclosure.
TIP: The system’s IP address will be available for 100 Series CPU boards though the control panel’s LCD menu: Function/Setup
Options/Master Info/IP Address. Enter the system’s IP address into a browser on a PC or other device on the same network as the
switcher to launch the System Configuration interface (see page 54).
Removing current CPU Board and Installing 100 Series CPU Board
CAUTION: Do not remove CPU board until you are ready to install the replacement, unless directed to do so by technical support.
Important Information for CPU Upgrade from 8/16/32/64 to 100 Series
Do not transfer SD cards from the currently installed CPU into the 100 Series CPU. SD cards from Enova DGX 8/16/32/64
CPUs and 100 Series CPUs have different functions.
CPU upgrade status will not show on the control panel unless the control panel has been upgraded prior to the CPU
Epica DGX SC Optical Boards are not supported within the 100 Series platform; therefore, these boards must be removed prior to using the new CPU.
After the CPU is upgraded to 100 Series, some boards may not power up. This is normal behavior for boards with firmware that does not match 100 Series compatibility. Upgrade the enclosure to regain full board power up.
Endpoint devices bound to the replaced integrated Master (DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU) via TCP/UDP connection scheme are not detectable by the new integrated Master (DGX 100 Series CPU) until the new Master is configured for the IP address used by the previous Master. (NDP devices appear in NetLinx Studio’s OnLine Tree as unbound devices.)
When a 100 Series system powers up but contains I/O boards with incompatible firmware versions, the CPU will take longer than normal to boot (15 - 30 min, depending on cage size) and cause the System Status LED to blink red/green.
This indicates that incompatible boards are present and need updating. To shorten the boot time and avoid the blinking red/green LEDs, the system can be booted with the boards unseated. Then, once the 5002 is online in about 4 min
(indicated by blinking green LED), the boards may be added and upgraded per the normal kit transfer process.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 245
Items Required
Enova DGX 100 Series replacement CPU board
Phillips #1 screwdriver
ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
FIG. 122
Enova DGX 100 Series CPU board (top view)
ESD WARNING: To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal Enova DGX materials. Use an ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip attached to a good ground source.
To remove and replace an Enova DGX CPU board assembly:
NOTE: If SC Fiber Boards are in the enclosure, remove them before beginning the following instructions.
1.
Turn off AC power to the enclosure. Make sure none of the power supply LEDs are illuminated.
2.
Disconnect all cables connected to the CPU and power supplies.
3.
screws in Enova DGX 8/16/32).
Enova DGX 64
Enova DGX 8/16/32
FIG. 123
Remove screws that hold faceplate
4.
Remove the CPU faceplate and set aside.
5.
Removal tab
NOTE: The only CPU with a bottom daughter board is the Enova DGX 64.
FIG. 124
Use removal tab to pull CPU straight out
6.
Place the old CPU board in an ESD approved static shield bag and set aside.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 246
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
7.
Slowly slide the replacement CPU board into the empty slot, being careful to align the edges in the board guides along the insides of the slot.
Board guides
FIG. 125
Align CPU with board guides
8.
the connectors). When the CPU board is fully inserted, its faceplate should sit flush with the back metal.
9.
Set old faceplate aside and attach new faceplate provided with CPU.
10. Optional – If ASB boards will be used in the upgraded system, install them prior to applying power to the system for the first time with a 100 Series CPU installed. For more information about ASB boards, see “Audio Switching Boards - Rules for System
Setup” on the following page.
11. Connect the enclosure (via the LAN 100/1000 port) to your public LAN.
12. Re-attach any cables that were removed in Step 2.
13. Apply power to the enclosure.
14. Check the CPU’s System Status LED for indications of normal display (see table below).
LED Indicator
System Status LED
Indicates
System status
System Status LED
FIG. 126
System Status LED indicator (Enova DGX 800 shown)
Normal Display
• Solid amber during boot load (10 sec)
• Solid green during app load (1-4 minutes, depending on system configuration)
• Flashing green when ready
Cautionary Display
Blinking red/green: MCPU is in a fault state. Power cycle may recover; otherwise, contact technical support.
(Systems with 100 Series CPU and I/O boards that have incompatible firmware use red/green blinking LED to indicate that enclosure/boards still require an upgrade.)
15. Wait for the 5002 device to come online (15 - 30 min, depending on enclosure size).
NOTE: For information about reducing boot time, see the “Important Information for CPU Upgrade from Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 to
100 Series” section on page 245.
16. If input and/or output boards have been removed from the enclosure, re-insert boards with the system powered and continue with the enclosure upgrade instructions.
17. To upgrade the enclosure/boards, follow the directions on page 248.
18. Optional (recommended) – Affix the provided sticker to label the product as part of the Enova DGX 100 Series. Enova DGX
Switchers upgraded to the 100 Series are supported by the Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media
Switchers and other documentation marked for the 100 Series.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 247
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Audio Switching Boards – Rules for System Setup
Audio Switching Boards must be installed as pairs. They will not work unless both an input and an output board are installed in the same enclosure (if the enclosure is an Enova DGX 6400, two input and two output boards are required).
When adding ASB Boards to an enclosure that does not already have them installed, be sure to use the correct board set designated for the enclosure size:
FG1061-716 – Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 800/1600 (contains 2 boards)
FG1061-732 – Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 3200 (contains 2 boards)
FG1061-764 – Audio Switching Board Set for the Enova DGX 6400 (contains 4 boards)
Enova DGX 6400 Audio Switching Boards must be installed in specific expansion board slots:
Audio Switching Input Boards (2) in the left and right slots immediately above standard input board slots
Audio Switching Output Boards (2) in the left and right slots immediately below standard output board slots
Audio signals can be routed from any of the standard video input board connectors (embedded audio) or from any of the terminal block connectors (audio only) on the Audio Switching Input Board to:
(1) any of the standard video output board connectors, (2) any of the terminal block connectors on the Audio Switching
Output Board, or (3) a combination of standard video output connectors and terminal block connectors.
Audio Switching Boards and AIE Boards are not compatible with each other and cannot be used in the same system. If both types are installed in the same enclosure, neither will work unless one type is removed (if both types of boards are present, the audio subsystem is disabled).
NOTE: Enova DGX 100 Series switchers contain an audio-only virtual matrix (VM2). If ASB Boards are in the enclosure, you can route audio switches on this matrix. If no audio boards are installed, route and disconnect commands are queued until audio boards are present, while all other commands are NACK’d.
Upgrading the Enclosure
The following procedure explains how to send a firmware (*.KIT) file to the enclosure to enable boards to work with the new CPU.
NOTE: EDIDs are not automatically updated when firmware is upgraded. To update input board EDIDs after an enclosure firmware
upgrade, you must use the reset factory DGX_SHELL command (see page 236).
To upgrade the enclosure (including boards):
1.
Download and unzip the “Enova DGX 100 Series Enclosure Firmware.” .zip file: a. Navigate to the Enova DGX 100 Series product page that matches your system at www.amx.com.
b. c.
Locate the Firmware Files section on the right side of the page and select the .zip file for download.
Unzip and open the downloaded file folder.
2.
Open the latest version of NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
3.
From the Settings tab, select Workspace Communication Settings, and click on Default Settings.
4.
In the Network tab, click New, enter the system’s new IP address (available through the control panel menu), click OK. Select the system and click OK.
5.
Click OK to close the Workspace Communications Settings dialog box.
6.
In the OnLine Tree, right-click and select Refresh System OnLine Tree.
7.
Optional (recommended) – Launch the System Configuration interface on a PC or device to monitor the upgrade.
a. b. c.
On the enclosure’s control panel, navigate to Function/Setup Options/Master Info/IP Address.
Open a web browser on a PC or device on the same network as the Enova DGX and enter the system’s IP address in the browser bar.
Navigate to System/Devices and click on Switcher Update Status. Continue monitoring through the rest of the process.
8.
In the OnLine Tree, right-click on the 5002 device and select Firmware Transfer.
9.
Click the Browse (...) button to navigate to the target directory.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 248
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Browse for the downloaded (unzipped) enclosure firmware file
Select the enclosure .kit file
FIG. 127
Send to NetLinx Device dialog box
10. Select the file for the Enova DGX from the Files list. Click Send.
During the switcher’s upgrade process:
The Enova DGX Switcher stays offline (does not display in the OnLine Tree).
The control panel and System Configuration interface (System/Devices/Switcher Update Status) display upgrade status messages.
Power cycles will not abort the upgrade; let it run until completion.
Once the upgrade is complete:
The LEDs return to normal.
The Enova DGX Switcher comes back on line (displays in the OnLine Tree).
The System Configuration interface upgrade status (System/Devices/Switcher Upgrade Status) reports that the system is rebooting.
NOTE: If any of the boards do not upgrade, the 5002 device can take 15-30 minutes to come online (depending on enclosure).
11. If the enclosure previously held AIE boards, or had unused expansion slots, and you have added ASB expansion boards to the enclosure with this upgrade, follow the instructions for enabling ASB default switched/embedded settings on the following page.
Important Information if Adding Audio Switching Boards (ASB) to an Upgraded Enclosure
If adding ASB boards to an enclosure that previously held Audio Insert/Extract (AIE) boards, or an enclosure that held no expansion boards, you must enable the audio sub-system's default ASB switched/embedded settings. Instructions for enabling default settings require using the DGX_SHELL interface.
To enable default settings on the audio sub-system:
1.
Launch the DGX_SHELL prompt (see page 228).
2.
Enable level 2 (super user) commands: a. From the DGX_SHELL prompt, type su enova 12amx34 followed by <enter>.
DGX_SHELL> su enova 12amx34
Privilege Level 2
DGX_SHELL>
3.
Toggle the audio routing to “switched” (ASB default) on all output boards: a. Type passthru OFF BCPU followed by <enter>.
4.
Check the Switch Mode setting on the output boards:
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 249
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System a. Type show aie followed by <enter> and confirm that the populated output boards all show a Switch Mode setting of
01 (switched) and not 00 (extracted) or 02 (embedded).
Setting “pushed” from expansion board to MCPU
DGX_SHELL> show aie
AIE
EXPIN (channels 1-8): 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02
BCPU1 02 02 02 02 ( 02 02 02 02 )
BCPU2 02 02 02 02
EXPOUT (channels 1-8): 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00
BCPU3 01 01 01 01 ( 01 01 01 01 )
BCPU4 00 00 00 00
Normal setting for populated input board
Correct setting for populated output board
Settings show all zeros for unpopulated board slots
Parenthesis indicate setting “pushed” from MCPU to populated input or output board
5.
With ASB default settings applied, continue installation or operation of the Enova DGX 100 Series switcher
Upgrading DXLink Transmitter/Receiver endpoints
Upgrading DXLink Twisted Pair and DXLink Fiber endpoints requires downloading the latest firmware files and using NetLinx Studio to transfer the files to the target endpoint. In order to be able to locate endpoints in NetLinx Studio, either change the IP Address of the upgraded Enova DGX to the same IP Address held by the pre-upgrade Enova DGX (maintains previous configuration settings; foregoes Auto-setup) or use the endpoint ID Pushbutton to return the endpoint to default settings (in preparation for Auto-setup).
Important Upgrade Information
CAUTION: Upgrading the firmware is a serious action in that if the upgrade fails, it can leave the device completely nonoperational.
If the upgrade fails or power is lost during upgrade, reboot the Transmitter or Receiver and attempt to upgrade the firmware again, as the module is in an unknown state and cannot be guaranteed to be operational.
NOTE: Some older DXLink Twisted Pair Receivers are not compatible with DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Output Boards. Instructions for
identifying incompatible Receivers are available on page 94.
To upgrade the DXLink TX/RX endpoint:
1.
Download and unzip the “Enova DGX 100 Series DXLink [Twisted Pair or Fiber] Firmware” .zip file: a. b. c.
Navigate to the endpoint’s product page at www.amx.com.
Locate the Firmware Files section on the right side of the page and select the .zip file for download.
Unzip and open the downloaded file folder.
2.
Launch NetLinx Studio and navigate to the OnLine Tree.
3.
In the OnLine Tree tab, right-click in the Workspace Bar and select Refresh System OnLine Tree.
Verify that the DXLink unit is listed in the OnLine Tree.
4.
Select Tools/Firmware Transfers/Send to NetLinx Device.
The Send to NetLinx Device dialog box appears.
Browse for the downloaded (unzipped)
DXLink firmware file
Select the DXLink .kit file
5.
Click the Browse button (...) and navigate to the downloaded file.
6.
Select the file for the DXLink unit (.kit file). Click Send.
7.
Click Close once the download process is complete. Reboot the DXLink unit.
8.
In the OnLine Tree, right-click on the switcher and select Refresh System.
(This establishes a new connection and refreshes the device list and their firmware versions in your system.)
9.
Optional – Reset factory settings on DXLink Fiber Transmitters (enables access to most recent AMX-provided EDIDs).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 250
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
To reset factory settings and enable the most recent EDIDs on a DXLink Fiber TX via Pushbutton ID:
CAUTION: Resetting factory settings does not reset the firmware version, but does remove any settings previously applied to the transmitter, applies EDID formats provided by the firmware, and enables auto-setup mode.
1.
Unplug the power connector from the rear of the Transmitter.
2.
Press and hold the ID Pushbutton on the of the DXLink Fiber TX while plugging in the power connector.
3.
When the NetLinx LEDs begin to flash in unison, start counting flashes (at the rate of once per second).
4.
As soon as the blink rate increases (after 10 flashes at that rate, the LEDs begin to blink at a faster rate), release the ID
Pushbutton.
5.
The Transmitter automatically reboots to complete the process.
NOTE: DXLink Transmitter factory settings can also be reset via Telnet.
Downgrade Sequence Overview
The sequence provided below is the only approved sequence for downgrading an Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switcher.
IMPORTANT: If an Enova DGX is upgraded from 8/16/32/64 to 100 Series, downgraded back to 8/16/32/64, and then re-upgraded to 100 Series, you must check the firmware versions for all boards in the enclosure (monitor upgrade via the System Configuration interface on the System/Devices/Switcher Update Status page). If some or all of the firmware versions have not been upgraded to
100 Series firmware versions as expected (see Status page during upgrade), upgrade the enclosure a second time.
NOTE: Solecis Digital Switchers do not need to be downgraded to work with the Enova DGX 8/16/32/64. Always use the latest available firmware with Solecis units.
Downgrade Sequence
1.
Downgrade any DXLink Twisted Pair or DXLink Fiber endpoints (see below).
2.
Replace the current (100 Series) CPU Board with an Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU (see the following page).
3.
Downgrade the enclosure (see below).
4.
Downgrade the front control panel (see below).
Downgrading DXLink endpoint firmware
Download the latest version of DXLink firmware that is compatible with an Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Digital Media Switcher and use
version. Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 compatible firmware is available on your DXLink product’s page at www.amx.com.
DXLink Firmware Compatibility
DXLink Twisted Pair Transmitters
DXLink Twisted Pair Receivers
DXLink Twisted Pair 4K Receivers
DXLink Fiber Transmitters
DXLink Fiber Receivers
Enova DGX 8/16/32/64
1.6.29
1.9.32
N/A
1.2.12
1.2.1
Enova DGX 100 Series
1.8.16
1.13.18
2.1.74
1.4.9
1.4.11
Downgrading the Enova DGX 100 Series enclosure
Download the Enova DXG 8/16/32/64 enclosure firmware (from the corresponding product page at www.amx.com) and use the
Enova DGX Enclosure Firmware
Firmware Version
Firmware matching pre-Upgrade CPU
3.0.10
Compatible with
Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 enclosures
Enova DGX 100 Series enclosures
Downgrading the front control panel
Download the Enova DXG 8/16/32/64 control panel firmware (from the corresponding product page at www.amx.com) and use the
“Upgrading the Control Panel” instructions on
page 244 to apply the downloaded firmware version.
Enova DGX Control Panel Firmware
Firmware Version
2.0.3
2.2.0
Compatible with
Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 enclosures
Enova DGX 100 Series enclosures
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 251
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Removing 100 Series CPU Board and Installing Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU Board
CAUTION: Do not remove CPU board until you are ready to install the replacement, unless directed to do so by technical support.
Important Information for CPU Downgrade from 100 Series to 8/16/32/64
Do not transfer SD cards from the Enova DGX 100 Series CPU into the Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU.
SD cards from Enova DGX 100 Series CPUs and Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 CPUs have different functions.
Audio Switching Boards are not supported within the Enova DGX 8/16/32/64; therefore, these boards must be removed prior to using the new CPU.
Endpoint devices bound to the replaced integrated Master (DGX 100 Series CPU) via TCP/UDP connection scheme are not detectable by the new integrated Master (DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU) until the new Master is configured for the IP address used by the previous Master. (NDP devices appear in NetLinx Studio’s OnLine Tree as unbound devices.)
Items Required
Enova DGX 8/16/32/54 replacement CPU board
Phillips #1 screwdriver
ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip
FIG. 128
Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 CPU board (top view)
ESD WARNING: To avoid ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) damage to sensitive components, make sure you are properly grounded before touching any internal Enova DGX materials. Use an ESD wristband and cord with an alligator clip attached to a good ground source.
To remove and replace an Enova DGX CPU board assembly:
NOTE: If Audio Switching Boards are in the enclosure, remove them before beginning the following instructions.
1.
Turn off AC power to the enclosure. Make sure none of the power supply LEDs are illuminated.
2.
Disconnect all cables connected to the CPU and unplug the AxLink connector.
3.
in Enova DGX 800/1600/3200).
Enova DGX 6400
Enova DGX 800/1600/3200
FIG. 129
Remove screws that hold faceplate
4.
Remove the CPU faceplate and set aside.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 252
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
5.
NOTE: The only CPU with a bottom daughter board is the
Enova DGX 6400.
Removal tab
FIG. 130
Use removal tab to pull CPU straight out
6.
Place the old (100 Series) CPU board in an ESD approved static shield bag and set aside.
7.
Slowly slide the replacement CPU board into the empty slot, being careful to align the edges in the board guides along the insides of the slot.
Board guides
FIG. 131
Align CPU with board guides
8.
the connectors). When the CPU board is fully inserted, its faceplate should sit flush with the back metal.
9.
Set 100 Series CPU faceplate aside and reattach the Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 faceplate provided with the CPU.
10. Apply power to the enclosure.
11. Check the CPU’s System Status LED for indications of normal display (see table below).
System Status LED
FIG. 132
System Status LED indicator (Enova DGX 64 shown)
LED Indicator
System Status LED
Indicates
System status
Normal Display
Constant green during power up, then blinking green at 1/2 second on/off intervals
Cautionary Display
• Blinking red/green: an exception has been logged in IOS (validation failure)
• Blinking red: dropped into IOS mode*
* A system is in IOS mode when an unexpected, temporary, critical error is trapped and logged and control is passed to the host software (IOS) which prevents the normal appcode from running until the error is manually cleared. Please report all such errors to
technical support (see page 60).
12. Re-attach any cables that were removed in Step 2.
13. Execute a test switch to make sure the system is working correctly.
If you are not familiar with operating this type of system, see the Enova DGX 8/16/32/64 Digital Media Switchers Hardware
Reference Manual at www.amx.com for control information.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 253
Appendix E – Upgrading/Downgrading the System
Troubleshooting
First:
Check all cable connections, check the System Status LED, and execute a test switch.
If the System Status LED is still not illuminated or the test switch does not work:
Repeat the installation procedure, checking the internal SD card to be sure it is securely in place and re-seating the CPU board to make sure that connection is established.
If the System Status LED still does not display normal indications:
Contact technical support (see page 60).
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 254
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Overview
IMPORTANT: Because signals routed through Input and Output Boards in an Enova DGX Switcher normally produce a quality image, you will not need the information in this appendix unless the installation has special scaling, EDID, or HDCP requirements. Most of the functionality provided by DGX Configuration Software is available through the primary user interface, the System Configuration
DGX Configuration Software provides HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, and DXLink Fiber Boards functionality for the following:
Scaler Mode – Use to set the Scaler mode to Auto, Bypass, or Manual (override). Also used to set the Aspect Ratio. (See
Scaler Override – Use to set custom resolutions. (See page 258.)
EDID Programmer – Use to re-program the EDID EEPROM chips on the input boards, allowing for custom configuration of
the EDID data that is stored on the boards. (See page 263.)
HDCP Settings – Use to enable or disable HDCP Support for specific inputs. (See page 267.)
The program is available at www.amx.com and includes a standard Help file with detailed information.
PC System Requirements for DGX Configuration Software v1.0.6
Windows 7 or later
Minimum Hardware: 166 MHz, 128 MB RAM, 35 MB of free disk space*, 800x600 display, serial port, video card with dual outputs
Recommended Hardware: 2.0 GHz, 512 MB RAM*, 1024x768 display
* The installation process requires 35 MB of disk space for the DGX Configuration Software installer. Once installed, the program requires 10 MB of disk space.
TIP: Administrator rights may be required to install DGX Configuration Software.
NOTE: For installations where DGX Configuration Software is required – The Enova DGX 100 Series default command environment is
DGX_SHELL and DGX Configuration Software is designed for optimal use with BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol, therefore we
suggest changing the default command environment to BCS. From the DGX_SHELL> command prompt, send the command set shell_start_cmdstr_COM1=bcs
and reboot the system. The next time the command environment is accessed, it starts in BCS.
Software Installation on PC and Enova DGX Connection
To install DGX Configuration Software:
1.
From the switcher’s product page at www.amx.com (under Application Files in the right-hand column), double-click DGX
Configuration Software.
2.
Click “I Accept” for the AMX License Agreement, and then select Open to download the file.
3.
Optional – Select DGX_Config_SoftwareReadMe_vX_X to read about the software before installation.
4.
Click the application file (which is zipped).
5.
In the Compressed (zipped) Folders dialog box, click Extract All.
6.
Select a destination for the files.
7.
When the download is complete, click the application file and follow the directions in the installation wizard.
NOTE: If you plan to use the terminal emulation function of the software, a serial connection is required.
To setup DGX Configuration Software:
1.
attach the free-running end of the cable to a PC.
Enova DGX: DB-9
PC: DB-9
FIG. 133
RS-232 pinout for null modem serial cable
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 255
2.
Apply power to the enclosure.
3.
On the PC, open DGX Configuration Software.
4.
From the Communication menu: a. b.
Select Serial Port.
Select Change Settings, change the Baud Rate to 115200, and click OK.
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Communication menu
Terminal tab
Connect/Disconnect button
Change Settings dialog box
Send button
5.
From the Terminal tab: a. Change the Baud Rate to 115200 and click Connect.
b. c.
In the Command field, enter: CTRL+C, then type bcs and click the Send button.
Click Disconnect.
6.
From the Communication menu, select Refresh Device.
General Notes for Working with DGX Configuration Software
DGX Configuration Software only displays inputs and/or outputs that can be modified.
File menu – Select Open File to load a file to the program (the file type available depends on the selected view). Select Save to File to save a file containing the currently displayed settings in the currently selected view.
Communication menu – Use to change the communication settings for the DB-9 serial and Ethernet ports. This menu also includes the option to “Refresh Device Lists,” which affects all device lists in the program.
Utilities menu – If the program cannot read and write the EDID data from the destination devices, the system may not support all of the DGX Configuration Software functionality.
Help menu – Access the Help file for the program, open a link for the Web Update option (to download updates for the program), and view current version information.
Messages in the bottom pane of the DGX Configuration Software dialog box report status of operations. Messages can be copied* for technical support purposes.
DXLink Fiber hardware – Only Duplex hardware in Bidirectional Mode with both fibers connected will allow DGX
Configuration Software to read EDID data from a destination device.
* Right-click on a message to access a short-cut menu with options to Copy Selected, Copy All, or Clear. When copying multiple messages: either select consecutive items by holding down the Shift key and clicking the first and last item or select nonconsecutive items by holding down the Control key and clicking on each item.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 256
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Scaler Mode View
The HDMI Output Board supports SmartScale resolutions are also available.
® Technology* to ensure appropriate output resolution regardless of the type of incoming video. For systems with special requirements, a Bypass option and a Manual (override) option for setting custom
In the Scaler Mode view, the default settings for the Current and Default scaler modes are both “Auto” (SmartScale) and the default setting for Aspect Ratio is “Maintain Aspect Ratio.”
* SmartScale automatically responds to the display’s preferred EDID information and delivers a custom scaled image based not only on the preferred resolution but also on the additional information associated with that resolution (e.g., horizontal and vertical pixel count, detailed timing, and color space chromaticity). SmartScale eliminates the incompatibilities between sources and displays operating at different resolutions by accepting the highest resolution of every source device ensuring every display operates at its preferred resolution.
TIP: If the SmartScale functionality on the boards does not result in a good image, the reason may be because of the display device’s handling of the image, e.g., cutting the display short or adding too much space around the display. These types of concerns need to addressed through the display device’s control menu or by consulting the display device’s customer support department.
Scaler Modes
Auto Mode
Auto Mode is the factory default setting and provides SmartScale Technology, which configures the output(s) to automatically scale the video to the best resolution (up to 1920x1200) and the video settings for that display without manual setup. If the image is satisfactory, no further action is required.
Bypass Mode
Bypass mode allows the video signal to pass un-scaled through the system.
If an output connector fails to read the EDID from its attached destination device on power up (i.e., no resolution data is available from the device), the output connector reverts to the Bypass mode until the video cable is unplugged and then plugged in, at which time it will attempt to read the EDID again.
NOTE: When Bypass mode is selected, both interlaced and replicated format can be passed.
Manual (Override) Mode
When you select Manual in the Scaler Mode view, the program sets up the video scaler with the factory default values (1280x1024
@ 60 Hz) for the selected outputs.
The Manual mode allows you to manually configure a specific or a custom scaled output resolution to send to the display monitor(s). In this mode, the system ignores the EDID data being received from a display up to 1920x1200. When you select and
To change the Scaler Mode settings:
1.
Select the Scaler Mode tab.
Scaler Mode tab
FIG. 134
Scaler Mode view
2.
Select the desired output(s). (When selecting multiple outputs: either select consecutive outputs by holding down the Shift key and clicking the first and last output or select nonconsecutive outputs by holding down the Control key and clicking on each output.)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 257
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
3.
Click any or all of the following:
The desired Current and Default scaler modes (for explanations of the three modes, see the previous page)
The Aspect Ratio of the display (for an explanation of the aspect ratio options, see below)
4.
Click the appropriate Set button(s) to persist the setting(s).
Maintain Aspect Ratio and Stretch to Fit
In the Scaler Mode view, you can select one of the two aspect ratio options for the selected outputs: Maintain Aspect Ratio (default) and Stretch to Fit.
To set the aspect ratio:
1.
Select the desired output(s).
2.
Select one of the Aspect Ratio options:
Maintain Aspect Ratio – This option maintains the incoming video’s aspect ratio. The image is scaled until the display’s video fills either horizontally or vertically first. If the vertical direction is filled first, then the video will have pillar box, black
box, black bars on the top and bottom of the display (not shown).
Stretch to Fit – This option scales the video to fill the display in both the horizontal and vertical directions (display on right
in FIG. 135). Black bars do not show when Stretch to Fit is selected.
FIG. 135
Example of displays set to Maintain Aspect Ratio and Stretch to Fit
3.
Click the Set button to the right.
The selected aspect ratio will now persist to the Auto and Manual (override) modes. The Bypass mode remains unaffected.
Scaler Override View
From the Scaler Override view (Manual mode), an output can be selected under “EDID Source.” Click Refresh EDID to determine the attached destination device’s resolution and then apply it to one or more outputs which have been selected in the device tree on the left.
In some special installation cases, you will need to use the settings in the Scaler Override view to override the automatic scaling and set (configure) a specific or a custom resolution for the display monitor. When an Enova DGX Switcher is connected to a PC running DGX Configuration Software, the program displays the resolutions supported by the selected destination monitor (or other destination device) based on the set of supported resolutions in the monitor’s EDID. Settings can then be selected and applied to the output. When you select Manual in the Scaler Mode view, the selected connector sets up the video scaler with factory default values (1280x1024 @ 60 Hz). EDID preferred resolution settings are used if available, unless scaler setup settings were previously uploaded.
NOTE: When the following timings are in the EDID data, the Scaler Override view will not display them: 720x400 @ 70 Hz,
720x400 @ 88 Hz, 640x480 @ 67 Hz, 832x624 @ 75 Hz, and 1152x870 @ 75 Hz. These timings can be entered in the program as custom resolutions.
Get Current Timing, Apply, and Save Buttons
Get Current Timing button – Click to retrieve timing currently stored on the selected output. This allows you to either apply those settings to other outputs that are connected to similar destination devices or to save the current timing as a backup before making any modifications.
Apply button – Click to see how well settings work. Sends currently displayed settings to the destination. Selecting Apply does not store or persist settings. If Apply was just selected and you close the program without saving any changes in the settings, the program asks whether or not to save the applied settings.
Save button – Click to preserve currently displayed settings on the output connector. Sends displayed settings to an output to store and persist them in the output’s memory. This button also persists the Scaling Override (Manual) option on the output.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 258
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
File Menu Options: Open File and Save to File
Open File – Select to load the settings from a file to the program.
Save to File – Select to save the currently displayed settings to a file. The file type available depends on the selected view.
TIP: When selecting outputs: select multiple, consecutive outputs by holding down the Shift key and clicking the first and last output or select multiple, nonconsecutive outputs by holding down the Control key and clicking on each output.
To retrieve (read) EDID timings from a destination device:
NOTE: DXLink Fiber hardware in Unidirectional or Data Link-lost Mode – EDID timings are not accessible as there is no return path available to receive the information.
1.
From the Scaler Mode tab, select and set Manual (override) as the mode.
2.
Select the Scaler Override tab.
3.
Under EDID Source, select the Enclosure and select the Output number connected to the desired destination from the dropdown lists. The system is queried for all compatible devices found with the default (or last saved) communication link setting.
Scaler Mode tab
FIG. 136
Destination device’s description, Manufacturer ID, and Product ID
4.
Click Refresh EDID. A short description of the destination device displays to the left of the drop-down list along with the
Manufacturer ID and Product ID (e.g., DELL 2408WFP; DEL; a02a).
The Scaler Override view is populated with the EDID timings from the detected device.
5.
Complete one of the following options (each option includes a step for saving the EDID):
(A) To set the EDID timings that were read from the device that was detected in the previous step, see the next page.
(B) To set a standard preset, which applies standard timing, see page 261.
TIP: When a number of outputs are connected to destination devices of the same type, the Get Current Timing button can be used to retrieve the settings
The instructions for options A, B, and C assume that the previous instructions for reading an EDID have been completed and the
DGX Configuration Software is open to the Scaler Override view.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 259
(A) To set an EDID timing that was read from the detected device:
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Scaler Mode tab
Scaler Mode tab
FIG. 137
Scaler Override view with EDID selected
1.
Under Resolution Source, click EDID.
2.
Under EDID from Detected Device – From the Available Display Modes drop-down list, select the desired resolution (only resolutions supported by the detected device are included).
3.
In the device tree on the left, select an output to send the resolution information to that output. Multiple outputs may be selected.
4.
Click Apply to transmit the selected information to the output(s). This action is temporary until settings are stored on the connector(s) in Step 6. Otherwise, the settings last only until power is cycled. The display re-syncs with the input(s).
5.
Verify that the display is satisfactory before proceeding.
6.
Click Save to store the currently displayed settings to the connector(s) and persist them in memory.
(If the settings have been changed since clicking Apply, the newest settings will be saved.)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 260
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
(B) To set a standard EDID preset:
Device tree with Outputs
Standard selected
Standard Presets / Timing Mode options:
• DTM (Discrete Monitor Timing)
• GTF (General Timing Formula)
• CVT (Coordinated Video Timing)
• CVT-RB (Coordinated Video Timing -
Reduced Blanking)
• CTA (Consumer Technology Association)
Standard 861D for HDTV
FIG. 138
Scaler Override view with Standard Presets selected
1.
Under Resolution Source, click Standard.
2.
Under Standard Presets, select the desired timing mode from the Timing Mode drop-down list.
3.
Under Standard Presets, select the resolution from the Available Display Modes drop-down list.
4.
In the device tree on the left, select an output to send the resolution information to that output. Multiple outputs may be selected.
5.
Click Apply to transmit the selected information to the output(s). This action is temporary until settings are stored on the connector(s) in Step 7. Otherwise, the settings last only until power is cycled. The display re-syncs with the output(s).
6.
Verify that the display is satisfactory before proceeding.
7.
Click Save to store the currently displayed settings to the connector and persist them in memory.
(If the settings have been changed since clicking Apply, the newest settings will be saved.)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 261
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
(C) To set a custom resolution with optional advanced detailed timing settings:
Custom selected
Device tree with Outputs
Custom Resolution / Timing Mode includes:
• Advanced Timing Mode display
• GTF (General Timing Formula)
• CVT (Coordinated Video Timing)
• VCVT-RB (Coordinated Video Timing - Reduced Blanking)
Show Timing Details selected for viewing Advanced Timing Settings
FIG. 139
Scaler Override view with a Custom Resolution selected (left); Advanced Timing Mode selected (right)
1.
Under Resolution Source, click Custom.
2.
Under Custom Resolution, enter the width, height, and refresh rate.
3.
Under Custom Resolution, select the timing mode from the Timing Mode drop-down list.
(Select Show Timing Details if desired.) Complete all remaining steps.
Or
If another timing mode is selected from the list (FIG. 139, on the left), go to Step 5.
4.
Advanced only – Under Horizontal Geometry, enter the values in number of pixels. Under Vertical Geometry, enter the values in number of lines. Select HSync (+ or -) and VSync (+ or -) Polarity.
5.
In the device tree on the left, select an output to send the resolution information to that output. Multiple outputs may be selected.
6.
Click Apply to transmit the selected information to the output(s). This action is temporary until settings are stored on the connector(s) in Step 8. Otherwise, the settings last only until power is cycled. The display re-syncs with the output(s).
7.
Verify that the display is satisfactory before proceeding.
8.
Click Save to store the currently displayed settings to the connector(s) and persist them in memory.
(If the settings have been changed since clicking Apply, the newest settings will be saved.)
NOTE: Down scaling to 800x600 – When using the program to scale from 1280x1024 down to 800x600, occasionally the video changes to a solid color screen and needs to be reset to restore the image. Auto Scaling is recommended when possible.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 262
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
EDID Programmer View
From the EDID Programmer view, EDID EEPROM chips on each of the DGX HDMI and DGX DVI Input Board connectors can be re-programmed independently if necessary.
EDID Overview
EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) is a data structure established by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) to enable plug-and-play support by enabling easy configuration of a computer’s graphics subsystem based on the capabilities of the attached display device.
EDID information includes items such as the following:
Manufacturer’s name
Product type
Supported video resolutions and refresh rates
Color space and filter chromaticity
Detailed timings
When a computer is directly connected to a display device, it can use the display device’s EDID information to determine an initial compatible video signal to send. With the computer’s display controls, the user can modify this selection to another compatible signal based on the provided EDID information.
With DVI and HDMI signals (both require EDID on the display devices), using EDID information has extended beyond computers to other source devices, such as DVD players. As long as the source device sends a compatible signal, the plug-and-play feature will work.
Digital Media Switchers and EDID
Digital Media Switchers, such as the Enova DGX, provide the ability to route one source signal to many potentially different types of display devices. In almost all cases through the use of compatible DXLink Receivers (featuring SmartScale Technology), incompatibilities between source device resolutions and displays are automatically resolved as each receiver independently scales each source device’s video to the display’s native resolution.
In cases where local DVI or HDMI outputs are used and a resolution incompatibility exists (or if a source device needs a specific resolution), the DGX DVI and DGX HDMI Input Boards have the ability to update the EDID emulation file (by updating each input’s
EEPROM chip) which comes pre-loaded with an EDID set.
This EDID set consists of some of the most common EDID settings in use today, including VESA and HDTV settings encompassing
EDID Re-programming” on page 263).
The DGX Configuration Software with EDID programming functionality has been provided for cases where additional in-field programming of a board’s input connectors EDID chips is needed. The EDID Programmer view can be used for the following:
Reading and saving EDID data in hexadecimal from an output receiving the information from its attached destination device
Writing EDID data to the Enova DGX input connector’s associated EDID EEPROM
IMPORTANT: Any analysis or editing of the EDID data necessary to support the equipment specific to the installation will need to be done separately prior to using the EDID Programmer view. A variety of freeware tools can be found on the Internet to help with these tasks.
Keep in mind that the EDID information for some equipment may not be compatible with the remaining equipment even with re-programming. In those cases, the signals will have limited routing options.
TIP: If the signal from some of the equipment can only be routed to part of the destinations due to incompatible EDIDs, control can be simplified by creating a separate virtual matrix for the inputs and outputs involved (see “Creating a New Virtual Matrix” in the
XNConnect Help file).
The remaining sections for the EDID Programmer view provide information on:
Determining the need for EDID re-programming
Reading and saving EDID data from an output, which received the information from its attached destination device
Writing data to an Enova DGX input connector
Additional HDMI EDID files for handling audio concerns
Determining the Need for EDID Re-programming
Ideally EDID analysis will have been completed during installation specification. Consideration should be given to the use of DXLink
Output Boards and corresponding DXLink Receivers which (in almost every case) will remedy incompatible source and destination resolution issues. If EDID analysis was not possible but all of the system’s devices are now available, the most effective way to proceed is to test if the signal from each source device can be routed through the Enova DGX Switcher to each of the destination devices. If they can be routed, then EDID re-programming is not necessary.
A method of control is not specified in the following instructions. Any board you think might need EDID re-programming must have the destination devices (and modules if applicable) attached before completing the following procedure.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 263
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
To determine if EDID re-programming is necessary:
1.
Route the first input to all of the applicable outputs.
2.
Check each destination display to verify that the picture is present, making note of any that are not.
3.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each of the remaining inputs.
IMPORTANT: If any of the destinations do not display a picture, analysis or editing of the EDID data may be necessary prior to using the EDID Programmer view in the DGX Configuration Software. A variety of freeware tools can be found on the Internet to help with these tasks.
Board Support for DVI and HDMI Signals – Changing the EDID Setting
Another reason to reprogram EDIDs is to support different source signals on a single board. Because each input can be changed independently (e.g., an HDMI Board can support both HDMI and DVI sources), inputs can be set up for specific sources or for the most common source device expected to be connected.
NOTE: HDMI-to-DVI or DVI-to-HDMI conversion requires an applicable conversion cable.
The EDID resolution and audio support variances between HDMI and DVI (which are provided as defaults) help to identify if they need to change from the original (factory loaded) EDIDs on each input.
DVI Boards
The DVI Input Boards come pre-loaded with EDIDs typical for DVI output devices (computer monitors, etc.) which do not support embedded audio signals. However, they will allow HDMI with embedded audio formats through if the default EDID setting is changed via DGX Configuration Software using a file from the EDID Library (see Option 2 below).
HDMI Boards
The HDMI Input Boards come preloaded with EDIDs typical for HDMI output devices (DVD players, etc.). However, they will allow
DVI formats through if the default EDID setting is changed via DGX Configuration Software using a file from the EDID Library (see
Option 2 below).
Options for Re-programming EDIDs
If EDID re-programming is necessary, use one of the following two options.
Option 1: Install the DGX Configuration Software and open the EDID Programmer view. Read the EDID from the output connected to the destination device and write it to the DXLink, DVI, or HDMI input connector.
Option 2: Install the DGX Configuration Software and open the EDID Programmer view. Check the AMX_EDID_Library file at www.amx.com (search for EDID Library) to determine if one of the custom EDID files meets the needs of the equipment.
(The custom EDID files are variants of base EDIDs.) Open and write the custom EDID file to the DXLink, DVI, or HDMI input connector.
TIP: If you have changed EDID from the default (which supports 2 channel L-PCM as embedded audio) and are experiencing audio problems, it may be because you are trying to pass Dolby or DTS or high PCM frequency rates and the destination device does not support them. If you are experiencing video problems, it may be because you are trying to pass a video format that the destination device does not support. In either of these cases, re-programming the EDID (below) or re-routing the signal via the System
Reading and Saving EDID Data from a Destination Device
TIP: In the EDID Programmer view, the Save to File option under the File menu can be used to save the EDID information as an .edid file. The saved file can be opened as a text file (from the File menu, select Open File) and edited or opened and written to an input
(click the Write button).
The instructions that follow tell how to use the EDID Programmer view to read and save the EDID information from an output, which is receiving the EDID information from a destination device.
NOTE: DXLink Fiber hardware in Unidirectional or Data Link-lost Mode – EDID timings are not accessible as there is no return path available to receive the information.
NOTE: The availability of the Read and Write buttons depends on whether an input or output is selected in the device tree on the left.
(Read from an output and write to an input.)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 264
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
To read and save EDID data:
1.
On the PC, open the DGX Configuration Software and select the EDID Programmer tab.
Device tree with Inputs/Outputs
Device tree with Inputs/Outputs
Device tree with Inputs/Outputs
Device tree with Inputs/Outputs
Messages Write – writes EDID to input on board
Read – reads EDID from selected output which received the EDID from its attached destination device
FIG. 140
EDID Programmer view
2.
From the Inputs/Outputs device tree on the left, select an output from which to read the EDID information that it receives from the destination device.
3.
Click Read to read the EDID information. The results display in the large read-only area.
4.
From the File menu, select Save to File (select location, enter file name, and click Save).
Leave the EDID Programmer view open for using the instructions on writing the EDID to a DGX Digital Media Switcher input connector below.
TIP: If the program cannot read and write the EDID information, the system may not support all of the DGX Configuration Software functionality.
Writing EDID Data to DGX DXLink, DVI, or HDMI Input Connector
The instructions that follow tell how to use the EDID Programmer view to write the EDID information from an output or from a saved file to the EDID chip for an input connector on a DGX DXLink, DVI, HDMI, or 4K HDMI Input Board.
NOTE: DXLink Fiber hardware in Unidirectional or Data Link-lost Mode – EDID timings are not accessible as there is no return path available to receive the information.
To write EDID data to the EDID chip for an input connector:
1.
In the DGX Configuration Software interface, select the EDID Programmer tab.
2.
Save the board’s EDID default as a backup (assumes the board has factory default EDID programming).
a. b. c.
Select the input connector.
Click Read.
From the File menu, select Save to File (select location, enter file name, and click Save).
3.
If an EDID was just read from an output (see page 200), select the input to which you want to write that EDID information.
Or
From the File menu, select Open File to select an .edid file to be written to the DXLink, DVI, HDMI, or 4K HDMI input connector.
4.
Click Write to write the EDID information to the input connector.
5.
If applicable – Repeat any of the steps that are necessary for any additional DXLink, DVI, HDMI, or 4K HDMI input connectors.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 265
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Custom HDMI and DVI EDID Files for Handling Audio/Video Concerns
HDMI, DVI, DXLink Twisted Pair, or DXLink Fiber Boards will be connected to multiple source and sink devices. These devices often support different video and audio formats. Potentially, neither the video nor the audio routed by the system can be displayed on one or more of the destination devices.
Customizing the EDID content at the Enova DGX input channels is one way to be sure that the formats provided by the source are compatible with most/all of the destination devices.
The HDMI and DXLink Twisted Pair Boards are preprogrammed with the equivalent of the file “AMX_HDMI1v3__Standard.edid” to support basic audio only (2 CH L-PCM 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz). The DXLink Fiber Boards initially do not have EDIDs loaded; however, they obtain EDIDs (on a per channel basis) as soon as they are connected to DXLink Fiber Transmitters. The DVI Board is preprogrammed with the equivalent of the file “AMX_DVI1v1_BaseBlockOnly.edid.” Both files are in the AMX_EDID_Library.
The files in the following two tables are located in the AMX_EDID_Library file at www.amx.com (search for EDID Library). Additional files provided in the EDID Library include support for 3D deep color and High Bit Rate (HBR) Audio.
Files using 1080p (VIC 16) as the preferred and native video resolution:
File Name
AMX_HDMI1v3__Standard.edid*
AMX_HDMI1v3_A__Surround.edid*
Monitor Name
AMX_HDMI1v3
AMX_HDMI1v3_A
Description
Supports basic audio only: uncompressed 2 CH L-PCM stereo audio with sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz.
Supports surround sound: audio up to 192 k for 48 kHz Dolby Digital
(5.1), 48 kHz DTS (5.1), and basic audio (uncompressed 2 CH L-PCM stereo audio with sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz).
Files using 720p (VIC 4) as the preferred and native video resolution:
File Name
AMX_HDMI1v3_B__720p.edid*
Monitor Name
AMX_HDMI1v3_B
AMX_HDMI1v3_C__720p_Surround.edid* AMX_HDMI1v3_C
Description
Supports basic audio only: uncompressed 2 CH L-PCM stereo audio with sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz.
Supports surround sound: audio up to 192 k for 48 kHz Dolby Digital
(5.1), 48 kHz DTS (5.1), and basic audio (uncompressed 2 CH L-PCM stereo audio with sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz).
* File names containing “AMX_HDMI1v3” do not in any way refer to the HDMI v1.3 standard.
Audio Troubleshooting
The default EDID for input boards only supports 2 channel L-PCM audio. If a source chooses to ignore this EDID and send a format that is not in the EDID, the audio may not pass through the Enova DGX at all or it may be distorted. To present other types of audio formats to the source, a different EDID must be loaded (see the AMX EDID Library at www.amx.com (search for EDID Library). If after changing the EDID on the input board, the audio is still distorted or is not present on the destination device, then the device may not be capable of supporting the requested audio format with the newly loaded EDID setting. In this case, a standard EDID should be used and the sources set up to only pass the type of audio that the downstream destination devices can handle.
Checking for Support
One way to check if a destination supports a particular type of audio format is to capture the EDID using DGX Configuration software’s EDID Programmer tab and paste the EDID data into a free-ware EDID reader program (e.g., www.edidreader.com).
Device between HDMI Output Board and Monitor
Sometimes a device (e.g., a video processor) between a DGX HDMI Output Board and the destination monitor is intentionally installed to alter the image scale. If that is not the case and you have image problems, you need to be aware that the scaler override function is responding to the EDID from the extra device rather than from the monitor. One possible solution is to use the
DGX Configuration Software to read and save the EDID directly from the monitor and then apply the override values to the output
(directions follow).
To read EDID directly from monitor and apply override values to output:
1.
Remove the device between the output and the monitor.
2.
Connect the output directly to the monitor.
3.
Install and open DGX Configuration Software (see page 255).
4.
Select the Scaler Override tab.
5.
Under EDID Source, select the Enclosure and select the Output number connected to the desired destination from the dropdown lists.
6.
Click Refresh EDID.
7.
From the File menu, select Save to File and save the settings to a file.
8.
Replace the device between the output and the monitor.
9.
From the File menu, select Open File and open the previously saved file.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 266
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
10. Click Apply to transmit the settings in the file to the output. This action is temporary until the settings are stored on the connector in Step 12. Otherwise, the settings last only until power is cycled. The display re-syncs with the output.
11. Verify that the display is satisfactory before proceeding.
12. Click Save to store the currently displayed settings to the connector and persist them in memory.
(If the settings have been changed since clicking Apply, the newest settings will be saved.)
HDCP Settings View
The HDCP Settings view controls HDCP support, enabling and disabling support on specific HDMI or DVI inputs. The default setting is for HDCP to be enabled.
To enable or disable HDCP support for an HDMI, 4K HDMI, or DVI input:
1.
Select the input (or select multiple inputs) on the left.
Set button
Inputs available
FIG. 141
DHCP Settings view
2.
Under HDCP Support, click the desired option: Enable or Disable.
3.
Click the Set button.
4.
Repeat as necessary for additional inputs.
NOTE: To enable or disable HDCP support over the DXLink line, send the appropriate SEND_COMMAND (HDCP-<ENABLE|DISABLE>) to the DXLink Transmitter. For details, see the “NetLinx Programming” chapter of the “DXLink™ Twisted Pair Transmitters/Receiver
Hardware Reference Manual” or the “DXLink™ Fiber Transmitters and Receivers Hardware Reference Manual.”
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 267
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
Terminal View
The Terminal view provides basic terminal emulation. This view allows you to enter and send BCS (Basic Control Structure), auxiliary, diagnostic, and DGX_SHELL commands to the system.
NOTE: If you plan to use the terminal emulation function of the software, a serial connection is required.
IMPORTANT: You must click the Connect button to establish serial communication with the system before you can use the terminal emulation function in the DGX Configuration Software. When done, be sure to click the Disconnect button.
BCS Commands
BCS protocol is an AMX command language for control operations. For complete information on BCS commands, see the
Programming Guide – BCS Basic Control Structure Protocol at www.amx.com.
Auxiliary BCS Commands
Auxiliary commands are also included in the Programming Guide – BCS Basic Control Structure Protocol at www.amx.com. The two most common auxiliary commands are: ~app! (to cause a warm reboot) and ~scr! (to view a splash screen).
DGX_SHELL Commands
The Enova DGX Switcher supports a number of shell (command-line interpreter) commands for a variety of functions, both basic
NOTE: DGX_SHELL Commands are case-sensitive.
To send a command to the system:
1.
In the DGX Configuration Software interface, select the Terminal tab.
Communication Settings
Connect/Disconnect button
Displays data in response to commands sent
Send button
Command field
FIG. 142
Terminal view
2.
Select and set the Terminal Communication Settings: Comm Port and Baud (rate).
(The default baud rate for the Enova DGX 100 Series Switcher is 115200.)
3.
Click Connect.
4.
Press CTRL+C to clear the communication channel and begin sending DGX_SHELL commands. (Type “bcs” and click the Send button to enter the BCS environment. Press CTRL+C to return to the DGX_SHELL environment.)
5.
Enter additional commands as necessary.
6.
When done, click Disconnect.
Control Structure Protocol at www.amx.com.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 268
Appendix F – DGX Configuration Software
To save the current data in the terminal window to a file:
1.
From the File menu, select Save to File (select location, enter file name, and click Save). The file format defaults to a .txt file.
TIP: Select and copy any or all of the data in the terminal window and then paste it into another program.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 269
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
Overview External Serial Control
Enova DGX Switchers can be controlled externally by attaching a serial control device that uses one of the communication protocols listed below:
BCS (USB) – ASCII sent over a USB cable via the USB (mini-B) Control port
BCS (Serial) – ASCII sent over a null modem serial cable via the serial (DB-9) Control port
Once a PC is attached to an Enova DGX Switcher via one of its Control ports, the system can be controlled by entering BCS commands into a terminal emulation program, e.g., the terminal in NetLinx Studio (Tools/Terminal Session).
NOTE: The two Control ports provide direct serial control of matrix switcher processing (they do not work on the same layer of control as the integrated NetLinx NX Master, which uses the LAN 100/1000 and Program ports). For information on establishing TCP/IP
control from the integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor to a LAN, see page 53.
External Serial Control Options
Although the main method of control for the Enova DGX Switcher is the integrated NetLinx NX Central Control Processor (for
control methods are also available. The communication protocols listed at the top of this page are used for these control options:
BCS Control
BCS (Basic Control Structure) is a command language that was developed for executing control operations and for diagnostic purposes. BCS commands are issued via a terminal emulation program, e.g., the terminal in NetLinx Studio (Tools/Terminal
Session). For information on BCS commands, see the BCS (Basic Control Structure) Protocol Programming Guide at www.amx.com.
Third-Party Controllers
Third-party controllers connect to either the serial port (DB-9) or the USB (mini-B) port on the CPU. If using a third-party controller, see the controller documentation for setup and operating instructions.
External Serial Control via USB Control Port
Controlling an Enova DGX Switcher using a connection through the USB Control port requires the creation of a virtual COM port.
Once created, the virtual COM port is used as if it were a standard serial connection and can connect to a control application or to a terminal emulation program. For terminal emulation, use the terminal in NetLinx Studio (Tools/Terminal Session) or another terminal emulation program.
IMPORTANT: You must have adequate rights to install USB device drivers to the PC. Check with your System Administrator to be sure you have the required access.
If you are establishing a new connection, complete all of the steps in the following instructions.
Or
If you are reconnecting after previously establishing a USB connection, complete Steps 2 and 3 and then set up and run the desired software program or utility.
To attach a PC to the USB (mini-B) port and establish a virtual COM port:
1.
Download the APBridge.inf file, which is located at www.amx.com (enter APBridge in the Search AMX.com field in the upper right-hand corner of the site). No user permissions are required.
2.
Apply power to the enclosure (see page 46).
3.
Connect the enclosure to a PC running Windows with USB cable (FIG. 143).
USB (mini-B) port
USB cable to port
FIG. 143
USB cable connected to USB port on Enova DGX 3200 and to PC
4.
If establishing a new connection, complete the remaining steps.
Or
If reconnecting after previously establishing a USB connection, go to Step 11 to run the desired software.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 270
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
NOTE: The following dialog boxes appear only during the initial USB connection. Once the virtual COM port has been assigned to the enclosure, the dialog boxes do not appear again. If they do appear, you have connected the USB plug to a different COM port on the
PC than the initial one – either switch to the initial COM port or establish a virtual COM port for the new port on the PC.
The Driver Software Installation window appears. Click Close.
5.
Open the Device Manager window (Start/Control Panel/Device Manger icon)*, open Other devices, and right-click on the
Unknown device icon. Select Properties from the menu.
The Unknown Device Properties window opens.
6.
In the Driver tab, select the Update Driver button.
Driver tab
Update Driver button
* The Device Manager may have a different location depending on the operating system and theme selected.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 271
7.
Browse for the APBridge.inf file and select the Next button.
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
Another Update Driver Software window opens. Click Close.
NOTE: A Windows Security window may open and ask if you want to install a driver with an unverified publisher. Select the “Install this driver software anyway” option.
8.
If the AutoPatch USB Bridge port specifies the COM number, go to Step 11.
If the port does not specify a COM number, right-click the AutoPatch USB Bridge, select Properties, and complete all remaining steps.
COM port number
(if not displayed, complete all remaining steps)
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 272
9.
In the AutoPatch USB Bridge Properties dialog box, select the General tab.
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
Assigned port number
10. Make note of the COM port number assigned to the AutoPatch USB Bridge. This port number must be entered when setting a connection in a software program or a terminal emulation program. The PC will always associate a specific USB connector with the assigned virtual COM port. The PC will not recognize the module if you disconnect and reconnect using a different
COM port on the PC. However, it will attempt to install a new virtual COM port using the new port. If completed, the new port will be assigned a different COM number.
IMPORTANT: You must identify the virtual COM port assigned to the USB connector to enable communication between the Control PC and the switcher.
11. Set up and run the desired method of control:
AMX Controller – For control programming information, see the manual for the specific controller.
the port determined in the previous steps. Set the settings to match the Enova DGX 100 Series defaults: baud rate – 115200, data bits – 8, parity – 1, stop bits – none, and flow control – 1.
IMPORTANT: If power is cycled on the enclosure, the USB connection must be reestablished. (1) Remove the USB cable, (2) close the software application in use, (3) reconnect the USB cable to the same USB connector that was used previously, and (4) reopen the communication software.
External Serial Control via DB-9 Control Port
The DB-9 Control port provides a standard serial connection and can be used to connect directly to a control application or to a PC running a terminal emulation program. To access the terminal emulation program in NetLinx Studio, go to Tools/Terminal Session.
PC Requirements for Serial Control
Windows 7 or Windows 8
Terminal emulation program
Serial port or USB port
RS-232 Pin Diagram
A serial connection via the Control port requires a null modem cable that matches the pin diagram in FIG. 144 for RS-232 without hardware flow control. Enova DGX Switchers require pins 2, 3, and 5 only.
Enova DGX: DB-9
PC: DB-9
FIG. 144
RS-232 null modem cable pin diagram, no hardware flow control
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 273
To establish external serial control via the Control (DB-9 serial) port:
1.
Plug one end of the null modem serial cable into the Control port on the enclosure.
Appendix G – External Serial Controllers
Control (serial) port
Cable to serial control device / system
FIG. 145
Null modem serial cable connected to Control port
2.
Plug the other end of the serial cable into the serial port on the serial controller.
3.
protector and/or AC line conditioner.
4.
Setup and run the desired method of control:
AMX Controller – For control programming information, see the specific controller’s manual.
Terminal emulation* – Open the program, set the COM port settings to match the default ones in the “Enova DGX Serial Port Settings” table to the right.
* For terminal emulation via the serial port, use the terminal in NetLinx Studio (see below) or another terminal emulation program.
Enova DGX 100 Series
Serial Port Settings
Baud Rate
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Flow Control
115200
8
None
1
None
Serial Communication Settings
If you are controlling the system with a serial controller, use serial communication software and make sure the baud rate is set correctly for the system. The recommended settings (default settings) for serial communication with Enova DGX 100 Series
Switchers are listed in the table to the right. Supported baud rates are 115200 (default), 19200, 38400, and 57600. The settings on the PC serial communication software and the enclosure must correspond to each other. If a change is required to make them match, changing the PC’s settings is preferable. If you decide to change the enclosure’s settings instead, use NetLinx Studio.
Terminal Emulation via NetLinx Studio
For terminal emulation, use the terminal in NetLinx Studio (Tools/Terminal Session) or another terminal emulation program.
When power is applied to the enclosure, the terminal will display a one-line splash screen followed by “Ready.” The system is ready to accept commands.
Splash Screen
[1:Enclosure] AMX Enova DGX 1600 v1.0.1R
Ready
FIG. 146
Power-up splash screen in NetLinx Studio’s Terminal
NOTE: AMX reserves the right to add to the contents of the splash screen at any time, without notice.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 274
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
ICSP Settable Output Resolutions
The resolutions in the following table are supported on output boards used in conjunction with the DXLink Receivers and can be set
from the Resolution Name (in the first column) can be entered in a SEND_COMMAND command (VIDOUT_RES_REF) to specify
scaling settings. For complete command information, see page 184.
NOTE: The resolutions and timings in the table below can only be changed with SEND_COMMANDs.
ICSP Supported Output Resolutions
Resolution Name Horizontal Active
Pixels
640x480,60
640x480,72
640x480,75
800x600,60
800x600,72
800x600,75
1024x768,60
1024x768,70
1024x768,75
1280x720,50
1280x720,60
1280x768,60
1280x800,60
1280x1024,60
1360x768,60
1440x900,60
1400x1050,60
1600x1200,60
1680x1050,60
1920x1080,50
1920x1080,60
1024
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1360
1440
640
640
640
800
800
800
1024
1024
1400
1600
1680
1920
1920
1920x1080p,60
1920x1200,60
3840x2160,24*
3840x2160,25*
3840x2160,30*
4096x2160,24*
4096x2160,25*
4096x2160,30*
1920
1920
3840
3840
3840
4096
4096
4096
800
1024
768
900
1050
1200
1050
1080
1080
Vertical Active
Pixels
480
480
480
600
768
720
720
768
600
600
768
768
1080
1200
2160
2160
2160
2160
2160
2160
Refresh (Hz)
60
60
60
60
75
50
60
60
72
75
60
70
60
72
75
60
60
60
60
50
60
60
60
24
25
30
24
25
30
Comments
720p
720p
1080p
Reduced
Blanking
1080p
Reduced
Blanking
See Footnote
See Footnote
See Footnote
See Footnote
See Footnote
See Footnote
Video Standard
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
CTA 861
CTA 861
VESA CVT
VESA DMT
VESA DMT
VESA CVT
VESA CVT
VESA DMT
VESA CVT
CTA 861
VESA CVT-R
CTA 861
VESA CVT-R
CTA 861
CTA 861
CTA 861
CTA 861
CTA 861
CTA 861
* Resolution requires end-to-end (source, transport, destination) 4K equipment.
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 275
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
Digital Video Output Resolution Support
IMPORTANT: The resolutions and timings in the list below can only be set (via DXG Configuration Software) for DXLink endpoints when they are directly connected to a DXLink output board.
CTA (RGB Color Space):
640x480p,59Hz
720x480p,59/60Hz
720(1440)x480i,59Hz
720x480p,119Hz
720x480p,120Hz
720x480p,239Hz
720x480p,240Hz
720x576p,50Hz
720(1440)x576i,50Hz
720x576p,100Hz
720x576p,200Hz
768x576p,50Hz
960x576p,50Hz
960(1920)x576i,50Hz
1280x720p,23/24Hz
1280x720p,25Hz
1280x720p,29/30Hz
1280x720p,50Hz
1280x720p,59/60Hz
1280x720p,100Hz
1280x720p,119Hz
1280x720p,120Hz
1920x1080p,23/24Hz
1920x1080i,25Hz
1920x1080p,25Hz
1920x1080i,29/30Hz
1920x1080p,29/30Hz
1920x1080p,50Hz
1920x1080p,59/60Hz
2560x1080p,50Hz*
2560x1080p,60Hz*
3840x2160p,23/24Hz*
3840x2160p,25Hz*
3840x2160p,29/30Hz*
3840x2160p,50Hz*^
3840x2160p,59/60Hz*^
4096x2160p,24Hz*
4096x2160p,25Hz*
4096x2160p,30Hz*
4096x2160p,50Hz*^
4096x2160p,59/60Hz*^
* Resolution requires end-to-end (source, transport, destination) 4K equipment.
^ Resolution is only supported in passthrough Mode with 4:2:0 chroma sub-sampling.
NOTE: The Consumer Technology Association (CTA) was formerly known as the Consumer Electronics Association (CEA): the CEA
861 video standard has been renamed to CTA 861.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 276
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
CVR (RGB Color Space):
IMPORTANT: The resolutions and timings in the list below can only be set (via DXG Configuration Software) for DXLink endpoints when they are directly connected to a DXLink output board.
768x480,60Hz
800x600,60Hz
800x600,120Hz
848x480,60Hz
960x600,60Hz
1024x576,60Hz
1024x640,60Hz
1024x768,60Hz
1024x768,120Hz
1064x600,60Hz
1152x720,60Hz
1152x864,60Hz
1224x768,60Hz
1280x720,60Hz
1280x768,60Hz
1280x768,120Hz
1280x800,120Hz
1280x960,60Hz
1280x1024,60Hz
1360x768,60Hz
1360x768,120Hz
1400x1050,60Hz
1440x900,60Hz
1536x960,60Hz
1600x1000,60Hz
1600x1200,60Hz
1680x1050,60Hz
1704x960,60Hz
1728x1080,60Hz
1800x1350,60Hz
1864x1050,60Hz
1920x1080,60Hz
1920x1200,60Hz
2560x1440,60Hz*
* Resolution requires end-to-end (source, transport, destination) 4K equipment.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 277
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
CVT (RGB Color Space):
IMPORTANT: The resolutions and timings in the list below can only be set (via DXG Configuration Software) for DXLink endpoints when they are directly connected to a DXLink output board.
640x360,85Hz
640x400,75Hz
640x400,85Hz
640x480,75Hz
640x480,85Hz
768x480,60Hz
768x480,75Hz
768x480,85Hz
800x600,50Hz
800x600,60Hz
800x600,75Hz
800x600,85Hz
848x480,50Hz
848x480,60Hz
848x480,75Hz
848x480,85Hz
960x600,50Hz
960x600,60Hz
960x600,75Hz
960x600,85Hz
1024x576,50Hz
1024x576,60Hz
1024x576,75Hz
1024x576,85Hz
1024x640,50Hz
1024x640,60Hz
1024x640,75Hz
1024x640,85Hz
1024x768,50Hz
1024x768,60Hz
1024x768,75Hz
1024x768,85Hz
1064x600,50Hz
1064x600,60Hz
1064x600,75Hz
1064x600,85Hz
1152x720,50Hz
1152x720,60Hz
1152x720,75Hz
1152x720,85Hz
1152x864,60Hz
1224x768,50Hz
1224x768,60Hz
1224x768,75Hz
1224x768,85Hz
1280x720,50Hz
1280x720,60Hz
1280x720,75Hz
1280x720,85Hz
1280x768,50Hz
1280x768,60Hz
1280x768,75Hz
1280x768,85Hz
1280x800,50Hz
1280x800,60Hz
1280x800,75Hz
1280x800,85Hz
1280x960,50Hz
1280x960,60Hz
1280x960,75Hz
1280x960,85Hz
1280x1024,50Hz
1280x1024,60Hz
1280x1024,75Hz
1280x1024,85Hz
1360x768,50Hz
1360x768,60Hz
1360x768,75Hz
1360x768,85Hz
1400x1050,50Hz
1400x1050,60Hz
1400x1050,75Hz
1440x900,60Hz
1440x900,75Hz
1440x900,85Hz
1536x960,50Hz
1536x960,60Hz
1536x960,75Hz
1600x1000,50Hz
1600x1000,60Hz
1600x1200,50Hz
1600x1200,60Hz
1680x1050,50Hz
1680x1050,60Hz
1704x960,50Hz
1704x960,60Hz
1728x1080,50Hz
728x1080,60Hz
1864x1050,50Hz
1864x1050,60Hz
1920x1080,50Hz
1920x1200,50Hz
2048x1152,50Hz*
2048x1152,85Hz*
2048x1536,50Hz*
2560x1440,50Hz*
2560x1600,50Hz*
2728x1536,50Hz*
* Resolution requires end-to-end (source, transport, destination) 4K equipment.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 278
Appendix H – Supported Output Resolutions
DMR (RGB Color Space):
IMPORTANT: The resolutions and timings in the list below can only be set (via DXG Configuration Software) for DXLink endpoints when they are directly connected to a DXLink output board.
1280x800,60Hz
1366x768,60Hz
1600x900,60Hz
DMT (RGB Color Space):
IMPORTANT: The resolutions and timings in the list below can only be set (via DXG Configuration Software) for DXLink endpoints when they are directly connected to a DXLink output board.
640x350,85Hz
640x400,85Hz
640x480,60Hz
640x480,72Hz
640x480,75Hz
640x480,85Hz
720x400,85Hz
800x600,56Hz
800x600,60Hz
800x600,72Hz
800x600,75Hz
800x600,85Hz
848x480,60Hz
1024x768,43Hz*
1024x768,60Hz
1024x768,70Hz
1024x768,75Hz
1024x768,85Hz
1152x864,70Hz
1152x864,75Hz
1152x864,85Hz
1280x800,60Hz
1280x960,60Hz,
1280x960,75Hz
1280x960,85Hz
1280x1024,43Hz*
1280x1024,60Hz
1280x1024,75Hz
1280x1024,85Hz
1360x768,60Hz
1366x768,60Hz
1600x1200,48Hz*
1600x1200,60Hz
* Format uses interlaced video resolution.
Hardware Reference Manual – Enova DGX 100 Series Digital Media Switchers 279
© 2016 Harman. All rights reserved. SmartScale, NetLinx, Enova, AMX, AV FOR AN IT WORLD, and HARMAN, and their respective logos are registered trademarks of HARMAN. Oracle, Java and any other company or brand name referenced may be trademarks/registered trademarks of their respective companies.
AMX does not assume responsibility for errors or omissions. AMX also reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice at any time.
The AMX Warranty and Return Policy and related documents can be viewed/downloaded at www.amx.com.
3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082
AMX.com | 800.222.0193 | 469.624.8000 | +1.469.624.7400 | fax 469.624.7153
Last Revised:
9/07/2016
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement